JP2019068965A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characterized in display means.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 100 includes a decorative pattern display device 208 which can display an icon. The icon is an icon related to a reservation. The icon may be displayed in silhouette. The decorative pattern display device 208 can carry out a certain change performance in which a display mode of the icon may be changed. When the change performance is carried out in a silhouette display state in which the icon is displayed in silhouette, at least a part of a display of changing animation is not displayed in silhouette in a ceratin scene of the changing animation. After the end of the silhouette display state, the display mode of the icon may be changed into another display mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 228

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  Conventionally, a game console provided with display means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by display means.

The above purpose is
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
When the icon of the second display mode is displayed after the end of the first state, the display mode of the icon may change to another display mode.
It is achieved by the game stand characterized by.

  According to the present invention, a game console characterized by display means can be realized.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result storage part for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the table for the pass / fail determination for common drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for pass / fail determination for special drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 1 shows a flow of a sub control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows a flow of a first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows a flow of an image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric Chu-long open presentation performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chu-long opening effect, (b) shows an example of the electric Chu-long opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 2 shows a flow of secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) shows a flow of second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the serif notice display in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows gradually the example of a display in tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of timer notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button continuous hitting production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production by the explanation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 54 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effects shown in FIG. 53. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 56. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the false continuation production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of expansion production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 2 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 3 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 4 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 5 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 6 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation concerning Example 7 in a time series. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is a figure showing an example of screen transition when various menus are chosen on a menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 8 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 9 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 10 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 11 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 12 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 13 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 14 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 15 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 16 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 17 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 18 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on image display device 208 'of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of image control of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 2000 as a game console according to a modification of the present invention, as viewed from the front. FIG. 17 shows a game console according to a modification of the present invention, wherein (a) shows a casino machine 3000 and (b) shows a portable telephone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display. It is. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result storage part for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the table for the pass / fail determination for common drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for pass / fail determination for special drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 1 shows a flow of a sub control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows a flow of a first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows a flow of an image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric Chu-long open presentation performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chu-long opening effect, (b) shows an example of the electric Chu-long opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 2 shows a flow of secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) shows a flow of second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 2 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 3 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 4 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 5 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 6 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation concerning Example 7 in a time series. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is a figure showing an example of screen transition when various menus are chosen on a menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 8 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 9 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 10 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 11 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 12 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 13 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 14 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 15 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 16 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 17 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 18 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 3 in time series. FIG. 17 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 1000 as a game console according to a modification of the present invention, as viewed from the front. FIG. 17 shows a game console according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a casino machine 2000, and (b) shows a portable telephone 3000 equipped with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the invention, and (d) a home television comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the invention A game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 34 and FIGS. 188 to 192 are basically used only in the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 1 to 34 and FIGS. Even in the case shown in FIG. 1, the codes shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 34 and FIG. 188 to FIG. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured in a frame shape Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage which can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “ball”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110 The upper plate 126 provided with the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 A ball extraction button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the firing device 110 by the operation of the player Ball launch handle 134 for launching the guided game ball into the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a chance to change the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the operation of the player For the setting unit 137 which can make various settings etc. by the operation of the setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), the card unit (CR unit), and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 and the button 136. A ball rental operation button 140 for instructing a ball rental, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit Not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board housing a first sub-board 160 that comprises a first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing and a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk A second sub-board case 166 for housing a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control part 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control part 400 and a substrate case 162; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls and that releases an error by an operation of a game clerk 68. A payout substrate case 172 housing the payout substrate 170, a launch substrate case 176 housing the launch substrate 174 constituting the launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the game ball, and various electric gaming machines And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156 and the first sub substrate 160 etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for a right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, the falling path of the gaming ball is divided into the right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and the left path on the left side of the rendering device 206 by changing the launch strength of the gaming ball by operating the ball emission handle 134 be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol starting opening 228, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the first special symbol starting opening 230, the second special symbol starting opening 232 (opened state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (opened state) etc. The ease of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting opening 228, the first special symbol starting opening 230 and the variable winning opening 234, the game of falling on the left path by the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nail 238 and the warp device 242 etc. Entry of balls is relatively easy, and entry of gaming balls falling on the right path is relatively difficult. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying a decorative symbol and various images (moving images or still images) used for effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower part of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 The normal symbol hold lamp 216 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7 segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) pending, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number (for example, four) of common drawing fluctuation games are displayed. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure variation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation game is specified. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and variable The winning openings 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of balls into the general winning openings 226 (general winning openings 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "winning balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rented balls" There are cases) and.

  The general drawing start port 228 and the general drawing start port 229 are devices, which are called gates and through chuckers, for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the present embodiment In the embodiment, one common drawing start port 228 is disposed on the left side path of the game board 200, and one common drawing start port 229 is disposed on the right side path. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start port 228 or the general drawing start port 229 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 or the drawing start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as an award ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 1 display device 212 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 1 variation game") is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right path. The special figure 2 start opening 232 has a pair of wing members 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and while the wing members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and win a common drawing fluctuation game, and a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right route. There is only one in the house. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 respectively include openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. For example, when the special figure display device wins the special figure variation game and the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing) Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the firing rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning any winning opening or start opening, or just out of passing the common drawing start opening 228, 229 The mouth 240 is reached.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. In addition, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying a fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The fourth symbol display 248 is provided with two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged in tandem. For example, LEDs are used as light sources of the two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to Special Figure 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to Special Figure 2. Note that the fourth symbol display device 248 may have only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth pattern may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as in this example, the fourth symbol display device may be provided in the rendering device 206 (center product). Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, from the warp outlet 242b to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling balls etc. that are run over by the balls discharged from the warp outlet 242 b and the nails of the game board 200 etc. In the central part of the front stage 244, the passed balls are special opening 1 start opening There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter 230.

  The effect movable body 224 in this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is vertically movable in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214, and a predetermined view A display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be set, the operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors A sensor circuit 428 outputting to the basic circuit 402 and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from power supply control unit 660 to payout control unit 600 and second sub-control unit 500, and main control unit 300, second sub-control unit 500, and firing control from payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (d). The types of figures and figures will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 5 (a), seven types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing G" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special drawing 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit and the number of rounds are performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game and after the end of the 7R big hit game, all transition to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. 15R special big hit symbol "Special figure A" and 7R special big hit symbol "Special figure B" is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game and is 7R big hit symbol "Special figure C" is a symbol which becomes a special figure low probability common figure high probability state after the end of a big hit game. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing C" are symbols whose advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R, and "special figure B" which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "special view E" is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability regular view low probability state, the special view high probability regular view low probability state (so-called so-called high probability game after the open time 100 ms × 2 R) Transition to the latent probability change state, and when “Special figure E” is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability regularity figure low probability state, the special figure high probability regularity popularity after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms × 2R) ends The state is shifted to the drawing high probability state (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). That is, the "special figure E" is an operation during the big hit game and the gaming state which is shifted thereafter by the gaming state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether it is the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state or not). It is a different pattern.

  "Special figure F" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure G” is a removal symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  In FIG.5 (b), four types of special drawings of "special drawing a"-"special drawing d" are shown as a stop symbol aspect in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 2. As shown in FIG. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is a detached symbol. In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, while seven special figures (of which five are the big hit) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used, As the stop symbol form of the four special figures of “special figure a” to “special figure d” (of which three kinds are big hit) are used. By configuring in this way, it may be possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a definite change in the big hit. In this example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 contains a sudden definite change or latent definite change which can hardly be obtained, while the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not contain a definite change or latent definite change. The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", 7R special jackpot of "special figure B", 7R jackpot of "special figure C", 15R special jackpot of "special figure a", 7R special jackpot of "special figure b" When notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-" Stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2 etc. When explicitly notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 15R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decor 3-decor 3- Stop display of decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "etc.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "Tokuku E" (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "Toku F", "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Do. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of “special figure D”, “decoration 1 – decoration 3 – decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure G" and "special figure d", symbol display areas other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" and "general drawing B" which are hit symbols, and "common drawing C" which is a detached pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 and the drawing start port 229, the drawing display device 210 displays all the seven segments and the central one. Repeat the lighting of the segment of the "general display of the fluctuation display". And, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, initial values of four random number counters for generating a common drawing win random value, a common drawing random value, a special drawing 1 random value, and a special drawing 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time and the random value for determining the special drawing fluctuation time are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random value for determining a common drawing fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308 1 is added to the above value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general prize opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 2 start opening 232, or the common view start opening 228 , 229 is determined to have been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value and the general drawing are used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value value, and the special figure 2 random value value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round is next next while setting it in the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. Also, apart from the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value next makes one round, the random number counter for generating the common drawing random value, Special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for and the random number counter for generating a special number 2 random number value has made one rotation. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 are awarded, the winning balls provided in RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening are provided. The value of the number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start openings 228 and 229, and variable winning openings 234 and 235 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (1) Obtain a random number value and store it in the special order 1 random number value storage area in order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 holdings decreases, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair of the holding order is the highest (first) is deleted. And the holding order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value value set is processed to be advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations increases, the special order 1 is new to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair in the lowest order (last). Data of a combination of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is written.

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the acquisition order in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the special order 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value pair data are deleted each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by one, and the remaining data It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value set is advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, the special figure 2 winning random number value is new to the next pending order of the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest pending order. And, the data of the special figure 2 random number value set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random value) was newly acquired. In the case, the special drawing prefetch process is executed using the start information. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  If the common drawing start port 228 or the common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generating random number counter The random number value is acquired as a winning random number value, and the common-mode random number value is acquired from the random number counter for general-purpose random number value generation provided in the RAM 308, and is stored in the general-purpose random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random number value in the common drawing random number storage area is stored by the same number as the common drawing reservation number stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area. In the common drawing random number storage area, every time the common drawing reservation number decreases by one, the data of the combination of the common drawing random number and the common drawing random value of the highest rank (first) is erased and It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random value set is incremented by one. In addition, whenever the number of popular drawing reservations increases by one, a new common drawing winning random value and the next pending order of the data of the combination of the lowest drawing (last) common drawing winning random value and the common drawing random value Data of a set of common-mode random numbers is written. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 235 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 is any one of a hit symbol (a common-diagram A or a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 5 (d)) and a dislocated symbol (a common-diagram C shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Make a final display of the symbol of. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. It is executed using the combination of the first common drawing win random value and the common drawing random value in the common drawing random number storage area as a start condition that is 1 or more.

  The main control unit 300 acquires common drawing start information (a pair of common drawing win random value and common drawing random value) from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the common drawing random value storage area, A table for deciding on a pass / fail judgment stored in the ROM 306 based on the common drawing win random number value in the common drawing start information acquired and the value of the common drawing probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later) Use the reference) to decide whether to win or lose. Next, based on the common drawing random number value in the common drawing start information thus acquired, the determined success or failure determination result, etc., the main control unit 300 determines the common drawing determination table (FIG. 9C) stored in the ROM 306. Use the hour movement table (see table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display of the common drawing. Next, the main control unit 300 uses, for example, various tables (for example, timer number selection not shown) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, and the acquired random number value for common drawing fluctuation time determination. The variable display time (timer number) of the common drawing is determined using the table), and the variable display time is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the common drawing fluctuation display time.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first drawing-up start information from the drawing random number storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the first drawing-general drawing start information from the drawing random number storage area and stores the common drawing reserve number. Subtract 1 from the number of general drawing reservations for the area. At this time, the general drawing start information extracted from the general drawing random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the general drawing start information stored in the temporary area. It is also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets a common drawing per shot flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON if the result of judgment is hit (winning), and sets a common drawing per shot flag to off when the result of judgment is non-winning.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 7R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability change flag, and common drawing probability change flag. . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5B is shown when the special figure a or 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability change flag is on, the special figure b or 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is off If the special figure c, the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure d modes, Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of the special view a to special view d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or Solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (until the game ball of predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, 235) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1). In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing, it waits for the period which is displaying the image which notifies the player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display device 208 is finished In the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating an effect waiting period is set. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start hole 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit as game balls enter and there is a large number of game balls and the euphorism is increased, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol form of the special figure 2, the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing shown is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, if the special figure probability change flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the chart probability change flag is on, the special view D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special view probability change flag is on, the common view probability change flag is off, the special view E, the small hit flag is on In the special figure F, when the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off the control so that it becomes each aspect of the special figure G, the setting area of the RAM 308 Special chart 1 stop chart To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special view 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special view 1 display device 212 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view G symbols. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) with high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) with low degree of advantage. . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Or a small hit (in the present example, a small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1) using the hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later) stored in Make a decision (whether or not to accept or reject). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special view 2 random number value in the special view 2 start information acquired and the special view determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 11A, The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special figure 2 is determined using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12 (a)). Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area Subtract 1 the number of reserved areas. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol fluctuation start command and a symbol fluctuation stop command concerning a common drawing are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a special figure start symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlying flags, values such as special figure probability change flags, special drawing related lottery processing In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it contains information indicating the timer number etc. selected in and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outliers flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and end effect start command, information including the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I have included it. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  If the command type is a symbol drawing start (rotation start) command of a common drawing, the command data is a per common drawing flag, a common drawing departure flag, a common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a common drawing related lottery process. Information including the information on the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the common drawing, information indicating the value of the common drawing per-flag, the common drawing deviation flag, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc. To be included.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special figure 1 related lottery process and special value 2 setting information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the common view display device 210 and special figure 1 display through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetching process executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217). In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the preliminary determination result (the special-figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see (b) to (e) in FIG. 8) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer division is completed. The processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the loading process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not non-power-supply is in progress, it may be determined in step S309 whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information of the increased amount may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 8B to 8E illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B illustrates an example of a state in which the special view 1 pre-reading result information is stored in the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special view 1 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8 (b), "special figure G" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure G" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 8 (c), "special figure d" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG.8 (c), the state in which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 8D shows an example of a special-purpose look-ahead result storage unit for special view 1 during power support. As shown in FIG. 8D, in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special view 1 change game is not the stop symbol information but the pre-reading result It may be stored as In the example shown in FIG. 8E, "timer 3" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "pending 1", and "timer 5" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "pending 2". The timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "pending 3" and "pending 4". In FIG. 8 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as "none". When timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-fetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set to correspond to the pass / fail result.

  In the above description, the stop symbol and the timer number are determined in advance, and the stop symbol information and the timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the pass / fail determination result is determined in advance and the information is prefetched It may be stored in the result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as pre-reading result information.

  Next, various tables used by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of a success / failure determination table used when performing a success / failure determination in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B is configured by the items of “general drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure result”. The item “common drawing probability” indicates a common drawing probability (common drawing low probability or common drawing high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired common drawing winning random value. Here, the possible range of the common drawing winning random value of this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a success or failure determination table for common use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the case where this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of hitting is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a success / failure determination table for general drawing, which is used when the drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of hitting is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the hit probability is 100 times. As described above, it may be designed such that only the hit is selected in the general drawing high probability state (during time reduction operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% in the short-time operation, but in the short-time operation, the probability that the hit is selected is higher than that in the short-time non-operation state (generally low probability state).

  FIG.9 (c) has shown the table of the symbol distribution and hit time operation for common figures. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is compared with the common drawing random number value when determining the stop symbol in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223), the distribution ratio of random number range for each design (ie Shows the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9C, the distribution rate of each symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the common drawing fluctuation game is a hit is 50% for the common drawing A and 50% for the common drawing B. The common drawings A and B are symbols for which the electric thu open operation is executed after the common drawing fluctuation game. In addition, since the disappointing symbol selected when the success or failure judgment result is disassembly is only one of the map C, the map C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of the disassembly. When the drawing C is selected, the electric chow opening operation is not executed after the drawing fluctuation game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the opening operation of the special view 2 start port (electric chow) 232 is executed after the normal view A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is not active, the wing member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. Do. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is a short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for only 1800 ms, and then It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, the opening operation of the special figure 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the general view B is not short, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only for 100 ms only once. When the gaming state at the stop display of the common figure B is short time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and then opened for only 1450 ms, again It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1450 ms.

  10 (a) to 10 (d) show an example of a table for determining whether or not the special determination is performed in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) is configured by items of “special drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of the success or failure determination. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible ranges of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65,536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 10A is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 10B is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10A, the probability of big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of small hit is the same.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 10C is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 10 (c), when this success or failure determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is zero.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 10D is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of small hit is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10C, the probability of a big hit is about 10 times.

  FIG. 11A shows a symbol sorting table for the special view 1. The numerical values in the "sorting" column in the table are compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the distribution ratio of random number range for each pattern (ie each Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the special figure A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B 25% for (7R special big hit), 25% for special figure C (7R big hit), 10% for special figure D (sudden probability variation big hit), 10% for special figure E (latency probability variation big hit) is there. Special views A, B, D, E excluding special view C are symbols for which positive change is activated after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hits (special figures A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, that is, the probability of probability variation is 75%.

  The special figures A, B and D indicate the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (during time reduction operation), spread figure low probability (due time not working) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view C is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The special view E is a symbol in which time saving is activated after the end of the big hit game only when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state or the general drawing high probability state. That is, when the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, time saving does not operate after the end of the big hit game. For example, when the special figure E is displayed several times in succession as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability common figure low probability state, time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability common figure) However, after the second and subsequent stop display, the time saving function is activated (it is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state). The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 90% in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, 100% in the other game state.

  In this example, the small hit symbol and the detached symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game are only one type each. Therefore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value, and the success judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is In the case of outliers, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a small hit symbol or an off symbol may be provided in a plurality of types similarly to the large hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the big hit time operation | movement in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), in the big hit game after the special view A is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R with 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after special image B or special image C is stopped and displayed, 7R is performed with 29000 ms per 1R, and in big hit game after special image D is displayed and stopped, the open of attacker Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2Rs in 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the gaming state other than the special view low probability general view low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

  In the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, 100 ms of attacker opening is performed twice in one opening opportunity. That is, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state and the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, the attacker operates in the same manner.

  FIG. 12A shows a symbol sorting table for the special view 2. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is the sorting percentage of the random number range for each symbol (ie, each is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which positive change is activated after the big hit game is over. The ratio of the probability change big hit (Toku figure a, b) in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, that is, the probability change probability is the same 75% as the probability change probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special figures a and b show the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (time reduction operation time), spread figure low probability (time reduction time not active) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view c is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of out pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. Therefore, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is a loss, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random number value. However, a plurality of types of off symbols may be provided similarly to the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the big hit time operation | movement in each symbol of the special figure 2. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (b), in the big hit game after the special view a is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R for 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special view b or special view c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, 7Rs are performed with 29000 ms per 1R to open the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, Special Figure 2 has a high probability of giving time reduction compared to Special Figure 1 and the release time of the attacker is long (or the number of R is large). Therefore, it can be considered that Special Figure 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Special Figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric tune long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S409 into effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 has been input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, otherwise transfer end ratio Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric-cho-long open effect process that is executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first auxiliary control unit 400. FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric Chu Long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the common drawing fluctuation game, and the special drawing 2 starting opening (electric Chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times for a common drawing fluctuation game and won , It may be referred to as long open)) It is an effect to ask whether or not to. It should be noted that, even after the regular drawing fluctuation stop, the electric tune long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during the electric cheer opening!") May be continued based on the regular drawing stop symbol.

  The electric power long open effect processing shown in FIG. 14 (a) is the start of symbol fluctuation from the main control unit 300 in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 in FIG. 13 (a). (Start of rotation) It is executed when a command is received.

  The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether the power-on long open effect execution regulation flag that restricts the execution of the power-on long open effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the power-long open effect execution regulation flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether the execution of the power-long open effect is restricted. For example, during the dark display where the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely black, the player can not visually recognize the effect even if the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of electric power Tyuulong is not obtained . Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display dark rotation. In addition, if the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric Chu-long opening effect, the game It is possible to carry out an electric Chu-long opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long long open effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the success or failure determination result of the special figure change game and the demonstration effect.

  In step S801, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is restricted, and for the restriction of the electric Chu-long opening effect. Other control processing is executed to end the present processing, and the process returns to the effect control processing (step S409) of the main processing.

  In step S801, if the power-on long open effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the power-on long open effect can be performed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol variation (start of rotation) It is determined from the command data of the command whether or not the success / failure determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is hit with reference to the information regarding the common drawing per game flag and the general drawing disengaging flag.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the success / failure determination result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the common drawing is generated from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the common drawing change game is the common drawing A.

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is the common drawing A, the process proceeds to step S807, the effect type selects the effect of "success pattern", and the power is open Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809 to execute other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “success pattern”, and ends this processing to effect control of the main process. It returns to a process (step S409).

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is not the common drawing A in step S805, the processing proceeds to step S811, and the effect type selects the effect of "failure pattern A" Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern A”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If it is determined in step S803 that the regularity determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is not a hit, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes electric power long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery processing. In the electric chew long opening false effect execution lottery process, the electric chew long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 by taking out a random number value from the random number counter for the electric tune long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 It is judged whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit using

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric power long open false effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the electric power long open false effect in step S 817, the process proceeds to step S 821, and the effect type “failure pattern B” is selected and set as electric power long open effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern B”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric power long open false effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric power long open effect, and ends the present processing to execute the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric Chu Long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the Electric Chu Long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric Chu Long opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit. An execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of moat-off, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Moreover, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set in the hit (open view B) when the turn off is open for a short time (short open), and the turn off does not open the turn off (outline C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general view B) and a shift (general view C).

  FIG.14 (b) has shown an example of electric Chu-long open presentation. FIG. 14 (b) shows display effects being performed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. At the front of the background effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A fluctuation icon display area a is disposed on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a fluctuation icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variation icon display area a, a special view reserve display area c for displaying a reserve for special view is arranged, and a reserve icon b of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. At the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a power long open effect area d is disposed. The common drawing change game is started by the common drawing display device 210 (not shown), and the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric Chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric Chu-long opening effect area d. An image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed together with the display of "during a helping chance lottery" as an electric Chu-long opening effect, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 A scruffy effect is being performed which causes the player to expect that the game may be released long. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden due to the effect of opening electric power long. In addition, the right side area of the special view hold display area c is also partially hidden. Thus, if there is a case that the electric Chu-long opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol makes at least a part of the electric Chu-long opening effect difficult to confirm There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S901, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S 903 following step S 901, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S 905. . In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 907 following step S 905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 907, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 16 to 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (1). FIG. 16 (1) and each figure to be described later show the decorative symbol display device 208 at the center. In the example shown in FIG. 16 (1), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display) in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 16 to FIG. 34, an even number of decorative symbols ("decor 2", "decor 4", "decor 6", "decor 8", "decor 10") are displayed surrounded by a vertically long rectangular frame display The inside of the frame display is mode 3 (indicated by hatching upward in the right (for example, blue) in FIGS. 16 to 34). Moreover, in FIGS. 16 to 34, the odd-numbered decorative symbols ("decoration 1", "decoration 3", "decoration 5", "decoration 7", "decoration 9") are surrounded by vertically elongated rectangular frame display As shown, the inside of the frame display is aspect 5 (shown by lattice hatching in FIGS. 16 to 34 (for example, red)). In addition, the frame display surrounding the odd-numbered decorative symbols is displayed so that the display size is larger than that of the frame display, and the lower right corners thereof match within the vertically long frame display including the character image in the frame. For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), "decoration 7" is displayed in a frame display including a character image of Yoshimune. The pachinko machine 100 displays the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the mode 3 or the mode 5 to thereby determine the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game by a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree The preview notice can be executed by the), and the character image can be displayed within the frame display surrounding the odd decoration pattern. The display of the pre-reading advance notice displayed in the mode 3 in the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is the display of the preview notice of the chance eye in the mode 3, and the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in the mode 5 The display of the pre-reading notice is the display of the pre-reading notice of the chance eye of aspect 5. The big hit reliability (expected degree) in the advance notice of the chance eye-read is set higher in the case 5 than in the case 3. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may display the decoration pattern itself in red or blue and execute the advance notice of the chance eye. Also, the odd-numbered decorative symbols may include character images. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the display, for example, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, flashing white), aspect 3 (for example, blue), aspect 4 (for example, green), aspect 5 (for example, It can be displayed in seven types: red, aspect 6 (for example, gold color), aspect 7 (for example, gold color).

  At the lower center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area e capable of displaying a variable icon is provided. When the reserve is digested and the special figure variation game is started, the reserve icon corresponding to the special figure variation game becomes a variation icon. The fluctuation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the cylindrical pedestal image (base) displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the notice of the variation with a predetermined big hit reliability of the success or failure of the special view variation game.

  A special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area e. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area f, the number of pending icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the special drawing 1 pending icon display area f by the number of holding icons of the special view 1 according to the number of pending icons of the special drawing 1 and the pending state of each special icon It is possible to execute pre-reading notice with predetermined big hit reliability with the success or failure of the special figure 1 fluctuation game which relates. The special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from right to left. At the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas, an oval pedestal image showing the display position of the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding orders, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of Special Figure 1 corresponding to the earliest (most stored) hold is displayed, and in the same way, the second to fourth areas correspond to the second to fourth hold. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 16 (1), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is two, and the suspension icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the special view 1 suspension icon display area f, respectively. . The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed overlapping at the upper end of the pedestal image. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 16 (1), the retention icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the form of a circle (example shown by dot hatching (for example, white) in FIGS. 16 to 34). Aspect 1 The circular aspect is the default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest big hit reliability of the plurality of aspects. The default mode may be a mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of which the special view 1 prefetch result is "not determined", and the reliability of the default mode in this case is not set.

  Further, three meter images (gauge images) g1, g2 and g3 are displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area e. The meter images g1, g2 and g3 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The meter image g1 includes three horizontally long rectangular frame images vertically stacked from the upper edge of the frame image, a horizontally long rectangular frame image disposed at the lower end, a character image of “爺” disposed within the frame image, and Segment-like images. The meter image g2 is a horizontally long rectangular frame image arranged at the lower end, a character image of “Hime” arranged within the frame image, and three horizontally long rectangular shapes stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image Segment-like images. The meter image g3 is a horizontally long rectangular frame image arranged at the lower end, a character image of “don” arranged within the frame image, and three horizontally long rectangular shapes stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image Segment-like images. In the initial state, the segmented images of the meter images g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in white. The meter images g1, g2 and g3 are displayed in red one segment at a time. When all segments of the meter image g1 are displayed in red, the meter image g1 is full, and when all segments of the meter image g2 are displayed in the mode 5, the meter image g2 is full. In the state where all segments of the meter image g3 are displayed in red, the meter image g3 is full. When all the segment-like images of the meter image g1 are displayed in red and the meter image g1 is full, an effect of promoting the title color at the start of the effect is executed. When the entire segment-like image of the meter image g2 is displayed in red and the meter image g2 is full, it is determined that the effect of operating the movable body (movable means) is executed. When the entire segment-like image of the meter image g3 is displayed in red and the meter image g3 is full, it is determined that the strong button effect is to be executed. Details of these effects will be described later.

  In addition, the special figure 2 reservation icon display area may be provided on the right side of the variation icon display area e. In the special figure 2 pending icon display area, the number of pending icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. When the special view 2 reserved icon display area is provided, the meter images g1, g2, and g3 may or may not be displayed. In addition, the special figure 2 reserve icon display area may be provided above the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), a fifth symbol display area h capable of displaying the fifth symbol is provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variation game, each left right middle symbol of the fifth symbol is "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "9" → "0" → " The variable display of the fifth symbol which is switched in the order of 1 "→ ... is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 16 (1), the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is displayed. In the fifth symbol, similarly to the decorative symbol, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to notify of the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), an image of a pattern of the sun is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the sun pattern is displayed when the effect stage is a fine stage. Although illustration is omitted, a background image corresponding to the effect stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, in FIG. 16 (1) and each drawing described later, the configuration necessary for the explanation of the embodiment is extracted and shown in the area on the paper surface divided by the dashed dotted line. The speaker 120, the movable body 700, the movable body 702, the chance button 136, the chance button 704, and the setting operation unit 137 are shown in FIG. And the fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are schematically illustrated. The pachinko machine 100 has a movable body 700 and a movable body 702 as movable means. Details of the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described later.

  A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The chance button 704 is disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106, and is an operation means that can be operated by the player. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for notifying the fourth symbol, and are arranged, for example, at predetermined positions on the board of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square-shaped external shape, and reports the fourth symbol for Special Figure 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular external shape, and reports the fourth symbol for Special Figure 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks in white when lit during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and is turned off during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks in white when it is lit during execution of the special figure 2 variation game, and turns off during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game. The fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, the downward arrow shown at the center lower end portion of FIG. 16 (1) indicates that the state shown in FIG. 16 (1) and the state shown in FIG. 16 (2) continue in time series. . Also in each of the drawings described below, the downward arrow illustrated at the center lower end of each drawing indicates that it continues in chronological order with the following drawings.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 16 (1) to 16 (9). FIGS. 16 (1) to 16 (9) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 16 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. Stop display (fixed display, main stop display) is displayed. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (1), the retention icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a mode 1 circular mode. Aspect 1 The circular aspect is the default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest big hit reliability among the plurality of aspects.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c represent the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the downward arrows shown in the fifth symbol display area h are the fluctuation displays of the fifth symbol It represents the displayed state. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 16 (2), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (2), the variation icon is displayed in a display size larger than the hold icon. This may make it easier to identify the change icon and the hold icon.

  FIG. 16 (3) shows a state in which the display j1 capable of specifying the mode (for example, color) of the speech preview display is displayed before the display of the speech preview display is started. The display j1 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j1 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j1. The display j1 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 3 (for example, blue). The mode 3 of the lower half of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the speech preview display k1 started in FIG. 16 (4) described later, and the display j1 is a display related to the mode of the speech preview display. The dialogue warning display is a warning display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j1, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech display is started. In addition, the display j1 may not include the display of the aspect corresponding to the aspect of the speech advance notice display.

  FIG. 16 (4) shows a state in which the speech notice display k1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the display of the serif notice k1 is started after the display j1 is deleted, but the display of the serif notice k1 may be started while the display j1 is displayed, or the serif notice may be performed simultaneously with the deletion of the display j1. The display k1 may be started. The display j1 may be deleted after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be moved to the lower right and moved out of the display area and deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (4), the serif notice display k1 is a pattern of the scroll, and the serif notice display k1 is displayed with a picture in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech notice display k1 is mode 3.

  FIG. 16 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k1 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 16 (6) shows a state in which the speech warning display k1 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k1 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the serif of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k1 is the third embodiment.

  In FIG. 16 (7), a character image (hereinafter referred to as “婆”) m1 of a rose and a character name display n1 including a character image of “婆” are displayed overlapping the left end of the speech notice display k1. It shows the condition that has been The speech notice display k1 may be a display including 婆 m1 and the character name display n1.

  FIG. 16 (8) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the speech preview display k1 so as to overlap the speech preview display k1. The mini game display o1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the speech preview display k1 or may be displayed without overlapping the speech preview display k1. The mini game (sub game) by the mini game display o1 is started in association with the speech preview display k1. The mini game display o1 includes an inverted triangular arrow image and four circular images. Four circular images are displayed side by side in a row, and from the left, aspect 1 circular images, aspect 4 circular images (shown by cross hatching in FIG. 16 to FIG. 34 (for example, green)), aspect 1 A circular image and aspect 5 circular images are arranged in order. At the beginning of the display, the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is displayed to the left of the leftmost aspect 1 circular image. The mini game by the mini game display o1 is executed in such a manner that the arrow image moves to the right. In the mini game, a hit is obtained corresponding to the hit image displayed on the left from the position at which the arrow image is stopped. Aspect 1 The circular image is an outset image, and the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are the hit images. More specifically, the mini game is off when the arrow image is stopped above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, and when the arrow image is stopped above the second aspect 4 circular image from the left. When the arrow image corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is acquired and the arrow image is stopped above the third aspect 1 circular image from the left, the incident corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is acquired, and the arrow image is the rightmost When stopping above the aspect 5 circular image, a hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image are obtained.

  FIG. 16 (9) shows a state in which a character string image of “Tomon Yatsudai is” is displayed in the dialogue warning display k1. The character string image of "Tomonaga Yatai" is a character display of the character display representing the line of 婆 m1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (9), the mini game by the mini game display o1 is ended. In the present example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the speech notice display k1. The movement start of the arrow image is the start of the mini game. The mini game may be started before the display of the character string image in the speech notice display k1, or may be displayed at the same time as the display of the character string image in the speech notice display k1. The display may be started, or may be started while the character string image is being displayed in the speech notice display k1. Further, in this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is lost. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can display a certain type of serif notice k1. The serif notice display k1 is a display including a letter display (in this example, "Tomonaga Yatsushiro") representing a serif on 婆 m1. The character display of this example is a character display including the content related to the character of the lord. In addition, there may be a case where a mini game by mini game display o is started in relation to the speech warning display k1. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by displaying the serif notice display k1 including the character display of the content related to the character, the serif notice display k1 can be noticed by the beginner player, and the serif notice display k1 In some cases, playing a mini game in conjunction with may make it easier for the player to focus on the mini game.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to (10) to (17) in FIG. FIGS. 16 (10) to 16 (17) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 16 (10) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k1 is displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), a character string image of "Good for tea" is displayed in the speech notice display k1. The character string image of "tea is good" is a character display of the character display representing the serif of 婆 m1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (10), the mini game by the mini game display o1 is ended. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the second aspect 4 circular image from the left, the result of the mini game is hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. In the present example, when the result of the hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as the result of the mini game, the display of the speech advance notice k2 is started as shown in FIG. 16 (12) described later.

  FIG. 16 (11) shows a state where a display j2 capable of specifying the color of the speech preview display k2 can be displayed before the display of the speech preview display k2 is started. The display j2 is moved from the vicinity of the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j2 of this example appears from around the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and the display is started. In the figure, the upper right arrow illustrated on the lower left of the display j2 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j2. The display j2 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 3. Aspect 3 of the lower half of display j1 corresponds to the aspect (for example, color) of serif notice display k2 started in FIG. 16 (12) described later, and display j2 relates to the aspect of serif notice display k2 It is a display. The dialogue warning display k2 is a warning display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j2, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech notice display k2 is started.

  FIG. 16 (12) shows a state in which the speech notice display k2 is started to be displayed. In this example, the display of the serif notice k2 is started after the display j2 is deleted. However, the display of the serif notice k2 may be started while the display j2 is displayed. The display k1 may be started. The display j2 may be deleted after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be moved to the upper right and moved out of the display area and deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (12), the serif notice display k2 is a pattern of the scroll, and the serif notice display k2 is displayed with a pattern in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech warning display k2 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 16 (13) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k2 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the left direction.

  FIG. 16 (14) shows a state in which the speech warning display k2 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k2 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k2 is the third embodiment.

  FIG. 16 (15) shows a state in which a character name display n2 including a character image of 婆 m2 and "婆" is displayed overlapping the right end portion of the speech notice display k2. Note that the speech notice display k2 may be a display including 婆 m2 and the character name display n2.

  FIG. 16 (16) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is started to be displayed. In the present example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the speech preview display k2 so as to overlap the speech preview display k2. The mini game display o2 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the speech preview display k2 or may be displayed without overlapping the speech preview display k2. The mini game with the mini game display o2 is started in association with the speech preview k2. Similar to the mini game display o1, the mini game display o2 includes an inverted triangular arrow image and four circular images. The four circular images are displayed side by side in a row in the lateral direction, and are arranged in the order of the aspect 1 circular image, the aspect 4 circular image, the aspect 1 circular image, and the aspect 5 circular image from the right. At the beginning of the display, the arrow image of the mini game display o2 is displayed to the right of the rightmost aspect 1 circular image. The mini game by the mini game display o2 is executed with the arrow image being moved to the left. The mini game is a win for the hit corresponding to the hit image displayed to the right from the position at which the arrow image is stopped. Aspect 1 The circular image is an outset image, and the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are the hit images. More specifically, the mini game is off when the arrow image is stopped above the rightmost aspect 1 circular image, and when the arrow image is stopped above the second aspect 4 circular image from the right. When the arrow image corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is acquired and the arrow image is stopped above the third aspect 1 circular image from the right, the impact corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is acquired, and the arrow image is the leftmost When stopping above the aspect 5 circular image, a hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image are obtained.

  FIG. 16 (17) shows a state in which a character string image of "Good for Daifuku" is displayed in the speech notice display k2. The character string image of “good for Daifuku” is a character display of the character display representing the serif of 婆 m2. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (17), the mini game by the mini game display o2 is ended. In this example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the speech notice display k2. The movement start of the arrow image is the start of the mini game. The mini game may be started before the display of the character string image in the speech notice display k2, or may be displayed at the same time as the display of the character string image in the speech notice display k2. The display may be started, or may be started while the character string image is being displayed in the speech notice display k2. Further, in this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 is stopped above the rightmost circular image of the aspect 1, the result of the mini game is lost. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, a hit corresponding to the form 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with the certain type of serif notice k1. Then, the dialogue warning display k2 is started to be displayed. In addition, the result of the mini game of the mini game display o1 can be derived regardless of the operation of the chance button 136. Further, the pachinko machine 100 does not start display of a certain effect display (for example, the second serif announcement display k2) due to the derivation of the result of disengaging the mini game, rather than the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display of the special drawing). The variation display (variation display of the special view) in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the result of the hit of the mini game is configured so as to be finally clearly displayed in the big hit mode. For example, rather than a variation display in which a dialogue warning notice of "general is Yashiro Shoji" is displayed as a first serif notice display without a dialogue warning indication of "Dafuku good fit" being displayed as a second serif notice display. The variable display in which the dialogue warning display of "well suited to Daifuku" is displayed as the second dialogue notification display is configured so as to be more likely to be finalized and displayed in the big hit mode in the end.

  In addition, a mini game different from the mini game of the mini game display o1 and o2 may be executed. At least a part of the mini game execution period of the mini game display o1 or o2 may overlap at least a part of the other mini game execution period.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 16 (18) to (25) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 16 (18) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed. The display j3 is a display capable of specifying the mode (for example, color) of the speech preview display k3 before the display of the speech preview K3 shown in FIG. 16 (19) described later starts. The display j3 is moved from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j3 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j3. The display j3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 1. Aspect 1 of the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the aspect of the speech preview display k3 started in FIG. 16 (19) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the aspect of the speech preview display. The speech notice display k3 is a prefetch notice display. By the display j3, the player can know the mode of the speech preview display k3 before the display of the speech preview display k3 is started.

  FIG. 16 (19) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k3 is started to be displayed. In this example, the display of the serif notice k3 is started after the display j3 is erased, but the display of the serif notice k3 may be started while the display j3 is displayed, or the serif notice may be performed simultaneously with the deletion of the display j3. The display k3 may be started. The display j3 may be deleted after being stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be moved to the lower right and moved out of the display area and deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (19), the serif notice display k3 is a pattern of the scroll, and the serif notice display k3 is displayed with a pattern in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech notice display k3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 16 (20) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 16 (21) shows a state in which the speech warning display k 3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the serif of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k3 is the first embodiment.

  In FIG. 16 (22), a character image of a girl (hereinafter referred to as "girl") m3 and a character name display n3 including a character image of "girl" are displayed overlapping the left end of the speech notice display k3. It shows the condition that has been The speech notice display k3 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 16 (23) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 16 (24) shows a state in which the character string image of “prepare blue” is displayed in the speech notice display k 3. The character string image of "prepare blue" is a character display of character displays representing serif of the girl m3.

  FIG. 16 (25) shows a state in which the mode of the reserve icon f2 has changed from the mode 1 circular to the mode 3 circular. The character string image of "prepare blue" in the speech preview display k3 is a display for previewing that the mode of the hold icon changes to mode 3. In addition, the big hit reliability of the retention icon is, from the low order, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 3 (for example blue), aspect 4 (for example green), aspect 5 (for example red), aspect 6 (for example , Golden), aspect 7 (e.g., iridescent). Further, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed even after the character string image is displayed in the speech preview display k3.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment can display a speech notice display k3 as a display of a certain type of speech notice. The serif notice display k3 is a display including a character display (in this example, "prepare for blue") of character displays representing the serif of the girl m3. Further, the speech notice display k3 is a display as a prefetch notice. The mini game by the mini game display o1 is not executed in relation to the serif notice k3 which is the pre-reading notice display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in order to check whether or not the mini game is successful, the player is instantly focused on the balloon of the speech warning display, and the game in which the display of the words of the speech warning display is in the eye The person can see the speech notice display and can deepen the understanding of the presentation etc. through the speech notice display and double the fun of the game.

The dialogue warning display is necessary to deepen the understanding of the character and the presentation.
Since the serif notice is not used as a notice with a relatively high hit expectancy, it can be displayed frequently, and it is necessary to have a role to hold a game.
However, in recent gaming machines, a large number of players who are bored and do not watch the conventionally displayed speech warning display.
It is meaningless for the player who is not looking at the serif notice display in the first place, even if the notice display is sometimes hot with the serif notice display.
If you don't see the serif announcement that has the above-mentioned role, you will end up with a monotonous game of whether you just hit a big hit.
In addition, although a gaming machine equipped with a mini game is also known as a new effect, the player pays attention to the mini game, and the player who does not see the serif notice is not seen more and more the serif notice It will
However, since the mini game may have anything other than a big hit, and it plays a role of giving during the game, it is good to be paid attention to the mini game, but the serif notice displays an understanding of the effects Since it is a good thing to deepen, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example makes the player who is interested in the mini game pay attention to the speech notice display again to enjoy the effects mounted on the game console without exhaustion. .

Also, for example, in the case where the balloon of the speech warning display is a mode having a relatively large hit reliability, it may have a pattern in which the mini game succeeds and a pattern in which it fails, and conversely, the speech warning display If the balloon is a mode with a relatively high hit reliability, the mini game is always hit, and if the speech warning display balloon is a mode with a relatively low reliability, the mini game is always output in the mini game It may be out of place.
In the case where the speech of the speech advance notice display is a mode having a relatively high hit probability, even if it is a pattern in which the mini game fails, the hit probability may be higher than when the mini game is not played.
The position at which the mini game is displayed overlaps, for example, at least a part of the balloon of the speech warning display, and may be the front side or the rear side of the sentence in the balloon display. Further, the position where the mini game is displayed may be, for example, outside the speech balloon of the speech warning display.
The character display of the serif notice display may be displayed gradually and gradually from the top side of the character.
The type of mini-game (like success, success and great success, etc.) differs depending on the content of the speech, the mode of the balloon and the mode of the character. For example, it is a gambling-like content that makes a great success or failure in the mini game when the character display of the character is displayed, and when the character of the princess is displayed, there is no great success but there are many successful relief types. It may be content.
There may be a case in which the second notice preview of the speech is given as an advance notice.
The character of the first speech notification display may move to the second speech notification display, and the first speech notification display may be erased.
In addition to characters, there may be voices and animations in which, for example, the character's mouth moves, in addition to characters, in the dialog warning display. For example, even if the speech preview display s1 to be described later has no animation in which the voice or character's mouth moves and the speech preview display k1 and k2 shown in FIG. 18 and the speech preview display s1 shown in FIG. You may be able to notice the serif notice shown in, and you may be able to notice a mini game. There is no sound effect related to the mini game while the mini game is being executed, and at the time of deriving the result of the mini game, the sound effect may or may not be output.

  Next, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as "front" (front, front, front, etc.), and the reverse is "rear" (rear, rear) Side, rear face etc. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed, for example, on an island facility, the vertical upper side as viewed from the player is "upper" (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and the reverse is "lower" (lower, lower, Lower end, etc.). Also, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the left side (left side, left side, left end, etc.) of the player is viewed from the player, and the reverse is right side (right side, right side, etc.) And the right edge).

  FIG. 17A shows a state where the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 are viewed from the front upper right and the rear lower left. The positions of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 in the front-rear relationship are, in order from the rear side, the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 702, and the movable body 700. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are disposed in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (1), the movable body 702 has movable portions 702a and 702b. The movable portion 702 a is disposed on the left side of the movable body 702, and the movable portion 702 b is disposed on the right side of the movable body 702. The movable portion 702a has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and is disposed so that the plane of the flat plate is orthogonal to an imaginary straight line extending in the front-rear direction. Similarly, it has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and the plane of the flat plate is disposed to be orthogonal to an imaginary straight line extending in the front-rear direction. A part of the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, "Yatsushiro") is written on the flat plate surface of the movable part 702a, and the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like on the flat plate surface of the effect movable body 702b. A part (in this example, "general") is written. In addition, a full color LED is disposed on the flat surface of the movable parts 702a and 702b, and the movable body 702 is, for example, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), aspect 3 (for example, A plurality of colors of blue), aspect 4 (for example, green), aspect 5 (for example red), aspect 6 (for example gold), aspect 7 (for example iridescent) can be emitted. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (1), the movable body 702 emits light to the aspect 1. The right end of the movable portion 702a located at the initial position is in contact with the left end of the movable portion 702b located at the initial position, and the movable portion 702a is movable leftward from the initial position. Is movable from the initial position to the right. For example, a stepping motor is used as a drive source of the movable parts 702a and 702b. In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the movable portion 702a is located at the left end of the movement range, and the movable portion 702b is located at the right end of the movement range.

  The movable body 700 has a circular shape, and the front surface thereof is decorated with a family crest. In addition, the movable body 700 has a full color LED, for example, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), aspect 3 (for example blue), aspect 4 (for example green), A plurality of colors of aspect 5 (for example, red), aspect 6 (for example, gold color) and aspect 7 (for example, rainbow color) can be emitted. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (1), the movable body 700 emits light to the aspect 1.

  The drive control (movement control) of the movable bodies 70 and 702 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the movable bodies 700 and 702 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 700 will be described using FIGS. 17 (2a) and (2b). FIG. 17 (2a) shows a state where the movable body 700 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 700 is below the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 700 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move vertically in the plane parallel to the display screen in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 17 (2 b) shows a state in which the movable body 700 has moved upward. An upward arrow illustrated below the movable body 700 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the movable body 700. Further, a circular diagram shown in the lower part of the figure represents the initial position of the movable body 700. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (2b), the movable body 700 is located at the upper end of the movement range. The movable body 700 may be movable upward from the position in FIG. 17 (2b).

  Next, the operation of the movable body 702 will be described using FIGS. 17 (3a) to (3c). FIG. 17 (3a) shows a state in which the movable body 702 is located at the initial position. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (3a), the movable parts 702a and 702b are located at the initial position, and the right end of the movable part 702a is in contact with the left end of the movable part 702b. The initial position of the movable body 702 is above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 702 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move vertically in a plane parallel to the display screen in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 17 (3 b) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward. The downward arrow illustrated below the movable body 702 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the movable body 702. Further, a rectangular diagram shown in the upper side in the drawing represents the initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (3b), the movable body 702 is located at the lower end of the movement range. The movable body 702 may be movable below the position in FIG. 17 (3b).

  FIG. 17 (3c) shows a state in which the movable portion 702a has moved to the left and the movable portion 702b has moved to the right. A left-pointing arrow shown superimposed on the movable portion 702a represents the trajectory and moving direction of the movable portion 702a, and a left-pointing arrow shown superimposed on the movable portion 702a represents the trajectory and moving direction of the movable portion 702a. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (3c), the movable portion 702a is located at the left end of the movement range, and the movable portion 702b is located at the right end of the movement range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 17 (3c), the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702a and the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702b are the same. The movable portion 702a may be movable leftward from the position in FIG. 17 (3c), and the movable portion 702b may be movable rightward from the position in FIG. 17 (3c). It is also good.

  FIG. 17 (4) shows a state in which the movable bodies 700 and 702 are started from the initial position. In the figure, a circular diagram illustrated below represents the initial position of the movable body 700, and a rectangular diagram illustrated above represents the initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (4), the movable body 700 is stopped at the uppermost position of the movement range, and the movable body 702 is stopped at the lowermost position of the movement range. The movable body 702a is located at the left end of the movement range, and the movable body 702b is located at the right end of the movement range. When the movable body 700 and the movable body 702 overlap in the front-rear direction, when the movable portions 702a and 702b of the movable body 702 are positioned at the initial position, substantially all of the movable portions 702a and 702b move in the front-rear direction It will not be visible to the player because By moving the movable portions 702a and 702b to the left and right, when the movable body 700 and the movable body 702 overlap in the front-rear direction, the movable portions 702a and 702b can be moved to the left and right to be visible to the player .

  Next, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 (5) shows a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special view 1 change game. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and in the fifth symbol display area h, the variable display of the fifth symbol is displayed. In the variation icon display area e, a variation icon e0 having a circular form 1 is displayed, and in the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f, suspension icons f1 and f2 are displayed. In addition, although the presentation example performed in connection with execution of a special figure 1 change game is demonstrated below, these effects may be performed in connection with execution of a special figure 2 change game. The pachinko machine 100 may have a movable body in addition to the movable bodies 700 and 702. A display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be disposed on these movable bodies.

  The decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and FIGS. 19 to 34 to be described later can be displayed in a rendering mode such as a sunny stage, a cloudy stage, a ZONE, and a super ZONE. The decorative design may be different in form depending on the effect mode. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display a decorative symbol of a certain aspect in at least a part of stages or effect modes, and can display a decorative symbol of an aspect different from a certain aspect in another stage or effect mode. It may be

  Next, the dialog warning display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a table for explaining a speech warning display. The table shown in FIG. 18 includes items of “NO”, “first serif notice display”, and “second serif notice display”. The item "NO" indicates the identification number of the speech warning display. In this example, 21 serif notice displays "NO01" to "NO21" are provided.

  The item of “first serif notice display” is, for example, the first serif notice displayed in the state where no serif notice such as serif notice k1 shown in FIGS. 16 (5) to (9) is displayed. It shows. The items of the "first serif preview" are composed of items of "character", "blunt mode", "mini game", and "serif content". The item of "character" indicates a character displayed during the speech warning display. The item "Blow-out mode" indicates the mode (for example, display color) of the balloon display of the speech warning display. “Aspect 1” is, for example, white, “Aspect 3” is, for example, blue, “Aspect 4” is, for example, green, and “Aspect 5” is, for example, red. In addition, although "aspect 2" is not provided, "aspect 2" may be provided. For example, "aspect 2" is a form of white blinking. The item "mini-game" indicates whether or not the mini-game is started in relation to the dialogue warning display. The mini game is started when the item of “mini game” is “o”, and it is indicated that the mini game is not started when the item of “mini game” is “x”. As shown in FIG. 18, the mini game is started in relation to the first serif preview of “NO01” to “NO17”, but on the first serif preview of “NO18” to “NO21”. The related mini-games are configured not to start. The item of “serif content” indicates the content of character display representing the serif of the character of the serif notice display. For example, in the case of the serif preview display of "NO01", a character string image of "Welcome" is displayed as a character display representing the serif of "character A (staff)".

  The item “second serif notice display” is, for example, the second performed in a state where the first serif notice display such as the serif notice display k2 shown in FIGS. 16 (12) to (17) is performed. It shows about serif notice display. The item of "second serif notice display" is composed of items of "character", "blunt mode", "mini game", and "serif content". "-" Of each item has shown that the 2nd serif advance notice display is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 18, the second serif notice display is not displayed in the serif notice displays of “NO01”, “NO02”, “NO04”, “NO07”, and “NO18” to “NO21”. Note that whether or not the second serif notice is displayed may depend on the result of the mini game started in relation to the first serif notice, or the first serif notice may be displayed. In the case of a serif notice display (for example, a serif notice display of “NO 03”, “NO 05”, “NO 06”, “NO 08” to “NO 17”), the second serif notice display is always displayed May be The item of "character" indicates a character displayed during the speech warning display. The item "blow-out mode" indicates the display mode (for example, display color) of the balloon display of the speech advance notice display. The second "serif" notice display is provided with the modes "mode 3" to "mode 5". For example, "Aspect 3" is blue, "Aspect 4" is green, and "Aspect 5" is red. In addition, although "aspect 1" and "aspect 2" are not provided in the second serif notice display, "aspect 1" and "aspect 2" may be provided. The item "mini-game" indicates whether or not the mini-game is started in relation to the dialogue warning display. The mini game is started when the item of “mini game” is “o”, and it is indicated that the mini game is not started when the item of “mini game” is “x”. As shown in FIG. 18, since the mini game is started in relation to the second serif notice display of “NO 03”, “NO 05”, “NO 06”, “NO 08” to “NO 17”, the second one Whenever the dialogue warning display is displayed, the mini game is started in relation to the second dialogue warning display. In addition, when the second serif notice display is displayed, a serif notice display in which the mini game is not started may be provided. When a mini game is started in connection with the second dialogue warning display, an effect effective for the player is started. Details of this effect will be described later. The item of “serif content” indicates the content of character display representing the serif of the character of the serif notice display. For example, in the case of the "NO3" serif preview display, a character string image of "Good for Daifuku" is displayed as a character display representing the "Chara B (婆)" serif.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18, when the second serif notice is displayed, the “character” of the first serif notice is different from the “character” of the second serif notice. In the case, the first and second serif notice displays the conversation notice. For example, in the case of the serif notice display of "NO 08", the first serif notice display is that "Chara" is "Chara D (Echigoya)" and "Serif contents" is "Ai Na", 2 In the second serif notice display, “Chara” is “Chara F (爺)”, “Serif contents” is “I do not know?”, And Echigo's words and 2 in the first serif notice display A conversation is established with the first serif warning display and the first serif and second serif notice display.

  Moreover, the serif notice display of "NO01"-"NO17" is a notice display of the said fluctuation | variation, and the big hit reliability is different for every aspect. This big hit reliability is aspect 3, aspect 4, aspect 5 from the low order. For example, in the mini-game, the hit result is higher when the serif notice is displayed with a relatively higher big hit reliability than when the serif notice is displayed in a relatively low hit reliability mode. May be derived easily. For example, when the speech warning display of the aspect of the aspect 4 is displayed may be easier to be derived as a result of the hit than when the speech preview of the aspect of the aspect 3 is displayed.

  Moreover, the serif notice display of "NO18"-"NO21" is a prefetch notice display, and the big hit reliability is "NO18", "NO19", "NO20", "NO21" in ascending order.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 19 (1) to 19 (21). 19 (1) to (21) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 19 (1) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 19 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the form of a circular form. Aspect 1 The circular aspect is the default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest big hit reliability among the plurality of aspects.

  In FIG. 19 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 19 (2), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  FIG. 19 (3) shows a state in which the display j1 capable of specifying the mode of the speech preview display is displayed before the display of the speech preview display is started. The display j1 is displayed in such a manner as to move downward from the center on the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j1 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j1. The display j1 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 3. Mode 3 of the lower half of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the speech warning display k1 started in FIG. 19 (4) described later, and the display j1 is a display related to the mode of the speech warning display. The dialogue warning display is a warning display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j1, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech display is started.

  FIG. 19 (4) shows a state in which the speech notice display k1 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j1 is erased, the display of the speech warning display k1 is started. The dialogue warning display k1 is a pattern of a scroll, and the dialogue warning display k1 is displayed with a pattern in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech notice display k1 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 19 (5) shows a state in which the speech warning display k1 is displayed in the form of animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 19 (6) shows a state in which the speech warning display k1 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k1 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the serif of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k1 is the third embodiment.

  FIG. 19 (7) shows a state in which a character name display n1 including a character image of 婆 m1 and “婆” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech advance notice display k1. The speech notice display k1 may be a display including 婆 m1 and the character name display n1.

  FIG. 19 (8) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the speech preview display k1 so as to overlap the speech preview display k1.

  FIG. 19 (9) shows a state in which a character string image of “Tomon Yatsudai is” is displayed in the dialogue warning display k1. The character string image of "Tomonaga Yatai" is a character display of the character display representing the line of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 19 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In the present example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the speech notice display k1. The movement start of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 19 (10) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is just before stopping.

  FIG. 19 (11) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o1 is ended. The stop of the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is lost. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  FIG. 19 (12) shows a state where 婆 m1 and the character name display n1 are erased. In this example, 婆 m1 and the character name display n1 are simultaneously erased, but either of these displays may be erased first.

  FIG. 19 (13) shows a state in which the character string image of “Tomon Yatsudai is” is erased from the dialogue warning display k 1.

  FIG. 19 (14) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 has been erased.

  FIG. 19 (15) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the dialogue warning display k1 is started. In the deletion animation of the speech warning display k1, a display in which the scroll is wound to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 19 (16) shows a state in which the scroll of the speech warning display k1 is completely wound. The speech notice display k1 is erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 19 (17) shows a state in which the speech notice display k1 is erased. In this example, the character (in the present example, 婆 m1) and the character name display n1, the character string image of the speech (in the present example, “殿 将 じ ゃ じ ゃ じ ゃ”), the mini game display o1, and the speech preview display k1 Be done. The order of deletion of these can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 19 (18) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is slightly swayed up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a in a state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 19 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c as a temporary stop in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 8" indicate that the "decoration 8" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 19 (20) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 5" indicate that the "decoration 5" is slightly shaken up and down. In the frame display surrounding "decoration 5", a rose character image is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 19 (21) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can display a certain type of serif notice k1. The serif notice display of this example is a serif notice display of "NO02" shown in FIG. The serif notice display k1 is a display including a letter display (in this example, "Tomonaga Yatsushiro") representing a serif on 婆 m1. The character display of this example is a character display including the content related to the character of the lord. In addition, there may be a case where a mini game by mini game display o is started in relation to the speech warning display k1. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by displaying the serif notice display k1 including the character display of the content related to the character, the serif notice display k1 can be noticed by the beginner player, and the serif notice display k1 In some cases, playing a mini game in conjunction with may make it easier for the player to focus on the mini game.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 19 (22) to FIG. 20 (19). FIG. 19 (22) to FIG. 20 (19) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 19 (22) shows the state continuing from FIG. 19 (6). In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, serif notices k1, 婆 m1 and character name display n1 are displayed.

  FIG. 19 (23) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the speech preview display k1 so as to overlap the speech preview display k1.

  FIG. 19 (24) shows a state in which a character string image of “good for tea” is displayed in the speech notice display k 1. The character string image of "Tomonaga Yatai" is a character display of the character display representing the line of 婆 m1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 19 (24), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In the present example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the speech notice display k1. The movement start of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 19 (25) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 19 (26) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is just before stopping.

  FIG. 19 (27) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o1 is ended. The stop of the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini game is hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. In the present example, when the result of the hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as the result of the mini game, the display of the speech advance notice k2 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (2) described later.

  FIG. 20 (1) shows a state following FIG. 19 (27), in which the display j2 capable of specifying the mode of the speech preview k2 is displayed before the display of the speech preview k2 is started. It shows. The display j2 is displayed in such a manner as to move to the upper right from the vicinity of the mode 4 circular image of the mini game display o1. The display j2 of this example appears from around the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and the display is started. In the figure, the upper right arrow illustrated on the lower left of the display j2 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j2. The display j2 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 3. Aspect 3 of the lower half of display j1 corresponds to the aspect of serif notice display k2 started in FIG. 20 (2) described later, and display j2 is a display related to the aspect of serif notice display k2. The dialogue warning display k2 is a warning display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j2, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech notice display k2 is started.

  FIG. 20 (2) shows a state in which the speech notice display k2 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j2 is erased, the display of the speech advance notice k2 is started. The dialogue warning display k2 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display k2 is displayed with a pattern in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech warning display k2 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 20 (3) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k2 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the left direction.

  FIG. 20 (4) shows a state in which the speech warning display k2 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k2 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k2 is the third embodiment.

  FIG. 20 (5) shows a state in which a character name display n2 including a character image of 婆 m2 and "婆" is displayed overlapping the right end portion of the speech notice display k2. Note that the speech notice display k2 may be a display including 婆 m2 and the character name display n2.

  FIG. 20 (6) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is started to be displayed. In the present example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the speech preview display k2 so as to overlap the speech preview display k2.

  FIG. 20 (7) shows a state in which a character string image of "Good for Daifuku" is displayed in the dialogue warning display k2. The character string image of “good for Daifuku” is a character display of the character display representing the serif of 婆 m2. In addition, a mini game is being played by the mini game display o2.

  FIG. 20 (8) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image of the mini game display o2 is just before stopping.

  FIG. 20 (9) shows a state in which the mini game by the mini game display o2 has ended. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 is stopped above the rightmost circular image of the aspect 1, the result of the mini game is lost. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  FIG. 20 (10) shows a state in which 婆 m1, character name display n1, 婆 m2, and character name display n2 are erased. In the present example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 20 (11) shows a state in which the character string image of "Good for tea" in the speech preview display k1 and "Good for Daifuku" in the speech preview display k2 are erased. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 20 (12) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 and o2 are erased. Although these displays are erased simultaneously, either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 20 (13) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the speech previews k1 and k2 is started. The erasing animation of the speech warning display k1 and k2 is displayed as a winding scroll.

  FIG. 20 (14) shows a state in which the scroll of the speech warning display k1 and k2 is completely wound. The speech notices k1 and k2 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 20 (15) shows a state in which the speech advance notices k1 and k2 are erased. In this example, a character (in this example, 婆 m1, m2) and character name display n1, n2, a character string image of serif (in this example, “good for tea”, “good for Daifuku”), a mini game display It is erased in the order of o1, o2, serif notice k1, k2. The order of deletion of these can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 20 (16) shows a state in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol display area 208a in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 20 (17) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 8" indicate that the "decoration 8" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 20 (18) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b so as to slightly swing up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 5" indicate that the "decoration 5" is slightly shaken up and down. In the frame display surrounding "decoration 5", a rose character image is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 20 (19) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, a hit corresponding to the form 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with the certain type of serif notice k1. Then, the dialogue warning display k2 is started to be displayed. The serif notice display of this example is a serif notice display of "NO03" shown in FIG. In addition, the result of the mini game of the mini game display o1 can be derived regardless of the operation of the chance button 136.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 21 (1) to (20). 21 (1) to (20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 21 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the form of a circular form.

  In FIG. 21 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (2), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  FIG. 21 (3) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed. The display j3 is a display capable of specifying the mode of the speech notice display k3 before the display of the speech notice display k3 shown in FIG. 21 (3) described later starts. The display j3 is moved from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j3 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j3. The display j3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 1. Aspect 1 of the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the aspect of the speech preview display k3 started in FIG. 21 (4) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the aspect of the speech preview display. The speech notice display k3 is a prefetch notice display. By the display j3, the player can know the mode of the speech preview display k3 before the display of the speech preview display k3 is started.

  FIG. 21 (4) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k3 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j3 is erased, the display of the speech advance notice k3 is started. The dialogue warning display k3 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display k3 is displayed with a pattern in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech notice display k3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 21 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 21 (6) shows a state in which the speech warning display k3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the serif of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k3 is the first embodiment.

  FIG. 21 (7) shows a state in which a character name display n3 including a girl m3 and a character image of "girl" is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k3. The speech notice display k3 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 21 (8) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 21 (9) shows a state in which the character string image of "prepare for blue" is displayed in the speech preview display k3. The character string image of "prepare blue" is a character display of character displays representing serif of the girl m3.

  FIG. 21 (10) shows a state in which the mode of the reserve icon f2 is changed from the mode 1 circular to the mode 3 circular. The character string image of "prepare blue" in the speech preview display k3 is a display for previewing that the mode of the hold icon changes to mode 3. Further, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed even after the character string image is displayed in the speech preview display k3.

  FIG. 21 (11) shows a state in which the girl m3 and the character name display n3 are erased. In this example, the girl m3 and the character name display n3 are simultaneously erased, but either of these displays may be erased first.

  FIG. 21 (12) shows a state in which the character string image of "prepare blue" in the speech preview display k3 is erased.

  FIG. 21 (13) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 has been erased.

  FIG. 21 (14) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the speech advance notice k3 has been started. In the deletion animation of the dialogue warning display k3, a display in which the scroll is wound to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 21 (15) shows a state in which the scroll of the speech warning display k3 is completely wound. The speech notice display k3 is erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 21 (16) shows a state in which the speech notice display k3 is erased. In this example, the character (in this example, girl m3) and character name display n3, the character string image of serif (in this example, "prepare blue"), mini game display o1, and serif notice display k3 are erased in this order. . The order of deletion of these can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 21 (17) shows a state in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol display area 208a in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 21 (18) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c in a state of being temporarily stopped in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 8" indicate that the "decoration 8" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 21 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b in a state of being temporarily stopped in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 5" indicate that the "decoration 5" is slightly shaken up and down. In the frame display surrounding "decoration 5", a rose character image is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 21 (20) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment can display a speech notice display k3 as a display of a certain type of speech notice. The serif notice display k3 is a display including a character display (in this example, "prepare for blue") of character displays representing the serif of the girl m3. Further, the speech notice display k 3 is a display as a prefetch notice, and is a speech notice display of “NO 18” shown in FIG. The mini game by the mini game display o1 is not executed in relation to the serif notice k3 which is the pre-reading notice display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 22 (1) to 24 (9). FIGS. 22 (1) to 24 (9) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 22 (1) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. 22 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a mode 1 circular mode.

  In FIG. 22 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 22 (2), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  FIG. 22 (3) shows a state in which a display j4 capable of specifying the mode of the speech preview display is displayed before the display of the speech preview display is started. The display j4 is moved and displayed from the center portion at the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j4 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j4. The display j4 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 4. Aspect 4 of the lower half of display j4 corresponds to aspect 4 of serif notice display k4 started in FIG. 22 (4) described later, and display j4 is a display related to the form of serif notice display. The dialogue warning display is a warning display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j4, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech notice display is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 22 (4) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k4 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j4 is erased, the display of the speech advance notice k4 is started. The dialogue warning display k4 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display k4 is displayed with a pattern in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. The speech notice display k4 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 22 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k4 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 22 (6) shows a state in which the speech warning display k4 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k4 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k4 is the fourth embodiment.

  In FIG. 22 (7), a character image of a princess (hereinafter referred to as "hime") m4 and a character name display n4 including a character image of "hime" are displayed overlapping the left end of the speech notice display k4. It shows the condition that has been The speech notice display k4 may be a display including the princess m4 and the character name display n4.

  FIG. 22 (8) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the speech preview k4 so as to overlap the speech preview k4.

  FIG. 22 (9) shows a state in which the character string image of "I'm done" is displayed in the speech notice display k4. The character string image of "I will do it" is a character display of the character display showing the line of princess m4. In the state shown in FIG. 22 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the speech notice display k4. The movement start of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 22 (10) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is moving to the right.

  FIG. 22 (11) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is moving to the right.

  FIG. 22 (12) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is moving to the right.

  FIG. 22 (13) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is about to stop.

  FIG. 22 (14) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o1 has ended. The stop of the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game is acquisition of a hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that the mode of the second serif notice display is the embodiment 5. In this example, when the result of the hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. The display of will start. The serif notice display of this example is a serif notice display of "NO 16" shown in FIG.

  FIG. 22 (15) shows a state in which the display j5 capable of specifying the mode of the speech preview display k5 can be specified before the display of the speech preview display k5, which is the second speech preview display, is started. The display j5 is moved from the vicinity of the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j5 of this example appears from around the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and the display is started. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated on the lower left of the display j5 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j5. The display j5 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 5. Aspect 5 of the lower half of display j5 corresponds to the aspect of serif notice display k5 started in FIG. 22 (16) described later, and display j5 is a display related to the form of serif notice display k5. The speech advance notice display k5 is a notice display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j5, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech notice display k5 is started.

  FIG. 22 (16) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k5 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j5 is erased, the display of the speech preview display k5 is started. The dialogue warning display k5 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display k5 is displayed with a pattern in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. The speech notice display k5 is an aspect of aspect 5.

  FIG. 22 (17) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k5 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the left direction.

  FIG. 22 (18) shows a state in which the speech warning display k5 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k5 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k5 is the fifth aspect.

  In FIG. 22 (19), a character image (hereinafter referred to as "ten") m5 of the lord is overlapped with the right end of the speech notice display k5, and a character name display n5 including a character image of "min" is displayed. Be done. Note that the speech notice display k5 may be a display including the m5 and the character name display n5.

  FIG. 22 (20) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the speech notice display k5 so as to overlap the speech notice display k5. In addition, a character string image of "Operation start" is displayed in the speech warning display k5. The character string image of "Operation start" is a character display of the character display showing the serif of m5.

  FIG. 22 (21) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o2 has been started.

  FIG. 22 (22) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 22 (23) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 22 (24) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 22 (25) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o2 has ended. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game corresponds to the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image It will be won for you. A hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated, and a hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. As a result of the mini game, when the hit acquisition results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started as shown in FIG. Ru.

  FIG. 22 (26) shows a state where the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started. An animation is shown in which the movement from the aspect 5 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is performed. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the temples p1 and p2 indicates the trajectory and movement direction of the temples p1 and p2.

  FIG. 22 (27) shows a state where the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is finished. Two segment-like images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 22 (28) shows a state in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 23 (1) shows the state following FIG. 22 (28), and shows the state where the princess m4, the character name display n4, the m m5 and the character name display n5 are erased. In the present example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 23 (2) shows a state in which the character string image of "I'll do it" in the speech notice display k4 and the "Operation start" in the speech notice display k5 are erased. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 23 (3) shows a state in which the mini game displays o1 and o2 are erased. Although these displays are erased simultaneously, either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 23 (4) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the dialogue warning display k4 and k5 is started. In the deletion animation of the dialogue warning display k4 and k5, a display in which the scroll is wound is displayed.

  FIG. 23 (5) shows a state in which the scroll of the speech warning display k4 and k5 is completely wound. The serif notices k4, k5 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 23 (6) shows a state in which the speech notice displays k4 and k5 are erased. In this example, characters (in this example, princess m4 and m5) and character name displays n4 and n5, character string images of serifs (in this example, "I will do it now", "start operation"), mini game display o1, It is erased in the order of o2, serif notice k4 and k5. The order of deletion of these can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 23 (7) shows a state in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol display area 208a in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 23 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a temporary stop manner in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 23 (9) shows a state in which normal reach effect is started. During normal reach effect and during super reach effect described later, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is erased. At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a wine barrel image is displayed, and it is suggested that normal reach production of a drinker comparison is started when a final display of the wine barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 23 (10) shows a state in which an enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as "enemy") is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the final display of the wine barrel image. . It is suggested that the normal reach effect of enemy destruction is started when the finalized display of the enemy is performed.

  FIG. 23 (11) shows a state in which a character image of a boss (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the enemy finalized display being performed. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the final display of the boss is performed.

  FIG. 23 (12) shows a state in which the boss finalization display has been performed. At the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "boss confrontation reach" is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped and the boss is displayed. It is done.

  FIG. 23 (13) shows a state where the boss confrontation reach has been started. In the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “Develop by winning to the boss” is displayed, and it is suggested that super reach production is started when the boss is won by the boss confrontation reach It is done. Further, during normal reach effect such as boss confrontation reach, the special view 1 reserve icon display area f and all the special view 1 reserve icons (in this example, reserve icon f 1) are erased.

  FIG. 23 (14) shows a state where an effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started during the boss confrontation reach. The gauge images g1 to g3 may accumulate irregularly. An animation is displayed in which the hall p3 that appears in the upper left portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the gauge image g3. In the figure, the arrow illustrated above the temple p3 indicates the trajectory and movement direction of the temple p3.

  FIG. 23 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. Three segment-like images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and the gauge image g3 is full. Above the gauge image g3, a character string image of "prepare OK" is displayed.

  FIG. 23 (16) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is won. At the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "winning" is displayed, and a lost boss is displayed below it.

  FIG. 23 (17) shows a state where the start effect of the strong button effect is started. The strong button effect is an effect that urges the player to press the chance button 136 with the pressed surface protruding upward, and the start effect of the strong button effect is an effect performed before the strong button effect is started. In the start effect of the strong button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 23 (18) shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is performed. An animation is displayed in which an effect image with an oval shape and jagged edges pops out from the gauge image g3 to the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the drawing, the arrow illustrated above the gauge image g3 represents the trajectory and the movement direction of the jagged effect image.

  FIG. 23 (19) shows a state in which a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image showing the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed below it and the strong button effect is started. The pressed surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward, and the button image is displayed in a mode corresponding to a state where the pressed surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward. Further, the button image is displayed in the aspect of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed above the button image, the chance button 136 emits light in mode 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In addition, the entire segment-like image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in black, and a character string image of “Done” is displayed overlapping the segment-like image, and the gauge image g3 is full. It is informed that the button effect has been started.

  FIG. 23 (20) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 23 (21) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 700 emits light in mode 5, moves upward and stops. In the strong button effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 23 (22) shows a state in which the movable body 702 moves downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b move left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in mode 5, moves downward, and stops.

  FIG. 23 (23) shows a state in which the sword reach of the super reach effect is started after the movable bodies 700, 702 move to the initial position. After the movable bodies 700 and 702 move to the initial position, the lighting of aspect 1 is performed. In the sword reach effect production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and the image of the crescent moon is displayed on the upper left of the display area. Also, at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "Kengo reach" is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a pavilion is displayed on the lower left side thereof. A character image of a swordsman (hereinafter referred to as "wordsman") is displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 23 (24) shows a state where reach effect of swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 23 (25) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of "[Swordsman] Fufufu" is displayed as the word display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 23 (26) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[殿] 成 る 敗 し く れ る” is displayed as a message display of the message.

  FIG. 23 (27) shows a state in which an animation in which the hall and the swordsman have been cut is displayed.

  FIG. 23 (28) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is started to be displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 24 (1) shows a state following FIG. 23 (28), and shows a state in which a button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 move to near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button introduction animation of this example ends when the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap.

  FIG. 24 (2) shows a state in which the button introduction animation has ended. After the button images q1 and q2 overlap each other, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed below the button image. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed at the top of the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in mode 5 to prompt pressing of the chance button 136. Further, the button image is displayed in the aspect of aspect 5.

  FIG. 24 (3) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 24 (4) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once in the operation valid period, the button image and the meter image are erased, and the result of the sword reach is displayed. In this example, since the temple loses to the swordsman, an animation in which the temple falls is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period of this example, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 24 (5) shows a state in which the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is resumed, and the "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a slightly shaking manner up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 8" indicate that the "decoration 8" is slightly swaying up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 24 (6) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is displayed. In the wipe effect display of this example, the wipe display is displayed so as to wipe off the area other than the fifth symbol display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the wipe display of this example includes a character riding on a motorcycle and a character string image of “CR XXXX (for example, the title name of the pachinko machine 100)”.

  FIG. 24 (7) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is displayed. During the wipe effect display, an animation is displayed in which the rider on the motorcycle moves from the left to the right.

  FIG. 24 (8) shows a state in which the wipe effect display has ended. The deletion of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the pattern of the sun and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 24 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination "6-8-6" is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, a hit corresponding to the form 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with the certain type of serif notice k1. Then, the dialogue warning display k2 is started to be displayed. The serif notice display of this example is a serif notice display of "NO 16" shown in FIG. In addition, the result of the mini game of the mini game display o1 can be derived regardless of the operation of the chance button 136.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 24 (10) to 24 (15). FIGS. 24 (10) to 24 (15) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 24 (10) shows the state continuing from FIG. 22 (21).

  FIG. 24 (10) shows the state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 24 (11) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 24 (12) shows the state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is in a state just before stopping.

  FIG. 24 (13) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o2 has ended. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 is stopped above the third aspect 1 circular image from the right, the result of the mini game is acquisition of a hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. Aspect 4 corresponds to a circular image in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated. In the present example, when the result of the hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as the result of the mini game, the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started as shown in FIG. 24 (14) described later.

  FIG. 24 (14) shows a state where an effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started. In the mini game display o 2, an animation in which the hall p 4 moves from the circular image to the gauge image g 3 is displayed. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the temple p4 indicates the trajectory and movement direction of the temple p4.

  FIG. 24 (15) shows a state in which the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. One segment-like image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in red, and one gauge image g3 is accumulated. As described above, in the mini game by the mini game display o2, the arrow image may be stopped on the third aspect 1 circular image from the left, and the hit corresponding to the fourth aspect circular image may be obtained.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 25 (1) to (11). FIGS. 25 (1) to 25 (11) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 25 (1) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Also, the hold icons f1 and f2 of the aspect 1 circular aspect are displayed.

  In FIG. 25 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c represent the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the downward arrows shown in the fifth symbol display area h are the fluctuation displays of the fifth symbol It represents the displayed state. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 25 (2), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  FIG. 25 (3) shows a state in which the step-up notice has been started. The step-up notice is a notice of the change. In the step-up notice in this example, the character images are sequentially switched, and when a certain character image is stopped and displayed, the next effect display of the step-up notice is started. In FIG. 25 (3), a character image of Princess Chibi (hereinafter referred to as "Chibi princess") r1 and a character string image of "SU1" above it are displayed on the center right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. "SU1" indicates that it is Step 1 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (4) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. A character image of a rose (hereinafter referred to as "rose") r2 and a character string image of "SU2" are displayed in the upper part of the display area central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the little princess r1. . "SU2" indicates that it is step 2 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (5) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. A character string image of "SU3" is displayed on the upper side of the princess r3 in place of the 爺 r2 on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. "SU3" indicates that it is Step 3 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (6) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. A character string image of "SU4" is displayed above the crown r4 instead of the princess r3 in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, to the right. "SU4" indicates that it is step 4 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (7) shows a state in which the step-up notice has ended. In the step-up notice of this example, since the stop display is not performed with a certain character image, the next effect display of the step-up notice is not started.

  FIG. 25 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is displayed on the left symbol display area 208 a in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 25 (9) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 8" indicate that the "decoration 8" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 25 (10) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 5" indicate that the "decoration 5" is slightly shaken up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 25 (11) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (12) to 26 (22). FIGS. 25 (12) to 26 (22) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 25 (12) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Also, the hold icons f1 and f2 of the aspect 1 circular aspect are displayed.

  In FIG. 25 (13), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c represent the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the downward arrows shown in the fifth symbol display area h are the fluctuation displays of the fifth symbol It represents the displayed state. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 25 (13), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  FIG. 25 (14) shows the state in which the step-up notice has been started. A character string image of “SU1” is displayed on the upper right of the little princess r1 and the upper side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. "SU1" indicates that it is Step 1 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (15) shows a state in which a step-up notice is being executed. A character string image of “SU2” is displayed on the upper side of 爺 r2 instead of チ r2 on the right side of the display area central part of the decorative symbol display device 208. "SU2" indicates that it is step 2 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (16) shows a state in which a step-up notice is being executed. A character string image of "SU3" is displayed on the upper side of the princess r3 in place of the 爺 r2 on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. "SU3" indicates that it is Step 3 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (17) shows a state in which a step-up notice is being executed. A character string image of "SU4" is displayed above the crown r4 instead of the princess r3 in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, to the right. "SU4" indicates that it is step 4 of the step-up notice. In this example, since the display r4 of step 4 is stopped and displayed, the next effect display of the step-up notice is started. In addition, if it progresses to step 4 of step up, swordsman reach will become easy to be performed in the said special figure change game.

  FIG. 25 (18) shows a state in which the speech notice display is started as the next effect display of the step-up notice. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display r4 and a speech notice display s1 are displayed. In the serif notice display s1, a character string image of "I'll try" is displayed as a serif of the user r4. Further, the speech warning display s1 is an aspect of aspect 5. Further, the speech notice display s1 is a speech notice display of a type different from the speech display shown in FIG. Further, the speech notice display s1 and the display r4 are notice displays of the change.

  FIG. 25 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is displayed on the left symbol display area 208 a in a state of temporary stop (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 25 (20) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c in a temporarily stop manner in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 25 (21) shows a state in which normal reach effect is started. During normal reach effect and during super reach effect described later, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is erased. At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a wine barrel image is displayed, and it is suggested that normal reach production of a drinker comparison is started when a final display of the wine barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 25 (22) shows a state in which an enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as "enemy") is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the final display of the barrel image. . It is suggested that the normal reach effect of enemy destruction is started when the finalized display of the enemy is performed.

  FIG. 25 (23) shows a state in which the character image of the boss (hereinafter referred to as "boss") is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the enemy finalized display being performed. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the final display of the boss is performed.

  FIG. 25 (24) shows a state in which the boss finalization display has been performed. At the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "boss confrontation reach" is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped and the boss is displayed. It is done.

  FIG. 25 (25) shows a state where the boss confrontation reach has been started. In the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “Develop by winning to the boss” is displayed, and it is suggested that super reach production is started when the boss is won by the boss confrontation reach It is done. Further, during normal reach effect such as boss confrontation reach, the special view 1 reserve icon display area f and all the special view 1 reserve icons (in this example, reserve icon f 1) are erased.

  FIG. 26 (1) shows the state following FIG. 25 (25), and shows the state in which the boss confrontation reach effect is being performed.

  FIG. 26 (2) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is won. At the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "winning" is displayed, and a lost boss is displayed below it.

  FIG. 26 (3) shows a state in which the start effect of the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect that urges the player to press the chance button 136, and the start effect of the button effect is an effect performed before the button effect is started. In the start effect of the button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 26 (4) shows a state in which the button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and the meter image showing the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed below it and the strong button effect is started. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in aspect 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 26 (5) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 26 (6) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 700 emits light in mode 5, moves upward and stops. In addition, in the button effect of this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 26 (7) shows a state in which the movable body 702 moves downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b move left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in mode 5, moves downward, and stops.

  FIG. 26 (8) shows a state in which the sword reach of the super reach effect is started after the movable bodies 700, 702 move to the initial position. After the movable bodies 700 and 702 move to the initial position, the lighting of aspect 1 is performed. In the sword reach effect production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and the image of the crescent moon is displayed on the upper left of the display area. Also, at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "Kengo reach" is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a pavilion is displayed on the lower left side thereof. The swordsman is displayed on.

  FIG. 26 (9) shows a state in which the reach effect of swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 26 (10) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of "[Swordsman] Fufufu" is displayed as the word display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 26 (11) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[殿] 成 る 敗 し く れ る” is displayed as a message display of the message.

  FIG. 26 (12) shows a state in which an animation in which the hall and the swordsman have been cut is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (13) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is started to be displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (14) shows a state in which a button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 move to near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button introduction animation of this example ends when the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap.

  FIG. 26 (15) shows a state in which the button introduction animation has ended. After the button images q1 and q2 overlap each other, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed below the button image. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed at the top of the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in mode 5 to prompt pressing of the chance button 136. Further, the button image is displayed in the aspect of aspect 5.

  FIG. 26 (16) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 26 (17) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once in the operation valid period, the button image and the meter image are erased, and the result of the sword reach is displayed. In this example, since the temple loses to the swordsman, an animation in which the temple falls is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period of this example, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 26 (18) shows a state in which the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is resumed, and the “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly shaking up and down in the middle symbol display area 208 b. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 8" indicate that the "decoration 8" is slightly swaying up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 26 (19) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is displayed. In the wipe effect display of this example, the wipe display is displayed so as to wipe off the area other than the fifth symbol display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the wipe display of this example includes a character riding on a motorcycle and a character string image of “CR XXXX (for example, the title name of the pachinko machine 100)”.

  FIG. 26 (20) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is displayed. During the wipe effect display, an animation is displayed in which the rider on the motorcycle moves from the left to the right.

  FIG. 26 (21) shows a state in which the wipe effect display has ended. The deletion of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the pattern of the sun and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 26 (22) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination "6-8-6" is stopped and displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment may be configured to start the display of a speech notice display such as a speech notice display s1 of a step-up notice as a response display of the operation of the chance button 136 or the chance button 700. In this case, when the chance button 136 or the chance button 700 is operated in a state where the chance button 136 or the button image (operation display) representing the appearance of the chance button 700 is displayed, the response is displayed as a step up notice. The speech warning display may be started. Further, in this case, there may be a case where the speech notice notices k1, k2, k4, k5, etc. are displayed, and at least a part of the speech notice notices such as the notices k1, k2, k4, k5, etc. Are overlapped by

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 (1) to 29 (9) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 27 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Aspect 1 Hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular manner.

  In FIG. 27 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 not shown. Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 27 (3) shows a state in which a display j4 capable of specifying the mode of the speech preview display is displayed before the display of the speech preview display is started. The display j4 is moved and displayed from the center portion at the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j4 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j4. The display j4 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 4. Aspect 4 of the lower half of display j4 corresponds to the aspect of serif notice display k4 started in FIG. 27 (4) described later, and display j4 is a display related to the aspect of serif notice display. The dialogue warning display is a warning display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j4, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech notice display is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 27 (4) shows a state in which the speech notice display k4 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j4 is erased, the display of the speech advance notice k4 is started. The dialogue warning display k4 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display k4 is displayed with a pattern in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. The speech notice display k4 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 27 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k4 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 27 (6) shows a state in which the speech warning display k4 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k4 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k4 is the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 27 (7) shows a state in which a character name display n4 including a character image of a princess m4 and a character of "hime" is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k4. The speech notice display k4 may be a display including the princess m4 and the character name display n4.

  FIG. 27 (8) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the speech preview k4 so as to overlap the speech preview k4.

  FIG. 27 (9) shows a state in which the character string image of "I'm done" is displayed in the speech notice display k4. The character string image of "I will do it" is a character display of the character display showing the line of princess m4. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 27 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the speech notice display k4. The movement start of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 27 (10) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is moving to the right.

  FIG. 27 (11) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is moving to the right.

  FIG. 27 (12) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is moving to the right.

  FIG. 27 (13) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is about to stop.

  FIG. 27 (14) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o1 is ended. The stop of the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the game is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image of the arrow image of the mini game display o1, the result of the mini game is the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that the mode of the second serif notice display is the embodiment 5. In this example, when the result of the hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, the speech warning display k2 of the aspect of the aspect 5 as shown in FIG. 27 (16) described later. The display of will start. The serif notice display of this example is a serif notice display of "NO 16" shown in FIG.

  Further, in FIG. 27 (14), the step-up notice is started. A character string image of “SU1” is displayed on the upper right of the little princess r1 and the upper side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, a step-up notice may be given while displaying the serif notice.

  FIG. 27 (15) shows a state in which the display j5 capable of specifying the mode of the speech preview display k5 is displayed before the display of the speech preview display k5 which is the second speech preview display is started. The display j5 is moved from the vicinity of the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j5 of this example appears from around the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and the display is started. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated on the lower left of the display j5 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j5. The display j5 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 5. Mode 3 in the lower half of the display j5 corresponds to the mode of the speech warning display k5 started in FIG. 22 (16) described later, and the display j5 is a display related to the mode of the speech warning display k5. The speech advance notice display k5 is a notice display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j5, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech notice display k5 is started.

  Further, in FIG. 27 (15), the step-up notice is executed. A character string image of “SU2” is displayed on the upper side of 爺 r2 instead of チ r2 on the right side of the display area central part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 27 (16) shows a state in which the speech notice display k5 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j5 is erased, the display of the speech preview display k5 is started. The dialogue warning display k5 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display k5 is displayed with a pattern in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. The speech notice display k5 is an aspect of aspect 5.

  Further, in FIG. 27 (16), the step-up notice is executed. A character string image of "SU3" is displayed on the upper side of the princess r3 in place of the 爺 r2 on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. "SU3" indicates that it is Step 3 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 27 (17) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k5 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the left direction. In addition, a step-up notice is executed, and a crown r4 is displayed in place of the princess r3 on the right side of the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper part of the hall r4 is displayed overlapping with the speech notice display k5. Further, the entire character string image of “SU4” is not visible because it is overlapped with the speech notice display k5.

  FIG. 27 (18) shows a state in which the speech warning display k5 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k5 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k5 is the fifth aspect.

  Further, in FIG. 27 (18), since the display r4 of step 4 is stopped and displayed, the next effect display of the step-up notice is started. The speech notice display is started as the next effect display of the step-up notice. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display r4 and a speech notice display s1 are displayed. In the serif notice display s1, a character string image of "I'll try" is displayed as a serif of the user r4. Further, the speech warning display s1 is an aspect of aspect 5. In this example, while the speech notice display k4 and k5 are displayed, the speech notice display s1 of the step-up notice is displayed. A part of the speech preview display s1 and a part of the display r4 are displayed overlapping the speech preview display k4 and k5. As described above, while the serif notice display shown in FIG. 18 is displayed, a serif notice other than the type shown in FIG. 18 (in this example, the serif notice display of the step-up notice) may be displayed. When the serif notice display shown in FIG. 18 is displayed overlapping the step up notice serif notice display as shown in FIG. 25 (18), the serif notice display shown in FIG. 18 is not displayed. When the dialog notice display of the step-up notice is displayed or when the serif notice display shown in FIG. 18 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22 (20) and the serif notice display of the step-up notice is not displayed, The jackpot symbol form is easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display under execution. In addition, when the serif notice display shown in FIG. 18 is displayed by being overlapped with the serif notice display of the step-up notice, the mini game of the mini games o1 and o2 is likely to hit. Further, even in the case where the mini game o1 and o2 are out of order, and the second speech preview display k5 shown in FIG. 18 is displayed overlapped with the speech preview display s1 of the step-up notice. In the symbol variation display under execution, the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily determined and displayed than in the case where the speech notification display k5 is not started and the speech notification display s1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 27 (19), the speech notice display s1 and the display r4 are deleted, and overlap with the right end of the speech display k5, and a character image of the temple (hereinafter referred to as "ten") m5, "ten" A character name display n5 including a character image of is displayed. Note that the speech notice display k5 may be a display including the m5 and the character name display n5.

  FIG. 27 (20) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the speech notice display k5 so as to overlap the speech notice display k5. In addition, a character string image of "Operation start" is displayed in the speech warning display k5. The character string image of "Operation start" is a character display of the character display representing the serif of m5.

  FIG. 27 (21) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o2 is started.

  FIG. 27 (22) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 27 (23) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 27 (24) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is moving to the left.

  FIG. 27 (25) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o2 has ended. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game corresponds to the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image It will be won for you. A hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated, and a hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. As a result of the mini game, when the hit acquisition results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started as shown in FIG. 27 (26) described later. Ru.

  FIG. 27 (26) shows a state where the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started. An animation is shown in which the movement from the aspect 5 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is performed. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the temples p1 and p2 indicates the trajectory and movement direction of the temples p1 and p2.

  FIG. 27 (27) shows a state in which the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is finished. Two segment-like images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 27 (28) shows a state in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 28 (1) shows the state following FIG. 27 (28), in which the princess m4, the character name display n4, the m5 m and the character name display n5 are erased. In the present example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 28 (2) shows a state in which the character string image of "I will do it" in the speech notice display k4 and the "Operation start" in the speech notice display k5 are erased. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 28 (3) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 and o2 are erased. Although these displays are erased simultaneously, either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 28 (4) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the speech previews k4 and k5 is started. The erase animation of the dialogue warning display k4 and k5 is displayed as a scroll of winding.

  FIG. 28 (5) shows a state in which the scroll of the speech warning display k4 and k5 is completely wound. The serif notices k4, k5 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 28 (6) shows a state in which the speech notice displays k4 and k5 are erased. In this example, characters (in this example, princess m4 and m5) and character name displays n4 and n5, character string images of serifs (in this example, "I will do it now", "start operation"), mini game display o1, It is erased in the order of o2, serif notice k4 and k5. The order of deletion of these can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 28 (7) shows a state in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol display area 208a in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 28 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c in a temporarily stop manner in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 28 (9) shows a state in which normal reach effect is started. During normal reach effect and during super reach effect described later, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is erased. At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a wine barrel image is displayed, and it is suggested that normal reach production of a drinker comparison is started when a final display of the wine barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 28 (10) shows a state in which an enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as "enemy") is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the final display of the barrel image. . It is suggested that the normal reach effect of enemy destruction is started when the finalized display of the enemy is performed.

  FIG. 28 (11) shows a state where a character image of a boss (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without displaying an enemy confirmation. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the final display of the boss is performed.

  FIG. 28 (12) shows a state in which the boss finalization display has been performed. At the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "boss confrontation reach" is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped and the boss is displayed. It is done.

  FIG. 28 (13) shows a state where the boss confrontation reach has been started. In the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “Develop by winning to the boss” is displayed, and it is suggested that super reach production is started when the boss is won by the boss confrontation reach It is done. Further, during normal reach effect such as boss confrontation reach, the special view 1 reserve icon display area f and all the special view 1 reserve icons (in this example, reserve icon f 1) are erased.

  FIG. 28 (14) shows a state in which effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started during the boss confrontation reach. The gauge images g1 to g3 may accumulate irregularly. An animation is displayed in which the hall p3 that appears in the upper left portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the gauge image g3. In the figure, the arrow illustrated above the temple p3 indicates the trajectory and movement direction of the temple p3.

  FIG. 28 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. Three segment-like images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and the gauge image g3 is full. Above the gauge image g3, a character string image of "prepare OK" is displayed.

  FIG. 28 (16) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is won. At the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "winning" is displayed, and a lost boss is displayed below it.

  FIG. 28 (17) shows a state where the start effect of the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect that urges the player to press the chance button 136, and the start effect of the button effect is an effect performed before the button effect is started. In the start effect of the button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 28 (18) shows a state in which a button image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed below the button image and the button effect is started. The button image is displayed in the aspect of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in aspect 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 28 (19) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 28 (20) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 700 emits light in mode 5, moves upward and stops. In addition, in the button effect of this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 28 (21) shows a state where the movable body 702 moves downward and the movable portions 702 a and 702 b move left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in mode 5, moves downward, and stops.

  FIG. 28 (22) shows a state in which the sword reach of the super reach effect is started after the movable bodies 700, 702 move to the initial position. After the movable bodies 700 and 702 move to the initial position, the lighting of aspect 1 is performed. In the sword reach effect production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and the image of the crescent moon is displayed on the upper left of the display area. Also, at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "Kengo reach" is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a pavilion is displayed on the lower left side thereof. The swordsman is displayed on.

  FIG. 28 (23) shows a state where reach effect of swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 28 (24) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of "[Swordsman] Fufufu" is displayed as the word display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 28 (25) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[殿] 成 る 敗 し く れ る” is displayed as a message display of the message.

  FIG. 28 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the hall and the swordsman have been cut is displayed.

  FIG. 28 (27) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is started to be displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 28 (28) shows a state in which a button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 move to near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 29 (1) shows a state following on from FIG. 28 (28), and shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is started before the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap. An animation is displayed in which an effect image with an oval shape and jagged edges pops out from the gauge image g3 to the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the drawing, the arrow illustrated above the gauge image g3 represents the trajectory and the movement direction of the jagged effect image.

  FIG. 29 (1) shows a state in which the button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and the meter image showing the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed below it and the strong button effect is started. The pressed surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward, and the button image is displayed in a mode corresponding to a state where the pressed surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward. Further, the button image is displayed in the aspect of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in aspect 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In addition, the entire segment-like image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in black, and a character string image of “Done” is displayed overlapping the segment-like image, and the gauge image g3 is full. It is informed that the button effect has been started.

  FIG. 29 (3) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 29 (4) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once in the operation effective period during the strong button effect, the button image and the meter image are erased, and the result of the sword reach is displayed. In this example, since the temple processes it to swordsman, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of a scene in which the temple won the swordsman. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display area, an image of a balloon including a character image of "holiday" is displayed in place of the attached image, and it is congratulated to win the jackpot. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period during the strong button effect, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 29 (5) shows a state in which the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 7 (for example, rainbow color) after the end of the sword strike, and moves upward and stops. In this example, when the image of the shrine and the swordsman is erased and the swords reach is finished, an effect that the movable body 700 moves is executed. In addition, the effect that the movable body 700 moves during execution of the sword strike may be performed.

  FIG. 29 (6) shows a state in which the movable body 702 emits light in mode 7, moves downward, and the movable parts 702a and 702b move left and right. In this example, when the image of the temple and the swordsman is erased and the swords reach is completed, an effect of moving the movable body 702 is executed. In addition, the effect that the movable body 702 moves during execution of the sword strike may be performed.

  FIG. 29 (7) shows a state in which the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is resumed after the movable bodies 700, 702 move to the initial position. In the middle symbol display area 208b, "decoration 6" is temporarily displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a big hit design, is temporarily stopped.

  FIG. 29 (8) shows a state in which the background display has returned to normal. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the pattern of the sun and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 29 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The decision result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is the big hit ("special figure B"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" which is a jackpot symbol aspect indicating that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-6-6" is stopped and displayed.

  In this example, the step-up notice is executed in a state in which the speech notice display shown in FIG. 18 is displayed. In the step-up notice of this example, the next effect display (in this example, serif notice display s1) is not performed if stop display is not performed with a certain character image, and a mini game display o1 performed in relation to the serif notice display. The mini game played by o2 is obtained when the arrow image passes by the image of the hit (Aspect 4 circular image), and a certain effect display (in this example, serif notice k5) is displayed. . As described above, effects which are not advantageous for the player unless they stop with a certain pattern (in this example, step-up notice) and effects which may be advantageous even if an arrow passes a certain image (in this example) A mini game) may be performed during the same symbol variation display. It should be noted that at least a part of the period during which the effect which is not advantageous for the player without stopping with the pattern and the effect which may be advantageous even if the arrow passes a certain image may overlap .

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 30 (1) to 30 (19). FIGS. 30 (1) to 30 (19) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 30 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and in the fifth symbol display area h, the variable display of the fifth symbol is displayed. In addition, the variation icon display area e displays a variation icon circular shape 1 aspect, and the special figure 1 suspension icon display region f displays a style 1 circular suspension icon f2.

  FIG. 30 (2) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 30 (3) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c as being temporarily stopped in a mode of slightly swinging up and down.

  FIG. 30 (4) shows a state in which "decoration 5" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c in a mode of slightly swinging up and down.

  FIG. 30 (5) shows a state in which Yoshimune t1 is displayed, which presses "decoration 2" of the left symbol display area 208a. According to Yoshimune t1, a display is performed in which "decoration 2" of the right symbol display area 208a changes to a decorative symbol including a character image. In this example, the odd-numbered decorative pattern includes a character image, "decorative 3" includes a princess, "decorative 5" includes a rose, and "decorative 7" includes a crown.

  FIG. 30 (6) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. "Decoration 3" includes a princess. Thereby, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols of the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" are temporarily stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern of the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a red chance eye, and the pre-reading advance notice object is a symbol fluctuating display corresponding to the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 30 (7) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 3-decorative 5-decorative 7", which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination "3-5-7" is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 30 (8), as the special figure 1 variation game is started by the special figure 1 display device (not shown), the variation indication of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol and the variation indication of the fifth symbol are started Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the hold icon decrease animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the fluctuation icon e2 and the change icon It has moved to the display area e. In the left symbol display area 208a, the princess t2 included in the "decoration 3" is continuously displayed. The princess t2 is a display related to the speech notice display k6 started in FIG. 30 (10) described later.

  FIG. 30 (9) shows a state immediately before the princess t2 starts moving downward. The downward arrow illustrated to the left of the princess t2 indicates the movement direction of the princess t2.

  FIG. 30 (10) shows a state in which the speech notice display k6 has been started. In this example, the princess t2 moves downward and becomes the princess m6, and a speech warning display k6 indicating the speech of the princess m6 is displayed. The aspect of the speech warning display k6 is aspect 4. In addition, a character name display n6 including a character image of a princess m6 and a character of "hime" is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech warning display k6. The speech notice display k6 may be a display including the princess m6 and the character name display n6. Further, a state is shown in which a character string image of "now this time live" is displayed in the speech warning display k6. The character string image of "now this time live" is a character display of the character display showing the words of Princess m6. In addition, a mini game by mini game display o1 is being executed. Further, the serif notice display performed after the chance eye display shown in FIG. 30 (6) may be a second serif notice display (for example, a serif notice display k3) which is a prefetch notice display.

  FIG. 30 (11) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is moving to the right.

  FIG. 30 (12) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is about to stop.

  FIG. 30 (13) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o1 is ended. The stop of the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini game is the hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. Mode 4 A hit corresponding to a circular image is the start of the second speech warning display. In the present example, when the result of the win acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as the result of the mini game, the display of the second serif notice display k7 is started as shown in FIG. 30 (15) described later. The serif notice display of this example is a serif notice display of "NO15" shown in FIG.

  FIG. 30 (14) shows a state in which a display j7 capable of specifying the mode of the speech notice display k7 is displayed before the display of the speech notice display k7, which is the second speech display, is started. The display j7 is moved from the vicinity of the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j7 of the present example appears from the vicinity of the form 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and the display is started. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated on the lower left of the display j7 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j7. The display j7 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 4. Aspect 4 of the lower half of display j7 corresponds to the aspect of serif notice display k7 started in FIG. 30 (15) described later, and display j7 is a display related to the aspect of serif notice display k7. The speech advance notice display k7 is a notice display of the change, and the big hit reliability is set depending on the mode. By the display j7, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display before the speech notice display k7 is started.

  FIG. 30 (15) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k7 is started to be displayed. In this example, after the display j7 is erased, the display of the speech advance notice k7 is started. The dialogue warning display k7 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display k7 is displayed with a pattern in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. The speech notice display k7 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 30 (16) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k5 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the left direction.

  FIG. 30 (17) shows a state in which the speech warning display k7 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice display k7 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the serif of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k7 is the fourth embodiment.

  In FIG. 30 (18), a character name display n 7 including a character image of 爺 m 7 and “爺” is displayed overlapping the right end portion of the speech notice display k 7. The speech notice display k7 may be a display including 爺 m7 and the character name display n7.

  FIG. 30 (19) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the speech preview k7 so as to overlap the speech preview k7. In addition, a character string image of "when" is displayed in the speech notice display k7. The character string image of "when" is a character display of the character display representing the line of 爺 m7. About this example, although explanation about a production beyond this is omitted, super reach productions, such as a princess live reach, are performed after that, and a big hit design pattern is stopped and displayed on the symbol display areas 208a-208c.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 31 (1a) and (1b). 31 (1a) and (1 b) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. In this example, a tutorial display (explanatory display) u1 of a design of a book is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The tutorial display u1 displays a game method, an explanation of effects, an explanation of characters, and the like. In this example, a string image of “Ken-A is the enemy of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display u1, and an explanation display of K-A is displayed.

The black dots illustrated between FIG. 31 (1a) and FIG. 31 (1b) indicate the passage of time.
FIG. 31 (1 b) shows a state in which the speech notice display k 1 is displayed. In this example, the speech notice display k1 is displayed overlapping a part of the tutorial display u1. In this manner, the serif preview may be displayed overlapping at least a portion of the character display for the character, such as a tutorial display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 31 (2a) to (2c). 31 (2a) to (2c) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (2a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of "I'm done" is displayed in the speech notice display k4. The character string image of "I will do it" is a character display of the character display showing the line of princess m4. Further, in the mini game by the mini game display o1, since the arrow image is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game is a hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image It will be acquired. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the mode 5 circular image is that the second serif notice display is displayed in the serif notice display k4. In this example, when the result of the hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. 31 (2 c) described later, The dialogue warning display starts to appear.

  FIG. 31 (2 b) shows a state in which the character string image in the speech notice display k 4 is erased.

  FIG. 31 (2c) shows a state in which the character string image of "CONTINUE !!" is displayed in the speech notice display k4. The character string image of "CONTINUE!" Is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4, and is a second line of speech display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 31 (3a) to (3d). 31 (3 a) to (3 d) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (3a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. In this example, at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a level display u2 representing the degree of impact of the player's pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The level of this example is “LV: 10”. When the gauge in the level display u2 is full, the level is increased by one.

  FIG. 31 (3b) shows a state where the mini game by the mini game display o1 has ended. Since the arrow image is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini game is hit acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. A hit corresponding to the circular image is to acquire 10 points of experience value for raising the player's level.

  FIG. 31 (3c) shows a state in which the player has earned 10 points. From the vicinity of the mini game display o, the experience value display u3 moves toward the level display u2. The experience value display u3 includes the letter "+10" in the oval frame display to notify that 10 experience values have been acquired.

  FIG. 31 (3c) shows a state in which the player has earned 10 points. The gauge in the level display u2 is increased by 10 experience points.

  In the above example, when a hit is made in the mini game, the second serif notice display, gauge up of gauge images g1 to g3, content change of serif notice display (FIG. 31 (2a) to (2c)), experience point up An effect display is performed. In the case of a hit in the mini game, at least two of these effects may be combined. The level display u2 may be always displayed. The level display u2 may not be provided or may not be displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 31 (4a) to (4d). 31 (4 a) to (4 d) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (4a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, history displays v1, v2 and v3 for notifying of the history of the serif notice display are displayed. The history displays v1 to v3 have a substantially square shape, and are displayed side by side in the order of the history display v1, the history display v2 and the history display v3 from the left side. The history display v1 displays the character image of the previous serif notice display, the history display v2 displays the character image of the second serif notice display, and the history display v3 displays the three serif notice display of the previous time The character image of is displayed. In FIG. 31 (4a), a princess is displayed in the history display v1 and v2, and a rose is displayed in the history display v3.

  FIG. 31 (4 b) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k 4 is displayed as a history. A princess who is a character of the speech preview display k4 moves from the princess m4 toward the inside of the history display v1. In the figure, a right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the moving princess indicates the trajectory and the moving direction of the princess. In addition, the princess in the history display v1 moves toward the inside of the history display v2 and the princess in the history display v2 moves toward the inside of the history display v3 so as to be pushed out by the princess. The 爺 displayed in the history display v3 is deleted.

  FIG. 31 (4c) shows a state in which the movement of the princess is completed. The princess is displayed in the history display v1 to v3. In this example, when the same character image is displayed in the history displays v1 to v3, the advance item is obtained.

  FIG. 31 (4d) shows a state in which the advance item u1 has been acquired. The notice item u1 has a pattern of a treasure box and is displayed in stock in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The preview items include, for example, pseudo-run items for which a pseudo-run effect is started, promoted items for which the title aspect (color) of the effect display is promoted to be a high hit reliability mode, and the cut-in effect is a big hit reliability There is a promotion item which becomes a high aspect of In addition, a specific character (for example, the staff shown in FIG. 18) may not be displayed as a history on the history displays v1 to v3, and the second serif announcement may not be displayed as a history on the history displays v1 to v3. May be

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 32 (1) to 32 (4). FIGS. 32 (1) to 32 (4) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (1) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a mode 1 circular mode. Also, the staging stage is a fine stage.

  In FIG. 32 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  FIG. 32 (3) shows a state in which the movable body 700 is moving upward and rotating clockwise. The movable body 700 may be rotatable. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the third aspect.

  FIG. 32 (4) shows a state in which the effect stage has changed to a cloudy stage. In this example, the moving operation of the movable body 700 is performed before the effect stage changes. Since it becomes a cloudy stage, the image of the sun of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to the image of a cloud, and is switched to the background image corresponding to the cloudy stage. In this example, the effect stage changes after the movable body 700 returns to the initial position. The effect stage may change during the movement of the movable body 700 to the initial position, or may change simultaneously with the completion of the movement to the initial position. The movable body 700 returns to the light emission of aspect 1 when returning to the initial position.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 32 (5) to (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (5) shows a state in which the rotating operation of the movable body 700 is performed while the special figure variation game is being performed. Also, the staging stage is a fine stage.

  FIG. 32 (6) shows a state in which the effect stage has changed to the ZONE stage. In this example, the moving operation of the movable body 700 is performed before the effect stage changes. Since it becomes the hall ZONE stage, the image of the sun of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to the image of the cloud and the lightning, and the character string images of "... Hall ZONE ~" and "Hall ZONE" are displayed, and the hall Switch to background image. Hall ZONE is a stage for notice, and a stage that is more highly hit than the sunny and cloudy stages. In addition, the notice of the customer ZONE may be a notice of the change, or may be a prefetch notice. In this example, the effect stage changes after the movable body 700 returns to the initial position. The effect stage may change during the movement of the movable body 700 to the initial position, or may change simultaneously with the completion of the movement to the initial position. The movable body 700 returns to the light emission of aspect 1 when returning to the initial position.

  FIG. 32 (7) shows a state in which the effect stage of the hall ZONE is being executed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "you can expect in the order of 超> Z ZONE" is displayed, and Z is more likely to be hit than も. Is reported. As described above, a plurality of presentation stages dedicated to advance notice may be provided.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 32 (8) to (11) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (8) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k4 is displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed. Also, the staging stage is a fine stage.

  FIG. 32 (9) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and is rotating clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the third aspect. In addition, a mini game is being performed by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 32 (10) shows a state in which the effect stage has changed to the ZONE stage. In this example, the staging stage is switched during display of the speech warning display. When the effect stage is switched to the hall ZONE, the dialogue warning display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 are erased. For this reason, the mini game is canceled before the result of the mini game of the mini game display o1 is derived.

  FIG. 32 (11) shows a state in which the effect stage of the hall ZONE is being executed. As in this example, the display of the mini game may be erased before the result of the mini game is derived. Thus, the display for the mini game may be erased before the result of the mini game is derived.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 32 (12) to (15). 32 (12) to (15) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (12) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k4 is displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed. Also, the staging stage is a fine stage.

  FIG. 32 (13) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and is rotating clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the third aspect. In addition, a mini game is being performed by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 32 (14) shows a state in which an effect display is displayed that states that the effect stage may change to the ZONE stage. In this example, during the effect display in which it is said that the effect stage may be switched to the hall ZONE, the speech notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 are erased. Therefore, the mini game is interrupted before the result of the mini game of the mini game display o1 is derived.

  FIG. 32 (15) shows a state in which the effect stage is continued on the fine stage without the effect stage moving to the hall ZONE. As in the present example, when the effect display indicating that the game may be switched to the ZONE is ended, the display of the dialog notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 is resumed. The mini game is resumed from the point of interruption. Thus, the mini game may be interrupted and then resumed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 33 (1a) to (1d) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of "I'm done" is displayed in the speech notice display k4. The character string image of "I will do it" is a character display of the character display showing the line of princess m4. In addition, a mini game by mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 33 (1 b) shows a state in which the button image u 4 is displayed overlapping a part of the speech warning display k 4. The button image u4 is an aspect imitating the appearance of the chance button 136, and is an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136. Further, the button image is displayed in the aspect of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in aspect 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In the present example, the meter image indicating the operation valid period is not displayed.

  FIG. 33 (1c) shows a state where the mini game of the mini game display o1 is finished. The arrow image is stopped above the rightmost aspect 5 circular image.

  FIG. 33 (1 d) shows a state where the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the item u5 is obtained. The item u5 is an item related to the change of the hold icon.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 33 (2a) to (2c). FIGS. 33 (2a) to (2c) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (2a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of "I'm done" is displayed in the speech notice display k4. In addition, a mini game by mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 33 (2 b) shows a state in which a meter image indicating an operation effective period is displayed overlapping the button image u 4 and a button image u 4 below the serif notice display k 4 overlapping a part of the serif notice display k 4 There is. Further, from the left, an image corresponding to the option of “A”, an image corresponding to the option of “B”, and an image corresponding to the option of “C” are displayed above the button image u4. In FIG. 33 (2 b), the option “A” is selected, and the cursor display is displayed on the image corresponding to the option “A”. The player operates the left and right keys of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor display, and can select the selection of “A”, “B”, and “C”. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where the cursor is displayed in the option of "A", "A" is selected. Further, the button image is displayed in the aspect of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “select !!” are displayed above the button image, the chance button 136 emits light in aspect 5, and pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 33 (2 c) shows a state in which an image corresponding to the option “B” is selected. The player can move the cursor display to an image corresponding to the option "B" by operating the right button of the setting operation unit 137 once from the state of FIG. 33 (2b). The operations of the setting operation unit 137 and the chance button 136 are valid during the operation valid period shown by the meter image.

  As described above, a button image or a meter image may be displayed overlapping with the serif notice display. Further, the options “A” to “C” may be selections of items that can be acquired or selections of reach effects. Note that the cursor display is automatically moved and displayed at high speed in the order of “A”, “B”, and “C”, and the cursor display may be stopped by pressing the chance button 136 and the option may be determined. In this case, the options to be selected may differ depending on the pressing timing of the chance button 136, or the options to be selected regardless of the pressing timing of the chance button 136 may be determined by lottery.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 33 (3a) to (3d). 33 (3 a) to (3 d) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (3 a) shows a state in which the speech advance notice displays k 4 and k 5 are displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed. The text image of "Just let's go into ZONE" is displayed in the dialogue warning display k5, and it is predicted that it will go to the past ZONE. In addition, the mini game of the mini game display o2 has not been started. Also, the staging stage is a fine stage.

  FIG. 33 (3 b) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and is rotating clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the third aspect. In addition, the mini game of the mini game display o2 is not started. As in this example, the mini game is not started immediately before rushing to the ZONE.

  FIG. 33 (3 c) shows a state in which the effect stage has changed to the ZONE stage. In this example, the staging stage is switched during display of the speech warning display. When the effect stage is switched to the hall ZONE, the dialogue warning display k4, k5, the princess m4, the hall m5, the character name display n4, n5, and the mini game display o1, 02 are erased. Therefore, the mini game display o2 is erased without the mini game being started.

  FIG. 33 (3 d) shows a state in which the effect stage of 殿 ZONE is being executed. As in this example, the display of the mini game may be erased before the mini game is started.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 33 (4a) to (4c). FIG. 33 (4 a) to (4 c) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (4 a) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k 4 is displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed. In the mini game of the mini game display o1, the arrow is stopped on the aspect 5 circular image, so the result of the mini game is a hit. For this reason, since the second serif notice display is displayed, the serif notice display k5 is started to be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a star-shaped mark display u7 including a hall is displayed. The mark display u7 is an item display for notifying of the shift to the hall ZONE.

The black dots shown between FIG. 33 (4 a) and FIG. 33 (4 b) indicate the passage of time.
FIG. 33 (4 b) shows a state in which the speech notice display k 5 is displayed. In the dialogue warning display k5, a character string image of "Just rush into ZONE" is displayed. Further, an effect image u8 is displayed overlapping the mark display u7. The effect image u8 is displayed when an item of the mark display u7 is used. In this example, the transition to the ZONE is predicted by the second speech notice display k5 and the mark display u7.

  FIG. 33 (4c) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is displayed. In this example, after this, the mini game of the mini game display o2 is not started in order to shift to the hall ZONE. Furthermore, after this, even when it moves to the hall zone, the mini game of the mini game display o2 may be started. In this case, when a hit is made in the mini game of the mini game display o2, a character string image of "Just rush into ZONE" may be displayed in the speech preview display k5.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 34 (1) to 34 (5). FIGS. 34 (1) to 34 (5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 34 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. It is displayed stopped. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a mode 1 circular mode.

  In FIG. 34 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol are started with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  Further, in FIG. 34 (2), a timer advance notice display u9 is displayed. The timer advance notice display u9 performs a countdown display of a predetermined time, and when the time becomes 0, a predetermined effect that the movable body or the like operates is executed. Timer notice display u9 is a mode of mode 6 (shown by vertical hatching in FIG. 34 (for example, golden color)). The big hit reliability of the timer notice display u9 is, from the low order, in the order of aspect 1, white blinking, aspect 3, aspect 4, aspect 5, aspect 6, aspect 7. The timer preview is displayed in a larger display size as the jackpot reliability is higher. Since the timer notice display u9 of this example is mode 7, it is displayed in a relatively large display size. Further, in FIG. 34 (2), a character string image of "under preparation" is displayed in the timer advance notice display u9, and the timer notice display u9 is a preparation notice prior to the start of the countdown. The timer advance notice display u9 is a display corresponding to the first in-provision image RDY shown in FIG. 43 (b) or FIG. 67 (a2) or the third in-provision image RDY3 shown in FIG. 67 (a2). The pachinko machine 100 of this example can display the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 67 (a2).

  FIG. 34 (3) shows a state in which a display j4 capable of specifying the mode of the speech preview display is displayed before the display of the speech preview display is started. A part of the display j4 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display u9. The entire display j4 may be overlapped with the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 34 (4) shows a state in which the speech notice display k4 is started to be displayed. A part of the speech notice display k4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 34 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k4 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction. A part of the speech notice display k4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

The black dots shown between FIG. 34 (5) and FIG. 34 (6) indicate the passage of time.
FIG. 34 (6) shows a state in which a character name display n4 including a character image of a princess m4 and a character of "hime" is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k4. A part of the speech notification display k4, a part of the princess m4, and a part of the character name display n4 are displayed overlapping the timer notification display u9.

  FIG. 34 (7) shows a state in which the timer notice display u9 has moved downward. The timer notice display u9 is moved and displayed before the countdown display of the timer notice display u9 is started.

  FIG. 34 (7) shows a state where the countdown display of the timer advance notice display u9 is started. In this example, a 99 second countdown is performed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 34 (9) to (13) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 34 (9) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k4 is displayed while the special figure variation game is being executed.

  FIG. 34 (10) shows a state in which the freeze effect display has been started. The freeze effect display of this example is an effect display that shows the player as if the time has stopped by freezing the display other than the change display of the decorative symbol and the change display of the fifth symbol. When the freeze effect display is started, the clock display u10 is displayed, and the execution time of the freeze effect display is measured and displayed. The clock display u10 is displayed overlapping with a part of the speech notice display k4.

  FIG. 34 (11) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is being performed.

The black dots shown between FIG. 34 (11) and FIG. 34 (12) indicate the passage of time.
FIG. 34 (12) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is being performed.

  FIG. 34 (12) shows a state in which the freeze effect display has ended. The freeze effect display of this example is performed for one minute. Since the speech advance notice display k4 is a time which is ended during the freeze effect display, it is erased after the end of the freeze effect display. Also, only the result of the mini game that should have been played during the freeze effect display is reflected. Therefore, two gauge images g3 are accumulated. Note that the freeze effect display length is relatively short, as in the present example, when it is one minute, longer than one minute, less than one minute, or short freeze (for example, A few seconds). In the case of short freeze, the movement display of the arrow of the mini game is not omitted, and the execution time of the freeze effect display is not measured and displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing the preparation notice effect shown in FIG. 35 and the timer notice effect shown in FIG. For example, during the preparation of the speech notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech notice display, a preparation for notice under preparation or a timer notice for presentation may be executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment relates to the notice effect during preparation shown in FIG. 35, and relates to the notice effect during preparation shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, 42, 44 to 46, 48 and 50 to 55. These preparation notice effects may be executed within the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech notice display or the display of the speech notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. For example, the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 71 may be executed during display of the speech advance notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech advance notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can perform display indicating the characters included in the speech preview display as shown in FIG. 71 (6) before the display of the speech preview display is started. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 72 to FIG. 90 related to the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71, and the same symbol as the serif notice display and the serif notice display. These conversational announcements may be performed within the variable display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the meter increase effect and the item application effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be performed during the display of the speech notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the meter increase effect and the item addition effect shown in FIGS. 93 to 98 and 102 to 115 related to the meter increase effect and the item application effect shown in FIG. These meter increase effects and item addition effects may be performed during the display of the speech notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the speech notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the operation effects of the movable bodies 1 and 2 which are also executed during the display of the balloon display shown in FIG. For example, the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 116 are operated during the display of the speech notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech notice display, so that at least a part of the speech notice display can be You may perform the rendering operation which overlaps by. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the rendering operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 117 and 118 related to the rendering operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIG. These rendering operations may be executed during the display or in the same symbol variation display as the serif warning display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment can execute the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIG. For example, the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIG. 149 may be executed during the display of the speech notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech notice display. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIGS. 150 to 169 related to the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIG. The effect display of these balloon display may be executed within the same symbol variation display as the above.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 and the like, and can play a mini game in association with the serif notice display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pseudo-series effect shown in (g) to (p) shown in FIG. For example, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed during display of the speech notice display, or in the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the effect display shown in FIGS. 170 to 184 related to the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 170, and the same symbol variation as the display of the serif notice display or the same as the serif notice display. These effects may be displayed within the display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 34 again.

(A1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain type of speech notice display (eg, speech display k1, k4, k6).
The certain type of serif notice is a display that may include a text display of the content related to a certain character,
A mini-game (for example, a mini-game by mini-game display o1) may be started in association with the certain type of serif preview.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the configuration, by displaying the first display k1 including the character display of the content related to the character, the first display can be made to attract attention to the beginner player, and the first display In some cases, playing a mini game in conjunction with may make it easier for the player to focus on the mini game.

(A2)
The gaming machine described in A1 above,
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
The result of a mini game can be derived without using the operation means.
When a certain result (for example, a hit result) (hereinafter referred to as a "first result") is derived as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is configured to be started. Yes,
When a result (for example, a result of losing) (hereinafter referred to as a "second result") other than the first result is derived as a result of a mini game, the display of a certain effect display Are configured to not start
The variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. Are easily configured to be displayed in a big hit manner on the
A game stand characterized by

(A3)
The gaming machine described in A2 above,
The certain type of serif notice is a display including a balloon (for example, a balloon display of serif notices k 1, k 4 and k 6),
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect (for example, aspect 3),
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment (eg, embodiment 4),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The balloon of the second aspect of the second aspect of the second aspect of the second aspect of the balloon according to the mini game of the first aspect of the first aspect of the present invention. The first result is more easily derived from a mini game started in relation to the notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(A4)
The gaming machine described in A3 above,
A mini game (for example, a mini game of mini game display o1) is configured to be played in the balloon.
A game stand characterized by

(A5)
The gaming machine according to the above A3 or A4,
Some kind of character display representing a serif of a character (for example, 婆, 爺, 殿) is configured to be able to be displayed in the balloon.
A plurality of character displays can be displayed as the certain character display,
One of the character displays of the plurality of types of character displays is a first character display (for example, "Don't go to Yatsushiro General"),
One of the character displays of the plurality of types of character displays is a second character display (for example, "Good for Daifuku"),
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally the final display in the big hit mode, rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without the second character display being displayed. Easily configured,
A game stand characterized by

(A6)
The game console according to any one of the above A3 to A5, wherein
It is configured to perform a display (for example, display j1, j4) suggesting an aspect of the balloon before the display of the certain type of speech preview display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A2 to A6, wherein
An effect indication is an indication of the certain type of speech warning display.
A game stand characterized by

(A8)
The game console according to any one of the above A2 to A7, wherein
The display for a mini game may be erased after the mini game is started and before the result is derived (see, for example, FIG. 32 (10)),
A game stand characterized by

(A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A2 to A8, wherein
It is equipped with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212 and special figure 2 table device 214) which can display a symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a variation display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol variation display") in which a lost symbol form is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation display") in which the big hit symbol form is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a "loss variation display") of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the lost symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a "big hit variation display") of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the big hit symbol variation display,
The lost variation display is a variation display that finally displays a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as a “first finalized display”) of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of removal) of a decorative symbol.
The big hit variation display is finally referred to as a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as a "second finalized display") of a decorative symbol of a certain combination (for example, a combination of hits) other than the first finalized display. Is a variable display to display
The display of the first finalized display is configured to start in response to the end of the lost symbol fluctuation display,
The display of the second finalized display is configured to start corresponding to the end of the big hit symbol variation display,
The fluctuation according to claim 2, wherein the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result rather than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. The display is configured so that it is more likely to be finally displayed in a big hit manner in the final display, "," from the variation display of the decorative symbol that the display of a certain effect display was not started by the derivation of the second result Also, the second finalized display can be displayed more easily by changing the display of the decorative symbol whose display of a certain effect display is started by deriving the first result. "
It is
A game stand characterized by

(A10)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A2 to A9, wherein
It is configured to be able to display a display (for example, display j2) indicating that a certain effect display is to be displayed before a certain mini game is started.
A game stand characterized by

(A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A2 to A10, wherein
It is configured to be able to execute a timer announcement effect (for example, a timer announcement effect of a timer announcement display u9),
The certain effect display may be displayed in relation to the timer advance effect.
A game stand characterized by

(A12)
The game console according to any one of the above A2 to A11, wherein
An effect display is a display whose display is started only by the derivation of the first result.
A game stand characterized by

(A13)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A12, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters;
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display (eg, princess),
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display (for example, a hall),
The first character display and the second character display are different displays,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as "a decorative symbol"),
Among the above-mentioned certain types of serif notices, a serif notice (for example, a talk notice k6 of princess m6 shown in FIG. 30 (10)) is a display including the second character display (hereinafter referred to as “ Call the "serif notice".),
It is configured to be able to display certain chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as "certain chance eyes") including the certain decorative designs,
After the certain chance eye has stopped and displayed, the certain serif notice is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 30 (7) to (10)).
A game stand characterized by

(A14)
The gaming machine described in A13 above,
Before the certain chance eyes stop displaying, the display of the combination of the decoration patterns which are not chance eyes (for example, "decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7" shown in FIG. 30 (5)) (hereinafter, "non-certain""The chance eye".) May be displayed stopped,
It is configured to be able to execute an effect (for example, an effect shown in FIG. 30 (5)) of changing the non-certain chance eye to the certain chance.
A game stand characterized by

(A15)
The gaming machine according to the above A13 or A14,
In a certain rendering state among a plurality of types of rendering states, the certain chance eye is configured to be able to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(A16)
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A15, wherein
The certain type of serif notice is a display including any of a plurality of types of characters,
A display (for example, a character image g2 shown in FIG. 71) can be displayed which suggests a character included in the certain type of serif notice before the display of the certain type of serif notice is started. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by

(A17)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A16, wherein
“A mini game may be started in connection with the above-mentioned certain type of serif notice display” described in the above A1 ”means“ after the display of the certain type of serif notice display is started A mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(A18)
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A17, wherein
A serif notice of another type (hereinafter referred to as "the second type of serif notice") different from the aforementioned type of the serif notice (hereinafter referred to as the "first type of serif notice"). It is configured to be viewable,
Both the first type of serif notice (eg, serif notice k1, k2, k4, k5, 6) and the second type of serif notice (eg, serif notice s1) There is a state that is displayed,
If only the second type of serif notice of the first type of serif notice and the second type of serif notice is displayed, a mini game is not started. (See, for example, FIG. 25 (18)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand having the configuration, when the mini game is always started in relation to the speech notice display, the player who is used to the game tends not to pay attention to the speech notice display. In some cases, it may be possible to cause a player who is used to playing a game to pay attention to the speech notice display by not starting the mini game when displaying the speech notice display.

(A19)
The gaming machine described in A18 above,
Equipped with operating means,
As a response display of the operation of the operation means, display of a serif notice display of the second type of serif notice display is configured to be started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state in which a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation display") is displayed, of the second type of serif announcements as a response The display of a certain serif notice display is configured to be started,
At least a portion of the display of the first type of serif preview is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by

(A20)
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A19, wherein
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving display of arrow images),
A game stand characterized by

(A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A20, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(A22)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A20, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000, 2000),
A game stand characterized by

(1A1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain type of serif notice.
One of the serif notices of the certain kind of serif notices is a first serif notice (eg, serif notice k1, k4),
One of the serif notices of the certain kind of serif notices is a second serif notice (eg, a serif notice k 3),
The first speech notice display and the second speech notice display are different notice displays (for example, when the first speech notice display (serif notice display k1) is displayed in a certain variable display) The second serif notice display (serif notice display k3) is not displayed in a certain variable display (see FIGS. 19 and 20)),
The first speech warning display is a speech warning display including a character display of the content related to a certain character,
A mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) is started in association with the first speech preview.
A mini game is not started in relation to the second speech preview (see, for example, FIGS. 16 (18) to (25)),
After a display showing a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result (for example, a hit)”) is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, a certain effect display (for example, a serif notice k2, k5) The display will start,
The certain effect display is a notice display (for example, a notice display of the change) of the change display in progress.
The second serif notice display is a look-ahead notice display of one of a plurality of read-ahead notice displays.
A game stand characterized by
(1A2)
The gaming machine according to the above 1A1,
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
The result of a mini-game can be derived without the operation of the operation means,
One of the serif notices of the certain kind of serif notices is a third serif notice (eg, serif notices k2, k5);
The first serif notice and the third serif notice are different notices,
The third dialogue warning display may be displayed as the certain effect display (for example, FIGS. 16 (10) to (17), FIGS. 22 (14) to (20), and FIGS. 30 (13) to ( 19)),
A game stand characterized by
(1A3)
The gaming machine according to 1A1 or 1A2,
The first speech preview display is a speech preview display including a certain image (hereinafter, referred to as “first image (for example, a balloon)”),
In a display area of the display area in which the first image is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first display area (central part in balloon display)"), character display representing serif is displayed,
A display of a mini game is displayed in a display area (for example, the right side in a balloon display) other than the first display area of the display areas in which the first image is displayed,
The first image is an image different from the background image displayed across the display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(1A4)
The gaming machine described in 1A3 above,
The first image (for example, a balloon) may be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect (for example, aspect 3),
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment (eg, embodiment 4),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The first image aspect is the second aspect of the second aspect, rather than a mini-game where the aspect of the first image is initiated in relation to the first serif announcement of the first aspect. It is easier for the first result to be derived in the case of a mini-game started in connection with the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(1A5)
The gaming machine described in 1A4 above,
Before the display of the certain type of serif preview is started, a display (for example, displays j1 and j4) suggesting the aspect of the first image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(1A6)
The gaming machine according to 1A4 or 1A5 above,
The second speech preview display is a speech preview display including a certain image (hereinafter, referred to as “second image (for example, balloon display)”) different from the first image.
In a display area of the display area in which the second image is displayed, a character display representing a serif is displayed,
The outer shape of the first image (e.g., horizontally long rectangular shape) and the outer shape of the second image (e.g., horizontally long rectangular shape) are the same outer shape (e.g., horizontally long rectangular shape),
The color of the first image (e.g. blue, green) and the color of the second image (e.g. white) are different colors,
A game stand characterized by
(1A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A6 above,
As a result of a mini-game, the effect display starts after a display representing a result (hereinafter, referred to as "second result (for example, removal)") different from the first result is displayed. Not (see, for example, FIG. 16 (9)),
A game stand characterized by
(1A8)
The gaming machine described in 1A7 above,
The display of the certain effect display by the derivation of the first result (for example, a hit) rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result (e.g., a loss) The game machine characterized in that it is easier to finally confirm the big hit in the case of the variable display in which the is started.
(1A9)
The gaming machine described in 1A8 above,
It is equipped with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212 and special figure 2 table device 214) which can display a symbol variation display,
The display means can display the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means can display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol variation display") in which a lost symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means can display symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation display") in which the big hit symbol form is finally displayed.
The display means can display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “loss variation display”) of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the lost symbol variation display.
The display means can display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a "big hit variation display") of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the big hit symbol variation display.
The lost variation display is a variation display that finally displays a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as "first finalized display") of a decorative symbol of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of a release).
The big hit variation display is finally referred to as a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as a "second finalized display") of a decorative symbol of a certain combination (for example, a combination of hits) other than the first finalized display. Is a variable display to display
In response to the end of the lost symbol variation display, the display of the first finalized display is started,
In response to the end of the big hit symbol variation display, the display of the second finalized display is started,
The display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result, rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result described in 1A8. "The variable display is likely to be finally displayed in the big hit mode finally", "the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result, rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol, The second finalized display is more likely to be displayed in the case of the variable display of the decorative symbol whose display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result. "
It is
A game stand characterized by
(1A10)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A9,
The display means can display a timer announcement effect display (for example, a timer announcement display u9),
The timer announcement effect display may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the first serif announcement display (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (6) to (8)).
A game stand characterized by
(1A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A10 above,
Multiple displays representing a character can be displayed,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a princess),
It can display multiple decoration patterns,
One of the plurality of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first display (hereinafter referred to as "a certain decorative symbol (for example, decoration 3)"),
A serif notice (eg, serif notice k6) of the certain types of serif notices includes a serif notice including the first display (eg, serif notice k6 shown in FIG. 30 (10)). ) And
It is possible to display a certain chance eye (hereinafter referred to as “a certain chance eye (for example, a decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7)”) including the above-mentioned certain decorative design,
After the certain chance eye is stopped and displayed, the certain serif notice is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 30 (7) to (10)).
A game stand characterized by
(1A12)
The gaming machine described in 1A11 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a hall),
The first display and the second display are different displays,
Before the certain chance eyes stop displaying, the display of the combination of the decoration patterns which are not chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as “non-certain chance eyes (for example, decoration 2-decorative 5-decoration 7). May be
It is possible to execute a change effect to change the non-one chance eye to the one chance eye,
The change effect is an effect including the second display (see, for example, FIG. 30 (5)), and a game console characterized by.
(1A13)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A12,
The first dialogue warning display is a display including one of a plurality of types of characters (for example, a hall, a princess, a wolf),
A display (for example, a character image g2 shown in FIG. 71) indicative of a character included in the first serif notice display can be displayed before the display of the first serif notice display is started.
A game stand characterized by
(1A14)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a tutorial display (for example, a tutorial display u1),
The first serif preview may be displayed overlapping at least a portion of the tutorial display (eg, FIG. 31 (b)).
A game stand characterized by
(1A15)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A14,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display (for example, meter (gauge) images g1, g2, g3).
When the certain effect display is displayed, an increase display of the meter display may be displayed (see FIGS. 22 (19) to (27)).
A game stand characterized by
(1A16)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A15,
It is possible to display a certain pre-reading notice display that displays the hold icon in a certain aspect (for example, aspects 3 to 7),
The second speech warning display according to claim 1, wherein the second speech warning display is one of a plurality of preliminary reading notice displays. It is a notice display regarding a notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(1A17)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A16,
As described above in 1A1, “a mini game is started in relation to the first serif notice display” is “after the display of the first serif notice display is started, the first serif A mini-game is started before the display of the advance notice is ended.
A game stand characterized by
(1A18)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A16,
A type other than the above-mentioned certain type of serif notice (hereinafter referred to as “first kind of serif notice (for example, serif notice k1, k2, k3, k4, k5, k6, k7)”) It is possible to display a serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display (for example, a serif notice display s1)”),
There is a state in which both the display of the first type speech warning display and the display of the second type speech display are displayed,
If only the second type of serif notice of the first type of serif notice and the second type of serif notice is displayed, a mini game is not started (eg, Fig. 25 (18)),
A game stand characterized by
(1A19)
The gaming machine described in 1A18 above,
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
As a response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a serif notice display of the second type of serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display (hereinafter, referred to as "operation display (for example, button image)") representing the appearance of the operation means is displayed, the second type The display of a certain serif notice of the serif notice is started,
At least a portion of the display of the first type of serif preview is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by
(1A20)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A19,
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving display of arrow images),
A game stand characterized by
(1A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A20,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

If the game production (reach production) as to whether or not the jackpot is hit is regarded as the main game, the mini game that can be executed in parallel with the main game can also be called a sub game.
As a mini game, the target TGT shown in FIG. 36 (a4), the drum (roulette) is rotated to notify a predetermined result, the enemy is defeated, and a large number of little princesses shown in FIG. Chibi Princess Muso directing the mission to annihilate the child, compared the drinking of the shrine and the bowl shown in FIG. 53 (b), the directing of the bowling chance shown in FIG. 56 (a3), the golf shown in FIG. 56 (b4) You may perform the presentation of the game.
The mini-game display at least includes animation display with images other than text (including variable display), and results of success (hit) or failure (out) are derived (eg heat → hot → hot? Gradually). A pattern for drawing letters, a display of a pattern for gradually drawing letters such as heat → hot → hot !!), and when a result of success is derived, another rendering (a certain rendering display) is started.
It is a conversation notice display that a plurality of speech notice displays and a conversation of two or more characters are established. The serif notice of 1 is also referred to as a comment notice.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 68. In addition, the effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far. That is, each effect shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 68 is an effect performed in a non-transparent state on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and one system capable of executing each effect shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present invention, the effect that is entangled with the transmission effect and the rendering means on the back side is the effect described using FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 35 to 68 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 35 to 68, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in the other drawings, The codes shown in 35 to 68 have priority.

  FIG. 35 to FIG. 68 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 35 to 68, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Moreover, in FIGS. 35-68, the example which arranged three decorative symbol display apparatuses side by side in a row is shown. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. In the present embodiment, an example in which various images are displayed on each of a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is shown, but all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 35 to 68, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut of a pattern that imitates a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, in FIGS. 35 to 68, the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 are shown, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special view 1 has a square shape, In the variable display of FIG. 1, it blinks, and in the stop display of the special view 1, it lights in the lighting mode of the lost or the lighting mode of the big hit. Also, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the lighting mode of the lost during the stop display of the special figure 2 Or it lights in the lighting mode of the big hit. Moreover, in FIG. 35-68, the mode of the speaker 120 and the presentation button 136, 136z is shown.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a fluctuation icon is provided at the center The h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all default display modes (white circular display modes). In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 35 (a), "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the grandchild's character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as the tutorial display, a description on the appearing character, a description on a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, you may be comprised so that alerting | reporting of a big hit expectation degree is possible by the display mode (For example, displaying in blue character, displaying in red, etc.) of tutorial display. In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the display being described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this presentation example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 is displayed in priority during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the decorative symbol, but may overlap the display region of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that constitutes the hold icon display area, the variation icon display area, and the tutorial display section TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, at the lower part of the display screen, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying a stage name and a reach name currently being performed is arranged. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 35 (a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, an acceptance number display 850 indicating the number of acceptances of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 35A, the acceptance count display 850 of the “0 times after” character string image is displayed, and the acceptance count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, below the acceptance number display 850, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 35A, all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. The character of this lord is sometimes called a navigation character. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed. Also, the stage name display unit ST1 or the character may be a display included in the Ui unit UI3, or may be configured such that at least a part thereof is displayed overlapping the front side of the UI unit UI3.

  In addition, a family crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing a closing operation using a shutter image. That is, the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (display of “under preparation”) is performed in place of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be an in-provision image preview display to be displayed before the display of the in-preparation image RDY described later is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed also when the preliminary display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and the big hit expectation may be configured to be different depending on the display mode of the shutter image, and the display mode of the shutter image is only one type. It may be configured such that it does not show the jackpot expectation by itself.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (d), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the in-provision image RDY in which the characters “in preparation” are displayed. In other words, the in-provision image RDY is displayed superimposed on the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (d), the background color of the image under preparation RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY shown in FIG. 35 (d) is the default display mode. . Note that the in-preparation image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the in-provision image RDY starts. After the display is started in the default display mode, the display mode may be changed to another display mode. Further, in the case of the configuration in which the above-described shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY may be associated with the display mode. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red in-provision image RDY may be displayed (probable). In this example of presentation, by displaying the image RDY being prepared, there is a case where a certain presentation (for example, a timer advance notice, a mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 changes from the blue display mode to the gold display mode. In this rendering example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to a gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 of this gold-colored display mode functions as a prefetch notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and not as a notice of a change of the display mode of the hold icon, but as a direct prefetch notice display. You may have to. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to become the default mode before the hold icon (the hold icon for the pre-reading target) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of the success or failure of the pre-reading change May be configured to be the default mode after the display indicating (for example, the display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1 with the preparing image RDY displayed, so that the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be noticed There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first pending icon h11, and the first one It is shown that the hold icon h11 of has been hit. At this time, due to the effect EF4, the entire first reserved icon h11 is covered, and it is considered to be in a more difficult visual condition than in a state where it is not covered by the effect EF4. Note that this effect EF4 is also displayed on the holding icon next to the target holding icon, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (g), the effect EF4 is placed next to the first holding icon h11 A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the on-hold change animation performed before the on-hold icon changes functions as the on-hold change advance effect display. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be included in the hold change advance effect display, that is, a series of animation from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change of the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change advance presentation display. In addition, the pending change advance effect display may be performed only by displaying the ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change advance effect display. In addition, even if the hold change animation is performed, the display mode of the hold icon may not change. In addition, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be started after the effect display on the ninja character NJ4. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may not be displayed to cause the image RDY to appear. Also, the arrangement may be such that the ready image RDY appears more easily when there is a pending icon displayed in the pre-reading mode than when there is no pending icon. According to this configuration, a state in which the holding icon changes after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is expected to appear in the preparation of the image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 displays a different type of advance notice (hold It may function as advance notification of an icon change and an object such as an image under preparation RDY, or an object change such as an advance notice and an advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (h), it is shown that the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state where the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 35H is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the family crest 224E may emit light in red after the first reserved icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or after the crest 224E emits light in red, the first one The hold icon h11 may start to display in the red display mode, or the family crest 224E may emit light in red at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts to display in the red display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold change animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". Although the combination of the decoration patterns of this "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of losing, it is also a combination of chance eyes. That is, the advance notice is given by the derivation display of the combination of chances. Although the chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode, the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be In addition, when the chance eye is displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, stop display of the decorative symbol may be sequentially performed, or after the sequential stop display of the decorative symbol is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be deleted. In addition, sequential stop display of the decorative symbol may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown to FIG. 35 (i), you may make it erase | eliminate the fluctuation icon h0 at the timing when the symbol was decidedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 35 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11, respectively. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (j), variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, it can be said that the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (k), it is shown that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is considered to be a swing fluctuation, and the middle symbol is displayed at a high speed. The display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI unit UI3 performs the process until the super reach is started. It is designed not to be hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 35 (l) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the image RDY being prepared. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Note that the movement of the household object 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the household crest 224E is started, The movement of the household object 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this presentation example, when transitioning to a specific super reach, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, and the UI unit UI3 may be hidden when at least the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, since the peripheral frame is not displayed when the image under preparation RDY is not displayed, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden in this case. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach is different depending on whether or not the image in preparation RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY during preparation is not configured to make it possible to identify an aspect of a certain advance notice or an effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even if the game is shifted to the sword reach.

  In FIG. 35 (m), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of only the image RDY being prepared is maintained, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out with the UI unit UI3. That is, the image under preparation RDY has the same display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after the non-display. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the sword strike, or the kana reach may begin after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest 224E. Swordsman reach may be started at the timing when it returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped to the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped to the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that notification is given that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and also that display before the start of a certain advance notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that the display of the effect EF5 has started a certain preliminary display itself. Furthermore, in this example of presentation, the image under preparation RDY can be said to end (become non-displayed) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. Although this mini game is an example of the notice display started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, the mini game may be started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made. In this example of rendering, the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the mini game is started, but the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started. In addition, for example, the characters “iron plate” may be displayed without the mini game or the timer advance notice effect being displayed, or the result of the success or failure judgment may be displayed suddenly. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The target TGT is composed of four divided areas, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the example shown in FIG. 35 (o)) is the area of the hit. By hitting an arrow in the area of the hit, it is possible to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions. Further, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of mini games and timer announcements, a type of mini game or timer announcement may be configured to always go through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini-game or timer advance notice may be configured (configuration 2) not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (p), it is shown that an arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice. The display indicating the result of the mini game may be configured to be displayed as a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. Note that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. The display of "iron plate" in the case where a certain advance notice display is a mini game may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (q), the character "iron plate" is displayed on a square background, and an iron plate image TP inclined about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this presentation example, it is possible to say that the advance notice display corresponding to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, the other advance notice display corresponding to the result of the advance notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Also, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, another advance notice may be displayed in the one cushion after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 (for example, the countdown is completed). (Including the start of another notice display immediately before the

  FIG. 36 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that at least one of the plurality of other examples may be provided, and conversely, at least one example may not be provided. The same applies to the following figures.

  FIG. 36 (a1) shows an effect following FIG. 35 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, although it is illustrated as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 35, the effect may be an effect performed on another scene, or an effect performed only as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. It is also good. The same applies to the following figures. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 36 (a1)-the same figure (a 3) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 35 (m)-the same figure (o), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (a4), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini-character MC1 from the lord has deviated from the target TGT and flew into a region different from the target TGT. That is, the situation in which the mini game as the advance notice has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is not displayed, and it is shown that the sword strike is being performed continuously. In this effect example, in the case of only the difference between the failure of the mini game and the success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game is successful. In addition, instead of the mini game, a timer advance notice may be performed. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice that nothing is displayed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the characters "chance" are displayed small somewhere, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 36 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 35 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 36 (b1) to FIG. 36 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (b4), the arrow thrown by the mini-character MC1 of the tombstone hits the target TGT, but a state of being stuck in the non-hit area is shown. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of "chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. ing. In this demonstration example, in the comparison of whether the mini game was a success or a great success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed finally in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. .

  FIG. 36 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 35 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 36 (c1) to FIG. 36 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG. 35 (n), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (c3), there is a state where a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 36 (c3) is also an example of the advance notice that is started when the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the mini game shown in FIG. 36 (c3) is configured to be more successful when it is started than the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) is started. The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be easier to succeed. In addition, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed when the mini game shown in FIG. 36 (c3) is started rather than the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol with the character of "iron plate" is derived, and it is shown that the mini game is very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and it is shown that the notice effect of the big hit determination is performed.

  In addition, although the mini game was performed in the effect shown in FIG. 35 in comparison with the example of effects shown in FIG. 35, in the effect example shown in FIG. . Also, both timer announcement effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time for counting down may be different.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 37 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 35 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. In FIG. 37 (a1), the fluctuation icon h0 is in the red display mode, and accordingly, the family crest 224E is also in the red light emission mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (a2), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (a3), it is shown that the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (a4), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, an example is shown where the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be performed not only during the super reach, but also may be configured to be executable during the super reach or not. In addition, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain advance display (a certain effect) is performed across the first state to the second state. It is also good. In addition, a certain advance notice (a certain effect) to be performed after the third display ends in the first state may cross the next change. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain advance notice (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

  FIG. 37 (b1) shows an effect following FIG. 35 (l). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 37 (b1) to FIG. 37 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (b3), it is shown that not the mini game but the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. This timer advance notice effect is also an example of the advance notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 37 (b 3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00". It should be noted that the big hit symbol may eventually be displayed more clearly when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. If the game is started, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed. Note that the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after the timer becomes “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down) , And is configured to perform an iron plate image TP), but after “0:00” indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, “iron plate”) is displayed in the display area in which the timer display is performed. Such as a display that can identify a certain effect display, or a display related to a certain effect display such as a “chance”, and then in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed. You may comprise so that presentation of effects (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Also, although the timer advance notice effect in this embodiment is configured to be displayed until "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down, it is displayed up to "1" indicating 1 second, or , "00: 01" may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display capable of specifying a certain effect display such as “iron plate”, or “chance”) in the display area where the timer display was performed. After performing a display related to a certain effect display), an effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of “1”, may be up to immediately before another effect display is displayed, or may be up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from when the "1" is displayed to when the display of another effect display is started is the same as the time from when the "2" is displayed to when the display of "1" is started (almost the same) It may be different (that is, displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”). When a pseudo run symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing “NEXT” or “continue” may be displayed as another effect display. Also, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is displayed immediately after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, other displays are displayed after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished. The timer display is displayed after the display (for example, a display showing that the timer display is counting up from 0 or a display related to the timer display like “after next chance up”) is displayed. It may be configured such that no other display is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (b4), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (b5), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, the timer advance notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In each of the effect examples shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 37 (c1) to FIG. 37 (c3) are effects following FIG. 37 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 37 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode changes in such a manner that the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes gradually shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the numbers in the timer display and the display in other display modes other than the numbers. First, only the decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds. In this case, the decrease speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. Also, two or more remaining time display meters with different remaining times may be provided, and each may be displayed with a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters with the same remaining time but different lengths. You may display it. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different advance notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Also, two or more remaining time display meters of the same length may be provided, and their reduction rates may be different.

  Further, in this presentation example, presentation may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance presentation presentation is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number of 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Also, the length of the meter may differ depending on the time of timer advance notice. In addition, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant, for example, may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and although the length of a certain meter may be long, for example, as a result of the decrease speed becoming faster from the middle, it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the rate of decrease of the meter does not have to be equal. For example, the decrease rate may be faster or slower in the state in which the numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 38 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 35 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. Then, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 38 (a2) to FIG. 38 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. A pair of translucent button images 136 q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a button effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136 q informs that the button image 136 a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started by uniting. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button preview effect. The pair of translucent button images 136 q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example of rendering, an example in which two translucent button images 136q are merged has been described, for example, a rendering in which four translucent button images 136q are merged may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are used. The button image 136a is materialized and button preview effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the image 136q is performed You may Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet. In addition, even when a deceased button image 136aL to be described later is displayed and a button preview effect is started, united animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or a translucent button image corresponding to the deceased button image 136aL Coalescing animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (a5), a state in which the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity is shown.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 38 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started. When the button preview effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is received, and an animation showing that the button image 136a is pressed is displayed with a character of "press", and further, remaining below the button image 136a. The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation effective period. Note that the button preview effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button preview effect is started.

  FIGS. 38 (b1) to (b6) show modifications of the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (b1) to (b5). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 38 (b1) to FIG. 38 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 37 (b1) to FIG. 37 (b3), so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 (b 4) shows a state in which the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect. In addition, even if the timer announcement effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the countdown of the timer display may be started according to the start of the combined animation. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to easily specify the notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared while the combined animation is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (b 5), the pair of translucent button images 136 q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the united animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" at the timing when the united animation is completed.

  FIG. 38 (b 6) shows that the combined animation is successful, the decal button image 136 a L is materialized, the button advance notice effect is started, and the operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca-button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer preview effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer preview effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, for example, an iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (c1) is a modified example of the effects shown in FIG. 38 (b3) to FIG. 38 (b6). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 38 (c1) to FIG. 38 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 38 (b3) to FIG. 38 (b4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 38 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q overlaps due to the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 38 (c4), a button advance notice effect by the deca-button image 136aL is started. The effect shown in FIG. 38 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 38 (b6), and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Thus, the presentation example shown in FIG. 38 is also shown for the example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of the super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared is ended and the timer advance notice is started while the introduced animation is displayed.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 39 (a), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (a), one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (a). The image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is more likely to finally display the jackpot symbol than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 39A is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 39 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest product 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than in the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of the display of the image RDY being prepared is started. As described above, it can be said that this presentation example shows that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished except for super reach.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (c), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the tutorial display section TT1 (that is, the area where the image RDY is being displayed) ing. When the timer advance presentation is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 39C, “90:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this example of presentation, it is shown that timer advance presentation is started before developing into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time as "90:00", and it can be inferred that the symbol variation display time is long, and a sense of expectation for a big hit may be improved. As described above, in this effect example, a relatively short time such as "10:00" is displayed when the displayed time of the timer display is displayed in a long time (long time) such as "90:00". Finally, the big hit symbol is configured to be more easily displayed than when displayed in (short time). Further, in this rendering example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is easily started to be long time in the timer preview rendering. Further, in this example of presentation, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 39 (d) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered that the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to be recognized by the family crest 224E being overlapped. In addition, the family crest item 224E also overlaps with a part of the timer notice display in the countdown display of the timer display. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

  FIG. 39 (e) shows that the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Also here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (f), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. In this example of effect, the background color of the timer advance notice display is red, and the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may be the same in the case where the timer advance notice display is the default background color and the case where it is the red background color.

  FIG. 39 (g) shows that the combined animation is successful, the deka button image 136aL is materialized, the button advance notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed, and the operation acceptance state is started. There is. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it will be for a big hit.

  FIG. 40: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 40 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (a1), one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image under preparation RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (a1). The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 40 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 40 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than in the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The dynamic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hitting area, and hitting the hitting area with an arrow hits the big hit reliability. High notices are to be made. In this presentation example, it is shown that a mini game is being played prior to transition to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a4), it is shown that an arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a5), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the fluctuation icon h0. It is shown that the preliminary announcement by is ranked up. In addition, the family crest 224E emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. It should be noted that after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family character 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest 224E may emit red light. After changing to the aspect or the golden light emission mode, the change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the timing when the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode The family crest item 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the displayed display of the mini game is shifted to the state in which the shutter image can not be visually recognized. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change after the closing operation by the shutter image starts. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Moreover, although the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game in this presentation example, the hold icon may be changed.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a6), it is shown that the tutorial display section TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a7), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state where no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another preview display, a timer preview display, or a mini game may be started. In addition, display may be performed to gray out after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40 (b1) to FIG. 40 (b8), an example showing how the mini game is started without displaying the image under preparation RDY will be described.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in red, and is displayed in advance. In addition, the hold icon h11 is a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the temple”, and the relationship between the panda character and the temple character is described. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 40 (b1) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is made non-display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b3), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini game preview display to be displayed before the display of the mini game described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this effect example, the mini game is shown to be started instead of the explanation display which has been performed until now. It can also be said that a mini game is shown starting without displaying the image RDY being prepared. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 40 (b4) to FIG. 40 (b8) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 40 (b 4) to FIG. 40 (b 8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 40 (a 3) to FIG. In addition, after the mini game is over, the explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or the gray out display may be performed.

  FIG. 41 is a view gradually showing a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 41 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 41 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 41 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 41 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing a closing operation with a shutter image. That is, it can be said that the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (preliminary display) is performed instead of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) . Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (a3), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before notice display displayed before a notice display to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (a4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, not the image RDY under preparation nor the mini game or the timer advance notice effect, but the notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” is displayed. The notice display of the "super heat" may be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer announcement effect being performed than when displayed without the mini game or the timer announcement effect. Good. Further, the notice display of the "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before performing the advance display such as “superheat”.

  FIG. 41 (b 1) to FIG. 41 (b 8) show an example of effect showing how the advance notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT 1. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 41 (b1) to FIG. 41 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 41 (a1) to FIG. 41 (a3), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, it is shown that a timer notice icon I81 for timer notice appears for notifying that timer notice effect will be performed when the shutter image is released. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed. Note that other notice icons may appear.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out from the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b7), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the timer preview icon I81 is kept displayed, and it is notified that the timer preview icon I81 is stocked. Alternatively, they may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b8), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the image RDY being prepared. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (b8), the image under preparation RDY is set as the default display mode. The preparation image RDY is displayed by the timer notice icon I81 being stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance presentation is notified by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the display mode of the image RDY in preparation for notifying of the start of the timer preview effect and the display mode of the image in preparation for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but are different You may In addition, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  FIG. 42 is a view sequentially showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timings of a certain advance notice display, and the start and end timings of a certain effect are different states among the states into which the second state is subdivided. It may be good or in the same state.

  FIG. 42 (a1) shows an effect following FIG. 35 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 36 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (m), the description will be omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 42 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into a super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a2), animation of a duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 42 (a3), the main character of the main character wins over the swordsman of the enemy character, The combination of the decoration patterns of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "is derived and the fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that a big hit is made is made. In order to congratulate the player from becoming a big hit, the family crest 224E, the eight generations character 224Fa and the generals character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode in which light is emitted in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 42 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a6), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a7), the character "Go" is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is informed that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. Note that the display of the characters "Go" may be performed or may not be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a8), it is shown that the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the big hit symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. A button image 136a of an aspect may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. In addition, even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (a9), the jackpot of “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7” from the combination of the decorative designs of the jackpots of “decor 4-decor 4-decor 4” It is changed to the combination of the decoration design of, and it is informed that the definite variation big hit is decided. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  FIGS. 42 (b1) to 42 (b4) show that the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice is started while the animation of the duel scene in the super reach is continued.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b1), it is shown that animation of a duel scene continues. At this time, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b1), "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display as a timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. In addition, the time when countdown is started may be before developing into super reach, may be after developing into super reach, or may be the timing when developed into super reach, reach It may be before the transition to the state, or may be after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b2), the button preview effect is started, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. That is, it is shown that the final judge effect is started. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down due to the timer advance production during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. Here, the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 is longer between the length of the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length at which the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is performed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display still continues, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol promotion effect will be performed thereafter. In this example of effect, even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00". This is because, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the resurrection effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Also, conversely, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be zero.

  FIG. 43 is a view showing in stages an example of a timer advance presentation effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 43 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 41 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (b), a state is shown in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared. In this preparation example, only one type of display mode is prepared for the image under preparation RDY, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this presentation example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain advance notice and a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain advance notice and a certain effect are to be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (c), it is shown that the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. . In this rendering example, one of a plurality of background colors in the timer advance notice display is selected, and the background color indicates the reliability of the big hit. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 43 (c), the background color of the timer advance notice is blue, which is an aspect with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Before or after the timer countdown starts, the background color of the timer advance notice may change, and an effect may be performed such that the reliability is improved halfway.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, after the timer display becomes "0:00", it may be in the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the timer display may become "0:00", or the timer display is " It may be in the reach state at the timing when it becomes 0:00 ". In this example of presentation, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a correspondence relationship with the display showing that it will be developed into the super reach, and it will always be developed into the super reach.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (e), instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, the character "Go" is displayed, and a certain advance notice is displayed. It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Note that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be in the non-display state after the button preview effect is started, or the button preview effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is in the non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button preview effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, an effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be exhibited.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 43 (i), the process shifts to super reach. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  In FIG. 43 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out with the UI unit UI3. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (k), it is shown that a cut-in image HCI of a princess is displayed. The princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without passing through the button announcement effect, the timer announcement effect, or the mini game, and the reliability is low. However, the button announcement effect or the timer announcement effect or It may be displayed as a result of the mini game being played. Moreover, it may change to the cut-in image HCI of a princess, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to Fig.44 (a)-the same figure (c) is the same as Fig.43 (a)-the same figure (c), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 44 (d), it is shown that an animation in which a character of a lord as a navy character is throwing a bomb is being performed. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "It's still." This bomb is displayed on the first decorative symbol display from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb travels to the tutorial display section TT1 in which the timer display is being counted down and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display section TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (e), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the ready image RDY is displayed again. When this timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is "10:00", and the timing at which the button advance notice effect is started is notified, but that timer notice effect is interrupted. It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button preview effect. It should be noted that the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed when the interruption presentation of the timer advance announcement production by the navigation character is performed than when the interruption presentation of the timer announcement production by the navigation character is not performed. It should be noted that if the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, the time of the timer display is increased and the time until the countup is extended is extended. Good, and the countdown speed may be slower. Also, for example, the timer advance notice has the advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, and that is why it is possible to know the future by the end timing of the image RDY under preparation (that is, the start timing of the timer advance). There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has been successful, and the process shifts to super reach (sword reach) as shown in FIG. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide.

  FIG. 44 (j) shows that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (k), it is shown that the image in preparation RDY is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is resumed. Specifically, the timer notice display after resumption is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Further, in FIG. 44 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). In addition, start timing of timer notice production is taken as appropriate timing, for example, before start of super reach, after start of super reach, before reach state, after reach state, after super reach start Also, the timing may be started before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance presentation effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and for example, may be started from "9:00" indicating the time of interruption.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit is decided. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the advance notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 43, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice production is not the development to the super reach but the cut-in image displayed during the super reach as a result of the timer notice production being extended. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. Thus, in this example of the effect, the countdown is “0:00” at a good place in the super reach, and an example in which a good effect is performed is shown. In addition, as the end timing (the start timing of a certain advance notice display) of the image RDY being prepared is later in a certain fluctuation, the expectation of the big hit is higher.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 45 (a) is the same as FIG. 43 (a), so the description is omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (b) shows a state where the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 has been switched to the image RDY being prepared. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image under preparation RDY is displayed, and it is shown that the timer announcement effect is performed twice. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image RDY being prepared, or may be displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It may be assumed that it will be performed once, but actually it will be performed twice. Here, instead of the display of “TIMER × 2”, for example, two in-provision images RDY may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (c), the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and a state is shown in which the timer notice effect is started. . The background color of the timer preview is blue, which is an aspect of low reliability. Here, the default display mode of the timer advance notice may be green. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is informed that the first timer announcement effect has been digested and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by the display of the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In addition, the display of "TIMER × 2" may be displayed without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of under-provisioning displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display regarding the under-provisioning display is once hidden after the first under-provisioning display ends.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (e), instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, the character "Go" is displayed, and a certain advance notice is displayed. It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may seem that there is no stock of the timer advance notice effect. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer announcement effect is started, but when the in-provision image RDY is displayed again, the first in-provision image RDY is displayed. Is displayed larger than when it is displayed. Therefore, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 or the decorative symbol may be overlapped by the image RDY during preparation. As described above, there may be an effect of causing more attention by temporarily non-displaying the image RDY during preparation and further overlapping.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and as shown in FIG. 45 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, super reach shift Display takes place and develops into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). In addition, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged preparation image RDY, and is considered to be less visible than the state where it is not overlapped by the family crest 224E. The image under preparation RDY may be overlapped with the family crest 224E only when enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when not enlarged. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  In FIG. 45 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. In addition, since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. In this way, the prepared image RDY enlarged and displayed may also be displayed during execution of the super reach. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (k), it is shown that the image in preparation RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is improved. Further, in FIG. 45 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "3:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). Further, in this example of the effect, the size of the timer advance notice display is the same size as the size of the ready image RDY displayed in the enlarged view, and when the timer advance notice display is displayed in the enlarged view, the big hit The symbol is easily displayed. In addition, when the background color of the timer advance notice display is gold, the display may be always enlarged. In addition, even if the background color of the timer advance notice display is a color other than gold, the display may be enlarged. Further, in this rendering example, the background color of the second timer preview rendering is higher in reliability than the first timer preview rendering, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the time displayed on the timer may be longer in the second timer announcement effect than in the first timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit is decided. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by being notified in advance that the timer advance effect is performed twice.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the number of clothes under preparation RDY is displayed, when one under preparation picture RDY is digested, all the preparation under image RDY is displayed on the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIG. 46 (a1) to FIG. 46 (a2) are the same as those in FIG. 42 (a1) to FIG. 42 (a2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a3), it is shown that the long press effect by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, an area in which a character of Tonosama is drawn is arranged at the upper side, an area in which a character of swordsman is drawn is arranged at the lower side. The size of both areas is displayed so as to relatively fluctuate. The image RDY is being displayed even when the long-press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a4), it is shown that the reception of the long press operation by the long press effect is started. That is, it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started. In this long press effect, although the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer advance notice display, and it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Also, in FIG. 46 (a4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "5:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this example of presentation, the operation valid period and the time of the countdown of the timer display coincide with each other. Note that they do not have to match completely. Note that the timer advance notice may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the play button 136 may be started after the timer advance effect is started, The timer announcement effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 46 (a5) shows that the player performs a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a5), the timer display in the timer advance display is "4:00".

  FIG. 46 (a6) shows that the player continues to perform the long press operation of the effect button 136. At this time, in the long-press effect display, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and the area in which the character of the sword superior placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Is shown to be dominant. It is suggested that this is likely to be an advantageous result. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a6), the timer display in the timer advance display is "3:00".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a7), the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is finished, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed in the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Moreover, in the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn further expands, and the area where the character of the sword master placed below is drawn smaller accordingly. It is shown that your character is by far the dominant. Note that the long press effect may be ended after the “Go” character is displayed, or the “Go” character may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, “Go The long press effect may be ended at the timing when the character of “is displayed. In addition, the operation effective period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, or the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, “Go The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character of “is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a8), the characters "one blow" are displayed, and the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button preview effect is started, and the operation is effective. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance presentation effect can be said to be an example of button operation presentation performed subsequently to the long press presentation. In other words, it can be said that an example in which a plurality of (types) button effects are continuously performed is shown. Here, the operation effective period to be set may be set again after the operation effective period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously to the operation effective period in the long press effect May be

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. At this time, the family crest item 224E, the eight generation character item 224Fa and the general character item 224Fb emit light in the light emission mode of the rainbow so as to congratulate being a big hit.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, the preparation display ends with the long press part and the countdown of the timer display is started, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or at the end of the long press part “0:00” is given, and an example is shown in which the button effect to be performed in the next part is good.

  In (b1) to (b5) in FIG. 46, a state is shown in which a long press effect is performed in the sword strike, but a timer advance effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that a long press operation is being performed. In this example of presentation, timer advance presentation is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 46 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, a character of a maroon placed above is drawn The area is reduced, and the area where the sword character placed below is drawn is enlarged, and it is shown that the Tonosama character is inferior (the character of the enemy character is dominated by the sword sword). . It is suggested that this is unlikely to be an advantageous result.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (b3), the characters “one shot” are displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT It is shown that the operation has been started and the operation effective period has been set again. As described above, when the timer announcement effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca-button image 136aL is difficult to be displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is easily displayed. When the long-press effect is performed and the timer advance effect is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative patterns of the lost 5-decoration "4" is derived to start the fluctuation. In addition, it may be a flow which may be a case where it does not go through a mini game or a timer advance notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 47 is a view showing in stages an example of button continuous hitting effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 47A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 47 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (a), the button continuous hit production is started, and the explanation of "Please turn the meter into MAX by pressing the button continuous hit in time" is performed. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged vertically is displayed on the left side of the display screen. In addition, at the timing shown to Fig.47 (a), it is before the reception start of continuous hitting operation of the production button 136, ie, before the start of an operation effective period, and the production button lamp 138 is also lighted in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of "prepare" displayed above the button image 136a corresponds to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button continuous hit effects). It should be noted that, when the button continuous hit effect is started, the decorative symbol which has been variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 47A is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 47 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (b), it is shown that the reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has been started. Specifically, the character "ready" displayed above the button image 136a switches to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation valid period is started. And the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button continuous hit effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed to decrease in accordance with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 47C, "5" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the end of the operation effective period is 5 seconds. Since a certain advance notice effect may be performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it is possible to say that the effect of the countdown display by the countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

  FIG. 47 (d) shows that the player has started the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (d), "4" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it will be four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 47 (e), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, one memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is red in accordance with the number of times of the continuous hitting operation. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (e), "3" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it will be three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 47 (f), the player continuously executes the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 47 (g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes “0”, and the operation valid period is over, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is finished. The memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red in three modes, that is, it indicates that the button continuous hit effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, it may be switched from red to white at the end of the operation effective period, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button continuous hit production fails, "Sorry ..." is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (h), and it is notified that the button continuous hit production has failed. In addition, in this demonstration example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown indication effect other than the timer advance notice, a certain advance notice display may not include this countdown indication display.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 48 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 48 (a). The function of the first preparing image RDY is similar to that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 48A is in a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this rendering example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and a plurality of preparing images are simultaneously displayed. For the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2, corresponding effects (timer announcement effect, mini game, etc.) are performed. Note that these in-provision images (the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2) all function as pre-reading notices. In addition, the background color of all the images in preparation is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be simultaneously started to be displayed, or one may be started to be displayed after the other is started to be displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 48 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 48 (b) shows that the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 48 (a) is ended and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It is placed on the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon is displayed and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon that was at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal Do. In addition, the fluctuation display of the decoration design is started. It should be noted that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (c), the first preparing image RDY1 being displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "5:00", and it is informed that there is a possibility that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this rendering example, when one of the plurality of in-provision images is activated (digested) to start rendering, all the other in-provision images are also digested. In addition, although the image in preparation is completely digested in one symbol fluctuation display, the advance notice icon may be carried over and displayed until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display.

  In (d) of FIG. 48, the timer display in the timer preliminary display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is “0:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the word "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer advance notice corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 was displayed, and the timer advance effect related to this timer notice is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding advance notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (f), the character "Go" is erased along with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward and moves to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 which may be displayed when the display mode of the holding icon is changed as shown in FIG. It may be a character. In this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may be started after the leading start previewing effect is started, or the leading start previewing effect may be started after the image moving animation in preparation is started, The in-provision image moving animation may start at the timing when the preceding start preview effect starts. Also, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 48 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2 but may overlap the second preparing image RDY2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (g), the change-on-hold animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a thuriken toward the change icon h0 and shows how it hit the change icon h0. It is done. At this time, the whole of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the visual recognition state is set as compared with the state where the fluctuation icon h0 is not covered by the effect EF4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (h), as a result of the on-hold change animation being performed, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change advance notice is started.

  In FIG. 48 (i), after “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and after reaching the reach state, transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the second ready image RDY2. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of presentation, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In FIG. 48 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (k), it is shown that the second under-provisioning image RDY2 is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice is displayed as a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Also, in FIG. 48 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display is a default display mode at the start of display and may be promoted display such as changing to a golden background color after start of display (for example, after the countdown is started). It is also good.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (m), instead of the timer display, the character "Go" is displayed and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer preview effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the preview display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain preview display. In this example of presentation, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects according to the explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 49 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 35 (a), the description will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (a2) shows that the instruction display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "the lord is the Yatsushiro general". . In this effect example, when switching the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1, the above-described opening and closing display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed. In this effect example, it is shown that, in the symbol variation display of one, when switching the explanation display, the switching display between the explanation display is performed without performing the open / close display by the shutter image.

  FIG. 49 (b 1) to FIG. 49 (b 3) show how opening and closing display is performed by the shutter image when switching the explanation display. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (b), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "Tomonashi is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preliminary display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. By performing such an effect, it was expected that the advance notice display would be started, but by making the player disappointing that the advance notice display was not started and the explanation display was carried out, the shutter image was opened and closed. There are times when it can be made to have expectations.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIGS. 50 (a1) to 50 (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 35 (e). In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 50 (a1)-the same figure (a2) is the same as the example of a rendition shown to FIG. 35 (f)-the same figure (g), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (a3), it is shown that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged from the default display mode although the effect EF4 is erased. . In this manner, a failure effect may be performed in which the display mode does not change even if the on-hold change animation described above with reference to FIG. 35 is performed. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may differ depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

  Although the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI unit UI3 in the above-mentioned change-on-hold animation, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI unit UI3 to display the UI. It may be made not to overlap the part UI3. In this case, in the on-hold change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI unit UI3.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 51 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 51 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 51 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the roulette board RR formed in a circular shape is divided into three equal parts. An area of a rose is arranged above the three sections, an area of a princess is arranged at the lower left, and an area of a small princess is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each of the areas in red, and a notice display corresponding to the area which is finally lit in red is prepared. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display in which the in-provision display and the like end may be the same or different. In addition, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol fluctuation display in which the symbol display is performed may be the same as the symbol fluctuation display in which the UW display etc. is finished. It may be. According to the combination described above, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a3), it is shown that all the areas are lit in red as a result of the fluctuation display of the roulette effect. That is, it has been notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the advance notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character are respectively prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a4), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the display of the image in preparation is accompanied, the character is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Little Princess moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner portion of the third preparation image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a6), it is shown that an animation is being performed in which the character CHM of Princess Little is throwing an object toward the fluctuation icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is the notice display due to the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a8), the display in a mode in which the brow character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparation-in-provision image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the character of "superheat" is derived, suggesting that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is performed by deriving the character of "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not the effect of changing the display mode of something, but the effect of giving a big hit advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a11), display in a mode in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is started. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to be overlapped on the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a12), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown is started. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a13), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 and notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the display of “Go” described above and shown in FIG. 48 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a14), super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into super reach (sword reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the character HME of the princess corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Also, although not shown, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moreover, in this example of presentation, the background color of the super reach transition display is set to gold, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of super reach, for example, iron plate image TP is displayed A mini game to be played or timer announcement effect may be performed.

  FIG. 51 (b1) shows that, in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 51 (a2), only the area of the eyebrows of the three areas is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character, only the notice display corresponding to the whale character is prepared. It has been informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b2), the third ready-to-be-prepared image RDY3 is displayed in such a manner that the brow character GII is adjacent. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only the mini game by the drum DRM is played.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 52 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a3), but “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen The third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the black character GII is adjacent, and two tiny princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. In the case where a plurality of effects are prepared by the insult character GII and the princess character HME, for example, two same characters can be displayed on one in-progress image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, one first in-provision image RDY1 is displayed, and two princess characters HME can be displayed. Conversely, a single character may display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a3), the character CHM1 of one of the two princess princess characters moves upward and moves to the lower left corner of the third preparation image RDY3. An overlap is shown. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display among the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a4), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM1 of Princess Little is thrown toward the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display by the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Little Princess is started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a6), the character CHM2 of the other Little Princess of the two Little Princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3 It is shown that parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a7), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM2 of Princess Little is thrown toward the variation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi is notified that the preliminary display by the fluctuation icon is ranked up.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red advance notice to the display mode of the gold advance notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIG. 52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b4) show another example of effect following FIG. 52 (a3). The effect shown in FIG. 52 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 52 (a4), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of the baby reaches the change icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is turned dark. Is performed, and the portion where the effect EF 7 is displayed glows white, and a display in which light is extended in the horizontal direction from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily made non-displayed due to the darkening of the display screen. You may In addition, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only a part of images in preparation is temporarily hidden. You may Thus, the state in which the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. Then, in this presentation example, the first state in which the hold icon is displayed with the UI unit UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is not displayed with the UI unit UI3 is the first state. The state may be changed to the fourth state, and the first state may be changed to the second state, or the first state may be changed to the second state. The first state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the second state may be set.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 was being displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  After that, when the dark display is finished, as shown in FIG. 52 (b4), the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 52 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 52 (a5), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 52 (c1) to FIG. 52 (c3) show another example of effect following FIG. 51 (a6). Since the effect shown in FIG. 52 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a7), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (c2), the display in a mode in which the indigo character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparation image RDY3 is displayed, “Go” is displayed. The characters are displayed to notify that the mini game is to be started. Note that the display of “Go” may be started after the キ ャ ラ ク タ character GII starts to vibrate, or the G character GII may start to vibrate after the display of “Go” is started, The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the scarlet character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to approximately the center of the display screen, and the effect by the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this example of effect, it is shown that the area in which the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area in which the image under preparation is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after the "Go" display is made may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without the "Go" display. . In addition, the case where the mini game is enlarged may be more likely to be a big hit if the mini game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image under preparation to the start of the mini game, timer advance notice effect, etc. may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain advance display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the places where the first display and the second display are performed are different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand There is a case to play the effect.

  FIG. 53: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the effect display on the left side is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the effect display on the right side is performed may be different display devices. In that case, a third display (some notice display) may be made on the display device 2 in some cases.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 53 (a). In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 53 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two on the left and right, and the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, the display of “Chibi princess is participating in SP reach participation in annihilation” is performed, and the Chibi princess has a mission of having Chibi princess to annihilate a large number of minions performed, and the right notice In the display area CUR, a display of "To win the victory in SP reach participation" is performed, and drinking comparison is performed between the coffin and the coffin, and the comparision of drinking is performed with a mission that the cowards win the drinking comparison. In this production example, the construction is such that transition to super reach is achieved when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Princess Musou rendering and the mission in the drinking and the rendering is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. It is done. It should be noted that after the Chibi princess musou rendition is started, the drinking and comparing performance may be started, or after the drinking comparison rendition is started, the Chibi princess and musk reversion may be started, and both of the renditions are started at the same time It may be done. Further, in this example of production, if at least one of the mission in the Chibi-Himeka Musou effect and the mission in the performance compared to the drink is achieved, it may be made a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during execution of both the Chibi princess insane effect and the drink comparison effect. There is. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (d), it is shown that the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the character of “chance” is displayed in the left notice display area CUL in which Chibi Princess Musou rendition is performed is displayed Thus, it is reported that the mission in the little princess princess musou rendition corresponding to the area where the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed is facilitated to be achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area where the image RDY being displayed is displayed does not match the area where the advance display is performed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and improve interest. . The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right notice display area CUR in which the effects are compared compared to drinking, or the chance is raised in both the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed because the mini game has ended.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (f), it is shown that a child is completely eliminated and a mission is achieved in the little princess princess musou rendition displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (g), the letter “Annihilation” is displayed in the left notice display area CUL together with the indication of Princess Chibi up, and the mission in the Chibi Princess incomparable effect is achieved Is reported. In the right advance notice display area CUR, effects are continued compared to drinking.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (h), it is shown that the lord has won the eyebrows and the mission has been achieved in comparison with the drink displayed in the right advance notice display area CUR.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (i), the character of “winning” is displayed together with the display of the up in the right notice display area CUR, and it is informed that the mission in the drinking comparison effect is achieved. It is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (j), it is shown that the sword reach is started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this example, since the mission in the drink comparison production is achieved, the swordsman reach is started, and since the mission in the Chibi princess musou rendition is achieved, the Chibi princess has appeared as a friend of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the comparition to drink is achieved and the mission in Chibi princess musou rendition fails, it will shift to swordsman reach, but the chibi princess will not appear, the mission in chibi princess musou rendition will be achieved and the comparition will be compared If you fail in the mission in, transition to Super reach for Chibi princess. That is, in this rendition, the contents of rendition to be developed thereafter differ depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of “chance” and the character of the princess are displayed is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is improved, but it is not the high reliability, not the notice display started from the mini game started from the image RDY under preparation or the timer notice effect. ing.

  FIG. 54: is a figure which shows in steps the example of another presentation of the presentation shown in FIG. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 54 (a) to FIG. 54 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (b), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (c), a state is shown in which both the Chibi Princess Musou rendition and the drink compared to the rendition are performed. In this presentation example, the display of the image RDY being prepared continues, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice display corresponding to the image in preparation RDY is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 54 (c) to FIG. 54 (e). In FIG. 54 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 54 (f) to FIG. 54 (j) are performed. It is to be noted that the effects shown in FIG. 54 (f) to FIG. 54 (j) are that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 for the effects shown in FIG. 53 (f) to FIG. The description is omitted because it is the same except for the above.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends, and the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared It is notified that it is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY was displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (m), it is shown that an arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, an iron plate image TP is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high advance notice.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 55 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a2), “reach when caught” is displayed, and it is shown that chasing effects are started, which is based on the mission of the lord to catch Echigoya. There is. When chase effect is started, a subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and a display (main display) related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 55 (a1) Is displayed. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a3), a state is shown in which the lord is closing the distance to Echigoya. On the other hand, in the subwindow WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a4), it is shown that the lord has caught Echigoya and the mission has been achieved. Thereby, it is notified that it will be reach. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that preparation for the reach occurrence is in progress. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the advance notice is generated by stocking the advance notice corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a5), the chase effect is finished, and the main display displayed in the subwindow WP3 is again displayed on the entire display screen, and then the "decoration 4" reaches a reach. The situation is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase presentation. When the main display is displayed on the full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display is full screen display, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  FIG. 55 (b1) to FIG. 55 (b2) show another example of effects relating to the display of the sub-window during execution of the chase effect shown in FIG. 55 (a1) to FIG. 55 (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 55 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 55 (b1). In the upper left portion of the display screen, a third preparing image RDY3 is displayed. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 55 (b1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (b2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 55 (b1) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chase effect) is performed. Although the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions not overlapping in this example, the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3. It may be made to overlap.

  FIG. 55 (c1) to FIG. 55 (c2) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 55 (b1) to FIG. 55 (b2). The effect shown in FIG. 55 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 55 (b1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (c2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, a subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and a display (main display) related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 55 (c1) Is displayed. In this example, the third preparing image RDY3 of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the sub window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub window WP3, and the first in-provision image RDY1 displayed in the position displayed so far is erased.

  FIG. 55 (d1) to FIG. 55 (d2) show display modes of the image in preparation when the background display is displayed in an inclined manner. In addition, since the example of an effect shown to FIG. 55 (d1) is the same as the example of an effect shown to FIG. 53 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3⁄4 and shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display.

  FIG. 56 is a view showing in stages an example of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 56 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a3), it is shown that a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take strikes in the bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a4), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels to ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a5), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  56 (b1) to FIG. 56 (b8) illustrate another example of effect of the step-up notice. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 56 (b1) to FIG. 56 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 56 (a1) to (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB is lifted from below the first step-up display unit SUA to lift the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is displayed in the same way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this presentation example, the mission is more likely to be successful if the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than on the mini game played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the mini game is successful in the second step up display unit SUB than when the mini game is successful in the first step up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b4), it is shown that a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, in the mini game display area, a message of "CUP IN" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is performed. That is, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b5), it is shown that the character of the lord put on and the golf ball moves toward the cup.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . It should be noted that the image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is notified that the jackpot reliability is high.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, although the bowling chance game and the golf game have been described as being successful, for example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins did not fall down is displayed to notify of a mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a message indicating that the player did not cup in may be displayed to notify of a mission failure. Also, in this example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but another character may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appeared It may indicate that the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. Since the effect shown in FIG. 57 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 56 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, something in the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. The explanation display may be deleted after the display of the first step-up display unit SUA starts, or the display of the first step-up display unit SUA may be started after the explanation display is deleted. The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step up display unit SUA starts display. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 57 (a3) to FIG. 57 (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 57 (a3) to FIG. 57 (a5) are the effects shown in FIG. 56 (a3) to FIG. 56 (a5) and the instruction display is not performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and The same is true except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a6), the situation where the mission is achieved is continuously shown.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the change icon h0 remain non-display.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a8), it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is re-displayed in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice and is redisplayed. Alternatively, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed before the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes and is redisplayed, and a mini game, timer advance notice effect, or the like may be made.

  FIG. 57 (b 1) to FIG. 57 (b 3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 57 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 57 (a1), except that four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed despite the movement of the hold icon h11 to the upper side of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, it overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. Is shown. That is, it can be said that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain display (pending icon h11) is not moved is shown even if the UI unit UI3 is moved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L of FIG. 57 (b3), it is shown that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the step-by-step another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58A, the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 58A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 58 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 58A is in the default display mode displayed in blue. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 58 (b) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58C, it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 58D to FIG. 58F, the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not framed out with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered, as shown in FIG. 58 (f).

  FIG. 58 (g) shows that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (h), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (i) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (j), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (k), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (l), the in-preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started Be done. Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, FIG. 58 (l) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out. At this time, the image under preparation RDY is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 58 (m), at least one of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed until the frame out is completed. It is considered that the department is difficult to see.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 59 (a1). In the first preparation image RDY1, the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 59A is in a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a1), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 59 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 59 (a2) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a3), it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (a 4) to FIG. 59 (a 6), the UI unit UI 3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first preparation image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 59 (a6), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with its display position lowered. As for the first preparing image RDY 1, the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  In FIG. 59 (a7), it is shown that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a8), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can. Further, the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparation image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be moved up, and the first preparation image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a9) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first preparing image RDY 1 and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a10), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels to ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a11), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice is started. Is notified. That is, when a new in-progress image is displayed when a certain number of in-provision images are displayed in a certain area, the new in-progress image is displayed in another area. Can. The third in-provision image RDY3 has a green background color, which is a default display mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (a12) to FIG. 59 (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  FIG. 59 (b 1) to FIG. 59 (b 2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. FIG. 59 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 59 (a3). Further, since the effect shown in FIG. 55 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 59 (a4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (b2), it is shown that the sword strike is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this presentation example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered. That is, it is shown that even when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the pseudo-series effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 60 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 60 (a1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 60 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, “decoration 6” is on the left symbol, and “decoration 7” is on the right symbol. It is shown that the display is stopped. In addition, the middle symbol is in the display of variation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a3), the variation speed of the middle symbol is low, and it is shown that the pseudo-connected symbol composed of the pattern of Tonosama scrolls in from above the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a4), a state is shown in which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a5), a pseudo run symbol stop animation for producing whether or not to start a pseudo run is started. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variation icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI unit FO animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this example of rendering, the UI unit UI3 is shown as non-displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo rendering rendition or when pseudo rendering is established. When the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo run symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIG. 60 (a5) to FIG. 60 (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a6), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a7), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo run pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of the dummy run pattern is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. In addition, the pseudo run pattern is overlapped also with stage name indicator ST1 which is indicated in 2nd decoration symbol display device 208M, acceptance frequency indication 850 and stock button picture 852, furthermore, 3rd decoration symbol display device It is also overlapped with the character of the lady displayed on 208N and the second number of reservations display. Also, at this time, the family crest 224E starts to rise, and overlaps a part of the pseudo-series symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (a8), the family crest 224E is rotated, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Don" to notify that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed.

  FIG. 60 (a9) shows that the pseudo run symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo run symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and that the UI unit UI3 is frame-in with frame in animation (UI unit FI animation). It is done. Note that the UI unit FI animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the UI unit FI animation may be started before the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo run symbol stop The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, as for the decorative design, it is temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation with the combination of the decorative design of “decoration 6-pseudo consecutive design-decoration 7”, after that, fluctuation indication of the decoration design of the second time by the pseudo ream is started Ru.

  FIGS. 60 (b1) to 60 (b3) show examples of display before and after the stage change effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. The effect shown in FIG. 60 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 60 (a1), so the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 60 (b2), the stage effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively display dark, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is It is shown that the approximate center glows and the light rays extend from there in the left and right direction. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this rendering example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. Further, in this example of rendering, it is also shown that the image RDY being prepared is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may be ended, and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 60 (b3) shows that the stage change effect has ended. In this effect example, after the completion of the stephen effect, the same display as that before the start of the stephen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it is a false stephen effect that neither mode transition nor stage change is performed.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing in stages an example of button preview effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61A, the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 61A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 61 (a). Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is in a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (a), it is shown that the sword strike is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during execution of a sword strike.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the sword reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (b), united animation is started, and a pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, Are moving. Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q overlaps with the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 61C shows that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. Note that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is framed out, or the effect is performed at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (d), the combined animation is successful, the deca-button image 136aL is materialized and the button advance announcement is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed, and the operation acceptance state is It is shown that it was started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at least during a period in which a button advance notice effect by the button image 136a (decay button image 136aL) is being performed.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the first special view display device 212 displays stop with a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L loses the “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. The stop display is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols. Also, the special figure 1 fourth pattern 284a1 is also lit in the display mode of losing. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 60 (a1) is in the form of a notice display mode displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 62 (a2), the situation during stop display of the symbol is continuously shown. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a3) displays the UI wipe display portion WP4 covering the entire UI portion UI3. The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle is framed in from the left side of the UI wipe display WP4 and as shown in FIG. 62 (a3) to FIG. 62 (a5), it is shown traveling toward the right end. . That is, in this effect example, in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the advance notice display mode to the default display mode, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed, and effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. There are cases where it is possible to naturally change the display mode in the UI unit UI3. Note that, for example, when returning to the original display due to a super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered by the wipe display unit, and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a6), a state is shown in which the effect by the character of the lady in the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is finished and the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that has been h0 and the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, a display of "Tomonashi is a general Yatsushiro" is performed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In the example of the effect, the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be performed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is performed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the displaying of the preparing image RDY is performed. The game may be ended and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 62 (b1) to FIG. 62 (b4) show an example of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in gold and is the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. The family crest 224E also emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 62 (b1) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (b2) to FIG. 62 (b4), in the tutorial display section TT1, a character of swordsman scrolls in from below and moves the line of sight continuously from the top of the head to the foot It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled by. Also, as shown in FIG. 62 (b4), after the foot of the sword character is displayed, the sword character is scrolled in such a manner that the line of sight moves continuously from the foot to the top of the head. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top and the foot of the sword character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, an example of displaying the entire character by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling on the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

  In this effect example, for example, in a state in which the explanation display is not resumed or in a state in which only the hold icon is hidden (a state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display is performed using a certain portion of the UI unit UI3. It can be said that an example to do is shown.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 63 can be applied can be divided into, for example, the first special view start opening and the second special view start opening per one start opening, and the symbol in the normal game state There is a so-called MAX8 machine (sometimes referred to as an eight-in-one machine) that can hold eight variable displays. Here, the MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement and four pedestals are formed in a staggered arrangement so that eight reserve icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 are held, so seven holding icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the holding icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 63 (a1), "Panda is the master of the temple" is displayed and the explanation display is It is In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 63 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a1), four special figures 1 are reserved and it is reported that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  Further, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 63 (a2), it is shown that the game ball has won the second special view starting opening and the holding of the special view 1 and the special view 2 has become eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to 7th hold icon h7 and the fluctuation icon h0 which are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyelid that imitates the face of the eyelid. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pong" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 and the effect example in which the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are simultaneously changed are shown when the hold is full. In this presentation example, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon in which the display mode of the eyebrows is displayed may be notified.

  FIG. 63 (b1) shows that a sword strike is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 63 (b1), the second holding number display is displayed, and according to the second holding number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (b1) Four are reserved, and it is notified that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  FIG. 63 (b 2) shows that the game ball has won in the second special view starting opening, and the number of reservations of special views 1 and 2 has reached eight in total. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special views 1 are suspended and four special views 2 are suspended, and the speaker 120 Then, a voice "pong" is output to notify that the hold is full.

  In FIG. 63 (b3), it is shown that the game is lost in the super reach, and the presentation of the sword strike is finished and the display of the castle town stage is returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. In addition, since the display is full during execution of the sword strike, the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. In this rendering example, when the display is full while the UI unit UI3 is hidden due to the super reach, when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed. It is shown about the example of presentation which changes a display mode.

  FIGS. 63 (c1) to 63 (c4) are diagrams for explaining another mode of the effect example shown in FIGS. 63 (b1) to 63 (b3). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 63 (c1) to FIG. 63 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 63 (b1) to FIG. 63 (b2), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 63 (c3), it is shown that the game is lost in the super reach, and the presentation of the sword strike is finished and the display of the castle town stage is returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. Also, in this example of rendering, the game was full during execution of the Swordsman reach effect, but the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 and the suspension icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full suspension is achieved. The letter "MAX" indicating that the change is made is displayed at the top of the variation icon h0. Thereafter, the symbol is fixedly displayed in a state where the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 does not change.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 63 (c 4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move onto the corresponding pedestals. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c4), variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and an explanatory display is performed.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the example of effects shown in FIGS. 64 (a1) to (a3) and 64 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a reserved icon display area, a tutorial display area TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is displayed integrally with the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, also in this demonstration example, when it becomes super reach, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, display is performed without frame out. You may leave it alone. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Further, in this presentation example, the image in preparation can be displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. A reserved icon display area is formed at the center of the UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 64 (a1). The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and variation icons are displayed in a mode of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (a1), two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, so two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is disposed on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 64 (a1), "Preliminary icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Jojo town stage" is displayed, It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Toku 1 and Toku 2 is also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224F and a general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (a2), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is switched to the first preparation image RDY1 is shown. The first preparation image RDY1 has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (a3), a state is shown in which the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display section ST2 is switched to the fourth preparation image RDY4. The fourth preparation image RDY 4 has a green background color and is a default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the image under preparation is displayed in each of the plurality of explanatory display parts.

  Fig. 64 (b1) to Fig. 64 (b2) are diagrams showing another example of effect following Fig. 64 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 64 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 64 (a2), the description is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (b2), the fourth ready-for-ready image RDY4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while continuing to display the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. It is shown that the image is displayed at a position shifted upward more than that. That is, it is shown that the image in preparation overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT3 as a third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the eyelid character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The whistle character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (c1), in response to the speech display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display of "here" is made on the blowout part TT3, and the conversation announcement continues. Here, the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative pattern, but the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 may overlap with the first decorative pattern. In addition, the brow character GY1 and the blowout part TT3 may be arranged at a position not overlapping the first decorative pattern. Also, the spider character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the spider character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The brow character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of the princess of the little princess and the character GY1 of the beard may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 becomes non-display may be the timing after the crow character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the crow character GY1 is displayed It is also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased may be the same timing as the timing at which the decoy character GY1 is displayed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Also, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (c2), it is shown that the family crest 224E ascends from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, after moving, the family crest 224E completely covers the holding display frame FL1 and moves a part of the first holding icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one part of the balloon part TT2. It covers each part.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the expansion animation (expansion animation) of the holding display frame FL1 is performed, and the holding display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest product 224E It is shown that it has appeared above than. That is, it can be said that a portion where the pending display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest 224E appears. Further, although the suspension display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps with the blowout part TT2 and overlaps with the blowout part TT2, it does not overlap with the blowout part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this example of presentation, there may be cases where the speech display preview (the blowout part TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the holding display frame FL1 is expanded. Thus, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expansion display mode. In this example of presentation, although the figure of reservation display frame FL1 before expansion and reservation display frame FL1 after expansion is expressed, that by which expansion display frame FL1 expands in a step-by-step manner is included in extended animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja appears in the upper part of the holding display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the part c is not overlapped with the family crest 224E.

  FIG. 64 (c5) shows that the family crest 224E descends to the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 64 (c6) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1, and the display of the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display area TT1 explodes is performed. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to have an expectation that the tutorial display section TT1 performs preliminary display and the reliability to the big hit may become high.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (c7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is considered to be the default display mode. In this effect, in place of the image RDY being prepared, the timer advance notice may be displayed and the timer advance notice may be started, the mini game may be started, or the advance notice may be displayed. .

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the extension effect of the hold display frame in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this effect example, a reserved icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, which respectively constitute a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a1), four pending icons are accommodated in each frame in the pending icon display area, and the second of the first pending icon h11 to the fourth pending icon h14 is displayed. The hold icon h12 is a display mode (for example, a display mode lit in blue) of the prefetch notice, and the other hold icons are set as the default display mode. Further, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and during the symbol variation display, the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area. Here, the area where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT7 displays the image RDY being prepared. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In this example of presentation, none of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a1), the family crest item 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (a2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. The enlargement display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually enlarged. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a2), the hold display frame containing the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded mode. Further, in the example of the effect, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the holding display frame, but the image under preparation RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display unit TT7 is separated and displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen. At this time, the image under preparation RDY may overlap a part of the holding display frame and the holding icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a3), the luminescent color of the household object 224E emitting blue changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the second hold icon h12 displayed in an enlarged manner is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol variation display required for the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the display mode is returned to the default. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually reduced. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this manner, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this presentation example, the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears due to the reduced display of the reserved icon display area is displayed in such a manner that the image RDY being prepared is accommodated.

  FIGS. 65 (b1) to (b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIGS. 65 (a1) to (a5). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 65 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 65 (a1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (b2), a state is shown in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (a2) and described above. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 65 (b2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. Although the UI unit UI2 is not displayed in the display in the sub-window WP3, it may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. Here, FIG. 66 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 67 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 68 is a view showing a display example of the ball removal error display. FIG. In addition, although the display position of the warning display of the ball extraction error (hereinafter referred to as “ball extraction error display”) is taken as a fixed place, it can be appropriately set which position is used as the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including variations of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is to be erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated to cancel the bottom plate full tank condition and the ball removal error is removed. Further, in the example of effect shown below, although the display example of the ball removal error display is shown, it is also applicable to, for example, a door opening error or the like that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, when the ball removal error display is performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 66 (a1) to (a2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display in the case where a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a1), a state is shown in which a ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, the message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to urge the player to produce the game balls stored in the lower tray and cancel the lower tray full-tank state.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a2), a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 where the shutter image is opened and the image RDY is displayed. It is shown that it is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to withdraw the ball when the display of the image under preparation RDY is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image under preparation RDY.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 66 (b1) to FIG. 66 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (c1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b1), a state is shown in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball pullout error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 Is easily visible. As a result, it may be possible to notice the remaining time display meter MT4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 66 (c1) to FIG. 66 (c2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 38 (b4) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (c1), the ball pullout error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the sword sword of the hostile, but overlaps with the translucent button image 136q related to the united animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, it is also possible for the ball removal error display ERR1 to overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the merging animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (c2), when the translucent button image 139q approaches, a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the united animation by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is finished by simultaneously viewing the removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 66 (d1) to FIG. 66 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 45 (f) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (d2), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display section TT1 to inform that the second timer announcement effect is started, but the in-preparation image RDY is redisplayed. Sometimes, the first preparing image RDY is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped by a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 which has not been overlapped in the tutorial display part TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the magnified image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to open the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball extraction error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 66 (e1) to FIG. 66 (e2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 46 (a5) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (e1), a part of the unballoon error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the sword character is drawn, but the character of the maroon is drawn Areas do not overlap.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (e2), as a result of the player performing a long press operation on the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and when A part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped with the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman character of the enemy role by looking at the display without the ball. In addition, it may be possible to notice an error indication ERR1 of the open ball error by looking at the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman of the enemy character. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. At the same time, give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the character between the character of the lord and the character of the sword sword of the enemy is finished by simultaneously viewing the merits of the error ERR1 of the ball and the character of the sword sword of the character of the enemy. There are times when you can.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 66 (f1) to FIG. 66 (f2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (e) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (f1), a state is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second ready image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the character "Go" is displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY was displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (f2), the character "Go" is erased together with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display unit TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation to move up. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. In addition, it is not necessary for the ball extraction error display ERR1 to overlap the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second ready image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it is possible to give an opportunity to pull out the ball when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished by simultaneously looking at the ball removing error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. There is a case.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 67 (a1) to FIG. 67 (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 51 (a3) to FIG. 51 (a4) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the image RDY1 under preparation in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 is overlapped for a part of the plurality of images in preparation. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of in-provision images (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by viewing a plurality of images being prepared. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image under preparation is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 67 (b1) to FIG. 67 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 51 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b2), the third preparation-ready image RDY3 is displayed so that the eyelid character GII is adjacent. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 67 (a2), since the image under preparation (Chibi Princess character CHM) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, the error display ERR1 for the ball is displayed It is not overlapped even against.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 67 (c1) to FIG. 67 (c2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 53 (b) to FIG. 53 (e). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 53 (b), a state is shown in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed substantially at the center of the left advance notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 53 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image under preparation RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the chance up cut-in image WCI. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to drop the ball when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 67 (d1) to FIG. 67 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (d1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55 (b1), a state is shown in which the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (d2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display (main display) related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 67 (d2) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 67 (e1) to FIG. 67 (e2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 55 (d1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (e1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (d1), a state is shown in which the ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. It is shown that it is being done. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not change the display position even when the shake vision effect is performed, and does not tilt, and the display state is maintained. At this time, when the background image is inclined, the margin is black. Then, when a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps with the margin, for example, when the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin and a part is It may be difficult to view.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 67 (f1) to FIG. 67 (f2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 56 (a1) to FIG. 56 (a2) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (f1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 56 (a1), it is shown that the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted and displayed is shown. It is done. At this time, the at-a-glance error display ERR1 at least partially overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the UI unit UI3 rising. That is, as the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice occurrence of effects in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing that the UI unit UI3 lifts. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect in the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 68 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 58 (d) to (e). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 58 (d), a state in which a part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped on the upper part of the tutorial display TT1 is It is shown. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this presentation example, it is shown that the overlap state of the unballoon error display ERR1 with the UI unit UI3 is canceled while the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward by the UI unit FO animation.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 68 (b1) to FIG. 68 (b2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 62 (a3) to FIG. 62 (a5) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 62 (a3), a state in which a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the UI wipe display WP4 is It is shown. At this time, the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI wipe display unit WP4 does not overlap with the character of the lady.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lady on the bike is moved to the right end of the UI wipe display WP5. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character on the motorcycle with the UI wipe display WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the effect display in the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI wipe display unit WP3.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 68 (c1) to FIG. 68 (c2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (b1), the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part is over the decorative symbol. It is shown how to wrap. In addition, it does not overlap to other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (c2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 68 (c2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the subwindow WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. At this time, a part of the extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the subwindow WP3 and another part overlaps the reserved icon display area. The pop-up error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, it may be possible to notice a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged and displayed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. Also, at the same time as watching the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the ball withdrawal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area, give a trigger to open the ball when the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area is finished. There are times when you can.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 68 (d1) to FIG. 68 (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d1), the display of “Please remove the ball” is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The removal-of-balls error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d2) has the same mode as the removal-of-balls error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be considered to be difficult to view.

  The unrounding error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d3) is another display mode of the unrounding error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d2), and the white background display "Please pull out the sphere" is displayed. It is considered as the aspect represented by.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described, but the decorative symbol display device It goes without saying that the invention is applicable even to a pachinko machine 100 provided with only one. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 69 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 69, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  FIG. 70 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 70) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown in FIG. 70) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being played. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three sheets are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is performed to perform a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not. It is determined whether to make the player relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. The operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. At the upper part of the front door 1002, a rendering device 1080 is disposed. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of the door member 1063 (shown in FIG. When the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1000 It has a structure that appears on the It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, consisting of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means or the third operation means) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of the second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, a display panel 1070 displaying a title or the like of a device can be protruded toward the front side. In addition, a light emitting diode (LED) is incorporated in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 70 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operating means (button) like the transmitting portion 191, and an example of the operating means (for example, It corresponds to one example of the operation means, and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091 and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of types of display may be a first display [for example, a change effect display (display change of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 35 (f) to FIG. Advance effect display etc.]
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [for example, a red display mode holding icon shown in FIG. 35 (h), etc.],
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 35 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display representing waiting for the display start of a certain advance display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p), etc.],
After the display of the first display is started, the display of the second display may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 35 (f) to FIG. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc., after the hold change prior presentation display due to
The third display may be started in the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), under preparation in a state where the UI unit UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed] Display of image RDY is started, etc.],
The display may end in the second state in the third state in which the display is started in the first state [e.g., as shown in FIG. The image under preparation RDY whose display is started when the unit UI3 is displayed is such that display is ended when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state [eg, FIG. 35 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in a non-display state, etc.]
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q) and the like] may be started [eg, FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, an iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice about a symbol change display being executed [for example, an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q) is a notice display notifying that a big hit is confirmed, etc.]
The second state may occur after the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (l) to FIG. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in the sword reach].
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  Further, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [eg, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (a)],”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is in the non-display state, the hold is not displayed. Icon is not displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display [for example, FIG. As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the ready image RDY shown in FIG. 35 (d) And the display position of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, the display mode of gold shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is easy to be decidedly displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (e) is displayed in a golden display mode, the display mode of the holding icon is likely to change. , Big hit symbol is easy to be decidedly displayed etc. in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of pre-reading, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, the display mode of gold shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is easily started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the red display mode hold icon is easily displayed. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

Also, at least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [eg, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed on the UI unit UI3. Overlapping etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may also overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured to Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

[Also, the first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap. [For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap, or even if the displays other than the first display and the sixth display are not configured to overlap. Good. Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (swords reach) shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG. (Q) etc.] can be executed,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started, and for example, the super reach shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG. And so on), etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed [for example, a state in which a super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG. 35 (q) is being performed] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p), etc.]”,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG.
The certain advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the certain effect is to be started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p), the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Notices the display of the steel plate image TP by sticking to the area around the target TGT, etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain advance notice may give notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give notice of something other than the fact that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain advance notice may always give notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give notice of a certain effect being started.

  In addition, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display, and a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display. Also, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain advance notice.

  Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or displays other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. i) As shown in (j) of the figure, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [for example, FIG. As shown in h), a ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.], and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned. "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display in a certain symbol variation display may be The started first display may be erased other than before the start of the symbol variation display to be started next. In addition, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display may be started in a certain symbol fluctuation display. The first displayed display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [eg, as shown in FIG. 41 (a4), the character of “superheat” in the tutorial display section TT1 Notice display consisting of may be displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [for example, the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (b6) and the like],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 38 (b1) to FIG. 38 (b6), the deca-button image 136aL is prepared) The display is started after the display of the image RDY is started, etc.],
The certain effect is started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (b6), an iron plate Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b1) to FIG. (B6), the image RDY being prepared Is displayed before the display of the decal button image 136aL starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 38 (b 4) to FIG.
The eighth display is a display for previewing that the display of the seventh display is to be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45 (a)],”
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), two images RDY1 and RDY2 may be displayed during preparation),
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is completed [for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the in-provision image RDY enlarged and displayed overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [for example, in FIG. 45 (b) to FIG. (K) As shown, the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in the tenth display [for example, FIG. Description display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 35A, the instruction display is on the tutorial display unit TT1 Etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the image under preparation RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a character relating to the first display [the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (display of the hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. Character of ninja shown in), etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, for example, the hold icon of the red display mode shown in FIG.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [in preparation display, for example, an preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 35 (d)],
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display may be a notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p) or FIG. 37 (b3) to FIG. It is a display showing that it is waiting for the display start of the timer announcement effect etc. shown in
It is configured that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and then the hold icon is displayed after the hold change advance effect display by the character is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f) to FIG. 35 (h), the first hold icon is displayed after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 is changing from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
In the first state, the third display may be started, and the display of the in-provision display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, as illustrated in FIG. As shown in, when the UI unit UI3 displaying the suspension icons h11 and h12 is displayed, the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, etc.],
The third display whose display has been started in the first state is configured such that the display may end in the second state, and the display is started when the hold icon is displayed. In the preparation display, the display ends when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 35D to 35N, the display is started when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The display of the image under preparation RDY is terminated when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display ends in the display state, the mini game or timer advance notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (n) to FIG. (O), the display of the preparation image RDY is After the completion, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in the non-display state, or as shown in FIG. 37 (b1) to FIG. After the display is completed, the timer announcement effect is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the certain advance notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, a display of an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q) or a button advance notice etc. by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (c 4)] Is configured so that the notice is started when the display result of the mini game is a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, for example, in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. (Q) As shown, when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in (c1) to (c4) of FIG. 38, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice is completed. Button preview effect is started by Deca button 136aL, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
It is configured to be in the second state after the first state, and may shift to a state in which the hold icon can not be displayed from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (l) to (m), when transitioning to swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is made non-display, and transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the non-display state Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [e.g., the state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc., before the transition to the sword reach ”,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [eg, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is made non-displayed in the sword reach, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  Further, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, the third display whose display is started in the first state may end the display in the third state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Also, it is configured that a certain effect may be started after the certain advance notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, a certain preliminary announcement display may not be a true preliminary announcement display, but may be a false preliminary announcement display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Also, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  In addition, the character is not limited to a person, but may be a display of a mini item system such as a notice item.

  Also, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", "the second display after the display of the first display is started. The display to start the display of may be made ". Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Moreover, "it is comprised so that it may become the said 2nd state after the said 1st state" may be "the said 2nd state following the said 1st state." It may be configured as ".

  In addition, after the first state, there may be a transition to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through the other state (for example, the 3rd state or the 3rd state) after the 1st state, it may shift to the 2nd state. In addition, in a state in which one symbol variation display is made, the first state may be shifted to the second state.

  Alternatively, a certain effect may fade in while a certain advance notice fades out.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG.
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
In the state where the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable, and the hold icon may be displayed in a state where an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol in change.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the display of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the display of the third display, a display of a part different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative symbol May be

  The sixth display may also include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

  Also, the sixth display may include the display of the base of the variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and the hold icon is displayed. In the above state, a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is overlapped with the display under preparation and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 35D, the image under preparation RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. It is displayed overlapping on the display unit TT1, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the display under preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed The display position of the display under preparation in the position and the non-display state of the hold icon is the same, for example, the display position of the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 35 (d) and the image in preparation shown in FIG. The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, for example, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is configured to be easier to be started [The display of the hold icon is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the preview preview, the hold icon of the display mode of the preview preview is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. When displayed in the golden display mode, the red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured such that the display of the second display is more likely to start, "in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when no change occurs. "" May be.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, for example, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed display [The hold icon display is displayed than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice. If the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice, the jackpot is likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode , The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, so it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, “in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth display does not change. "" May be.

Also, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display. [At least a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is For example, as shown in (f) of FIG. 35, a part of the UI unit UI3 is over the ninja character NJ4 as shown in FIG. Being wrapped etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, the display may be configured such that at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping only the first display, or the display of at least a portion of the sixth display is It may be configured such that displays other than the first display may be displayed overlapping. In addition, the display may be configured such that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that it may be overlapped and not displayed on one display.

  In addition, only at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or the display other than at least a part of the display of the sixth display The display may also be configured to be displayed overlapping with the first display.

  In addition, the display of a part of the sixth display may be configured to be displayed overlapping the first display, or all the displays of the sixth display may be displayed on the first display. It may be configured to be displayed overlapping.

  Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. The image including the pending icon display area is displayed in a state in which both the image relating to the image including the pending icon display area and the character relating to the change effect display (the pending change advance presentation display) of the pending icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the character NJ4 of the ninja, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1). Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with any display other than the first display. May be configured. In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. When both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  Also, even if only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be done. Also, even if only the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state other than the state in which both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be configured.

  Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (swords reach) shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. It is a state etc. before the super reach (Swordsman reach) shown in figure (q) is started],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, a super reach (word Reach is being executed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

  The first state may be a reach state before developing into an SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is in progress in the certain change.

  Also, the first state is a state before developing into an SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reaching state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state of reach execution.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a timer advance notice display [for example, a display of a timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 38 (b 3) to FIG.
A game stand that features. "
I also explained about

  The timer advance notice may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of types of timer advance notices, it may be a certain kind of timer advance notice.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (q), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Also, when there are multiple types of mini games, it may be a type of mini game.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button advance effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (b6), etc.]”,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be In addition, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q), etc.]”
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  Here, only the fifth display may be displayed as an effect, or an indication other than the fifth display may be displayed as an effect. May be Further, the fifth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or may be configured so that the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, or when the fifth display is displayed. If the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed.

  Also, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display aspect and a certain advance display aspect is displayed only in a certain aspect There may be.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started. [The display under preparation whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (i) to FIG. (J) In preparation, the image RDY is being displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [a certain symbol A character relating to a change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has been started in the variable display is erased before the next symbol fluctuation display is started, for example, FIG. As shown in (h) through (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol change display to be started next is started, It may be configured that the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased other than before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started. In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or a certain symbol variation The first display whose display is started in the display may be configured so that it may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  Note that a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. In addition, a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state).

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed [the notice is performed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a4), there may be a case where a notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [a button or a lever, for example, effect button 136 etc.]" is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [display of an image of a button or a lever, for example, a deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts to be displayed after the third display is started, and the display of images of buttons and levers is started to be displayed after the display in progress is started, For example, as shown in (b1) to (b6) of FIG. 38, the Deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the display of the image RDY being prepared, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started, and when the button (or the lever is operated during the display of the image of the button or the lever, the notice is given) The iron plate image TP is displayed, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG.
The third display is a display which is ended before the display of the seventh display is started. [In preparation display is ended before the display of the button or the lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b1) to FIG. 38 (b6), the image under preparation RDY is such that the display is terminated before the start of the display of the decal button image 136aL, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

  The seventh display may be a big button image among the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the deca-button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the deca-button image is displayed.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the button image of the normal color is displayed and when the button image of the special color is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more easily determined when the button image of the special color is displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and in the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the big hit symbol is in the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 38 (b 4) to FIG.
The eighth display is a display for previewing that the display of the seventh display is to be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45 (a)],”
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above-mentioned third displays may be displayed. [The two in-provision displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 48A, two in-provision images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done etc],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes [the display of the display in progress of one of the two displays in progress The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [In preparation display in which the display mode has changed overlap with the change icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The displayed preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [two in preparation displays are displayed. In this case, all are digested in the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (b) to FIG. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example,“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 35 (a). It is the displayed explanation etc.],
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed, and [an explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the instruction display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [In preparation display is displayed in a specific display area where an explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in), the in-provisioning image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc. where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “display indicating that the display start of a certain advance notice display is waiting” means “character display in preparation [for example,“ in preparation ”in preparation image RDY shown in FIG. Display of letters etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display [ball drop display, for example, ball drop error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1), etc.]”.
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball extraction error display ERR1, the character display of "Please pull the ball" is prompted to open the ball, etc.,
In a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display At least a part of the in-provision display is overlapped with the in-progress display in a state where both the in-provision display and the out-of-ball display are displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2) In preparation, the image RDY is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or a display prompting other than the game ball to be ejected. Further, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

  Further, the eleventh display may be a display prompting to discharge only the game balls, or a display prompting to discharge other than the game balls.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display without fail May be displayed, and in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, displays other than at least a part of the third display are overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. And in a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of a part of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. May be

In addition, in a state in which both the certain advance notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain advance notice display is overlapped and displayed on the eleventh display. When at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice is overlapped with the ball withdrawal display in a state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball withdrawal display are displayed, for example, As shown in 66 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped only with the eleventh display. The display may be configured, and in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh Or at least a part of the notice may be displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh in a state where both the notice and the eleventh display are displayed. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both of the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state other than the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. It is preferable that all the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh when both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed. May be

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a pachinko machine [ball-and-ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a slot machine [rolling-type game machine],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Although the hold icon may be used as a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is held, this can be realized according to this game console.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 71 to 90 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 71 to 90, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in FIG.

  First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example will be described using FIG. 71 (1). At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 and the common figure reservation number aa5 , The fourth pattern aa6 of the common figure is displayed. The special figure 1 reserve number aa1 is a display representing the reserve number of the special figure 1 by a number, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3 is a display representing the reserve number of the special figure 2 by a number, and the common drawing reserve number aa5 is a common drawing Is a display representing the number of reservations of In the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area c capable of displaying a variation icon is provided. The right side of the variation icon display area c is the hold icon display area, and in the example shown in FIG. 71 (1), the special view 1 hold icon a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special view 2 hold icon b1, b2, b3. Are displayed side by side so that they alternate in this order from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine in which a mechanism is provided on the game board in which gaming balls are alternately winning at the special figure 1 starting opening and the special figure 2 starting opening. . In the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided. In the display area d, a tutorial display, a message display and the like are displayed, and in the case where there is no content to be displayed in particular, a character string image of “under preparation” is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 71 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 71 (1) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "department 3-decoration 4-decoration 8", which is an out-of-pattern aspect, is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 71 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). There is. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 displayed in the reserve icon display area becomes the variation icon c1 and moves to the variation icon display area c The special view 1 reserve icon a2 to a4 and the special view 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 move to the left.

  FIG. 71 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 71 (4) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 71 (5) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the conversation advance notice is started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice may be started or may not be started at a predetermined probability.

  FIG. 71 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a character image of a brow (hereinafter, referred to as "browsing") g2 is displayed. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 71 (7) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 71 (8) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (9) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to an eyebrow's character image (hereinafter referred to as an eyebrow) g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to 71 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2.

  FIG. 71 (11) shows a state where display of a character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h 1 including a character image of “「 ”is started. The character name display h1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 71 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 71 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 71 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the hall g1 and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the hall g1.

  FIG. 71 (16) shows a state in which the speech display which is a speech (line) of the display g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 71 (16), a character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 71 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 71 (18), a character string image of “morning weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (19) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as speech display.

  FIG. 71 (20) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed.

  FIG. 71 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 71 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 71 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 71 (24) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (25) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right.

  FIG. 71 (26) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right.

  FIG. 71 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 71 (28) shows a state where display of the character name h2 including the character image of "爺" is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 71 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (31) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the eyelid g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the eye g2.

  FIG. 71 (33) shows a state in which the speech display which is a speech (line) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 71 (33), the character image of "o" is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 71 (34), the character string image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 71 (35), a character string image of “Having weather for lunch” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed.

  FIG. 71 (37) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the end of the conversation advance notice display.

  FIG. 71 (38) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c after the end of the conversation advance notice display. Although illustration of the following is omitted, in the present example, reach effect with “decoration 7” is started thereafter. In addition, reach presentation may not be started after the end of conversation advance notice display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is the first display (the first serif announcement display shown in FIG. 71 (19)) and the second display (the second display (FIG. 71 (36)). The notice can be displayed. The first display includes a hall g1 displayed in FIG. 71 (19), a balloon display i1, a speech display in the balloon display i1, and a character name display h1. The second display includes the bag g2, the balloon display i2, the dialog display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2 displayed in FIG. 71 (36). A first conversation notice is displayed on the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are preliminary display of the change. Further, in the present example, the first display is displayed after the eyelid g2 is displayed in FIGS. 71 (6) to (8).爺 g2 may be displayed prior to the display of the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including the g 2 is displayed. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 72 (1) to (38) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 72 (1) to 72 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 72 (7) to (10) show a state in which the hall g1 is moving to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 72 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the toe g1 is displayed from the beginning before the serif display of the toe is displayed in FIG. 72 (19), and no other character such as the toe g2 is displayed. Thus, 爺 g2 may not be displayed prior to the display of the first display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 73 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 73 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (22), so the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 73 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation advance notice is continued, a princess character image g3 (hereinafter referred to as "hime") is displayed. The princess g3 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 73 (24) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 73 (25) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 73 (26) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the eyebrow g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the right.爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 73 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (27) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character not appearing in the second display shown in FIG. 73 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by giving a preliminary notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 73 (36). In some cases, it is possible to show the player's intention and to improve the player's interest.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 74 (1) to (38). FIGS. 74 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 74 (1) to 74 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 74 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 74 (7) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 74 (8) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 74 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 changes to a temple g1 while the princess g3 moves to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 74 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 74 (10). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the character is different when the first display is displayed by giving a preliminary notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 74 (10). In some cases, it is possible to show the player's intention and to improve the player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 75 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 75 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (25), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 75 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 75 (27) shows a state where the princess g3 has stopped.

  FIG. 75 (28) shows a state in which the display of the character name h3 including the character image of "hime" is started. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 75 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 75 (30) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 75 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 75 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 75 (33) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 75 (33), the character image of "afternoon" is displayed.

  FIG. 75 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 75 (34), a character string image of "afternoon weather" is displayed.

  FIG. 75 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 75 (35), a character string image of "afternoon weather" is displayed.

  FIG. 75 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "mark of rain" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 75 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38), the description thereof is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is the first display (the first serif notice display shown in FIG. 75 (19)) and the second display (the second display (FIG. 75 (36)). The notice can be displayed. The first display includes a hall g1 displayed in FIG. 75 (19), a balloon display i1, a speech display in the balloon display i1, and a character name display h1. The second display includes the princess g3 displayed in FIG. 75 (36), the balloon display i3, the speech display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3. A first conversation notice is displayed on the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are preliminary display of the change. Further, in this example, after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 75 (6) to (8), 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 75 (23) to (25). It is a Gase notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display shown in. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by giving a preliminary notice that displays the 爺 g2 that does not appear in the conversational notice display, it is possible to make the character different when the conversational advance display is displayed, and poke the player's will In some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 76 (1) to (38). 76 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 76 (1) to 76 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 76 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed first. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 76 (7) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 76 (8) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 76 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 76 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during movement animation (during movement display) of the character, and movement display of three character images is displayed. Note that, in the present example, the message is displayed in the order of 爺 g2, the princess g3, and the temple g1, but the message may be displayed in the order of the princess g3, 爺 g2, and the temple g1. In addition, four or more character images may be displayed during movement display of the character image.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 77 (1) to (38). 77 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 77 (1) to 77 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 77 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 77 (7) shows a state in which the temple g1 changes to 爺 g2 while the temple g1 moves to the left.爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 77 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 77 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 77 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (6) to (10), three characters go round in the order of character g1, g2, g3, and g1 during the movement animation display of the character. Is displayed. Note that four or more characters may be displayed so as to make a round or a half round while displaying the movement animation of the character. Further, during the movement animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 77 (23) to (27), a plurality of character images may be displayed so as to make a round.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 78 (1) to (38). 77 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 77 (1) to 77 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 78 (7) shows a state in which the temple g1 changes to 爺 g2 while the temple g1 moves to the left.爺 g2 is moving to the left. Note that the display g1 may be changed to display g2 when the entire display g1 shown in FIG. 78 (6) is not displayed.

  FIG. 78 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 78 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 changes to the eyebrow g2 while the princess g3 moves to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 78 (10) shows a state in which the toe g1 stops after the toe g2 changes to the toe g1 while the toe g2 moves to the left. Note that it may be changed to g1 after or when g2 stops.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 78 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (6) to (10), three characters are looped in the order of the character images g1, g2, g3, g2, and g1 during the movement animation display of the character. It will be displayed as The character may change in the reverse direction such as princess g 3, 爺 g 2, and hall g 1 after changing in the order of hall g 1, 爺 g 2, and princess g 3. In addition, during the movement animation display of the character, four or more characters may make a round and may be displayed so as to change in the opposite direction to the round. Further, during the movement animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 78 (23) to (27), a display in which the character changes as shown in FIGS. 78 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 79 (1) to (38). 79 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 79 (1) to 79 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 79 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed first. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 79 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the left. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 79 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the eyebrow g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 79 (9) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the expression of the temple g1 changes while the temple g1 moves to the left. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (10) shows a state in which the toe g1 has stopped after the expression of the toe g1 has changed. Note that an animation may be displayed in which the expression of the hall g1 changes after the hall g1 stops or simultaneously with the stop. Further, in this example, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the speech g1 displayed in the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 79 (19) is longer than the display period of the g2. Thus, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the character displayed in the conversation advance notice may be the longest.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 79 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (22), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 79 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 79 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 79 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 79 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped. Note that an animation may be displayed in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes after or when the eyelid g2 stops.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 79 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (38) to (38), the description will be omitted. As in the present example, a display may be displayed in which the mode (for example, expression) of the character changes while the movement animation of the character is displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 80 (1) to (40) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the state shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 74 (36), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 80 (2) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 80 (3) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 80 (4) shows a state in which the decoration symbol of the pseudo-series is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The decoration symbol of the pseudo ream is displayed when the effect display of the pseudo ream is performed. The pseudo ream is an effect of performing pseudo fluctuation as if variable display of a decorative symbol has been performed a plurality of times during one special figure fluctuation game, and is a notice effect of the fluctuation. After the decorative symbol of the pseudo ream is displayed, the second of the variable display of the decoration symbol (the second time of pseudo ream) is started.

  FIG. 80 (5) shows a state in which the second run of the pseudo run has been started. Further, the movable body 700 shown in FIG. 17 has moved upward and stopped. Further, during the second execution of the pseudo run, “× 2” is displayed in the display area d, and it is informed that the second run of the pseudo run is being performed.

  FIG. 80 (6) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 80 (7) shows a state where the operation valid period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 80 (8) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is started to be displayed. The first conversation advance notice display is the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 80 (1). Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the second conversation announcement may be started, or the second conversation announcement may not be started at a predetermined probability. May be

  FIG. 80 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation announcement display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 80 (10) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (11) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (12) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (13) shows a state in which the princess g3 has stopped. The character movement animations shown in FIGS. 80 (9)-(13) are shown in FIGS. 71 (6)-(10), 73 (6)-(10) and 74 (6)-(10), respectively. 75 (6) to (10), FIGS. 76 (6) to (10), 77 (6) to (10), 78 (6) to (10), 79 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

  FIG. 80 (14) shows a state where the display of the character name display h3 is started. The character name display h3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 80 (15) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (16) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (17) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (18) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 have stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 80 (19) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 80 (19), the character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (20) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 80 (21), the character string image of “afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (21) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 80 (21), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (22) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "mark of rain" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  FIG. 80 (23) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed.

  FIG. 80 (24) shows the state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 80 (25) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 80 (26) shows the state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 80 (27) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (28) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (29) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right.

  FIG. 80 (30) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 80 (31) shows a state where display of the character name h2 including the character image of "爺" has been started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 80 (32) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (33) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (35) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the eyelid g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the eye g2.

  FIG. 80 (36) shows a state in which speech display as a speech (line) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 80 (36), the character image of "o" is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (37) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 80 (37), the character string image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (38) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 80 (38), a character string image of "Half weather for lunch" is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (39) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed. Further, the aspect of the balloon display i2 is changing from white to blue, and the aspect of the character name display h2 is changing from white to blue. The big hit reliability is set higher for blue than for white. As described above, in the second conversation advance notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

  FIG. 80 (40) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the end of the conversation advance notice display. Although illustration of the following is omitted, in the present example, reach effect with “decoration 7” is started thereafter.

  In this example, after the first conversation announcement (the first conversation announcement) shown in FIG. 80 (1) is displayed, the second conversation announcement (the second conversation shown in FIG. 80 (39) is displayed). Conversation notice is displayed. In this manner, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure change game. Note that the jackpot reliability may be set to be higher as the number of times of conversation advance notice display is larger.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 81 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 81 (1) to (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 81 (16) to (18) show a state in which movement display (movement animation) of speech display is displayed. The speech display moves from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left in the balloon display h1. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  FIG. 81 (19) shows a state in which the speech display has stopped within the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 81 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (20) to (32), the description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 81 (33) to (35) show a state in which movement display (movement animation) of speech display is displayed. The speech display moves from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left in the balloon display h2. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  FIG. 81 (36) shows a state in which the speech display has stopped within the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 81 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the moving animation of the speech display is displayed. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 82 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to 82 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 82 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 82 (7) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 82 (8) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 82 (9) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is changed to an eyebrow's character image (hereinafter referred to as an eyebrow) g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 82 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to 82 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2.

  FIG. 82 (11) shows a state where display of a character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h 1 including a character image of “「 ”is started. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 82 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 82 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 82 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 82 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the hall g1 and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the hall g1.

  FIG. 82 (16) shows a state in which the speech display which is a speech (line) of the display g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 82 (16), a character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 82 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 82 (18), a character string image of “morning weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (19) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as speech display. In this example, compared with FIG. 71 (19), a hallmark g1, a character name display h1, a balloon display h1, and a serif display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 82 (20) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed overlapping with a part (a part of the first display) of the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 82 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 82 (22) shows that the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 82 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation in which the character g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 82 (24) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with part of the display g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 82 (25) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 82 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 82 (27) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is stopped and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are stopped.

  Since the states shown in (28) to (38) in FIG. 82 are the same as the states shown in (28) to (38) in FIG. 71, the description will be omitted. In this example, at the start of the display of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation advance display, an animation in which the first display such as 殿 j1 moves is displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 83 (1) to (38). FIGS. 83 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 83 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to (22), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 83 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation in which the character g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 83 (24) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with part of the display g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 83 (25) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 83 (26) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display stop.

  FIG. 83 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped.

  In the states shown in FIGS. 83 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed as in the states shown in FIGS. 71 (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping with the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1 and the speech display. In this example, the moving animation of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation advance display is displayed overlapping with the first display such as jj1.

  FIGS. 83 (32) to (35) show the state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display h 2, similarly to the states shown in FIGS. 71 (32) to (35).

  FIG. 83 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed. In this example, the speech display in the balloon display h2 and the speech display in the balloon display h2 are displayed overlapping the speech display in the balloon display h1 and the speech display in the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 83 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 83 (37) and (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the second display such as 爺 g2 of the conversation advance display is displayed overlapping the first display such as jj1.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 84 (1) to (38). 84 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 84 (1) to 84 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 84 (6) to 84 (10) show a state in which the character movement animation is displayed as in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10). In this example, the display sizes of the g2 and g1 are displayed in larger sizes than the examples shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10).

  FIGS. 84 (11)-(19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are displayed as in FIGS. 71 (11)-(19). In this example, the display size of the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (19).

  FIG. 84 (20) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 84 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 84 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 84 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, simultaneously with the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation is displayed in which the display size of the display g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 84 (24) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right, and the display size of the speech display is reduced, as well as the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1.

FIG. 84 (25) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right, and the display size of the character display h1 and the character name display h1 and the balloon display h1 and the speech display is reduced.

  FIG. 84 (26) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right and the display size of the display g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1 and speech display is reduced.

  FIG. 84 (27) shows a state in which the animation in which the display size of the display g1 is stopped, and the display size of the character display h1 and the speech display is reduced is stopped. The display sizes of the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (36).

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (28) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the message g1 and the like in the conversation advance notice display is enlarged and displayed until the second display of the message g2 and the like starts to be displayed. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 84 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h2, and in this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display The display size may be overlapped with part of h2.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 85 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIG. 85 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 82 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.

FIG. 85 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (1).
FIG. 85 (2) shows a state in which the timer advance notice display j has been started. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer announcement display j performs countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, predetermined effects (for example, operation of the movable body and predetermined announcement display) are performed. Before the countdown is started, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

FIGS. 85 (3) and 85 (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 82 (3) and 82 (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 85 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (5).

  FIG. 85 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started as in FIG. 82 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started with the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a countdown display of 40 seconds is performed.

  In FIG. 85 (6) to (19), the conversation advance notice display is displayed as in FIG. 82 (6) to (19), and in the present example, the countdown indication of the timer advance notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 85 (6) to (19), the timer advance notice display j is displayed overlapping the characters g1 and g2 and the character name display h1, the balloon display i1 and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 85 (14) and later, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is not visible.

FIGS. 85 (20) and (21) show the same state as in FIGS. 82 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 85 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (5).

  FIG. 85 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice is continued as in FIG. 82 (23). Further, in FIG. 82 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer advance display j is 36.99 seconds.

  In FIGS. 85 (24) to (36), the conversation advance notice display is displayed as in FIG. 82 (24) to (36), and in this example, the countdown indication of the timer advance notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 85 (24) to (36), the timer advance notice display j is displayed overlapping the character 爺 g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 85 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is not visible.

  FIGS. 85 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 82 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. As described above, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer advance notice display j, other indications may be displayed (eg, a ball removal error indication, a door open error indication, another notice indication, a change effect indication of the hold icon) or the like. Further, as shown in the timer advance notice display j, the length of the display period of the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 85 (6) to (10) is as shown in FIG. 85 (19) to (36). The display h 1, the balloon display i 1, and the display period of the conversation notice display including the speech notice display are shorter than the display period.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 (1) to 86 (38), a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 86 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIG. 85 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 82 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.

FIG. 86 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (1).
FIG. 86 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k has moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the start of the display of the conversation advance notice display. The movable body k may reciprocate vertically and horizontally in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 between the start of the symbol variation display and the start of the reach effect.

FIGS. 86 (3), (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 82 (3), (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 85 (3) and 85 (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 86 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (5).

  In FIGS. 86 (6) to (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 82 (6) to (19). In this example, the movable body k displays characters g1 and g2 and character names At least a part of the h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display becomes invisible from the player.

FIGS. 86 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 82 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Further, in FIGS. 86 (20) and (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 86 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (22).

  FIG. 86 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued similarly to FIG. 82 (23). In FIGS. 86 (24)-(36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 82 (24)-(36), and in this example, the movable body k displays characters g1 and g2 and character name display At least a part of h1 and h2, the balloon display i1 and i2, and the speech display become invisible to the player.

  FIG. 86 (37) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 86 (38) shows a state in which reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. Thus, the moving effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation advance notice display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 87 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIGS. 87 (1) to (38), the same effects as those in the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.

Fig. 87 (1) shows the same state as Fig. 82 (1).
FIG. 87 (2) shows a state in which the design indication m is displayed by the light guide plate disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Like the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 35 to 68, the pachinko machine 100 of this example has a light guide plate disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can display the pattern display m by light emission of the light guide plate. It is. The pattern display m is displayed overlapping with the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (36), the pattern display m is displayed overlapping with the first display such as the g1 and the like and the second display such as the g2 and the like. As described above, the pattern display m or the error display (display of the ball removal error or the door open error) is over at least one of the first display such as g1 and the like and the second display such as the g2 and the like. May wrap

  FIG. 87 (38) shows a state in which reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the pattern display m is erased. Thus, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation advance notice display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 88 (1) to (38). FIGS. 88 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since FIGS. 88 (1) to 88 (5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 88 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the inside of the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the frame of the square are set to white, blue, and green in ascending order of the big hit reliability. In FIG. 88 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white. In addition, the conversation advance notice display of this example is the same as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 71 except that the character is displayed within a square frame.

  FIG. 88 (7) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 88 (9) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 has changed to the eyebrow g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left. The square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 89 (6) to 89 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2. The inside of the square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in white. Thus, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue and white. In addition, the order of the change of this color can be set arbitrarily. Note that this color change is performed during the character movement animation.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 88 (11) to (21), the hall g1 is displayed surrounded by a square frame, and except for the point that the inside of the frame is white, the state shown in FIGS. The description is omitted because it is the same as the state shown in).

  FIG. 88 (22) shows that the player is operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 88 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white.

  FIG. 88 (24) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (25) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 88 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (27) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 has stopped. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 88 (28) to (36), the eyelid g2 is displayed surrounded by a square frame, and except for the fact that the inside of the frame is blue, FIGS. Since it is the same as the state shown to), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 88 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 71 (37) and (38). In this example, the character of the conversation advance notice is displayed in a frame, and the inside of the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. A big hit reliability is set by the color in the said frame.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 (a1) to (a20), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 89 (a1) to (a20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 89 (a1) to (a5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (a6), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h1 move to the left. The character name display differs from the character in that the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 89 (a7) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. In addition, the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 89 (a8) shows a state in which the eyelid g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 89 (a9) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 has changed to the eyebrow g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 89 (a10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation advance notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 or the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  89 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 89 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (a12), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h2 move to the left.

  FIG. 89 (a15) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 89 (a16) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 89 (a17) shows a state in which the eyelid g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 89 (a18) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation advance notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  FIGS. 89 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38). As in this example, during the movement animation of the character, the movement animation of the character name display or the balloon display may be displayed. Further, the balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a speech display from the beginning of the display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 (b1) to (b20), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 89 (b1) to (b20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 89 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 89 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (b6), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h1 move to the left. The character name display differs from the character in that the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning. Also, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue and green respectively. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b6), a square image on the left side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The left square image is white, and the middle square image is blue. These square images also move to the left with the character.

  FIG. 89 (b7) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b7), a square image on the left, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the right are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 89 (b 8) shows a state in which the eyelid g 2, the character name display h 1 and the balloon display i 1 are moved to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

  FIG. 89 (b9) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 has changed to the eyebrow g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b9), the square image on the left is white, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the right is green.

  FIG. 89 (b10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. In addition, the frame g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame in the frame. Thus, in the conversation notice display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in one of the three squares displayed during the movement animation of the character. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue and green in descending order of the jackpot reliability.

  FIGS. 89 (b 11) to (b 13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 89 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (b12), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h2 move to the left. The character name display h2 is displayed in blue. Also, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue and green respectively. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b14), the square image on the right side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The right square image is green and the middle square image is white. These square images also move to the right with the character.

  FIG. 89 (b15) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b7), a square image on the right side, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left side are displayed. The right square image is white, the middle square image is green, and the left square image is blue. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 89 (b16) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The inside of the balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b16), the square image on the right is blue, the square image in the middle is white, and the square image on the left is green. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 89 (b17) shows a state in which the eyelid g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right. At the time point shown in FIG. 89 (b17), the square image on the right is green, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the left is white.

  FIG. 89 (b18) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a blue frame in the frame. The character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. The display colors are white, blue and green in the descending order of the big hit reliability.

  FIGS. 89 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the character movement animation are candidate displays of display colors in a frame enclosed by the character after stopping. As in this example, candidates for display colors in a frame enclosed by the character after being stopped may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 90 (a1) to 90 (a5). 90 (a1) to 90 (a5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 90 (a1) to 90 (a5) show character movement animations shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 90 (a1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started.爺 g2 appeared and moved to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. During the movement of 2 g2 to the left, the mark g1 is displayed. The mark g1 is displayed on the left of the mark g2, and a part of the mark g2 is displayed overlapping. In addition, for example, the transmittance is displayed at 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. A part of オ ー バ ー g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1. In addition, for example, in the case of 表示 g2, the transmittance is displayed at 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, the character may increase during the character movement animation. In this example, the characters are increased by one but may be two or more. In addition, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Also, one character may be displayed overlapping the entire other character.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 90 (b1) to (b5). FIGS. 90 (b1) to 90 (b5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 90 (b1)-(b5) show the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 71 (6)-(10) and so on.

  FIG. 90 (b1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 appear and move to the left. The mark g1 is displayed on the left of the mark g2, and a part of the mark g2 is displayed overlapping.

  FIG. 90 (b2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1.

  FIG. 90 (b3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A portion of the hall g1 is displayed overlapping the eye g2.

  FIG. 90 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1.

  FIG. 90 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. Overlapping characters may alternately change between one character and another character.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 90 (c1) to (c5). FIGS. 90 (c1) to (c5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 90 (c1) to 90 (c5) show the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 90 (c1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (c2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.

  FIG. 90 (c3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 90 (c4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 90 (c5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, one character may be erased one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to (d1) to (d5) in FIG. FIGS. 90 (d1) to 90 (d5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 90 (d1) to (d5) show the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 90 (d1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (d2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess G4 is displayed in place of Princess G1 and ninja g5 is displayed in place of Princess g3. The characters may be entirely replaced from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

  FIG. 90 (d3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The ninja g5 has been erased.

  FIG. 90 (d4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 90 (d5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended. Little Princess g4 has stopped.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, and another character is displayed instead of one character during the character movement animation, and then the characters are sequentially erased, and the last One character may remain in the. Also, a plurality of characters may be erased at one time.

  FIG. 90 (e) shows a table used when determining a conversation advance notice to be executed in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. For example, the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 71 is “conversation notice 1”, and the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 72 is “conversation notice 2”. The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute any conversation notice from among a plurality of conversation notices. Also, for example, it is possible to combine and execute a plurality of conversational announcements such as “conversational announcement 1” and “conversational announcement 2”. Further, the pachinko machine 100 can display the speech notice display shown in FIG. 16 during the speech notice display of the present example, and displays the speech notice display of the present example in combination with the speech notice display shown in FIG. It is possible.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is selected from among one of the conversation announcements when one of a plurality of effects omitted from illustration in “***” of the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 90 (e) is selected. After displaying the balloon display of any of FIGS. 16, 19 to 28, 30 to 34, 71 to 90, 412, and 425 to 445 as the first balloon display, the second balloon is displayed. It is possible to display any of the balloon display of FIG. 16, FIG. 19 to FIG. 28, FIG. 30 to FIG. 34, FIG. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is selected from among one of the conversation announcements when one of a plurality of effects omitted from illustration in “***” of the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 90 (e) is selected. A balloon that combines a plurality of elements of the balloon display of any of FIGS. 16, 19 to 28, 30 to 34, 71 to 90, 412, and 425 to 445 as the first balloon display. After displaying the display, a plurality of balloon displays shown in any of FIGS. 16, 19 to 28, 30 to 34, 71 to 90, 412, and 425 to 445 as second balloon displays. It is possible to display a balloon display combining the elements of. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, 3 or more as a conversation notice of 1 when one of a plurality of effects omitted in the illustration of "***" of the table for determining the conversation effect of FIG. 90 (e) is selected. The balloon display of can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of the plural effects which are not illustrated in the “***” of the conversation production determination table in Figure 90 (e) is selected, the pattern fluctuation display of 1 time It is possible to display two or more conversation announcements in a period. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when the balloon display is being displayed or the conversation announcement is being performed, the display condition is satisfied when the execution condition of the other effect display or the error display described in the embodiment or the drawing or the movable body rendering operation is satisfied. And the operation can be performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 may be displayed while the conversation notice display is being displayed, or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing the preparation notice effect shown in FIG. 35 and the timer notice effect shown in FIG. For example, during the preparation of the notice of the conversation notice or within the same symbol variation display as the notice of the conversation notice, the notice effect during preparation or the timer notice effect may be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the meter increase effect and the item application effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be executed during display of the conversation advance notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation advance notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 by this example can display a conversation advance notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, as in the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 153 (k), the display sizes are different from those in the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 153 (b) and (e) etc. (small display size, large display size) The display may be displayed to display the conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 by this example can display a conversation advance notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (b) to 153 (f), in the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the moving distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the moving distance of the balloon display f2. And may display a conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 by this example can display a conversation advance notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is ended at the time shown in FIG. 153 (e), and a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed overlapping with the other display so as to display the conversation notice The display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 may display at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 71 at a position displayed overlapping with another display and displaying the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 by this example can display a conversation advance notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (b) to 153 (f), at the start of display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a moving animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, and FIGS. As shown in (t), when the balloon display f1 and f2 end display, the balloon display starts and ends so that the balloon animation f1 and f2 move toward the right. The direction of movement of the balloon display may be different at the time of. The pachinko machine 100 may make the moving direction different between at the start of display and at the end of display of at least one of balloon display i1 or balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pseudo-series effect shown in (g) to (p) shown in FIG. For example, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed during display of the conversation advance notice display, or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation advance notice display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 90 again.

(B1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 (19)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 (36)),
The first display is a display including a first line (for example, the morning weather is "sunny mark"),
The first display is a display including a first character (for example, g1).
The second display is a display including a second line (for example, the weather for lunch is "cloud mark"),
The second display is a display including a second character (eg, 爺 g2),
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The second character may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, by anticipating that the second display including the second character is displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(B2)
The gaming machine described in B1 above,
A third character (eg, princess g3) may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, by giving a preliminary notice of displaying a character not appearing on the first display, it is possible to make the character when the first display is displayed different and to poke the player's will In some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(B3)
The gaming machine described in B2 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 80 (39)),
The third display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is "rain mark"),
The third display is a display including the third character (eg, princess g3),
The third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 80 (39)).
A game stand characterized by

  By making the third character appear not in the second display but in the third display, it is possible to catch the player's mind, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(B4)
The gaming machine described in B3 above,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first conversation announcement display (for example, a conversation announcement display shown in FIG. 80 (1)),
One display of the plurality of displays is a second conversation announcement display (for example, a conversation announcement display shown in FIG. 80 (39)),
The first conversational notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation advance notice display is a display including the second display,
The second conversation advance notice display is a display including the third display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand having the configuration, by causing the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display to appear in the second conversation notice display, it is possible to catch the player's will, and the player's interest is displayed. May be able to improve.

(B5)
The gaming machine described in B4 above,
While the first symbol variation display is displayed, the second conversation notification may be displayed after the first conversation notification is displayed (FIGS. 80 (1) to (39)). )reference),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand having the configuration, by causing the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display to appear in the second conversation notice display, it is possible to catch the player's will, and the player's interest is displayed. May be able to improve.

(B6)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B5, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a character movement animation shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10)),
The first animation display is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of a character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The first animation display is a display that may include the second character.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand having the configuration, since the second character is displayed in the first animation display, the player is expected to expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. There is a possibility.

(B7)
The gaming machine described in B6 above,
The first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display (see, for example, FIG. 90 (a3)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, it may be possible for the player to be entertained by reasoning about which character the first display is displayed.

(B8)
The gaming machine according to B6 or B7 above,
In the first animation display, the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand having the configuration, when the first display is displayed by the second character, it may be possible to make the player think so as to be entertained.

(B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B6 to B8, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 71 (23) to (27)),
The second animation display is displayed prior to the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of a character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The second animation display is a display not including the first character.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand having the configuration, there are cases where it is possible to cause the character appearing in the first display to appear and the player can play the game without waking up.

(B10)
The gaming machine described in B9 above,
The number of characters in the second animation display is less than the number of characters in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy rate of the character's expectation by the player by reducing the character candidates in the second display.

(B11)
The gaming machine according to B9 or B10 above,
The first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first displayed character in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy rate of the character's expectation by the player by reducing the character candidates in the second display.

(B12)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B9 to B11, wherein
The display period of the first animation display is shorter than the display period of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

(B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B12, wherein
The first display is a display including a first color (for example, white),
The second display is a display including a second color (for example, blue),
The reliability in the first color is a reliability different from the reliability in the second color,
The display including the second color may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, by announcing the reliability of the second display, it is possible to expect the reliability when the second display is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are times when you can.

(B14)
The gaming machine described in B13 above,
The confidence in the second color is greater than the confidence in the first color,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, it may be possible to make the player expect that the second display is displayed by increasing the reliability of the second display to be displayed later.

(B15)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B14, wherein
The first dialog is displayed prior to the display of the first display (for example, the display shown in FIG. 71 (19))
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand having the configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player is expected to expect the first character to appear by the first dialog. There is a possibility.

(B16)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B15, wherein
The first display is a display including a first name (e.g., "ten"),
The first name is the name of the first character,
The first name is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand having the configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player is expected to expect the first character to appear by the first name. There is a possibility.

(B17)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B16, wherein
Equipped with operation means (eg, chance button 136) operable by the player;
The second display is displayed when the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(B18)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B17, wherein
The second display is displayed after the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(B19)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B18, wherein
A movable body (e.g., a movable body k) movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(B20)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B19, wherein
A display (for example, a pattern display m) may overlap in at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(B21)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B20, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(B22)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B20, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000, 2000),
A game stand characterized by

The first display may be overlapped with another display, and the area where the first display is overlapped by the second animation is such that the first display is overlapped by the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, it is possible to make the second animation pay attention to the second display by largely overlapping the first display during the second animation, and to ensure the relevance to the first display while the second display is displayed. There are times when you can.
The area in which the first line is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area in which the first line is overlapped by the second display. In this case, it is possible to make the second animation pay attention to the second dialogue by largely overlapping the first dialogue during the second animation, and secure the relevance to the first dialogue while the second display is displayed. There are times when you can.
There may be cases where the lines of the speech advance notice do not match.
A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and a character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be sequentially started to be displayed in the first animation, and the order may be circled in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be sequentially started to be displayed in the first animation, and each character may perform animation in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and a character may change in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the characters are reduced by one or more in the first animation.
After the second display is displayed, transition to reach effect corresponding to the second character may be made.
A conversation notice display is performed for each of the pseudo variation display, a first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo variation display, and a second conversation in the second pseudo variation display after the first pseudo variation display. An advance notice may be displayed.
The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variation display, a part of the first conversation notice may overlap the movable, and a part of the second conversation notice may overlap the movable.
A portion of the first conversation announcement may overlap the timer announcement and a portion of the second conversation announcement may overlap the timer announcement.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 91 to 115. FIG. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 91 to 115 are basically used only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 91 to 115, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in FIG.

<Type of item>
Next, types of items included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a generic term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the item according to the present embodiment is largely divided into two types: custom item and non-custom item. It can be different. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. The non-custom item is an item that can not be modified (customized) in the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine 100, but the player is given a predetermined profit.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give the item to the player when an item giving condition set for each item is satisfied. When the custom item is given, the player performs the setting operation of the given custom item using the effect customization screen (see FIG. 100 (q) etc.) described later, thereby displaying the pachinko machine 100. , Voice, functions, various probabilities, etc. can be modified (customized) according to their own preferences. Also, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain predetermined benefits (eg, benefits for the player such as a notice, a prefetch notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 91, for example, the item grant condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is granted. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the user's preference. In addition, when the item grant condition of item D (hold pedestal custom 1), item E (hold pedestal custom 2) or item F (hold pedestal custom 3) is satisfied and the item is granted, a pachinko machine It is possible to modify (customize) a part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) at 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed below the hold icon) according to the user's preference.

  In addition, when the item giving condition of “heat” is satisfied and the item is given, the player is notified by the notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)”. Can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a hit or a high possibility of a hit). In addition, when the item grant condition of "superheat" is satisfied and the item is granted, a notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is "super heat (very high expectation)" is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a big hit, or that the possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, the meter increase presentation and the item assignment presentation will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 described with reference to FIG. 3, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (in this example, , 10) gauges (ticks) are displayed, and one sphere is inserted into the meter increase entrance 227, and the meter gauge is turned off (reduced) one by one each time it enters (details are described Later).

    By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine whether the number of balls entering the meter increase entrance 227 or the gauge of the meter is full (predetermined value for the meter increase entrance 227). It becomes possible to grasp whether a number (in this example, ten balls) has entered. In addition, the aspect of meter increase presentation is not limited to this example, For example, even if one sphere lights at every entrance into the entrance for meter increase 227 and enters, one gauge of the meter is lit (increased). Good.

  Further, the item giving effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the giving of the item, and in the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number of opening ports 227 for meter increase (this example) Then, it is determined that the item granting condition is satisfied when 10 spheres have entered), and using the decorative symbol display device 208, an indication is given that an item is given, the type of the item concerned, etc. Perform (details will be described later). By executing such an item giving effect, the player can grasp that the item has been given, the type of the item, and the like. In addition, the item giving condition and the aspect of the item giving effect are not limited to this example, for example, the number and type of already acquired items may be displayed, or the item is special (rare item May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  The first embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. The gaming state shown in FIG. 92 (a) is a state (during symbol variation) in which the special game variation game is being executed. Also, in this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, and the number of special figure 2 variation games is 3 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 6 by the display of six reserve icons PI. Is displayed, nine gauges are extinguished, and one gauge GG is lit. With the meter increase effect, nine spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (one more sphere It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 92 (c). After performing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter is performed By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 92 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 92 (e) to FIG. 92 (g). While enlarging the image, an animation display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 92 (h), information on items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (i), the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description IT of the item as information on the item (in this example, description of item A) (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  The state shown in FIG. 92 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In this example, when the information on the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) is displayed in the item giving effect, the buttons shown in FIG. 92 (j) to FIG. 92 (m) are displayed. Make a presentation.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item application effect by displaying the display related to the button effect in front of the display regarding the item application effect or the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is made to overlap at least a part of the display of the display and the decoration of the design. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not disturbed, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the item By temporarily reducing the visibility of the presentation effect, the presentation effect may be able to be enhanced.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG capable of performing a specific selection (in this example, selection of whether to set an acquired item or not) from a plurality of options and an appearance of a chance button 136 effective for accepting an operation are simulated. The image of the button and the character image prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, PUSH), and the appearance of the left and right keys whose reception of the operation is effective among the up, down, left and right direction keys (not shown) An operation valid period display TG including a button image BG2 and a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 92 (l) in a state in which the option “Yes” is temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 92 (m) By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the “Yes” selection has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  In the state shown in FIG. 92 (n), the button effect is ended and the item giving effect is resumed. In the item giving effect after resumption, FIG. 92 (n) to FIG. 92 (p) are triggered by the fact that a specific selection (in this example, selection to set an acquired item) is made from a plurality of options in the button effect. After displaying an animation that moves from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the image including the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of "during item A setting" instead of the character display CD1, it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition during the SP (super) reach change (the gauge of the meter becomes full). In this embodiment 2, over the period shown in FIG. 93 (a) to FIG. 93 (b), the fluctuation game of the special figure develops from the normal symbol fluctuation to the SP reach fluctuation, and the subsequent FIG. 93 (c) to FIG. In addition to the SP reach fluctuation, the SP reach effect is executed over the period shown in FIG.

  During one such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it lights as shown in FIG. 93 (e). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 1 except that the SP reach change is being performed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item granting is performed by displaying the indication concerning the item giving effect in front of the display concerning the SP reach effect and the meter over the period shown in FIG. 93 (h) to the same figure (q). At least a part of the display relating to the rendering is overlapped with the display relating to the SP reach rendering and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item giving effect is not impeded, so that the information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the SP reach effect and the meter can be improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  Further, at least a part of the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed by displaying the variation display of the decoration symbol in front of the display regarding the item giving effect over the period shown in FIG. 93 (k) to the same figure (o). Is overlapped with at least a part of the display regarding the item giving effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol is not impeded, it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game and also temporarily recognize the visibility of the item giving effect. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the velocity.

  Furthermore, over the period shown in FIG. 93 (l) to FIG. 93 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed in front of the display for the SP reach effect and the item application effect. Thus, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol overlap at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item imparting effect. With such a configuration, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the visibility of the button effect will not be disturbed, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variation game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time thereof. In addition to being able to perform, there may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach effect or the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 3 is an example which starts an item provision effect based on that item provision conditions were satisfied (due that the gauge of a meter became full) during non-pattern fluctuation (during stop display of a symbol). The gaming state shown in FIG. 94 (a) is a state in which the variation game of the special drawing is not executed (during non-symbol variation). In this example, there is no special figure fluctuation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations for special figure 1 fluctuation game is 0, the number for special figure 2 fluctuation game is 0, It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such non-design fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it lights as shown in FIG. 94 (c). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 1 except that the SP reach change is being performed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item provision is performed by displaying the display related to the item provision effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIG. 94 (j) to FIG. 94 (m). At least a portion of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbol is There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item giving effect is started during the symbol change based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the non-pattern change (during stop display of the symbol). This is an example of During the non-design fluctuation shown in FIG. 95 (a), as shown in FIG. 95 (b), one ball enters the entrance for 227 for increasing the meter, and in the subsequent FIG. 95 (c), it lights up A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 95 (c), based on the ball entering the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) In the subsequent FIG. 95 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 95 (f), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 95 (g), it is lit 1 as shown in FIG. 95 (g). After executing the meter increase effect that all ten gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 95 (h), the character display CD2 of "full" is performed instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 95 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to this example, triggered by the establishment of the item giving condition, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 95 (i) to FIG. 95 (k). While enlarged display, an animation display for moving from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center is performed, and information about an item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule as shown in FIG. After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 95 (m), the item image IG including the character display of "Heat" is displayed. In this item image IG, an item giving condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure fluctuation game is “hot (high expectation)” (the special figure fluctuation game has a winning result of It indicates that it is a hit, or that the possibility of a hit is high.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  In the state shown in FIG. 95 (n), the item giving effect is ended and the SP reach is started. As described above, if the display related to the item giving effect is deleted before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not disturbed, so the progress of the fluctuation game is accurately made to the player. It may be possible to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation in the state where the number of reservations is full. This is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on what has been done (the gauge of the meter is full).

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 96 (a) is a state (during symbol variation) in which the variation game of the special figure is being executed. In this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, the number of special figure 2 variation games is 4 It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 7 by the display of seven reserve icons PI. Is displayed, and 6 gauges are turned off and 4 gauges GG are turned on. 6 spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (the 4 spheres are It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 96 (c), it is lit 4 A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 96 (c), as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230), and the subsequent FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special game 1 floating games is increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the lower display area of the screen, the number of reserved special game variations (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) increases from 7 to 8 and becomes full by the display of eight reserve icons PI Is shown.

  In this example, the meter increase effect is shifted to the increase mode when the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) becomes full (8 in this example). Configured. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced by N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 96 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (g), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 96 (h), the three lights are on as shown in FIG. 96 (h). Perform meter increase effect to turn off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 96 (i), when one ball further enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 96 (j), the one gauge which has been lit is extinguished. By doing this, a meter increase effect is realized in which all 10 gauges go out, and the right to erase another gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. The subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode), and therefore the same in FIG. While attaching a code | symbol, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this example, the example shows transition to the increase mode (double mode) based on the fact that the ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation while the number of reservations is full. It may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the condition of is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item grant condition is satisfied (when the gauge of the meter is full), the right to erase the gauge of the meter can be carried over to the next game, but it is configured not to carry over The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment in time series.

  In the sixth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving two types of custom items). Note that the meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are applied in the item application effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 97 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, as shown in FIG. 97 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of item names (in this example, item A and item B) IN1 and IN2 and descriptions of items (in this example, descriptions of item A and item B (content in the figure) Is omitted)) Display IT1 and IT2. In addition, three or more types of items may be provided in the item provision effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 97 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button effect according to the present example, a selection display SG capable of specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item A or item B) and reception of the operation are effective. Among the button image BG1 including an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (in this example, PUSH) prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136, the operation acceptance is effective among the up, down, left, and right direction keys not shown. And an operation effective period display TG including a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right key) is effective. .

  As shown in FIG. 97 (l), when the selection operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 97 (l) with the option of “item A” temporarily selected during such button effects, as shown in FIG. 97 (m) In addition, by highlighting the option of “item A”, it is informed that the selection of “item A” has been confirmed (that item A has been selected to be set among acquired item A and item B). Do.

  In the state shown in FIG. 97 (n), the button effect is ended and the item giving effect is resumed. In the item presentation effect after resumption, FIG. 97 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, selection to set item A among acquired item A and item B). (N) to (p), an animation is displayed in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed while being moved from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display region After that, instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", by performing the character display CD3 of "during item A set", it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving custom items and non-custom items). Note that the meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are applied in the item application effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 98 (h), after performing an animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, in FIG. 98 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description of the item (in this example, the description of item A (content is omitted)) display of IT1 Display the item image IG including the display of the character of "Heat". In addition, the non-custom item provided in the item provision effect may be another non-custom item (for example, hold change, model explanation 1 to 3, lost, etc.) described with reference to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 98 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. The subsequent item giving effect and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the same reference numerals are given in FIG.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in time series, and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demonstration screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 99 (a) using the decorative symbol display device 208. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen whose display is started when, for example, a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during non-symbol variation, and in the present example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or brightness adjustment Display the top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen capable of selecting various menus is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in the present example, the right key) or the third operation means (in the present example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or the brightness adjustment screen) is displayed. , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) or the fifth while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When the operation of the operation means (in this example, the down key) is received, the display of a luminance adjustment screen such as the various lamps 418 and the decorative symbol display device 208 etc. capable of adjusting the luminance is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step and the meter display is suggested to indicate that the volume is increased by one. If the operation of the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is decreased by one step Run. When the operation of the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display is performed to indicate that the brightness is increased by one step. When the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the down key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is decreased by one step is executed Do.

  Furthermore, when it is detected that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed while displaying the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demonstration screen is started, and the symbol variation display is performed. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 99 (b) is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to the present example is composed of four menus of effect customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and return to the demo screen, and when each menu is selected, the effect customization screen and the mobile terminal It is configured to transition to a linked service screen, an initialization confirmation screen, and a demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 100, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the non-symbol variation shown in FIG. 100 (a), the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is accepted as shown in FIG. 100 (c) while the demonstration screen is being displayed, FIG. 100 (d) The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is received, so as shown in FIG. 100 (f). As shown, while the brightness is lowered by one step, the meter display indicating that the brightness is decreased by one is executed, and as shown in FIG. 100 (g), the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key 161c). Since the operation of (a) is received, as shown in FIG. 100 (h), the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is increased by one step is executed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 100 (i), while the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted while this brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness adjustment screen is replaced. The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 100 (j) is started. In addition, as shown in FIG. 100 (k), while the display of the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 100 (l). As such, the meter display is executed to indicate that the volume has been lowered by one step and the volume has been decreased by one step.

  Subsequently, while the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 100 (l) is detected, the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected, so the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 100 (m) is started. Since the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is received as shown in FIG. 100 (n) while the demonstration screen is displayed, the menu screen shown in FIG. 100 (o) is displayed. The display of has started.

  Subsequently, in the state where the menu for effect customization is temporarily selected on this menu screen, as shown in FIG. 100 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted. , The display of the effect customization screen has been started. Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (r), while the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 100 (q) is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. The display of moving the light display to the next selectable item (in this example, the item P) is performed, and the first operation is performed as shown in FIG. 100 (t) with the item P temporarily selected. Since the operation corresponding to the means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character display of "setting item P" is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208 By doing, it is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal linked service screen>
FIG. 99 (c) is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal-linked service screen according to the present embodiment is configured of six menus of trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the portable terminal interlocking service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 101 (b), the display of the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b1) is started, and this portable terminal interlocking service is started. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, after the trial play screen display shown in FIG. 101 (b1-1) is started, the new registration is selected on the trial play screen In (b), the display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 101 (b1-2) is started.

  When a menu for password input is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b2), a password as shown in FIG. 101 (b2-1) and FIG. 101 (b2-1-1) The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, the display of a screen notifying a password input error as shown in FIG. 101 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of a screen notifying the completion of the password input as shown in FIG. 101 (b2-1-3) is started.

  Also, when the data storage menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b3), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b3-1) is started, and this confirmation screen When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b3-2) is started, and “End” is selected while this two-dimensional code display screen is displayed. In this case, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b3-2-1) is started.

  Also, when the data clear menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b4), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b4-1) is started, and this confirmation screen When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b4-1-1) is started. Also, when the quick start menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b5-1) is started, as shown in FIG. When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (display of the gauge of the meter becomes full) while the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. The gaming state shown in FIG. 102 (a) is a state in which a demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-pattern variation. Also, in this example, there are no special figure fluctuation games being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special drawing 1 fluctuation games is 0, and the number of special drawing 2 fluctuation games is 0 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (b), as shown in FIG. 102 (b), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 102 (b) while such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. After performing the meter increase effect that all the ten gauges go out by turning off the one gauge which has been lit, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), instead of the display of the meter "full tank" By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and therefore the same in FIG. Although the code is attached and the explanation is omitted, the display related to the item giving effect is in front of the display on the demonstration screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIG. 102 (e) to FIG. 102 (n). By making it display in, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the demo effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen), the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Operation related to the button effect (in this example, setting of the item acquired by the player than the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment)) Operation) to be received with priority.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the operation relating to the button effect (this example Then, the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired by the player is received, but the timing shown in FIG. 102 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen) When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when the) is displayed, the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, the operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the In addition, even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the demo screen (top menu screen The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation related to (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection, volume adjustment, or luminance adjustment) is accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 9>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, an item imparting effect is started based on satisfaction of the item imparting condition (display of the gauge of the meter being full) while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. It is an example. Note that the meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item giving effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen over the period shown in FIG. 103 (e) to FIG. 103 (n). At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display on the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired is received, but the timing shown in FIG. 103 (n) (the timing when the menu effect is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the operation on the menu screen (in this example, the operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the user has received a menu selection operation such as a mobile terminal interlocking service.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment in time series.

  In the tenth embodiment, an item imparting effect is started based on satisfaction of the item imparting condition (display of the gauge of the meter being full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100 is displayed. This is an example of The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed in front of the display relating to the volume adjustment over the period shown in FIG. 104 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment, the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in the present example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the player) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item is received, but the timing shown in FIG. 104 (n) (the timing at which the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for performing the volume adjustment has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / example 11>
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment in time series.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition (that the gauge of the meter is full) while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 101 is displayed. It is an example. Note that the meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. While the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item imparting effect is in front of the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIG. 105 (g) to FIG. 105 (n). By displaying at least a part of the display related to the item giving rendering, at least a part of the two-dimensional code is made to overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) Configured.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the user has received an operation for setting an item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 105 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation by the chance button 136 is received at timing (1), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation related to the two-dimensional code ( In this example, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation (an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment in time series.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item using a production customization screen after having done. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed in front of the display on the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIG. 106 (e) to FIG. 106 (o). Then, at least a portion of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the effect customizing screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. Temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect customization screen may improve the effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen, so An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set in the effect customization screen) It is composed of

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired by the person is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 106 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set in the effect customization screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customizing screen), the operation related to the effect customizing screen (this example In the effect customization screen, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation of determining the item to be set is accepted.

  Also, in this example, with the option “Yes” being temporarily selected during the button effect, as shown in FIG. 106 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 106 (m) Even when the "Yes" option is highlighted, the process of setting the acquired item is not performed immediately, and as shown in Fig. 106 (q) to (u), the menu screen is displayed again. When the mobile terminal interlocking service screen is selected in and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 106 (v), the item acquired in the item giving effect (in this example, the item A) can be set It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, an increase in meter effect and an item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, an item imparting effect is started based on satisfaction of the item imparting condition (display of the gauge of the meter being full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item immediately by operation in button production after having done.

  Since the meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those of the above-mentioned Example 12, while attaching the same reference numerals in FIG. 107, their description is omitted, but in this example, FIG. j) to (k), when the selection operation of the chance button 136 is received as shown in FIG. 107 (l) in a state where the option “Yes” is temporarily selected, as shown in FIG. As shown in (m), by highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). If an item is acquired while the presentation customization screen is displayed, item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the presentation customization screen as shown in FIG. 107 (i).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. After that, the point to set the item using the effect customization screen is the same as the embodiment 12 described using FIG. 106, but in this example, the effect customization screen is in front of the display regarding the item giving effect By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item application effect (in this example, all the gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, since the visibility of the effect customization effect is not impeded, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item imparting effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the Note that at least a part of the effect customization screen may be configured not to overlap at least a part of the display related to the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 15 starts an item provision presentation based on that an item provision condition was satisfied (display of the meter's gauge became full) while the effect customization screen demonstrated using FIG. 99 and FIG. 100 was displayed. This is an example in which the item provision effect is continued even if the symbol variation display is started while the effect customization screen is being displayed. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the twelfth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 109 (l), the ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) during the item giving effect shown in FIG. 109 (k). In the following FIG. 109 (m), symbol variation display is started, but item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item giving effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not inhibited.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 16>
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, an increase in meter effect and an item addition effect according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixteenth embodiment in time series.

  This embodiment 16 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 92 in that the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. Although it is the same as 1, in this example, the item is displayed across two changes of the change and the next change.

  Specifically, after the variation ends during execution of the item giving effect shown in FIG. 110 (k) and stop display of the symbol is performed, as shown in the following FIG. New fluctuation game is started based on. Then, the button effect is continued also in the next symbol change following the symbol change in which the item giving condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 110 (m), the button effect is produced based on the pressing operation of the chance button 136 being accepted. , The item giving effect is resumed, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. As in this example, if it is possible to display items across a plurality of symbol variations, the item giving effect is not interrupted with stopping or starting symbol variations, and the player's willingness to play the game May be able to last. In addition, the symbol variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient, and it is not necessary to be a continuous symbol variation.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in time series.

  The embodiment 17 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 92 in that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. Same as 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the ball's entry into the meter increase entrance 227 during execution of the item assignment effect, and the meter increase effect is executed when the ball entry is detected. ing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (k), during the execution of the item assignment effect shown in FIG. 110 (j), since the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 is detected, the following FIG. As shown in), during the display of the item by the item giving effect, the meter increase effect to advance the gauge of the meter is started. If it is possible to increase the meter while the item is displayed as in this example, it may be possible to further increase the player's willingness to play the game. In addition to enabling the increase of the meter during the display of the item, the establishment of the item grant condition may be possible (the gauge of the meter may be full), In this case, the right to give the item may be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 18>
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the mini game is executed based on the establishment of the item provision condition during symbol variation (the gauge of the meter becomes full), and the item provision effect is started after the mini game is over. Do. FIG. 112 (e) shows the state where the mini game is started. In this example, the display area in which the gauge of the meter is displayed is enlarged, and it is configured to execute the lottery in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the lottery according to the present embodiment may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, or may be determined based on the player's selection operation, the player's selection operation The result may be predetermined regardless of. In addition, the "x" sign of the result of Amidaki is off, the image imitating a capsule is the acquisition of an item, the letter of E means that the item of E is acquired, and the letter of E is reached Is configured to give notice of the items to be earned. In addition, when the design and color of the image imitating a capsule are different from normal, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be a plurality of types of mini games, and the type of items may vary depending on the type of mini game The ease of acquisition and the appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Ami-dakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. With the configuration as in this example, it may be possible to entertain the player without getting bored of the period from the satisfaction of the item grant condition to the display of the item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first modification will be described. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for increasing meter 227” is used as a trigger for the effect of increasing the meter, but the present invention is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of the ball may be used as a trigger for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) to (b), the meter increases when the ball enters the starting opening (in the present example, the first special view starting opening 230) during non-pattern variation. The effect may be executed, as shown in FIG. 113 (c) to FIG. 113 (e), the ball entered the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) during the symbol change. In the case, a meter increase effect may be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 of the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 of the second display mode based on the pre-reading result of the change game In this case, the meter increase effect may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 113 (i) to FIG. 113 (l), the meter increase effect may be performed when the pseudo link is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 113 (m) to (o), even if the meter increase effect is executed when the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received while the button effect is being executed. Good, as shown in FIG. 113 (p), meter increase effect may be executed when reach is executed, and SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (q). The meter increase effect may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 113 (r), the meter increase effect may be performed when the advance notice display (in this example, the display of the character image of a princess) is performed. .

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the second modification will be described. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 2 in time series.

  The point that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) is displayed while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIG. 99 or 100 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the operation regarding volume adjustment is performed (in this embodiment, even if the display regarding volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display regarding button effects). An operation relating to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation for adjusting the volume.

  Specifically, during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 114 (c), as shown in FIG. 114 (d), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. As shown in e), after performing the meter increase effect of turning off all the 10 gauges by turning off one of the gauges that were on, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), on the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank” instead, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the entrance hole 227 for meter increase, and the item provision condition is satisfied. To inform

  A state shown in the following FIG. 114 (g) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to this example, triggered by the establishment of the item giving condition, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the period shown in FIG. 114 (g) to FIG. 114 (i). An animation display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 114 (j), information on items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 114 (k), the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description IT of the item as information on the item (in this example, description of item A) (The contents are omitted)).

  In this example, at least a part of the display of the volume control screen is displayed by displaying at least a part of the display of the volume control screen by displaying the display related to the item addition effect on the back side of the display of the volume control screen. Some overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not impeded, information on volume adjustment can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing it.

  Further, in this example, the display related to volume adjustment is displayed on the front side than the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 114 (n), the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) When the operation of is received, the display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” is executed during the button effect without executing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is accepted, display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” during the button effect is performed without executing the processing of lowering the volume by one step.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is received in a state where the option “Yes” is temporarily selected during the button effect, the button effect is ended, s) After performing animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD 1 of “item not set”, the character display CD 3 of “during item A setting” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third modification will be described. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for meter increase 227” is regarded as the condition for the item grant, but the present invention is not limited to this and “the entrance to the inlet for meter increase 227 is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of a sphere may be used as the satisfaction condition of the item assignment. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 115 (a) to (c), the cumulative number of balls entering the variable winning hole 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls obtained in the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example) , And an item may be given if it exceeds 10000 spheres, or as shown in FIG. 115 (d) to FIG. 115 (h), when a specific operation is accepted by the operation means (in this example, An item may be assigned when the operation is accepted in the order of the key 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is a means capable of displaying a presentation setting display (for example, a presentation customization screen shown in FIG. 106, a volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 104, a brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 100). A display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, setting of items shown in FIG. 106, setting of volume shown in FIG. 103, setting of luminance shown in FIG. 100), display during the display of the effect setting display A display including the setting of 1 (for example, the setting of the item A shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 106) separately from the effect setting display in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “first display”. For example, FIG. 104 and FIG. Indication Can be displayed on the display means displays the (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) suggesting that granted the item, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the first display including the setting of 1 can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed while the effect setting display is being displayed, Even during display, the player may be able to enjoy it.

  In addition, count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 92 (a) etc.) capable of displaying a display in which the number or amount increases or decreases is provided. , “First count display.” For example, a display in which all ten gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 92 (c) etc., and a character display CD2 of “full tank” as shown in FIG. 92 (d) etc. When it becomes, the said 1st display may be displayed on the said display means, and the display by the said count display means may be a display which can be changed in the period of a non-pattern variation display.

  With such a configuration, since the display of the count display means changes during non-pattern variation display, it may be possible to play a game without getting bored of the player. In addition, the player may not wake up even if the suspension of the floating game is lost.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means, and the second display is a notice (For example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 95 (m) or the like).

  If such a configuration is used, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  In addition, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 112) is executed. May be

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to enjoy the period until the first display is displayed.

  In addition, an operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 92 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) For example, it is a means capable of displaying a button effect shown in FIG. 92 (j) etc., and the first operation display means an effective period display of the operation means (eg, FIG. 92 (j) etc. It may be a display including the operation effective period display TG shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, the player can operate the operation means to participate even while the first display is displayed, and the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the effect setting display and the display of the first display, the effect setting display may be erased.

  With such a configuration, the first display may be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, settings (for example, settings of items shown in FIG. 106) selectable in the effect setting display may be increased.

  With such a configuration, the player's choice can be increased, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 115 (o) to (r), when the ball enters a predetermined game area while displaying the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for increasing the meter) When a ball enters the entrance, when the ball enters the starting opening or the winning opening, the first display (for example, the player sets the item A) separately from the effect setting display in the display. And a setting (for example, an item A) corresponding to the first display can be displayed on the display means, and the display corresponding to the acquisition may be displayed on the display means. It may be displayable on the display means.

  In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and for example, the symbol variation starts while the item appearing during the non-symbol variation is displayed. In any case, the item may not be deleted. Also, while the custom display and the item are being displayed, even if the variation of the symbol starts, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. In addition, even if the meter is difficult to see (or not visible) during the display of the custom display, the item may appear when the meter is full. Also, the item may appear after the meter is full during non-design variations.

  Moreover, the meter which stored a part in non-design fluctuation may make an item which shows reliability appear after being full during symbol fluctuation. Further, an item (heat, intense heat, etc.) indicating the reliability may be made easier to appear at the time of symbol fluctuation than at the time of non-pattern fluctuation, or may not be appeared at the time of non-pattern fluctuation. Moreover, you may display a button effective meter (operation effective period display) during non-design fluctuation. Also, the item may be displayed by canceling the demonstration screen (or without cancellation), or the item may be displayed by canceling (or without canceling) the menu display. The display of the two-dimensional code may be canceled (or without cancellation) to display the item.

  Also, the meter may be stored at an opportunity other than ball passing. In addition, there may be an increase mode in which the increase amount of the meter is increased than that in the normal state. Further, in this case, the system may be configured to shift to the increase mode at the end of the hold full or the power support. Also, the item may appear after the mini game with the meter full. In addition, even during SP reach, an effect may be performed in which an item appears. Also, the period of the button effect of reach and the period of the button effect of customization may or may not overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect rather than one. Further, the items to appear may be changed depending on the game state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item is made to appear during the display of the customization screen, the display of “?” In the customization screen may be changed (the item is additionally displayed), or when the customization screen is displayed again without being changed. In the customization screen, the display of "?" May be changed. In addition, the appearance of the item may be notified, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may be made to easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. Further, the item may be displayed across a plurality of changes, the meter may be stored while the item is displayed, or the meter may be configured to be full at one type of trigger.

  In addition, display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or more single color or full color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, The meter display may be performed only by the reel (drum) display device, the leaf display device, the plasma display, or the projector, or the meter display may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, , When the ball enters the entrance for increasing meter 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display 208 and the meter display of the other display devices increase by the same increment), one for the decorative symbol display 208 and the other display device It is good also as a count display means which performs meter display.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel And a stop button for stopping rotation of the reel individually, lottery means for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control regarding the stop of the symbol and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally winning combination Determining means for determining whether or not the game is performed, and payout control means for performing game medium payout processing for paying out the game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 116 to 169. FIG. The symbols shown in FIGS. 116 to 169 are basically used only in the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 116 to 169, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in FIG.

  Next, the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118.

  FIG. 116 shows an example of presentation using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode. In FIG. 116 to FIG. 118, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emits light, it is expressed in light black color, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is expressed in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 116 (b) following FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is moved from the initial position to the approximate center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position There is. When the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the common drawing reserve number aa5, the part of the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the button advance notice h110 , And a part of the ball extraction error display h111, the operation expiration date display h112, and the preview display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that the movable body 1 may overlap with displays other than these as the movable body 1 is positioned approximately at the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 116 (d) following FIG. 116 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 30 degrees from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 116 (e) following FIG. 116 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and a ball pull error display The other part or the like of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. In addition, there may be a case where the movable body 1 overlaps with the display other than these by the movable body 1 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, any of these displays There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  In FIG. 116 (f) following FIG. 116 (e), after moving the movable body 1 back to the shape before deformation, it moved to the initial position and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 were turned off It shows the state.

  As described above, in the present effect example, only the movable body 1 located on the front side of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position falls to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.

  FIG. 117 illustrates the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is moved from the initial position to the front of approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position There is. When the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a fourth pattern aa4 of the special figure 2, a button preview It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a drop-in-ball error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that when the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 70 degrees clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 117 (e) following FIG. 117 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button preview h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these when the movable body 2 is deformed at a position substantially in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any of these displays may be used. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  In FIG. 117 (f) continued from FIG. 117 (e), after the movable body 2 performed an operation to return to the shape before deformation, it moved to the initial position and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 were turned off. It shows the state.

  As described above, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When the present effect example is performed, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed in a final display than in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 116 is performed. In the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 116 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be more easily finalized and displayed than in the case where it is displayed.

  FIG. 118 shows the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 118 (b) following FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 118 (c) following FIG. 118 (b) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start to move from the initial position and are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. When the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a second special figure 4 pattern aa4, common drawing reserve number aa5, part of common drawing 4 pattern aa6, part of button advance notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 Overlap with some of the In addition, when the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display of any one of them does not overlap. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are made the same. However, the movement end timing may be different.

  FIG. 118 (d) following FIG. 118 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable parts 14 move downward, and a pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, the timing of the start of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  FIG. 118 (e) following FIG. 118 (d) shows that the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is finished at the same time. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 14 moves downward, and the pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and the ball removal are newly added. Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these by the movable bodies 1 and 2 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be a case where one of the displays in the display does not overlap. In addition, the timing of completion | finish of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  In FIG. 118 (f) following FIG. 118 (e), after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, the movement to the initial position is simultaneously started and the movement is ended. , And 2 show the state in which the respective light emitting means are simultaneously turned off. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before deformation | transformation may be started by separate timing, and may be complete | finished by separate timing. Further, even if the timing of the start of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the shape of the movable body 2 before the deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The start timing of the operation to return to the previous shape may be the same or the end timing may be different. In addition, there may be cases where the timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ, or the timing of the start of the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ. It is also good. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The movement start timing may be the same or the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  Thus, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of simultaneously deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 116 or the effect example shown in FIG. 117 is performed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the effect example shown in FIG. 116 or the effect example shown in FIG. 117 is performed than when the effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, an example of effects using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90 will be described.

  The movable body 90 is described with reference to FIG. Fig. 119 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and Fig. 119 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 for rotating the movable body 90b, a rotary shaft d1, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion It has 90c3.

  In the LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 are provided in alignment in an arrangement of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows 1 column, 3 rows 1 column, 2 rows 6 columns , And the light emitting diode is not provided in the third row and the sixth column). A light emitting diode b1 to b4 is provided on the LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and a light emitting diode c1 is provided on the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c along the outer periphery of the arc portion To c4 are provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be all light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different colors), or a part may be a single color light emitting diode and another part may be a full color LED , All may be configured with full color LED. Further, as the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a, light sources other than the light emitting diodes may be used.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (g) show stepwise the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on or the like. In FIG. 120 to FIG. 126, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the lighted case is shown in light black. In addition, in FIGS. 120 to 126, illustration of the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 is omitted.

  FIG. 120 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. The movable body 90 can be vertically moved by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. The cable connected to the movable body 90 may be disposed behind the arm so as not to be visible to the player. In addition, the character string "under preparation" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 120 (b), which is continued from FIG. 120 (a), the movable body 90 is moved to be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and all of the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are mounted. The light emitting diode is shown in a lit state. In addition, the display of the character string “under preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 120 (c) following FIG. 120 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c are visible.

  FIG. 120 (d) following FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 120 (e) continued from FIG. 120 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the attitude of FIG. 120 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the attitude of FIG. 120 (d).

  FIG. 120 (f) following FIG. 120 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 120 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 120 (d).

  FIG. 120 (g) following FIG. 120 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (n) show the effect example using the movable body 90 in stages.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 121 (b), which is continued from FIG. 121 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  FIG. 121 (d) following FIG. 121 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 121 (e) continued from FIG. 121 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d).

  FIG. 121 (f) following FIG. 121 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d).

  FIG. 121 (g) following FIG. 121 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 121 (h) continued from FIG. 121 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 121 (i) continued from FIG. 121 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotating about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 121 (j) continued from FIG. 121 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated by 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 121 (k) continued from FIG. 121 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 121 (l) continued from FIG. 121 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90c becomes visible. The light of all the provided light emitting diodes is visible.

  FIG. 121 (m) following FIG. 121 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude of FIG. 121 (l), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude of FIG. 121 (l). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, there may be a case where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 121 (i) to 121 (l).

  FIG. 121 (n) following FIG. 121 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position, and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 122 to 125 is performed.

  An example of the effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described using FIG. FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (n) show the effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 in stages. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 122 (a) shows a state where the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 122 (b), which is continued from FIG. 122 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 122 (c) following FIG. 122 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 122 (d) following FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves further upward and stops at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 122 (e) following FIG. 122 (d) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are simultaneously moving downward. There is. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 122 (f) following FIG. 122 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original position. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

  FIG. 122 (g) following FIG. 122 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 122 (h) continued from FIG. 122 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 122 (i) continued from FIG. 122 (h), a portion of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable body 90b is obtained by moving only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  122 (j) following FIG. 122 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the lights of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  122 (k) continues on FIG. 122 (j), in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is moved upward, whereby a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is obtained. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) is visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  122 (l) following FIG. 122 (k) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  FIG. 122 (m) following FIG. 122 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to its original position after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Moreover, there may be a case where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original position so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 122 (i) to 122 (l).

  122 (n) following FIG. 122 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position, and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more easily finalized and displayed finally than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  One example of the effect using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 123 (a) to 123 (n) show the effect example using the modification of the movable body 90 in stages. In the present modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a state where the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 123 (b), which is continued from FIG. 123 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, and the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 123 (c) following FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  FIG. 123 (d) following FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 123 (e) continued from FIG. 123 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 123 (d).

  FIG. 123 (f) following FIG. 123 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 123 (d).

  FIG. 123 (g) following FIG. 123 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 123 (h) continued from FIG. 123 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 123 (i) continued from FIG. 123 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotating about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 123 (j) continued from FIG. 123 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 123 (k) continued from FIG. 123 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 123 (l) continued from FIG. 123 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 123 (m) following FIG. 123 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 123 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 123 (d). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, there may be a case where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 123 (i) to 123 (l).

  FIG. 123 (n) following FIG. 123 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more easily finalized and displayed finally than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  An example of effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  In FIG. 124 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, decorative symbol variation display is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (b) following FIG. 124 (a), the finalized display of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the hold icon a2 of the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (c) continued from FIG. 124 (b), the decorative symbol variation display by the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the predictive warning mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string "Press the button!", The button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed, and the notice effect of the button operation is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the fluctuation icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string of "press a button!", A button advance notice h110, and an operation expiration date h112 It is overlapped.

  In FIG. 124 (d) following FIG. 124 (c), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a by the player operating the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, and the sun's An image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (e) continued from FIG. 124 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach effect is displayed. Has been started. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern and a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (f) following FIG. 124 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, SP reach effect display is started by displaying the character string of "match!" And the decorative symbol display device is started. At the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced size. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the Tono character display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (g) following FIG. 124 (f), the SP reach effect is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display 208 The combination of symbols is reduced and temporary stop display is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208, there is an effect display in which the character scene of "win", the character of the lord and the enemy character is ended and the character of the lord has won. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the effect display won by the character of the hall is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (h), which is continued from FIG. 124 (g), in the decoration symbol display device 208, the stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is made. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (i), which is continued from FIG. 124 (h), a big hit game effect display of the 1R's for the 15R special big hit game is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol "Decoration 7" which is a stop symbol of a big hit is displayed, and a character string of "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right. A string of "80 balls" indicating the sum of the numbers and a string of "big hit counts: 1" indicating the number of big hits at the lower right are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R's big hit game effect indication is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (j) following FIG. 124 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the 15R special big hit game is over and the character string of “Dito” is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the “Dito” string is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (k) following FIG. 124 (j), the state is shifted to the power support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "right strike me!" And a symbol indicating that right strike is performed, a variation icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display and a part of the character string "Please hit right!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (l) following FIG. 124 (k), the power supply state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "door open error", a character string of "ball full error", a fluctuation icon ad5, and a special figure 2 reservation icon ac2 of the prefetching notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full error", a part of fluctuation icon ad5 and a special figure 2 reserve icon A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  As shown in the present effect example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and game states. The movable body 90 may overlap all the displays shown above, or the movable body 90 may not overlap the displayed displays.

  An example of effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the announcement effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 121 is performed by the player pressing the chance button 136 in the operation valid period of the chance button 136 of the announcement effect of the button operation. It shows. Even when the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 121 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. . The series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a pre-reading notice. Also, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) is performed, it is configured that final big hit symbols are easier to be determined and displayed than when a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) are not performed. It may be done. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more easily finalized and displayed finally than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  FIG. 125 (b) shows a state in which a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 121 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is finished. In addition, a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) are performed, it is configured that final big hit symbols are easier to be determined and displayed than when a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) are not performed. If a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) are performed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed compared to the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) are performed. In the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) are performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) are performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more easily finalized and displayed finally than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 126, a modified example of how the movable body 90 is viewed at the initial position shown in FIG. 119 will be described. The movable body 90 is located rearward of the game board 125 having a game nail.

  FIG. 126 (a) is an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30a at the initial position. The structural body 30 a has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a portion of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a portion of the movable body 90b, and a portion of the movable body 90c are visible through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 126 (b) is an example in which the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30b at the initial position. The structural body 30b has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a vertically elongated rectangular notch at a substantially central portion. The structure 30 b is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c are provided via the notch of the structure 30b. It is visible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30c at the initial position. The structural body 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, since the movable body 90 is overlapped with the structure 30 c, the movable body 90 can not be viewed by the player. By disposing the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structural body 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structural body 30c may be made more easily visible during non-display than in display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  With reference to FIG. 127, a modification of the position and movement operation of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described.

  FIG. 127 (a) is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down in front of the liquid crystal display device a 208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a 208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 127 (b) is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 127 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The figure on the left side in FIG. 127 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is positioned behind the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle diagram in FIG. 127 (c) shows the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moved downward. The figure on the right side in FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display c208 after the movable liquid crystal display c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is positioned in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c 208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, a rendering example using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 138. The structure 247 used in the effect example of FIG. 128 to FIG. 138 is a structure in which the shape of the front is substantially circular and the design of the family crest is applied to the surface, and can be moved vertically. 128 to 137, the left figure shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left figure, the structure 247. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is a schematic for determining whether a predetermined character display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani or a display su1 of the sun) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be seen by the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the drawing, the line of sight by which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by ○, and the line of sight by which the player can not visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by x. The shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 in this example is determined by setting a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 to a predetermined eye angle (e.g., a general sitting height (e.g., a seating height of 70 cm to 100 cm) The angle of the line of sight in the normal gaming attitude of the player) may be designed to be calculated so as not to be visible. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 128 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 128 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 128 (b), which is continued from FIG. 128 (a), the character display SB of the sabothani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 128 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonal upper view has the character of Sabohani A part of the display SB can be viewed. In the description of the player's eyes in the present example and in the following examples, the term “substantially front” defines the angle within the range of ± about 10 ° as the front when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper means that the angle of the eye is + about 20 ° or more as the substantially oblique upper, and the substantially oblique lower means the eye angle of −20 ° or less as the substantially oblique lower, but the present disclosure Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, the position of the line of sight should be higher than that of the substantially front with substantially diagonal upper, and the position of the line of sight should be lower than that with the substantially front with substantially diagonal lower.

  In FIG. 128 (c), which is continued from FIG. 128 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the sabothani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabohani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 128 (d) following FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which the animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking from substantially diagonally above will display the Sabohani character You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 128 (e) following FIG. 128 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, this example is an example in which movement display is performed from a position at which the character display SB of Sabohani used for prenoting the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to a position at which the character display SB is not overlapped. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 129 to 137 is performed. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 is not moved and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, leftward, rightward and rotation. The player who is generally seen from the front may be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani by performing one or a plurality of movements, and may be overlapped with the structure 247. At least any one or more of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or rotational movement of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed while moving and displaying the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at the position. In some cases, it may be possible for a player who is looking substantially from the front to be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of SaboHani.

  FIG. 129 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 129 (b) continued from FIG. 129 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 129 (c), which follows FIG. 129 (b), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 129 (d) following FIG. 129 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the Sabohani character display You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 129 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 129 (d), shows a state in which the animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  Thus, the present example again overlaps the structure 247 after performing the movement display from the position at which the sabothani character display SB used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. In this example, the movement display is performed at the selected position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 137 is performed.

  FIG. 130 shows the example of presentation using the structure 247 and the structure 50t in stages. The structure 50t is an opaque thin plate-like structure, and the title of the game console is displayed on the surface. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 130 (b) continued from FIG. 130 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 130 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 130 (c) following FIG. 130 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 130 (d) following FIG. 130 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the sabothani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 130 (e) following FIG. 130 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern. In the state of FIG. 130 (d), the player looking at the structure 50t from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal bottom shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In this way, this example is overlapped to the structure 50t after the movement display is performed from the position where the character character SB of Sabohani used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. This is an example of moving display at a position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 131 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The figure on the left side of FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 131 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of a decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 131 (b), which is continued from FIG. 131 (a), is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 131 (c) following FIG. 131 (b) shows a state where an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The lower right portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped.

  FIG. 131 (d) following FIG. 131 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani further moves to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 131 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 131 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 131 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  As described above, in this example, the position that is not overlapped with the structure 247 after the movement display is performed from the position where it is not overlapped with the structure 247 to the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for warning of the change is overlapped. Is an example of moving display. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 132 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  132 (b), which is continued from FIG. 132 (a), is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani in this example is larger than the character display SB of Sabohani shown in FIG.

  FIG. 132 (c) following FIG. 132 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right part of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 132 (d) following FIG. 132 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped. In the state shown in FIG. 132 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player looking at the substantially oblique upper side is the character of Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 132 (e), which follows FIG. 132 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  Thus, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is not overlapped to the structure 247 to the position where a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not to be overlapped with the structure 247 later, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an effect example which is always visible from the player in a substantially front view. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 133 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 133 (b) continued from FIG. 133 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 133 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 133 (c) following FIG. 133 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire display su1 of the sun appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapped with the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 133 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the display su1 of the sun and the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the sun display su1 and at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB.

  In FIG. 133 (d) continued from FIG. 133 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws the display su1 of the sun upward is displayed, and the display su1 of the sun moves upward Showing an animation display to be displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3.

  FIG. 133 (e) continued from FIG. 133 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, with the safohani character display SB displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped, the sun display su1 is upward The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  Thus, in the present example, only the display su1 of the sun is displayed after the display 2 of the character display SB of Sabohan and the display su1 of the sun, which are used to announce the change, are overlapped with the structure 247. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not overlapping with. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 134 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  134 (b) continues to FIG. 134 (a), the whole of the sabothan character display SB and the sun at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247 while the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display. The entire display su1 is displayed as it appears from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the Sabohan character display SB and at least a portion of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 134 (c) following FIG. 134 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun move upward on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A character display SB of Sabohan and a display su1 of the sun are displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 134 (d) following FIG. 134 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which only the display su1 of the sun moves downward on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon a3. In the state of FIG. 134 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the display su1 of the sun, and the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the sun of the display su1. The whole is visible.

  In FIG. 134 (e) continued from FIG. 134 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, with the safohani character display SB displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, the sun display su1 is further down The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. The player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not see the display su1 of the sun, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top can see at least a part of the display su1 of the sun .

  Thus, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the notice of the change are displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped, the character display SB of Sabohani and the display of the sun In this example, movement display is performed at a position where su1 is not overlapped with the structure 247, and thereafter movement display is performed at a position where only the sun display su1 is overlapped with the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 135 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 135 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude from the structure 247 in a radial shape. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as the advance notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

  In FIG. 135 (b) continued from FIG. 135 (a), the upper half of the character display SB of the SABOHANI at the position overlapped with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to move upward so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state of FIG. 135 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the effect image ef1 of the player who can not view the character display SB of Sabohani, but from a substantially diagonal top The player who is watching is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohan and a part of the effect image ef1.

  In FIG. 135 (c) continued from FIG. 135 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the safari is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is displayed moving up so as to appear from the bottom. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (c), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while a player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 135 (d) following FIG. 135 (c) shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking from substantially diagonally above will display the Sabohani character You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 135 (e), which follows FIG. 135 (d), shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB and effect image ef1 are displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, the present example is an example in which movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped, but the character display SB of Sabohani is used. Is an example in which the effect image ef1 attached to the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position not overlapped by the structure 247 before it is displayed at a position overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 136 shows three example effects using the structure 247. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 136 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 136 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character display h113 of the temple and the balloon display h114 of the character string “when chance is found!” It is displayed to overlap in part. The balloon display h114 of the character string of “If you find a character!” Is a display for predicting that the character display SB of Sabohani appears, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.

  In FIG. 136 (b) continued from FIG. 136 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Further, in the balloon display h114, a character string "during character appearance!" Is displayed. The character string of “character appearing!” May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabo Hani, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state shown in FIG. 136 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In FIG. 136 (c) continued from FIG. 136 (b), the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is enlarged. In the balloon display h114, a character string "during character expansion!" Is displayed. May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state of FIG. 135 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front is able to visually recognize part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

  As described above, in this example, before displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for the advance notice of the change at the position where the SABOHANI character display SB is overlapped to the structure 247, a display for previewing that the SABOHANI character display SB is displayed After the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position where it is overlapped to the structure 247, a display is made to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed, and the position to be overlapped to the structure 247 is performed. In this example, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed on the screen is enlarged, and a display is provided to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the size of the character display SB of Sabohani to be enlarged is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily displayed finally.

  The drawing on the left side of FIG. 136 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 136 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and the character display SB1 of the sabo hani 1 and the sabo hani 2 serving as the advance notice of the variation is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 136 (A), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a portion of the character display SB1 of the Sabo Hani 1 and at least a portion of the character display SB2 of the Sabo Hani 2.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change are displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247. is there. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of the advance notices displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally.

  The figure on the left side of FIG. 136 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In FIG. 136 (A), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 to be a preliminary display of the variation is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. A character display SB2 of Sabohani 2, which is a preliminary display of the change, is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state of FIG. 136 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabo hani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabo Hani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the SaboHani 1, and the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of SaboHani.

  As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapped with the body 50t. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapped by the plurality of structures is large, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed.

  FIG. 137 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208. FIG.

  137 (b) continues on FIG. 137 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 137 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabohani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 137 (c) following FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  In FIG. 137 (d) following FIG. 137 (c), the structure 247 moves upward and is located at a position where it overlaps with the character display SB of the safari that is displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 137 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonally lower is the character display SB of Sabohani At least a part is visible.

  Thus, in this example, after displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for anticipating the change at a position overlapped with the structure 247, the character movement SB is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and then the structure is performed. In this example, the body 247 is moved, and the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. It is also good. In this example, the movement of the structure 247 is carried out behind the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani, which is the advance display, but it is always displayed on the character display SB of Sabohani according to the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani. The movement of the structure 247 may be performed so as to overlap, or the movement of the structure 247 may be performed first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohan may be delayed.

  FIG. 138 shows an example of effect using the structure 247. FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at a position where they overlap the structure 247. FIG. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 138 (b), the structure 247 is viewed from the upper left to the lower right. The player visually recognizing the structure 247 from the front can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani although a part of the effect image ef1 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the player visually recognizing the structure 247 from the upper left to the lower right visually recognizes a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player visually recognized from the front. In addition, the effect of this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 137 is performed. It is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 148, examples of effects using the hold icon and the change icon will be described. Arrows in FIGS. 139 to 148 are for explaining the locus and movement direction of the holding icon and the fluctuation icon, but the locus and movement of the holding icon and the fluctuation icon in the decorative symbol display device 208 are described. It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

  FIG. 139 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 139 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 139 (h) and 139 (i) after FIGS. 139 (a) to (g) and FIG. 139 (j) after FIGS. 139 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 139 (a)-(i). Fig. 139 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 139 (b) following FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 139 (c) continued from FIG. 139 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 139 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 139 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 139 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 139 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 139 (f), which is continued from FIG. 139 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is a special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be The notice display m1 may be a notice display for giving a notice that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display that the SP reach effect is carried out.

  In FIG. 139 (g) continued from FIG. 139 (f), the preliminary display m1 shows a middle symbol display area while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  139 (h) continues to FIG. 139 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 139 (i), which follows FIG. 139 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 is displayed as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation to return to the position before movement is ended. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 139 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 139 (j) following FIG. 139 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 139 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base where the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 139 (k) continued from FIG. 139 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the condition that has been

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. It is. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 140 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 140 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 140 (h) to 140 (j) after FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (g) and FIGS. 140 (k) to 140 (k) to FIG. The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 140 (a)-(j). FIG. 140 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 140 (b) following FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 140 (c) continued from FIG. 140 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 140 (d) following FIG. 140 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 140 (e), which follows FIG. 140 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 140 (f) continued from FIG. 140 (e), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Recently, a vertically-long rectangular holding icon (hereinafter referred to as “the holding icon while going out” is displayed on the pedestal displaying the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 as the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 with the character string “on the go” "" Is displayed. In addition, it may replace with a pending icon while going out, and may use a default shaped pending icon with a lighter color.

  In FIG. 140 (g) continued from FIG. 140 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 140 (h) continued from FIG. 140 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the pedestal on which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 5 is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  140 (i) continues to FIG. 140 (h). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the base before moving is finished with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reserved icon a3 and the base is displayed on the base The hold icon in the same manner as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon while out of the office.

  In FIG. 140 (j), which is continued from FIG. 140 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon during leaving is erased.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 2 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 140 (k)-(m).

  In FIG. 140 (k) following FIG. 140 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 140 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears Be done. On the pedestal on which the on-going hold icon is displayed, the on-hold icon re-appearing animation in which the on-hold icon of the aspect (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps the on-going on-hold icon and reappears is displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 140 (l) continued from FIG. 140 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is not moved. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 140 (m) shows a state in which the hold icon is erased while out of the office.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. Is an example of provisionally displaying a pending icon of another aspect in place of the pending icon being moved. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 is performed.

  FIG. 141 shows two examples of the effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 141 shows an example of the pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 141 (h) and 141 (i) after FIGS. 141 (a) to 141 (g) and FIG. 141 (j) after FIGS. 141 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 141 (a)-(i). Fig. 141 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208 The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 141 (a) shows a state where decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 141 (b) following FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 141 (c) continued from FIG. 141 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 141 (d) following FIG. 141 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 (e) following FIG. 141 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 (f) continued from FIG. 141 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed, the special view 1 reservation icon a3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a suspension icon temporary movement animation in which the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily moved to the pedestal for which the special view 1 suspension icon a 3 is displayed is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, and is used as a notice of the change. May be displayed.

  In FIG. 141 (g) continued from FIG. 141 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. Moreover, in the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b 3 is temporarily displayed on the base on which the special figure 1 reserve icon a 3 was displayed most recently. Is displayed on. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  141 (h) following FIG. 141 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 to be returned to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 208ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  In FIG. 141 (i) continued from FIG. 141 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is finished, with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 suspension icon a3. The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement. In addition, the suspension icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 141 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 141 (j) following FIG. 141 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 141 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 suspension icon a 3 reappears on the base where the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily displayed. The suspension icon re-appearing animation and the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 move toward the original pedestal. The temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 hold icon b 3, but the special view 2 hold icon b 3 is a hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation It may be displayed to overlap. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 141 (k) following FIG. 141 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 is ended, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement. Then, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is ended, and the special view 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the move.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. In the example below, the pending icon on the right is temporarily displayed in place of the pending icon being moved, and when the pending icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed pending icon returns to the original position. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 is performed.

  FIG. 142 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 142 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIG. 139 (h) and FIG. 139 (i) are performed after FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (g) and FIG. 139 (j) after FIGS. 142 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 142 (a)-(i). 142 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 142 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  142 (c) continued from FIG. 142 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 142 (d) following FIG. 142 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 142 (e) following FIG. 142 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  142 (e) is continued from FIG. 142 (f) in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of a cassette.

  142 (g) continued from FIG. 142 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  142 (h) following FIG. 142 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed.

  FIG. 142 (i) following FIG. 142 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special view 1 reserved icon a3 and the movement animation is finished. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 2 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 142 (j), (k).

  142 (j) following FIG. 142 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 142 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears And a special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base on which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed, and the character string "under preparation" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  142 (k) following FIG. 142 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 is ended, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement It shows the condition that has been

  As described above, in the present example, the pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol fluctuation display is re-varied is performed when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the temporary notice display while the temporary stop display of the missing symbol is displayed. There is no example.

  FIG. 143 shows the effect example using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 143 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 143 (b) following FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 143 (c) continued from FIG. 143 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 143 (d) following FIG. 143 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 143 (e) following FIG. 143 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  143 (f) continues to FIG. 143 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 reservation icon a3 is a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  143 (g) continued from FIG. 143 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 143 (h) following FIG. 143 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  143 (i) following FIG. 143 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 is displayed as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation for returning to the position before movement is finished .

  143 (j) following FIG. 143 (i) has shown the state as which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" was displayed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  143 (k) continued from FIG. 143 (j), while the display of the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” in the decorative symbol display device 208 is the special view 1 reservation icon a3 being a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 143 (l) continued from FIG. 143 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 143 (m) following FIG. 143 (l), the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) at which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 143 (n) following FIG. 143 (m) shows a state in which the re-movement animation for returning to the position before movement is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reservation icon a3. There is.

  As described above, in this example, while the temporary stop display of the out pattern is displayed, the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle pattern of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display, and the decorative symbol variation display changes again and again. It is an example to do. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 144 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 144 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 144 (b) following FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 144 (c), which is continued from FIG. 144 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3, the special view 2 hold icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 144 (d) following FIG. 144 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 144 (e) following FIG. 144 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  144 (f) continues to FIG. 144 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” in the decorative symbol display device 208 is the special view 1 reserved icon a3 being a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  144 (g) continued from FIG. 144 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  144 (h) continues to FIG. 144 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 144 (i) following FIG. 144 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the position before movement is finished as the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reservation icon a3. .

  144 (j) following FIG. 144 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  144 (k) continued from FIG. 144 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed, the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special view 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 144 (l) continued from FIG. 144 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  144 (m) following FIG. 144 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 2 hold icon b3 was displayed is displayed The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 144 (n) following FIG. 144 (m) shows a state in which the re-movement animation for returning to the position before movement is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notice display m1 as the special view 2 reservation icon b3. There is.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the pseudo continuous notice is performed multiple times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 is performed. If there is not enough hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 145 gradually shows an example of presentation using the hold icon.

  Fig. 145 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 145 (b) following FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 145 (c), which is continued from FIG. 145 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3, the special view 2 hold icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 145 (d) following FIG. 145 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Drawing 145 (e) following Drawing 145 (d) shows a state where temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" was displayed in decoration symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 145 (f), which is continued from FIG. 145 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5” in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  In FIG. 145 (g) continued from FIG. 145 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  145 (h) continues to FIG. 145 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 145 (i), which follows FIG. 145 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 hold icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  In FIG. 145 (j) continued from FIG. 145 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "reach!" Is displayed.

  As described above, in this example, when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started It is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 is performed.

  FIG. 146 shows the effect example using the variation icon in stages.

  146 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  146 (b) following FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  146 (c) continues in FIG. 146 (c) after the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default mode special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  146 (d) following FIG. 146 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  146 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 146 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  146 (f) continues from FIG. 146 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon ad1 is displayed from the fluctuation icon display area 280 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". It shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out and moving as the advance notice m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 are the same display mode. Further, on the pedestal of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the fluctuation icon is not displayed. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a prefetch notice. May be

  146 (g) continued from FIG. 146 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m2 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  146 (h) continues to FIG. 146 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice m2 returning to the position (base) of the variation icon display area 280 is displayed. -The temporary stop display of "decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the advance notice m2.

  146 (i) following FIG. 146 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation returning to the position of the fluctuation icon display area 280 ends as the notice display m2 as the fluctuation icon ad1. .

  As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the variation icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the advance notice during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 is performed. It should be noted that not only the variation icon of the default mode but also a variation icon of an aspect other than the default mode may be used as the advance notice m2 of this example.

  FIG. 147 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 147 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 147 (b) following FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  147 (c) continued from FIG. 147 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (d) following FIG. 147 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  147 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 147 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  147 (e) is continued from FIG. 147 (e). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the advance notice m1 is a display used as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In FIG. 147 (g) continued from FIG. 147 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  147 (h) continues on FIG. 147 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed.

  147 (i) following FIG. 147 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before moving is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reserved icon a3. .

  FIG. 147 (j) following FIG. 147 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed, and the moving icon of the holding icon moves the holding icon to the left and the moving animation of the holding icon moves to the changing icon display area 208 and the moving animation of the holding icon changes .

  FIG. 147 (k) following FIG. 147 (j) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 147 (l) continued from FIG. 147 (k), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is a special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 3" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  147 (m) continues on FIG. 147 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 3", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 2" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decorative 2" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 3" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 147 (n) following FIG. 147 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3 is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (o) following FIG. 147 (n) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special icon 1 hold icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  147 (p) following FIG. 147 (o) shows the state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol change display is displayed, and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the left and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. There is.

  147 (q) following FIG. 147 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (r) continued from FIG. 147 (q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the temporary stop display of “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 8” is displayed, the special view 1 reserved icon a3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 are the same display mode, and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  147 (s) continued from FIG. 147 (r), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 8", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area It shows a state in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 7" which is temporarily stopped and displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 8" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  147 (t) following FIG. 147 (s), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3 "is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed is shown.

  147 (u) continued from FIG. 147 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 reservation icon a3, and the moving animation ends, and “decoration 7” Reach production of is performed.

  As described above, this example is an example of developing a reach effect by continuously notifying that a predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. is there. The first and second notices appearing in this example are used as pre-reading notices, and the third notices appearing are used as notices of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed.

  FIG. 148 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 148 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. Further, the special view 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of the character of the lord. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of the character of your character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 148 (b) following FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the form of the character of the window character is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 148 (c), which is continued from FIG. 148 (b), the special symbol 2 is a special figure 2 in which a special character 1 is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (d) following FIG. 148 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 148 (e) following FIG. 148 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  148 (f) continues to FIG. 148 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 2 reservation icon b2 is a special view 1 and 2 pending icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out from special drawing 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2 and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out from the special view 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. All of the notice displays c1 to c3, the special view 2 suspension icon b2 and b3, and the special view 1 suspension icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b2, b3 and the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 148 (g) continued from FIG. 148 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 changes. It shows a state where it has changed to the advance notice c3 '. The notice displays c1 'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and a display mode in which a large-displayed character of the lord is fighting with a Japanese sword removed. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display c1 'fights against "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped on the left symbol display area 208a, The battle animation is a battle animation in which the notice display c2 'fights with "decoration 4", which is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3', which is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, is displayed temporarily. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 148 (h) following FIG. 148 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 ′ changes to c1, the notice display c2 ′ changes to c2, and the notice display c3 ′ changes to c3 The notice display c3 displayed the special view 2 hold icon b3 at the position at which the notice display c2 displayed the special view 1 hold icon a3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2. The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is ended, and a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown.

  In FIG. 148 (i) continued from FIG. 148 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special view 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation in which the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is ended as the movement before the movement. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

  As described above, in the present example, when the plurality of reserved icons collide with the plurality of decoration symbols as the plurality of advance notices during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decoration symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started. Is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 147 is performed. When the number of pending icons used as the advance notice display of this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the advance notice display.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 169.

  FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (c) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 149 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 149 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the hall is displayed at the approximate center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 149 (b) continued from FIG. 149 (a), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 149 (c) following FIG. 149 (b), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the brow character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are the same. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a presentation example of balloon display will be described.

  FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 150 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 150 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 150 (b) following FIG. 150 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple from the left end of the screen is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 150 (c) continued from FIG. 150 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed. Shows the status displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon and the design of the sunny mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon is displayed) Then, after stopping display at the approximate center of the screen, it is possible to display the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark in order from the top of the character string, or even if all the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark are displayed at once. Good. The same configuration may be applied to other balloon display.

  In FIG. 150 (d) continued from FIG. 150 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 150 (e) continued from FIG. 150 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1 may be overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may be overlapped with the balloon display f2 .

  FIG. 150 (e) shows a state in which the balloon animation f1 is moved upward by the appearance of the balloon balloon f2. In this example, the balloon animation f1 is moved upward and the balloon animation f2 is moved leftward at the same time.

  In (f) of FIG. 150 (e), which is a continuation of FIG. 150 (e), a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved toward the left and a moving animation is performed. The moving animation is performed, and the state displayed at the upper center of the screen is shown.

  In FIG. 150 (g) continued from FIG. 150 (f), a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 150 (h) following FIG. 150 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and height are different. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  In FIG. 150 (h), with the appearance of the balloon display f3, the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward by moving animation, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen Is shown. In this example, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves toward the right are simultaneously performed.

  In FIG. 150 (i) continued from FIG. 150 (h), a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right, and a moving animation is performed, and the balloon f2 is moved upward. The moving animation is performed and displayed at the approximate upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows a state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, after the frame, the balloon display f2 of the wolf character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may delete the balloon display f3 after deleting the balloon display f2, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. At the same time, the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the n-th time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number It may be erased before the start of) or may be erased before displaying the temporary stop indication. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out gradually in the same place, or in the same manner as the balloon display f1 of the Tono character After displaying the moving animation moving upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction of each appearance. The same may be applied to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed. In the balloon display described in the present example and the following drawings, patterns of each configuration (weather mark (fine mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) of the balloon display, display of character strings, frame, display of character name, character In each of the face images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or all may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character may crack may be displayed. The entire balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates and the animation display in which the display of the character string blinks and the animation display in which the character blinks. In addition, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and the animation display in which the character palpates may be displayed while the number of characters in the display of the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display may be repeated to rotate and return to the original posture, one animation display to return to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original may be moved after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one gloss display moving or changing may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display of the respective configurations of the balloon display may overlap with a part of another animation of each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  151 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol aa4, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 151 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 151 (b) following FIG. 151 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple is displayed from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 151 (c) continued from FIG. 151 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 151 (d) continued from FIG. 151 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 151 (e) following FIG. 151 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , A moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In (f) of FIG. 151 (e), which is continued from (e) of FIG. 151, the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 151 (g) continued from FIG. 151 (f) is displayed such that a balloon display f2 by a brow character appears from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 151 (h) following FIG. 151 (g) shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left and displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  151 (i) continues on FIG. 151 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 151 (j) following FIG. 151 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. 11 shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 151 (k) continued from FIG. 151 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen It is displayed.

  In FIG. 151 (l) following FIG. 151 (k), the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 151 (m), which follows FIG. 151 (l), shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right and displayed in the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 152 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 152 (b), which is continued from FIG. 152 (a), a balloon display f1 is displayed such that a balloon character f1 from the left end of the screen appears. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 152 (c) continued from FIG. 152 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed. Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 152 (d) continued from FIG. 152 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 152 (e) continued from FIG. 152 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 152 (f) following FIG. 152 (e) shows a state in which the balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left and the moving animation is performed and the stop display is performed substantially at the center of the screen . The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the hall character and the character image of "don" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 152 (g) continued from FIG. 152 (f), after the moving animation moving toward the left of the balloon display f2 is finished, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In FIG. 152 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the text of "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon of the balloon display f2 and the pattern of the clear mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion Approximately the upper half of can be seen. Note that at a certain timing between FIG. 152 (f) and FIG. 152 (g), the balloon of the balloon display f1 is in a state in which a part of the pattern of the clear mark is displayed and the character string is not displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 152 (h) continued from FIG. 152 (g), the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  152 (i) continues on FIG. 152 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and an operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 152 (j) following FIG. 152 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 152 (k) following FIG. 152 (j) shows a state where the balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right and the moving animation is performed and the stop display is performed at the approximate center of the screen . The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 and the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the brow character and the character image of "爺" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 152 (l), which follows FIG. 152 (k), shows a state in which moving animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 152 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the text of "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and the part of the frame of the design of the cloud mark and the balloon part Approximately the upper half of can be seen. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 151 (m) continued from FIG. 152 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen It is done.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIG. 153 shows an example of a pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 153 (n) to 153 (q) after FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (m) and FIG. 153 (r) to FIG. 153 (a) to FIG. The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Fig. 153 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  153 (b) continues from FIG. 153 (a) so that the balloon display f1 by the character of Doun appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 153 (c) continued from FIG. 153 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 153 (d) continued from FIG. 153 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 153 (e) continued from FIG. 153 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 153 (f) following FIG. 153 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 153 (g) continued from FIG. 153 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 153 (h) following FIG. 153 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 153 (i) continued from FIG. 153 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  In FIG. 153 (j) continued from FIG. 153 (i), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 153 (k) following FIG. 153 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of "Honey" displayed at a position overlapped with the Sabo Hani character image and the Sabo Hani character image, and a character string and pattern of "When reached" are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 153 (l) following FIG. 153 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The display is stopped at the position where the balloon part f4 appeared from the lower part of the screen has appeared, and the movement on the balloon display f3 is also interrupted and displayed once. In addition, the lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 153 (m) following FIG. 153 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f2. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 153 (n) following FIG. 153 (m) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon portion in which a character image of "Shippu" and a character string and a pattern of "Heating fever" displayed on the face image of the Gale character and the face image of the Gale character are displayed. It is an indication that includes. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 and the like.

  In (o) in FIG. 153 (o) following FIG. 153 (n), scroll display of balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 153 (p) following FIG. 153 (o), scroll display of balloon displays f4 and f5 is performed, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 153 (q) following FIG. 153 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 153 (r) continued from FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (m), the balloon display f5 is displayed from the left end of the screen so that the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed in FIG. It shows a state in which a moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect that the balloon displays f1 to f4 are scrolled upward in order is displayed, the effect that the balloon displays f2 to f5 are scrolled to the right is performed.

  In FIG. 153 (s) following FIG. 153 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to simultaneously come out from the right end of the screen .

  FIG. 153 (t) following FIG. 153 (s) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. FIG. 154 shows an example of a pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 154 (k) and (l) after FIGS. 154 (a) to (j) and FIG. 154 (m) after FIGS. 154 (a) to (j) The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Fig. 154 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 154 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  Continuing from FIG. 154 (a), FIG. 154 (b) is such that the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 154 (c) continued from FIG. 154 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 154 (d) continued from FIG. 154 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 154 (e) continued from FIG. 154 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 154 (f) following FIG. 154 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 154 (g) continued from FIG. 154 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 154 (h) continued from FIG. 154 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 154 (i), which is continued from FIG. 154 (h), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  In FIG. 154 (j) continued from FIG. 154 (i), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 154 (k) following FIG. 154 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

  FIG. 154 (l) following FIG. 154 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Thereafter, there may be a case in which reach effect is started while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are erased, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 154 (m) following FIG. 154 (a) to (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation expiration date h112 are displayed. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 154 (n) following FIG. 154 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 'and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 'appearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. After this, the balloon displays f1 'and f2 may be erased and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect or the reach effect may be started, or the animation in which the holding icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Good.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 155 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 155 (b) following FIG. 155 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 155 (c) continued from FIG. 155 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 155 (d) continued from FIG. 155 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 155 (e) continued from FIG. 155 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 155 (f) following FIG. 155 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 'was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 155 (g) continued from FIG. 155 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1' and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at the position where the action is made, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 155 (h) continued from FIG. 155 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen at the same time as the moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f2 is configured not to be displayed but to be erased above the position at which the balloon display f1 'is displayed. Also, by displaying the balloon display f1 'in priority to the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving in a scroll display behind the balloon display f1, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured such that the overlapping parts of 'are not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the character of the eyebrow of the balloon display f2 and the character image of the eyebrow are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ', they are scrolled to the upper end position of the screen. As described above, in this example, when a balloon display having a high hit probability appears, the callout having a high reliability is left on the screen by prioritizing and deleting the balloon having the low hit reliability. It is configured.

  In FIG. 155 (i) continued from FIG. 155 (h), with the balloon display f1 ′ being stopped and displayed, a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed and the balloon display is performed. The state f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 'and f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 156 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 156 (b) following FIG. 156 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 156 (c) following FIG. 156 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 156 (d) following FIG. 156 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 156 (e) following FIG. 156 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. After the balloon display f2 by the キ ャ ラ ク タ character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In this example, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 is moved upward to perform a moving animation. Therefore, the balloon display f2 is approximately below the balloon display f1. Displayed to overlap in half.

  In FIG. 156 (f), which is continued from FIG. 156 (e), in the state where the lower half of the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, a moving animation of moving upward together is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 156 (g) following FIG. 156 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted, and a chance is made at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 156 (h) following FIG. 156 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of “Today's weather” and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of “balloon display f2” (“Today's weather”) The balloon part of the balloon display 2 by overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part (the character string of "Today's weather" or the frame part of the cloud mark or the balloon part ) Is configured to overlap with part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of “Today's weather” and the pattern of the rain mark and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters overlap in the balloon portion. There may be cases where the balloon part may overlap with the face image of the character, or there may be cases where the character image of the character's name overlaps with the balloon part.

  In FIG. 156 (i), which is continued from FIG. 156 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 are moved upward is performed, and the upper end of the balloon f1 and the lower end of the balloon f3 fit on the screen Shows a state in which the moving animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or ended. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 to f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be possible. Further, in the present example, the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays are configured to be uniform, but the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays may be configured not to be even. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 157 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 157 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 157 (b), which follows FIG. 157 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 157 (c) following FIG. 157 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 157 (d) continued from FIG. 157 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 157 (e) following FIG. 157 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and part of each configuration of the balloon display (the weather pattern, characters, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be reduced to be different for each configuration.

  In FIG. 157 (f), which follows FIG. 157 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 157 (g) continued from FIG. 157 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted and a chance is made to a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 157 (h) following FIG. 157 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f3 by a princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before being moved upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the degree of reduction of the balloon display f1. In addition, one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced more or less than the other, or the configuration to be reduced between the one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 157 (i) following FIG. 157 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or ended and the stop display is performed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 158 (a) to 158 (k) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 158 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth pattern aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 158 (b) following FIG. 158 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In (c) of FIG. 158 (c), which is a continuation of FIG. 158 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 158 (d) continued from FIG. 158 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 158 (e) following FIG. 158 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  In (f) of FIG. 158 (e), which is a continuation of FIG. 158 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 158 (g) continued from FIG. 158 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 'is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1' The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 158 (h) following FIG. 158 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1 'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1 'is enlarged, and as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is floated instead. . In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "SP reach confirmation" are displayed. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased according to the change of the new balloon display f1 ′, but for example, it is moved in any of the left-right direction to be erased It may be overlapped, may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a which has changed without moving, and may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 158 (i) continued from FIG. 158 (h), stop display is performed so that the balloon display f1a fits within the frame of the screen.

  In FIG. 158 (j) following FIG. 158 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 158 (k) following FIG. 158 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The character string "SP reach confirmation" is deleted and the character string "all rotation reach confirmation" is displayed. The character string “all rotation reach determination” is displayed as if it protrudes from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "all rotation reach confirmation" is a character image of a decorative symbol or a hallmark, a holding icon, a variation icon, a special figure 1 holding number aa1 or a special figure 1 fourth pattern aa2 or a special drawing 2 holding number aa3 There may be a case where the display of the second pattern aa4 of 2 and the common drawing reserve number aa5, the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the display of the character string of the tutorial display area tu1 or the display other than these may overlap.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 159 (a) to 159 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 159 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 159 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 159 (b) following FIG. 159 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, a character display m3 of a princess is displayed from the left end of the screen. Princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th design aa2 of special drawing 1, the special drawing 2 reservation number aa3, the 4th design aa4 of special drawing 2, the common drawing reservation number aa5, the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing There is.

  In FIG. 159 (c), which follows FIG. 159 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed It shows the displayed state. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 159 (d) continued from FIG. 159 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of the character It is displayed to be. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  In FIG. 159 (e) following FIG. 159 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, an animation is displayed in which the princess character m3 moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed in the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the left character part of the balloon part f2 It is displayed to overlap.

  In FIG. 159 (f) following FIG. 159 (e), the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the middle character part of the balloon part f2 of the balloon display f2 It is displayed to be.

  In FIG. 159 (g) continued from FIG. 159 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the character part of the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern part of the sunny mark and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap with the character part of the right part and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button advance notice h110 and a part of the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 159 (h) following FIG. 159 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the image of the cloudy mark on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f2 and the rain on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f3 It is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the image of the mark and a part of the face image of the brow character.

  In FIG. 159 (i) continued from FIG. 159 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and is erased so as to come out from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the nephew character. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 160 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 160 (b) following FIG. 160 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. The frame portion of the balloon display f1 is difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 160 (c) continued from FIG. 160 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. It shows the displayed state. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 160 (d) continued from FIG. 160 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

  In FIG. 160 (e) following FIG. 160 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 160 (f) following FIG. 160 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and the patterns of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 160 (g) continued from FIG. 160 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the sunny mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 160 (h) following FIG. 160 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the design of the cloudy mark, and a portion of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

  In FIG. 160 (i) following FIG. 160 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. By the structure 247, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position Alternatively, the balloon display may be configured to move, or may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 161 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 161 (b) continued from FIG. 161 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the light emission display of the smiling character is performed on the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  In FIG. 161 (c) continued from FIG. 161 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  In FIG. 161 (d) continued from FIG. 161 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button advance display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 161 (e) following FIG. 161 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 161 (f) following FIG. 161 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 161 (g) continued from FIG. 161 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the clear mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 161 (h) continued from FIG. 161 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 161 (i), which follows FIG. 161 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, when light emission display is performed by the light emission panel positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  162 (a), in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 162 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 162 (b) following FIG. 162 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 162 (c), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. It shows the displayed state. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

  In FIG. 162 (d) continued from FIG. 162 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

  In FIG. 162 (e) continued from FIG. 162 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the character of the character of the character, part of the character of the character "don", and part of the frame portion of the character balloon display f2. .

  In FIG. 162 (f), which is continued from FIG. 162 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord character, the whole of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the wolf character It overlaps with part of the image.

  In FIG. 162 (g) continued from FIG. 162 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a substantially entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the brow character, and the button preview h110 overlaps with all of the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 162 (h) following FIG. 162 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the first display, the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "hime" There is.

  In FIG. 162 (i), which is continued from FIG. 162 (h), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the whole character string, the rain mark A part of the pattern of the part, a part of the face image of the princess character, and the whole of the character image of "hime" are overlapped.

  In this example, when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decoration pattern, the fourth pattern, the mini decoration pattern, the notice display, the prefetch notice display, the tutorial display, the pseudo link display, the reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive calls display, number of acquired balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of the light amount adjustment display, the button press display, the error display, the ball removal display, the door open display, and the abnormality occurrence display.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (h) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 163 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 163 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 163 (b) following FIG. 163 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1 ', the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the lord character and the face image of the character of the lord character, and the character string and pattern of "simulative chance!" It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 163 (c) continued from FIG. 163 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Shows the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 reserve icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab.

  In FIG. 163 (d) continued from FIG. 163 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 163 (e) following FIG. 163 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 'by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1' moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of キ ャ ラ ク タ, a character string of “hold change” and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 163 (f) following FIG. 163 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is performed, and a movement in which the balloon display f2 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2' is in the state of being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1' was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 163 (g) following FIG. 163 (f) shows a state in which the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 'is moving toward the special figure 1, 2 suspension icon display area 280ab There is.

  In FIG. 163 (h) following FIG. 163 (g), the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 'is replaced with the special view 1 reserve icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special view 1 reserve icon a4. It is done. After this, the balloon display f1 ′, f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation may be performed in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. It is also good.

  The effect of this example is an example in which a continuous advance notice is given by the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1 'is used for the advance notice of the change, and the balloon display f2' is used for the advance notice. Moreover, in this example, the design of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved to be displayed as a hold icon, but the variation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part The notice icon to be used may be moved to the inside of the balloon and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon may be displayed so as to be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step. Further, in FIGS. 164 to 166, the sub liquid crystal a 208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b 208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 164 (a) shows that the sub liquid crystal a208 includes the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special pattern 4 aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 164 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 164 (b) following FIG. 164 (a), the balloon display by the character of the statue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) At the same time as a part of f1 is displayed to appear, a balloon comes out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a 208 (a part at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) Another part of the display f1 is displayed to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather is" and a pattern of a sunny mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a character image of the character The character image of “don” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 164 (c) continued from FIG. 164 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the balloon display f1 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are directed upward simultaneously. A moving animation to move is displayed, and it is shown in a stopped state at the approximate center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a 208 and displayed.

  In FIG. 164 (d) following FIG. 164 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 164 (e) continued from FIG. 164 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. While the time limit display h112 is deleted, a part of the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (a portion at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) It is displayed to be. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image and a face of an eyebrow character The character image of “爺” displayed above the face image of the character of “” and a part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 164 (f), which is continued from FIG. 164 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is performed. A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f1 is moved upward to move animation is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and it is stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  In FIG. 164 (g) continued from FIG. 164 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 and an operation expiration date h112 are displayed at a position where a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 overlap. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 164 (h) continued from FIG. 164 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The time limit display h112 is erased, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b 208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which a character string of "afternoon weather" and a pattern of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess The character image of “Hime” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 164 (i) continued from FIG. 164 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward, and the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is moved upward, and the moving animation is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and the display is stopped at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 165 (a) shows sub-liquid crystal a208, special figure 1 with hold number aa1, special figure 1 with a fourth pattern aa2, special figure 2 with hold number aa3, special figure 2 with fourth figure aa4, common figure hold number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 165 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 165 (b) continues from FIG. 165 (a), and the balloon display by the character of the statue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) The f1 is displayed as it appears. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 165 (c), which is continued from FIG. 165 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 165 (d) continued from FIG. 165 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 165 (e) following FIG. 165 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 by a wolf character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  In FIG. 165 (f), which is continued from FIG. 165 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is upward The moving animation to move toward is performed, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed in a stopped state substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 continued from FIG. 165 (f), in FIG. 165 (g), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button preview display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the overlapping positions, indicating a state in which a preview effect that urges the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 165 (h) continued from FIG. 165 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 already erased is displayed so as to be shrunk in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 165 (i), which is continued from FIG. 165 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 An animation is performed to move downward, and a balloon display is displayed so as to be stored under the sub liquid crystal b 208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b 208. When the sub liquid crystal b 208 is full of balloon display, it may be deleted from the old balloon display, or a new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. Half balloon display may be erased.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorative It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows sub-liquid crystal a208, special figure 1 reserve number aa1, special figure 1 symbol 4 aa2, special figure 2 reserve number aa3, special figure 2 symbol 4 aa4, common figure reserve number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  166 (b) continues from FIG. 166 (a) from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b 208 (the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) A balloon display f1 is displayed to appear. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 166 (c) following FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed.

  FIG. 166 (d), which follows FIG. 166 (c), shows a state in which the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the stop of “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4”. In addition, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 166 (e) following FIG. 166 (d), the next fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In (f) in FIG. 166 (e), which is continued from FIG. 166 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is upward Movement animation to move is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 166 (g) continued from FIG. 166 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 166 (h) continued from FIG. 166 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  166 (i) following FIG. 166 (h) has shown the state which made the stop display of "decoration 2-decor 8-decor 9" by the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. In FIG. 166 (h), even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b 208, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. .

  In FIG. 166 (j) following FIG. 166 (i), the next change is started, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon display f1 to f3 in the sub liquid crystal b208 Is taking place continuously.

  In FIG. 166 (k) continued from FIG. 166 (j), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f6 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. There is. The balloon display f6 has a character image of "Chibi princess" displayed on the face image of Chibi princess character and Chibi princess character's face image and "Evening weather" and "reach kana?" It is a display including the balloon part where the design of the clear mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice of the reach being performed in the change.

  In FIG. 166 (l) continued from FIG. 166 (k), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, At the stage when the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or ended.

  166 (m) following FIG. 166 (l) shows a state in which the reach effect of “decor 4” is being performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, this example is an example in which the balloon display is continuously displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  FIG. 167 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 167 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 167 (i) to (k) after FIGS. 167 (a) to (h) and FIG. 167 (i ′) after FIGS. 167 (a) to (h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs rendition of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 167 (a)-(k).

  Fig. 167 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 167 (b) following FIG. 167 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 167 (c) continued from FIG. 167 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 167 (d) continued from FIG. 167 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 167 (e) continued from FIG. 167 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more same balloon displays may be continuous.

  In FIG. 167 (f) following FIG. 167 (e), a moving animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 167 (g) continued from FIG. 167 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of both balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the chance button 136 is simulated at a position overlapping both balloon display f1. The button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 167 (h) continued from FIG. 167 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and it is immediately before the both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a balloon display f1b is displayed from the bottom of the screen so as to appear. In the balloon display f1b, the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character of Tono and the character image of "don" displayed on the image of the character of the character It is a display that includes a balloon part in which a character string and a pattern are displayed that are visible and that are visible and stupid. In addition, the blowout part of the blowout display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 167 (i) following FIG. 167 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 167 (j) following FIG. 167 (i) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is being scrolled.

  FIG. 167 (k) following FIG. 167 (j) shows a state in which scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 167 (i ′) to (l ′).

  167 (i ') continued from FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (h) shows a state in which the scroll display of the blowout part f1 b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

  167 (j '), which follows FIG. 167 (i'), shows a button advance display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date showing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge on the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows a state in which h112 is displayed.

  In FIG. 167 (k ') continued from FIG. 167 (j'), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the stopped balloon f1b is resumed. Ru.

  FIG. 167 (l ') following FIG. 167 (k') shows a state where scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. In addition, every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, the button advance notice effect may be performed, or the button advance notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the strings of "When all on the person, it looks like a foolish wisdom, and what is below is something that looks like a foolish one." May be scrolled and not all may be scrolled. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (g) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  168 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Moreover, FIG. 168 (a) has shown the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 168 (b) following FIG. 168 (a), two balloon displays f1 are displayed simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation moving to the left at the same speed is displayed . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  FIG. 168 (c) following FIG. 168 (b) is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 so that balloon displays f2 and f3 appear simultaneously from the right end of the screen, and the animation moving to the left at the same speed is It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. Also, animations of moving up to the left at the same speed with the upper and lower balloon displays f1 are started.

  In FIG. 168 (d) continued from FIG. 168 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In FIG. 168 (e) continued from FIG. 168 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In (f) of FIG. 168 (e), which follows FIG. 168 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed, and comes out from the left end in the order of appearance. It is a state just before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all balloon displays move at the same speed in the same direction is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves at different speeds in different directions may be performed. Further, the balloon display used for the notice of the change and the advance notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice and the advance notice of the change, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  In FIG. 168 (g), which follows FIG. 168 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed, and comes out from the left end in the order of appearance Shows the state after being erased. After this, there may be a case where SP reach effect or all rotation reach effect may be started, or there may be an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 simultaneously started are simultaneously displayed, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may be ended, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may be faster in moving speed than the other. In addition, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are simultaneously displayed, the display may end simultaneously, but one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may have a moving speed faster than the other.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIG. 169 (a) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 169 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when displaying the balloon display f2 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f2 can not be viewed simultaneously.

  FIG. 169 (b) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 169 (b) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, it may be possible to simultaneously view the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f2.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 169.

(C1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (see, for example, FIG. 119);
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 119),
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b));
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)),
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (b) and (d)).
The light emission mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (b) and (d)).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(C2)
It is a game stand described in C1, and
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by
(C3)
The gaming machine described in C1 or C2,
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 126 (c)).
A game stand characterized by
(C4)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C3, wherein
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by
(C5)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C4, wherein
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the initial state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(C6)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C5, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b));
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(C7)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C6, wherein
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a));
A game stand characterized by
(C8)
It is the gaming machine described in C7,
In the first state, the first light emitting unit may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(C9)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C8, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3) (for example, refer to FIG. 119 (b)).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover (for example, see FIG. 120 (a));
A game stand characterized by
(C10)
The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C9, wherein
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by
(C11)
The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C10, wherein
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(C12)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C11, wherein
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)),
A game stand characterized by
(C13)
The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C12, wherein
Equipped with a game board (eg, game board 125) having a game nail,
The first movable means is a means operable behind the gaming board (see, for example, FIG. 126).
A game stand characterized by
(C14)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C13, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(C15)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C13, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

(D1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (see, for example, FIG. 119);
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 119),
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b));
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)),
The first light emitting means is a means covered by the first cover (for example, the cover 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The second light emitting unit is a unit covered by the first cover (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(D2)
It is a game stand described in D1, and
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by
(D3)
The gaming machine described in D1 or D2,
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 126 (c)).
A game stand characterized by
(D4)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D3, wherein
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by
(D5)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D4, wherein
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the initial state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(D6)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D5, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b));
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(D7)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D6, wherein
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a));
A game stand characterized by
(D8)
It is a game stand described in D7,
In the first state, the first light emitting unit may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(D9)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D8, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, cover portion 90b3) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a));
A game stand characterized by
(D10)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D9, wherein
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by
(D11)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D10, wherein
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(D12)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D11, wherein
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)),
A game stand characterized by
(D13)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D12, wherein
Equipped with a game board (eg, game board 125) having a game nail,
The first movable means is a means operable behind the gaming board (see, for example, FIG. 126).
A game stand characterized by
(D14)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D13, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(D15)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D13, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

(E1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 1);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 1);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is means capable of performing a first operation (for example, an operation for moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 116 (c)).
The second movable means is means capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation for moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (c)).
The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 116 (a)).
The position of the second movable means having performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means having performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 118 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(E2)
It is a game stand described in E1, and
The moving direction of the first movable means in the first operation is the same as the moving direction of the second movable means in the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 118 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even while the second operation is being performed.

(E3)
The game console described in E1 or E2,
When at least a portion of the first movable means and a portion of the second movable means overlap in the front-rear direction, another portion of the second movable means is visible from the front.
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.

(E4)
A game console according to any one of E1 to E3, wherein
Display means (eg, decorative symbol display device 208),
The position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means which has performed the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 118 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.

(E5)
It is a game stand described in E4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string of "Please drop the ball") (for example, see FIG. 118 (b)).
At least a portion of the first error indication may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 118 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.

(E6)
It is a game stand described in E5,
The first error display refers to a ball drop display (see, for example, FIG. 118 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, it may be possible to change the appearance of the ball removal display.

(E7)
A game console according to any one of E1 to E6, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(E8)
A game console according to any one of E1 to E5, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The moving direction of the first movable means in the first operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and the component in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction It may be an orientation including at least one of the following components or the vertical component.
The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and the component in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction It may be an orientation including at least one of the following components or the vertical component.
-Both the first operation and the second operation may be performed simultaneously, one may be performed and the other may be performed, or only one or the other may be performed.
-Both the first and second movable means may simultaneously return to the initial position after both the first movement and the second movement are performed, and one after the other returns back. It is also good.
-One of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate while the other moves while returning to the initial position.
-The LED of the second movable means may emit light during the first operation, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means.
-The LED of the first movable means may perform the light emission effect during the second operation, and may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means.
-Even when the first movable means is positioned in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform the light emission effect, and the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means may be performed Good.

(F1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (see, for example, FIG. 119);
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, refer to FIG. 119);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 119),
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b));
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)),
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30a) (for example, see FIG. 126 (a)) ,
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(F2)
The game console described in F1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by
(F3)
The game console described in F1 or F2,
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 126 (c)).
A game stand characterized by
(F4)
A game console according to any one of F1 to F3, wherein
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by
(F5)
The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F4, wherein
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the initial state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(F6)
A game console according to any one of F1 to F5, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b));
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(F7)
A game console according to any one of F1 to F6, wherein
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a));
A game stand characterized by
(F8)
It is a game stand described in F7,
In the first state, the first light emitting unit may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(F9)
A game console according to any one of F1 to F8, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover (for example, see FIG. 120 (a));
A game stand characterized by
(F10)
A game console according to any one of F1 to F9, wherein
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by
(F11)
A game console according to any one of F1 to F10, wherein
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(F12)
The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F11, wherein
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)),
A game stand characterized by
(F13)
A game console according to any one of F1 to F12, wherein
Equipped with a game board (eg, game board 125) having a game nail,
The first movable means is a means operable behind the gaming board (see, for example, FIG. 126).
A game stand characterized by
(F14)
The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F13, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(F15)
The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F13, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

(G1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A structure (eg, structure 247);
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani) at a first position (for example, the lower center of the display area) (for example, see FIG. 128 (c)).
At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping with a part of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 128)
The first display displayed at the first position is a display that may be overlapped with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 128 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of changing the direction of watching the game stand to play a game, and to improve the player's interest.

(G2)
It is a game stand described in G1,
The structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 137)
The first indication displayed at the first position is an indication which is not overlapped with the structure after the movement of the structure.
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(G3)
The gaming machine described in G1 or G2,
The display means is a movable display means (see, for example, FIGS. 385 to 391),
The first display displayed at the first position is a display which is not overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(G4)
The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G3, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (e.g., a central portion of a display area);
The first display displayed at the second position is a display which is not overlapped with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 128 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(G5)
It is a game stand described in G4,
The first indication may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (see, eg, FIG. 128).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(G6)
The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G5, wherein
The first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 128),
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the advance notice may be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(G7)
The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G6, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(G8)
The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G6, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The first display may be a pre-reading notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display. It may be a character display or an error display.
The first indication displayed in the second position may be overlapped with the structure.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.
The structure may comprise display means, may comprise an LED substrate and may be movable.
The display means may be movable.
The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
The structure may be a light emitting panel, and the first display may be performed behind the light emitting display of the light emitting panel.
(Drawing)
Example of moving from the first position where the warning indication is overlapped to the structure to the second position not overlapping, the second position not overlapping from the first position where the warning indication is overlapped to the structure Of moving to the first position again after moving to the second position, and the third to be overlapped to the other structure after moving from the first position where the notice is overlapped to the structure to the second position not overlapping. Move to the position ・ Example of moving to the fifth position not overlapped after moving to the first position overlapped from the fourth position where the warning display is not overlapped to the structure ・ Example where the warning display is always partially seen ・An example in which a notice display is displayed at a first position where it is overlapped with the structure, and another notice display moves to a second position where it does not overlap, and the notice display is The other notice display is moved to the first position. The notice display moves from the first position where it is overlapped to the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the effect display is first. Examples of visual notice ・ Example of giving notice of notice notice before displaying notice notice at the first position overlapped by a structure, Example of notice notice showing enlarged ・ Display notice notice at the second position , Or the movement of the structure or the movement of the display means hides the notice display of the second position

(H1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
While displaying the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter, referred to as “first animation” (for example, moving animation of the advance notice m1) may be displayed,
After the display of the first animation, a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous fluctuation) may be performed in the decorative symbol change display (for example, see FIG. 139).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(H2)
It is a game stand described in H1, and
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a change icon.
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of the hold icon and the change icon.

(H3)
The gaming machine described in H1 or H2,
The first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 148 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(H4)
It is a game console according to any one of H1 to H3, wherein
The first animation is an animation including moving display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 139 (f) to (i)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(H5)
A game console according to any one of H1 to H4, wherein
The first animation is an animation including reduced display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 139 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(H6)
A game console according to any one of H1 to H5, wherein
The first animation is an animation including an increase display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 139 (j) and (k)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(H7)
It is the gaming machine described in H6,
The increase display in one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (see, for example, FIG. 143).
A game stand characterized by

  Sometimes you can enjoy the behavior of one icon more.

(H8)
A game console according to any one of H1 to H7, wherein
The first effect display is a pseudo continuous change display in the decorative symbol change display (see, for example, FIG. 139 (h)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(H9)
A game console according to any one of H1 to H8, wherein
The first effect display is a reach change display in the decorative symbol change display (see, for example, FIG. 145 (j)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(H10)
The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H9, wherein
A game stand characterized in that the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display.

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(H11)
A game console according to any one of H1 to H10, wherein
The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in the icon display area (for example, the special view 1, 2 reserved icon display area 208ab) (for example, see FIG. 140 (f)).
During at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, an icon in which a character string “in preparation” is displayed) may be displayed in the icon display area (for example, Figure 140 (g)),
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the display of the icon display area.

(H12)
The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H11, wherein
While displaying the decorative symbol variation display, an animation (hereinafter referred to as "second animation") by two or more of the icons may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 148 (f)).
After the second animation is displayed, the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 148 (h)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons.

(H13)
The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H12, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

-The icons may move so that nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, and other icons are moved and displayed (packed) May be
-When the icon is moved to the original icon display area and then displayed again (return display), the increase display may be performed, or may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or other icon displays It may be displayed to dismiss.
-The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, may be erased (destructed), or may be shifted from the fluctuation display to the variable display, or temporarily stop the special symbol in the middle symbol It is also good.
The first effect display may not be performed after the first animation.
A plurality of first animations may be performed during one decorative symbol variation display.
A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon between a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.
An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa.
The first animation may be performed more easily in the case of the full hold than in the non-full case, and vice versa.
-A notice may be displayed indicating that the first animation is to be performed.
A count advance notice (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed.
The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the change icon is digested.
The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.
(Drawing)
FIGS. 139 to 148 are examples in which the holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol while the swing symbol of the out-of-the-round symbol fluctuates, and the decorative symbol variation display changes again (simulated).
FIG. 140 shows an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on the holding base while the holding icon is moving. FIG. 141 is an example in which when the hold icon is moving, the back hold icon is packed and returned to the original position when coming back.
FIG. 142 is an example of the caste effect that does not develop even if the hold icon is hit.
FIG. 143 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation multiple times in one change.
FIG. 144 is an example in which different pending icons perform the first animation in one change.
FIG. 145 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 146 is an example in which the variation icon strikes the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.
FIG. 147 is an example in which the same held icon collides with multiple changes and develops into reach.
FIG. 148 is an example in which a plurality of suspension icons simultaneously reach the decorative pattern to reach.

(I1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, refer to FIG. 150 (f)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, see FIG. 150 (e)),
At least a portion of the first display area may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, it is possible to concentrate on the game and improve the player's interest.

(I2)
It is the gaming machine described in I1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as “first moving animation” (for example, moving animation upward)) (for example, FIG. 150 (d ), (E)),
After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(I3)
The game console described in I2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation” (for example, moving animation moving to the left)).
After the second movement animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(I4)
The game console described in I2 or I3,
After the display of another moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “third moving animation” (for example, moving animation moving to the right)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. The display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (b) and (c)),
The first moving animation and the third moving animation may have different moving directions of the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 150).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the moving direction different depending on the moving animation.

(I5)
A game console according to any one of I1 to I4, wherein
At least a portion of the first balloon display and at least a portion of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(I6)
A game console according to any one of I1 to I5, wherein
At least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(I7)
A game console according to any one of I1 to I6, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 167 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(I8)
A game console according to any one of I1 to I7, wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by

  There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

(I9)
A game console according to any one of I1 to I8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(I10)
A game console according to any one of I1 to I8, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, an open ball display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.
The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.
(Drawing)
FIG. 149 is an example of conversation announcement.
FIG. 150 shows an example of conversation notice and horizontal movement of the appearing animation, and vertical movement when the new speech balloon appears (vertical animation of the new speech balloon and animation of the old speech balloon simultaneously).
FIG. 151 shows an example of conversation announcement and horizontal movement of an appearing animation, and an example of vertical movement (a variation of timing, animation of a new speech bubble and animation of a new speech bubble) when the new speech balloon appears.
FIG. 152 shows an example of conversation notice and horizontal movement of an appearing animation, and an example of vertical movement (a variation of timing, an animation of a new speech bubble and an animation of an old speech bubble after animation of a new speech balloon) when the new speech bubble appears.
FIG. 153 shows an example of the speech advance notice, an example of the vertical movement of the animation animation, and an example in which the size of the speech balloon is different from the normal half and double.
FIG. 154 shows an example of conversation announcement, an example in which a lost character returns, and an example in which the content changes when it returns.
FIG. 155 is an example in which an example of a speech notice and a specific speech balloon (for example, a speech balloon with a high degree of expectation) are not deleted.
FIG. 156 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example of the speech balloon overlapping.
FIG. 157 shows an example of conversation announcement and an example in which an old speech balloon is reduced.
FIG. 158 shows an example of conversation announcement, an example in which the balloon of the same character continues, an example in which the balloon is expanded, and an example in which the content of the balloon is out of the balloon.
FIG. 159 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving.
FIG. 160 shows an example of conversation announcement and an example in which the balloon moves with the movable body operating.
FIG. 161 shows an example of conversation announcement and an example in which the balloon moves in a state where the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light.
FIG. 162 shows an example in which the speech balloon moves in a state where an example of the conversation announcement and the first display is displayed.
FIG. 163 shows an example of a speech notice and an example of a speech read-out notice (a hold icon is changed to a look-ahead icon).
FIG. 164 is an example of an example of a speech advance notice, in which a character and a balloon are displayed on different display means. FIG. 165 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example in which the balloon is moved to another display means.
FIG. 166 shows an example of an announcement of speech and an example in which a balloon is displayed over a plurality of changes.

(J1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, refer to FIG. 150 (f)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, see FIG. 150 (e)),
While the second balloon display is displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (e) and (f)).
A game stand characterized by

  By displaying the first balloon display in another display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, the player can easily grasp the relevance of the two balloon displays, so that it is possible to concentrate on the game and make the player's interest It can be improved.

(J2)
It is a game stand described in J1, and
The display means is a means capable of displaying the moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as “first moving animation” (for example, moving animation upward)) (for example, FIG. 150 (d ), (E)),
After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(J3)
It is a game console described in J1 or J2, and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation” (for example, moving animation moving to the left)).
After the second movement animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(J4)
A game console according to any one of J1 to J3, wherein
At least a portion of the first balloon display and at least a portion of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(J5)
A game console according to any one of J1 to J4, wherein
At least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(J6)
The gaming machine according to any one of J1 to J5, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 167 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(J7)
A game console according to any one of J1 to J6, wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by

  There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

(J8)
The gaming machine according to any one of J1 to J7, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (see, for example, FIG. 153 (q)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 153 (n)).
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same,
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 153 (q)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the width of the balloon display different.

(J9)
A game console according to any one of J1 to J8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(J10)
A game console according to any one of J1 to J8, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, an open ball display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.
The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

Each event (each effect) may be performed in series or in parallel.
Each event (each effect) can be a combination of part or all of a certain event (some effect) and part or all of another event (other effect).
Each event (each effect) may be performed in series or in parallel.
Each event (each effect) may only be performed in series.
Each event (each effect) may only be performed in parallel.
Here, execution in series means that an event (some effect) ends and another event (an other effect) starts, and execution in parallel means an event (or ) And other events (other effects) at the same time, the start timing and end timing of a certain event (some effects), and the start timing of other events (other effects) A combination of the and the end timing is possible as appropriate.

Also, each event (each effect) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or in series only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without being distinguished by state .
The certain state may be a state in which transition is made by a player operation, or a state in which transition is made without a player operation (for example, transition is made without a player operation after a player operation If you do, it may be the final trigger or the first trigger.)
Here, "to shift without using the player's operation" may shift based on a lottery, or may be shifted according to the control state, or a combination of both. It may be
Here, the “lottery” may be a lottery related to the player's advantage, or may be a lottery not related to the player.
Here, the “control state” may be a state related to the degree of advantage for the player, or a state not related to the degree of advantage for the player (for example, control state 1 and control state 2) And the degree of advantage to the player may or may not be different.
Specifically describing the state in which the degree of advantage for the player is different, if there is a difference between the control state 1 and the control state 2 that the user is staying in the control state N, then the user is in fact staying. There are cases where the degree of advantage does not differ, and there may be differences in the degree of advantage in the state after the stay, which may be either.

The image used in the description of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation, and of course, it may be another image, for example, an image of a tombstone (male character) It is also possible to replace the image with a princess (female character).
In addition, even if the image for explaining a certain effect and the image for explaining another effect are the same image, the image for explaining another effect is replaced with another image, and Other renditions can also be performed in parallel and / or in series.
In addition, in the case where an image for explaining a certain effect and an image for explaining another effect are the same image, it is possible to carry out alternatively instead of enabling parallel and / or serial execution. It is also good.
In addition to the case where the images are the same, there are cases where the timing is the same (for example, both are in super reach effect production) and the place is the same (for example, both the hold display areas).
Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, it may be performed in series in the first half and the second half of the super reach, or even in the same place, it may be parallel in different places. You may run in series or in the first half of the Super Reach in the same place.

Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (representation means).
A certain means (rendering means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (plurality devices).
Each event (each effect) performed in each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) may be performed in one device (an effect device).
Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).
As devices (rendering devices), display devices such as a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, movable objects 700, 702, etc. The movable body of
In addition, there may be a case where one device (rendering device) is described as an example for each event (each effect). For example, in the case of notification, it is applied to another device (rendering device) capable of notifying Is possible.
Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).
Moreover, when it is configured to be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices), a part or all of the characteristics of a certain notification may be applied to each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).

Each configuration in each event (each effect) may be merely illustrated, and even if only one of the events (each effect) has a configuration, the other may have its configuration. Or the combination may be possible, or the combination may be possible after deleting a configuration provided only on one side.
Also, the combination may be denied depending on the difference in configuration.

Next, another specific example of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 170 to 185 are basically used only in the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 170 to 185, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in 170 to 185 have priority.
<Direction using the second decoration pattern>

With reference to FIGS. 170 to 185, as one of the embodiments of the present invention, a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted with respect to an effect example using the second decorative symbol performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to the enlarged view.
<Effect example A>

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects based on the image display device 208 'of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 170 (a) shows a state in which the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state of fluctuating stop), and in the first image display device 2081, “decorative 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -The combination (pattern combination of an out) of the decoration pattern (1st decoration pattern) of decoration 1-decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) are displayed on the left side thereof. h12 and h13 are displayed to notify that the reservation of Special Figure 1 is 3. Further, while the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white (the default), the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, and the prefetch notice is executed. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display of "Panda is the master of the lord" is executed.

  In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) is displayed, but at this timing, all the meters are painted in white, and it is informed that the meter is 0. Further, in the stage name display area, "jomachi" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  The third image display device 2083 shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and in the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the suspension of the special view 1 is "3", The second reserved number display of Toku 1 and Toku 2 which show that the reservation of Toku 2 is "0" is performed.

  The fourth symbol display device 284 is displayed in gray with a special figure 1 (square shape) and a special figure 2 (round shape) both, indicating that it is in the off stop state. In addition, the built-in LEDs of the chance buttons 136 and 137 are both white. In the family crest 224, the built-in LED emits blue light in conjunction with the advance notice of the hold icon h11, and stands by at the initial position (in this example, below the first image display device 2081). The Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C emit white light from the built-in LED, and stand by (stop) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081). The audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  In the following description, mainly the effects that have been changed from the previous effects with the passage of time will be mainly described.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 170 (b), one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 170 (a)) is digested and symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 (not shown) is started. In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variation game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081 performs variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol. In the present embodiment, the variation display (the first variation display and the second variation display) of the decorative symbol is represented by a downward white arrow (the same applies to the other embodiments below). Also, the white arrows shown in FIG. 6 (b) are elongated arrows, and in this case, indicate that the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed in a manner having transparency. On the other hand, when a white arrow is displayed by a short (thick) arrow (for example, the same figure (e)), it shows that the decoration pattern is changing at a low speed. In the case of low speed fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative symbol can be recognized.

  Further, with the termination of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the right end of the icon display area 800 Then, it is displayed as a blue fluctuation icon h0 to give advance notice. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 next to the left of the change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, and the left of the change icon h0 The white suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed on the two pedestals, respectively, to notify that the special view 1 is suspended.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the suspension of the special view 1 is “2”, and the suspension of the special view 2 is “0”. Number display is done.

  In addition, in the explanation display part TT1, the character display of "The panda is a master of the lord" is still performed. As described above, the explanation display in the explanation display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the timing shown in FIG. 170 (c), in the left symbol display area 208a of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol (here, “decor 6”) shakes (temporarily stops), and the same symbol (d) The timing shown is a state in which the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) is subjected to swing fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c of the first image display device 2081, and is displayed as reach (temple) .
The timing shown to the same figure (e) is the state in which the decorative symbol ("decoration 6") which was performing the rocking | fluctuation fluctuation | variation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c has started fluctuation | variation again. In addition, the fluctuation | variation of "decoration 6" of the right symbol display area 208c in this timing is a low-speed fluctuation | variation, as shown by the white short (thick) arrow. In addition, the state in which the decorative pattern starts to change slowly after swing fluctuation (temporary stop) may be referred to as "the decorative pattern is smooth" or "the decorative pattern is zurel".

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol) is shifted, a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) may be started. In this example, the case where the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol) is shifted is described as one of the start conditions of the pseudo continuous effect, but other start conditions may be used as the start condition of the pseudo continuous effect. The symbol (the first decorative symbol) may be always displaced, may or may not be displaced, or may not be displaced, and the same applies to the pseudo-series effect described below It is.

  The timing shown to the same figure (f) is the state which the decoration pattern (here "decoration 7") is carrying out rocking | fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c. In this way, when one decorative pattern (here, "decoration 6") shifts, and another (next) decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7") shakes (temporarily stops), that temporary The stopped decorative design ("decoration 7") may be referred to as "misaligned eyes".

  In the present embodiment, the occurrence of the misalignment of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is one of the notifications that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. Note that the notification that the pseudo connected effect may be started may be another notification, and may not be a gap occurrence.

  The timing shown to the figure (g) is the state in which the 1st animation started in the inside symbol display area 208b which was performing high-speed fluctuation. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a type different from the decorative symbol representing a number, and is, for example, one symbol of the symbols relating to the execution of the continuous effect (first effect). The special symbol is also one of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol refers to a symbol whose continuous effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a continuous advance effect) is started by the stop display of the symbol.

  As an example, the first animation of the present embodiment is an animation (stopping animation of special symbol) asking whether the special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the present embodiment, as an example, a case where the first animation is an animation (middle symbol turning animation) asking whether or not a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b will be described. Here, the stop display of the special symbol may be a swing fluctuation stop display (temporary stop display), which is the same in the following embodiments.

  When the middle symbol turning animation is finished, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the continuous effect may be executed.

  Here, the special symbol is the symbol of the character (don't care) as shown in the same figure (g), and this special symbol (character (sign) 's symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example The pseudo-series effect is executed as a continuous effect. As described above, the special symbol related to the start of the execution of the pseudo connected effect may be referred to as the pseudo connected symbol.

  In addition, execution is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It may be a configuration, and in this case, the perching animation (first animation) may be an animation asking whether or not the last one of the three designs is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display, such as at least one of the three symbols including a fluctuation.

  That is, the timing shown in the same figure (g) is a first animation (middle symbol turning) asking whether the pseudo-linking symbol (which becomes the start condition) related to the start of the pseudo sequence effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. An animation is shown being performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the timing shown in FIG. 2I, the width of the pseudo run symbol gradually starts to be enlarged and displayed. ing. That is, although the pseudo | simulation run pattern of the figure (h) is the same display size as the decoration pattern ("decoration 6" and "decoration 7") of the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, the same figure The width of the pseudo run pattern in (i) is expanding. As a result, the right end portion of the "decoration 6" of the left symbol display area 208a and the left end portion of the "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208a start to be overlapped with the left end portion and the right end portion of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6I, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol starts its display in the upper part of the second image display device 2082. In addition, at this timing, only the second symbol display area 208Y (a frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the drawing) starts its display, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown to the same figure (j) has shown the state which the horizontal width of the pseudo | simulation consecutive symbol is further expanded and displayed. At this timing, "decoration 6" of the left symbol display area 208a and "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo consecutive symbols, and can not be viewed by the player (left symbol display The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult for the player to visually recognize in comparison with the pseudo consecutive symbols).

  In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (middle symbol turning animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (shake Fluctuation, temporary stop indication). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed, for example, in the symbol combination shown in FIG. 171 (o). That is, the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 6") is displayed in a swing (temporary stop) in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 7") is in a swing (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208g. In addition to being displayed, in the middle symbol display area 208l, a pseudo-connected symbol (here, the symbol of the same character as the symbol (h) in the figure (h)) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as shown to the figure (j), as shown to the figure (j), as shown to the figure (i), as shown to the figure (j), without displaying "only a frame" of the 2nd symbol display area 208Y as a display plan area of the 2nd decorative figure The second decorative symbol may start to be displayed in the symbol display area 208Y (the second symbol display area 208Y can be recognized by the player by the start of the display of the second decorative symbol).

  At this timing, the first decorative symbol is not visible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo consecutive symbol (for example, the pseudo continuous symbol or the second decorative symbol displayed is more difficult to visually recognize), and the first animation The first decorative symbol (the state of the variation stop of the first decorative symbol) after the end of is unconfirmed, but the stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol by the second decorative symbol (the middle symbol display area 208l of the second symbol display area 208Y) The player can recognize the presence or absence of the display. That is, for the advanced user, by watching the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of the fluctuation stop of the first decorative symbol, that is, the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo run pattern) and the continuous effect by it It can be recognized whether or not (the pseudo series effect) is started. As described above, the state of the variation stop of the first decorative symbol is undecided, but the state where the presence or absence of the stop display of the special symbol (the presence or absence of the continuous effect) can be recognized by the player by the second decorative symbol (first In the present specification, the first decorative symbol is changed to the first decorative symbol that is not visible (difficult to see) to the player in the symbol display area 208X, and is referred to as "previous bar" in this specification.

  The timing shown to the figure (k) has shown the state which the horizontal width of the pseudo | simulation consecutive symbol is further expanded and displayed. At this timing, "decoration 6" of the left symbol display area 208a and "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo consecutive symbols, and can not be viewed by the player (left symbol display The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult for the player to visually recognize in comparison with the pseudo consecutive symbols). Furthermore, the left and right end portions of the enlarged pseudo run symbol are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-connected symbol is displayed (crossed over) over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2093).

  More specifically, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo run symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area, for example, the left end portion of the pseudo run symbol at least the first (2) In this example, the left end of the pseudo run symbol is overlapped with the second decoration symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area. In the second decorative symbol, the stop display of symbol combination in FIG. 171 (o) is continued.

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo run symbol is overlapped with a part of the display on the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character like a bastion on the stage, And the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2).

  In addition, at this timing, a part of the movable body (in this example, the family crest 244A) starts to rise and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081 (it overlaps the first image display device 2081) . As a result, a part of the display displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the family crest 224A and is not visible to the player (or the second decorative symbol or movable body (family crest 224A, etc.) More difficult to see than). Specifically, (a part of) a pseudo run symbol, a part of the display of the icon display area 800 (in this example, (all of the change icons h0, a part of the hold icon h11 and its pedestal), and an explanation display A part of the tutorial display in the area TT1 is invisible to the player (or less visible than the second decorative symbol or the movable body (such as the family crest product 224A)).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo consecutive symbol is ended (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 6 (k)), and the position where the raised family crest 244A is raised. , And the sound effect of “Don” is output from the speaker 120.

  At this timing, the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol is not visible (difficult to see) to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo-connected symbol, but with this, the state of the fluctuation stop of the first decorative symbol is determined. That is, at this timing, the player can recognize the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo linked symbol) and the presence or absence of the start of the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo linked effect) by it. The second decorative symbol is the same as the figure (k) (the state of FIG. 171 (o)).

  Therefore, even if the player does not notice the stop display (previous bar) of the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing shown in FIG. 7 (j), the movable body shown in FIG. It is possible to recognize that the stop display of the pseudo run symbol and the start of the execution of the pseudo run effect by it have been determined by the movement (here, the rotation movement) of the family crest 244A) and / or the sound effect from the speaker 120.

  For example, the family crest 244A starts to rotate after the stop display of the pseudo run symbol and the start of the execution of the pseudo run effect thereby are determined. Note that the family crest 224A may rise after the start of rotation at the initial position (the position below the first image display device 2081 shown in (j) in the figure), in which case, for example, After it is decided that the stop display and the start of execution of the pseudo-series effect by it are decided, it moves to the stop position after the ascent (the position of FIG.

  In addition, even at the time of other effects, the family crest 244A performs operations such as movement such as rising and falling and rotation. Also, the household crest 244A may be configured not to perform movement such as movement such as rising or falling or rotation during other effects, or may perform movement or rotation such as upward or downward during other effects. Some of the operations may be performed, or only some of the operations may not be performed.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure shows a state in which the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol in the first symbol display area 208X becomes visible to the player after the end of the first animation display. Although illustration is omitted, an animation of a reduced display of the enlarged pseudo-connected symbol is executed between the figure (l) and the figure (m), and the size of the initial state (see m (m) The display size is reduced to “the same as the“ decoration 6 ”in the left symbol display area 208 a and the“ decoration 7 ”in the right symbol display area 208 c. As a result, "decoration 6" which is swayed (temporarily stopped) in the left symbol display area 208a of the first symbol display area 208X, and a special symbol (pseudo run pattern) which is swayed (provisionally stopped) in the middle symbol display area 208b. The “decoration 7” which is swayed (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208c becomes visible to the player, and the decision of execution of the pseudo-series effect is notified. The second decorative symbol is the same as the figure (k) (the state of FIG. 171 (o)). That is, at the timing shown in the same figure (m), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be simultaneously viewed by the player in the same display mode ((provisional) stop display of the same symbol combination) There is.

  In addition, the animation of the reduction display of the pseudo run symbol executed between the same figure (l) and the same view (m) is the animation display of the enlargement display of the pseudo run symbol (for example, FIG. The execution time may be the same as in FIG. (K), may be short, or may be long. In addition, the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo consecutive symbol may not be executed.

  Generally, as shown in the figure (m), the player stops and displays the special symbol (simulated continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). This makes it possible to recognize that the start of the execution of the continuous rendition (pseudo series rendition) has been decided. Alternatively, the player accustomed to playing the game can not visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol (the presence or absence of symbol combination and (provisional) stop display) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. Even if it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to recognize that the start of execution of continuous rendering (simulated sequence rendering) has been decided by the movement (in this case, the rotation movement) of the movable body (household character 224A) .

  In this embodiment, the state of the first symbol display area 208X is not visible (difficult to see) at the timing prior to them ((m), (l)) and by the first animation display. However, as shown in the figure (j), the player recognizes that the start of the continuous effect (simulated sequence effect) has been decided by the second decorative pattern not overlapped in the first animation display. There are cases where you can

  In this example, the timing at which the special symbol (pseudo run symbol) shown in the same figure (g) starts to display is the start timing of the first animation, but the start timing of the first animation is limited to this timing Absent. For example, the start timing of the first animation may be the timing at which the special symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) shown in FIG. 6 (g) becomes visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 6 (h). In the middle symbol display area 208b, it may be the timing at which the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped, or the display mode of the special symbol changes at a timing later than FIG. (H) (in this example, the dummy as shown in FIG. It may be timing when the enlarged display of the consecutive symbols is started).

  In addition, the end timing of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. (M), and until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. When a reduction animation of a special symbol is executed between the same figure (m), until the reduction animation starts, or until the enlargement animation ends in the figure (l) until the reduction animation ends. , Etc. is the timing.

  That is, the display period of the first animation is a period defined as any combination of any of the start timing and the end timing of the first animation described above, but as an example, it is before the figure (m) When the reduction animation of the special symbol is executed, the display period of the first animation is the same as (h) to (h) until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (g) to (m) of the figure. For example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. (M), or until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (i) to (m). In addition, when the reduction animation of the special symbol is not executed before the figure (m) (when ending with the enlarged display), the display period of the first animation is from the figure (g) to the figure (l), The figure (h)-the figure (l), or the figure (i)-the figure (l), etc. are the same in the following respective embodiments.

  The timing shown in the figure (n) shows a state in which a second animation other than the first animation has started to be displayed in the display area of the first image display device 2081.

  The second animation that is displayed at this timing (after the pseudo run symbol is stopped) is an animation that is displayed during the period until the pseudo run effect starts, and here continues several times (for example, twice) It is an animation which shows that execution of false continuation production is decided.

  In this example, in the second animation, as shown in (n) in the figure, the character is displayed from the center to the left, and as shown in (o), the character moves in the center While the display size is enlarged, it is an animation in which the characters "still" are displayed. Also, in this example, the second animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081, but the second animation may be displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 '.

  The timing shown to the figure (p) has shown the state which the pseudo | simulation series effect which continued several times started execution, and there is no change of the display of an icon display area, and the process of pending | holding.

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X) of the first image display device 2081, the combination of the first decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. . In addition, it overlaps with a part of the first decorative symbol (a part of "decoration 6" in this example), and displays the number of times of pseudo continuous effect (hereinafter referred to as "simulated continuous number display", 2 in this example "X 2" which shows time is displayed.

  In the symbol display areas 208k to 208g (the second symbol display area 208Y) of the second image display device 2082, a second decoration in the state of FIG. 171 (o) similar to FIG. The symbols (decorative symbols including the stop display of pseudo run symbols) continue to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the display of the first image display device 2081 is changed, accurate information (in this example, pseudo information) is displayed by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. It is made possible for the player to recognize that continuous effect is being executed). That is, the second decorative symbol displayed on the second image display device 2082 (the second symbol display area 208Y) is a decorative symbol such that the player is notified of some information by the display of the decorative symbol (combination of the decorative symbols). It can be said that it is a symbol displayed so as to exert its original function. In other words, the second decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol even when the state of the first decorative symbol (the symbol combination and the presence or absence of the (temporary) stop display) is not visible or difficult for the player. Secure the notification of information by

  As described above, when the continuous effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) is executed, a special symbol (for example, pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation (middle symbol turning animation) display. Is stopped. Thereafter, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is resumed, a symbol other than the special symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b (for example, a decorative symbol with the same numeral as the right symbol display area 208c (here, "decoration 7") indicate. That is, at this timing, the symbol combination of the second decorative symbol ("decorative 6-special symbol-decorative 7") is different from the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol ("decorative 6-decorative 7-decorative 7") It is a combination.

  In this example, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is resumed, the decorative symbol of the numeral is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is resumed. The same symbol (i.e., a special symbol) as the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6Q, in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081 and the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and It shows a state where the fluctuation display (high speed fluctuation) of the second decorative symbol is resumed. In addition, with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, an animation is performed in which the pseudo-sequence display (in this example, “× 2”) is displayed in a reduced size.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6R, in the first symbol display area 208X, fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation) of the first decorative symbol continues while the second symbol display area 208Y (second decorative symbol) is It is hidden.

  In the above example, after the timing shown in the same figure (i), after displaying the variation display of the second decorative figure as shown in the same figure (q) in the second symbol display area 208Y, the same figure (j The temporary stop (stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol) of the second decorative symbol shown in) may be performed.

  Further, the stop display of the second decorative symbol including the stop display of the special symbol in the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o) shown in FIG. 171 (j) is the first image display device It is sufficient for the player to be able to see before the stop display (the same figure (m)) of the first decorative pattern including the special symbol in 2081, for example, the stop of the special symbol at the timing shown in the same figure (i) The stop display of the second decorative symbol (Fig. 171 (o)) including the display may be displayed, or the stop display of the special symbol may be displayed at the timing shown in Fig. (K) or Fig. (L). The stop display of 2 decoration symbols (figure 171 (o)) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the same figure (j), the timing (1st timing) by which the right symbol ("decoration 6") and the left symbol ("decoration 7") are overlapped by the middle symbol (pseudo run symbol) expanded, The display timing (second timing) of the second decorative symbol may be the same timing, or the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing. It may be

  Moreover, in the same figure (p), even if the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo consecutive times display is the same timing as the display start timing (resumption timing, second timing) of the first decorative symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  Moreover, in the same figure (q), the start timing (first timing) of the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the fluctuation display of the second decorative symbol are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may occur after the second timing.

  Also, the pseudo run count display may be started from the same figure (q), in which case the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo run count display and the start timing of the variable display of the second decorative symbol (the second The timing 2) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

Further, in FIG. 6 (r), the timing (first timing) at which the pseudo-repeating number display is reduced from the size shown in FIG. 4 (q), and the timing for erasing the second decorative symbol (second timing) The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
<Common items in each example>
Matters common to the examples shown in FIGS. 170 to 185 will be described including the present example.

  First, in the state of the decorative symbol (symbol combination of the decorative symbol) which is a condition under which (simultaneous) serial effect is started (a symbol may be generated), a gap is generated in the left symbol or the right symbol (followed by the special symbol in the middle symbol) In the case of stopping), the left pattern and the right pattern become tempers (when stopped by the same pattern), and when the special symbol stops in the middle symbol, or the special symbol stops in the middle symbol regardless of the left symbol and the right symbol. In the case of (only) whether there is, etc.

  In addition, in the configuration where the pseudo continuous effect may be started when a gap is generated in the left symbol or the right symbol, if there is no gap, it becomes a temppai, and then, it is a decorative symbol of a number If the decorative symbol of the number which added 1 passes, it will develop in reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-series effect is not started, if a gap is not generated, it becomes a temppai, and then it is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol of the number obtained by adding 1 to the decorative symbol of the tempered number.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the pseudo sequence effect may be started when the left symbol and the right symbol are tempered, there is a state as to whether or not the pseudo sequence symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the number If the decorative symbol of the number which added 1 to the decorative symbol passes, it will develop in reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-series effect is not started, the display is stopped with the decorative symbol of the number obtained by adding 1 to the decorative symbol of the tempered number, and it becomes an off.

  In addition, for example, the left symbol is "description 6", the middle symbol is "special symbol" and the right symbol is "decoration 7" stop display (symbol combination of "decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7" is stop display) When the serial effect starts, the left symbol is "decoration 6", the middle symbol is "special symbol", the right symbol is "decoration 7", and the left symbol is, for example, the left symbol also in the next pseudo-sequence effect. The "decoration 6" and the design on the right are "decoration 6" and are configured to be a temppai (referred to as a "decoration 6 tempie"). In this case, the "decorative six-tenpai" is configured to have a higher jackpot probability than the reach other than the "decorative six-tenpai".

  Therefore, in the second decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (j) and FIG. 171 (o), of the symbol combinations of "decoration 6-special symbol-ornament 7", "decorator 6" of the left symbol is the player By becoming visible to the player, the player may be able to recognize whether or not to become “decorative six-ten-pai” when developing into a super reach, and the player's sense of expectation may be enhanced.

  The temppai design has big hit expectations which are different from each other. For example, the left design is "decoration 7" and the right design is "decoration 7" and the temppai (referred to as "decoration 7 tempai") Become. In such a case, it is possible to visually recognize that the symbol combination of "decorative 7-special symbol-decorative 8" is stopped and displayed by the second decorative symbol, for example, so that the player's subsequent development is "hot". There are cases where it can be made to recognize that

  In addition, the first animation (stop animation of a special symbol) includes enlarged display, but may include rotating display, and it is not attached to the enlarged display of the symbol itself but attached to the symbol The effect display or the like may include a display that is gradually enlarged. In addition, there may be cases where displays other than the second decorative symbol overlap due to the enlarged display of the first animation.

  In addition, although the second decorative symbol is described as an example of a configuration in which it may be displayed or non-displayed, the second decorative symbol will be described except for a configuration in which a third decorative symbol to be described later is displayed (FIG. 179). May be displayed at all times.

  In addition, in one turning effect of the turning animation (first animation, stop turning animation of special design, middle pattern turning animation) by a special symbol, a tipping by the second decorative symbol may occur, or the second There is nothing corresponding to a special symbol in the decorative symbol, and there may be a case where a tipping occurs due to the stop display of the second decorative symbol by a symbol other than the special symbol.

  In addition, the stop display (re-display) of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) generated after the pseudo-sequence effect does not include the special symbol so as not to be mistaken as the pseudo-series symbol being stopped again. Is desirable.

  In addition, when the number of pseudo-sequences is plural, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed (or changed so that it can be changed (of the changeable state) whenever the number increases (increases) ) May be configured, and in this configuration, the hold icon or the change icon may be hidden at a certain timing.

Further, although the case where the number of times of pseudo run is plural is described as an example, the number of times of pseudo run may be one. As the number of pseudo runs increases (the pseudo run effect continues), the jackpot expectation increases. Further, in each of the production examples described in the present specification, there may be a case in which the big hit expectation degree is higher than the pseudo series effect, or there is a case in which the big hit expectation degree is lower than the pseudo series effect. May be
<Effect example B>

  Next, another presentation example will be described. FIG. 171 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects based on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  This effect example is an example of the case where the special symbol is not stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display (that is, when the continuous effect is not started), and FIGS. 171 (a) to (i) are Since it is the same as the timing shown to 170 (a)-FIG. 170 (i), description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the description of the same configuration as that of the effect example A shown in FIG. 170 may be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 171 (j) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo run symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, "decoration 6" of the left symbol display area 208a and "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo consecutive symbols, and can not be viewed by the player (left symbol display The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult for the player to visually recognize in comparison with the pseudo consecutive symbols).

  In addition, in the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y in which only the frame portion (white-painted square frame) has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Be done. The second decorative symbol in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 6") is displayed in a swing (temporary stop) in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 7") is in a swing (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208g. )Is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208l, the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol (the second decorative symbol) is being performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 18 (k), the animation of the reduced display of the enlarged pseudo-connected symbol is executed in the first symbol display area 208X, and the size of the initial state (left symbol display area shown in FIG. An animation (scroll display of a middle symbol) which is reduced to the same size as “decoration 6” of 208a and “display 7” of the right symbol display area 208c and which descends from above in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed. Showing the status.

  Further, at this timing, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The second decorative symbol in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") is displayed in a swing (temporary stop) in the left symbol display area 208k, and in the middle symbol display area 208l, the decorative symbol (second symbol, here "decoration 8") Is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol (here, "decoration 7") is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g in a fluctuating movement (temporary stop). That is, at this timing, the first symbol variation area 208X and the second symbol variation area 208Y are both visible to the player, but the state of the first decorative symbol (presence of symbol combination and (temporary) stop display) And, the state of the second decorative pattern (the presence or absence of symbol combination and (temporary) stop display) is different. Hereinafter, when simply described as "state of decorative symbol", it refers to a state (display mode) such as the symbol combination of the decorative symbol and the presence / absence of (temporary) stop display.

  The timing shown to the figure (l) is the state by which the decorative symbol (here "decoration 8") of the number was stopped-displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation display in the first symbol variation area 208X. It shows. That is, after the first animation display, the special symbol (here, the pseudo continuous symbol) is not displayed stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is determined that the continuous effect (the pseudo continuous effect) is not executed by stopping the special symbol. It is in a state of Here, the first animation display refers to an animation by the pseudo continuous symbol (the symbol of the character (ten)) in the same figure (g) to the same figure (k).

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be viewed by the player in the same state (the combination of the decorative symbols is a temporary stop state of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7").

  Thus, in this example, the case is shown where execution of continuous rendering (for example, simulated serial rendering) does not start after the first animation display, and in that case, the middle symbol display of the first symbol display area 208X In the area 208b, the special symbol (for example, pseudo consecutive symbol) is not stopped and displayed, but the symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a numeral) of a type different from the special symbol is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation display, temporary stop display). Furthermore, in this case, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 8") stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is a decorative symbol of numbers displayed in the case where the continuous effect is executed (Fig. 170 (p) The decorative symbol ("decorative 7") stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is a decorative symbol (third symbol) having a number different from that of the decorative symbol ("decor 7").

  The timing shown in the same figure (m) shows a state where the second decorative symbol has been erased in the second image display device 2082, and the timing shown in the same figure (n) is the first in the first symbol display area 208X. A state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (here, the second decorative pattern (combination of the decorative patterns of “deco 6-deco 8 −deco 7)”) is stopped is displayed.

  Generally, as shown in FIG. 1L, after the display of the first animation is finished, the player performs special processing in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). It is possible to recognize that it has been decided that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not performed by the stop display of the symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol). Alternatively, a player who is used to playing a game can move the movable body even if the state of the first symbol display area 208X is not visible (difficult to see) by the first animation display, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to recognize that the start of the execution of the continuous effect (simulated sequence effect) has been determined by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of (the family crest product 224A).

  In this embodiment, as shown in (k) in the figure, even if it is in a state where the stop display of the first decorative symbol is not determined (the first animation display is in progress) at a timing earlier than that, as shown in FIG. It was determined that continuous rendition (pseudo rendition) is not performed by the second decorative symbol (Fig. 171 (q)) in which the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the number) is stopped and displayed in the display area 208l. There are cases where it is possible to make the player recognize things.

  Alternatively, even if the first animation display is being executed at a timing prior to the timing shown in (l) of the figure, as shown in (j) of the figure, (the middle symbol display area 208l changes at high speed The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (p)) allows the player to recognize that it is determined that the continuous effect (simulated continuous effect) will not be executed. There is a case.

  In (k) of the figure, the pseudo run symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b may move downward (displace) and may be returned to the top and may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is a stop display of the pseudo run symbol shown in FIG. 170 (m), and the pseudo run effect is started similarly to FIG. 170 (n) to FIG. In this case, when the player visually recognizes in advance the second decorative symbol in which the special symbol is displayed stopped in the middle symbol, the first symbol is displayed in a state in which the special symbol is displayed stopped in the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol. If the middle symbol of the decorative symbol (a pseudo-series symbol of the middle symbol display area 208b) is shifted downward, the player may be able to recognize that the shift is made and appear to return upward (become first).

  In addition, you may be comprised so that the method of the case in which it returns to upper direction and it carries out stop display may become high hit expectation in the case where a special symbol shifts downward and returns to a stop display rather than stop display in the mode of normal stop.

  Thus, during the execution of the first animation ((j), (k) in the same figure), the first decorative symbol (the state of the fluctuation stop of the first decorative symbol) after the end is unconfirmed, The second decorative symbol (the fact that the pseudo continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y) previously prevents the continuous effect (the pseudo continuous effect) from being performed. That is, for example, an advanced person or the like gazes at the second decorative symbol, and before stopping the change of the first decorative symbol, the state of the stop display of the special symbol (the pseudo-series symbol) and the continuous effect by it The presence or absence of the execution start of can be recognized.

  In addition, for example, at the display timing of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 17J, the second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (q)) in which the middle symbol is stopped may be displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 170, when the pseudo connected effect is executed, there is no prior opening by the display of the second decorative symbol, and as shown in FIG. 171, the forward connected only occurs when the simulated connected effect is not executed. You may do so.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 170, the first bar may be generated in any of the case where the simulated continuous effect is performed and the case where the simulated continuous effect is not performed as shown in FIG.

Also, in FIG. 171 (k), the timing (first timing) at which the animation of the scroll display of the pseudo-connected symbol starts and the timing (second timing) at which the second decorative symbol is displayed are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.
<Effect example C>

FIG. 172 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects based on the image display device 208 'of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Effect example C-1)

  In the same figure (b)-the same figure (f), the 2nd symbol display area 208Y for performing the change display (the 2nd change display) of the 2nd decoration pattern is provided in the 1st image display device 2081 It is an example of presentation when there is.

  That is, FIGS. (B) to (f) correspond to the timings shown in (h) to (l) of FIG. 170, respectively, and in (h) to (l) of FIG. The second decorative symbol displayed in the two-image display device 2082 is displayed in a second symbol display area 208Y provided in the first image display device 2081.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (b), the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (c), the width of the pseudo run symbol gradually expands. Start, the right end of "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a start to be overlapped with the left end and the right end of the pseudo consecutive symbols, respectively For example, only the second symbol display area 208Y (a frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the figure) for displaying the second decorative symbol in the upper left of the one image display device 2081, for example, starts its display (first 2 decoration pattern is hidden).

  In the timing shown in (d) of the figure, the horizontal width of the pseudo run symbol is further enlarged, and "Decoration 6" of the left symbol display area 208a and "Decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208a are both pseudo run The symbols completely overlap and are not visible to the player (the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be recognized by the player compared to the pseudo-series symbols).

  In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (middle symbol turning animation) is displayed), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state shown in FIG. 171 (o) The second decorative pattern is displayed. That is, the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 6") is displayed in a swing (temporary stop) in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 7") is in a swing (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208g. ) And a second decorative symbol in a state in which a pseudo-connected symbol (here, the symbol (the symbol of the same character as the symbol (h) in this figure) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. That is, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo run symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first bar, and the execution of the pseudo run effect at this timing (or later timing) The confirmation may be recognizable to the player.

  In addition, at this timing, at least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6E, the width of the pseudo run symbol of the first decorative symbol is further enlarged, and one pseudo run symbol has a plurality of image display devices 208 '(first image display device 2081, second image display The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) including the stop indication of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed, and overlaps the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol. The crest 244A starts to rise and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081 (it overlaps with the first image display device 2081).

  In the timing shown in (f) of the figure, the enlarged display of the pseudo connected symbol of the first decorative symbol is finished, the raised family crest 244A rotates at the raised position, and the sound effect of "Don" from the speaker 120 is displayed. It shows the output status. The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) including the stop indication of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment (example of presentation), the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol to be enlarged first overlaps with the second decorative symbol (it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol), and then the second image display device The display starts at 2082.

Even if the player does not notice the stop display of the second symbol display area 208Y shown in (d) of the figure, the operation of the movable body (family crest 244A) shown in (f) of the figure. It is possible to recognize that the stop display of the pseudo run symbol and the start of the execution of the pseudo run effect by it have been determined by (the rotation operation here) and / or the sound effect from the speaker 120. The other configuration is similar to that of FIG.
(Effect example C-2)

  FIGS. 172 (h) to (l) are diagrams showing other effect examples, in which part of the first decorative symbol is not displayed during execution of the first animation.

  FIGS. 172 (h) to (l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 170 (h) to 170 (l), respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (h), the pseudo-connected symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, and at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (i), the width of the pseudo connected symbol is gradually expanded Start the display. At this timing, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are not displayed. Also, for example, at the upper part of the second image display device 2082, only the second symbol display area 208Y (a frame portion indicated by a white frame in the drawing) for displaying the second decorative symbol starts its display (The second decorative symbol is hidden).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7J, the horizontal width of the pseudo run symbol is further enlarged, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. This second decorative symbol is in the state of FIG. 171 (o). That is, the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 6") is displayed in a swing (temporary stop) in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative symbol (here, "decorative 7") is in a swing (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208g. ) Is displayed, and a pseudo continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the character (ten)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. Thereby, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo run symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first bar, and the execution of the pseudo run effect at this timing (or later timing) In some cases, it is possible for the player to recognize the determination of.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6K, the width of the first symbol is further expanded, and one symbol is a plurality of image display devices 208 '(first image display device 2081, second image display) The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) including the stop indication of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed. At least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation displayed on the second image display device 2082.

  In the timing shown in (l) of the figure, the enlarged display of the pseudo connected symbol of the first decorative symbol is finished, the raised family crest 244A rotates at the raised position, and the sound effect "Don" from the speaker 120 is displayed. It shows the output status. The second decorative symbol including the stop indication of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed. The other configuration is similar to that of FIG.

  Thus, in the present embodiment (example of presentation), the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol to be enlarged first starts to be displayed on the second image display device 2082, and then the second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o) ) (Overlapping with the second decorative pattern).

  In this production example, the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a which are not displayed in the same figure (i) are at least a second animation (a pseudo (simulated) shown in FIG. In the state before becoming non-displayed (for example, in this example, in the left symbol display area 208a, “in the left symbol display area 208a, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (m), for example) The decoration pattern of "decoration 6" and the decoration pattern of "decoration 7" are re-displayed in the right pattern display area 208a.

As described above, when the first decorative symbol is not displayed during execution of the first animation, the player can be made to recognize the state of the decorative symbol by the display of the second decorative symbol. In addition, the timing of a display start of a 2nd decorative symbol is the same as that of the case of the example of a presentation of FIG.
(Effect example C-3)

  FIGS. 172 (n) to (o) are diagrams showing another example of effect, and in FIG. 170 (d), are an example of effect in the case of being a temppai (reach).

  FIG. 172 (n) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 170 (d). In FIG. 170 (d), effects are made to appear as tempay (they do not actually become a tempai), but the timing shown in FIG. 172 (n) In the figure, it shows a state of becoming a temppai.

  The timing shown in FIG. 172 (o) shows a state in which a tempe (reach) effect is being executed, and in this example, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, for example, the first symbol, for example) are displayed on the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a. , “Deco 6” are enlarged and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208 b, the decorative symbol (eg “decor 6”) is larger than the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 a. An animation that is displayed in a state of low visibility is being executed.

  In addition, by being overlapped to the enlarged left symbol and the right symbol, the high-speed fluctuation itself of the middle symbol is also difficult for the player to visually recognize in comparison with the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Here, "an animation displayed in a state of poor visibility for the player" means an animation in which the visibility becomes worse compared to the left symbol and the right symbol due to high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, the left symbol or the left symbol The animation is displayed in a state in which the transmittance is higher than that of the right pattern (in a state where the decorative pattern is displayed thin).

  In this case (in the case of tempay), the second decorative symbol is not displayed in any of the image display devices 208 '. That is, in the present embodiment, the visibility of the scroll display of the middle symbol is obstructed by the animation display by the right symbol and / or the left symbol (a state where the notification of the information by the first decorative symbol is inhibited) Also, the display of the second decorative symbol (notification of the relevant information) is not performed.

In the same figure (d), although the display of the second decorative symbol is started, the pseudo consecutive symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol by the timing of the display start of the second decorative symbol and the enlargement of the pseudo consecutive symbol. The timing may be simultaneous, or after the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed, the pseudo continuous symbol may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol by the enlargement of the pseudo continuous symbol, or the pseudo After the run symbol is enlarged, the display may be started so that the second decorative symbol overlaps the pseudo run symbol. The same applies to FIG.
<Demonstration example D>

  FIG. 173 is a view sequentially showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 170 (a), for example, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 170 (b) to (c) is executed, and the timing shown in FIG. 173 (b) follows the left symbol In the display area 208a, for example, the decoration symbol of "decoration 6" and the decoration symbol of "decoration 7" in the right symbol display region 208a are shaken (temporarily stopped), and the decoration symbol is rapidly changing in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 170 (c) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 170 (g), in which the first animation is started in the middle symbol display area 208b which has been changing at high speed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol), but is the special symbol (here, the symbol of the character (princess)) stopped and displayed separately from the pseudo-sequence effect? It is an animation (a medium pattern turning animation) that asks if you wonder. For example, when the special symbol (here, the symbol of the character (princess)) different from the pseudo rendition is stopped and displayed, another rendition of the same kind as the pseudo rendition is described (for example, mini character MC described later) And so on), continuous announcement effect etc.) is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, in the middle symbol display area 208b, an animation of scrolling display of the middle symbol in which the special symbol of the character (princess) descends from above is executed.

  In the timing shown in (d) of the figure, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped (temporarily displayed), and then, for example, the animation is rotated with the vertical position unchanged. The animation of) is running.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7E, the execution of the continuous effect is determined in response to the stop display of the special symbol of the character (princess) in FIG. An animation (second animation) (for example, before the start of the continuous effect) relating to the continuous effect is shown being performed. Here, the second animation is an animation including an image in which the image of the character (princess) is displayed and the characters “chance !!” are displayed.

  That is, in this example of presentation, the display period of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. (D) (until the symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in FIG. Period).

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is the stop display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X (here, the stop display of symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" (swing fluctuation, temporary) Stop) is shown being executed.

  Further, at this timing, a small character (mini character MC) is displayed above the description display area TT1. In this example, the mini character MC is a mini character (princess), and this display is a continuous effect (effect display that constitutes at least a part of the continuous effect).

  In this example, the special symbol is a symbol different from the pseudo-series symbol, but the display (stop indication) of the decorative symbol is after the display of the animation (second animation) after the special symbol is stopped and displayed is finished. In the case of being re-displayed, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, a decoration symbol ("decor 6") of the left symbol display area 208a when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. And the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern ("decor 7") of the right pattern display area 208a.

  In such a case, the decorative symbol of the middle symbol display area 208b is the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") of the right symbol display region 208a (or the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 6") of the left symbol display region 208a. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed. That is, at this timing, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed, and the display of the first decorative symbol resumed after the animation (second animation) is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, it becomes stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the decoration pattern of the pattern combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7".

  The timing shown in the same figure (g) is that the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (round shape) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284 and are in the state of off stop. It shows. In addition, in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state (displayed stopped in the symbol combination of "department 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a symbol combination of missing).

  In the timing shown in (h) of the figure, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in (g) in the figure) is digested, and a state where symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 (not shown) is started In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variation game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, the variable display (first variable display) of the first decorative symbol is performed at high speed.

  Further, with the end of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a white fluctuation icon h0. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 next to the left of the change icon h0, and the white hold icon h11 is displayed on the left pedestal of the change icon h0. It is informed that the hold of is 1.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the suspension of the special view 1 is “1” and the suspension of the special view 2 is “0”. Number display is done.

  In addition, the mini character (princess) of the information of the description display part TT1 is continuing the display (the display is continued until the next fluctuation (carried over)). For example, the number (displayed number) of mini characters (princess) is increased by the stop display (see the same figure (d)) of the special symbol (here, the character (princess)) during the subsequent game. As the number of displays increases, for example, the expectation of the jackpot increases, and the player's expectation increases. That is, the effect of the increase (appearance) of the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same type of effect as the pseudo continuous effect in terms of continuous effect.

  On the other hand, while the pseudo-series effect is a continuous effect within one change, the effect in which the mini character (Hime) of this embodiment appears is a continuous effect (a continuous effect called horizontal connection) across multiple changes. In terms of points, it can be said that they are different types of continuous effects.

Further, the effect of the increase (appearance) of the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same effect display as the meter display in that the expectation of the player is increased by the increase of the display number. Therefore, instead of the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess), it may be effect of meter display (display in which the meter is increased (or decreased)).
Further, the number of displayed mini characters (princess) may correspond to the number of continuous effects.

  In addition, in this example, the display of the second decorative symbol is not performed in the image display device 208 '(the first bar does not occur).

Moreover, in this example, although the case where the special symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in the second animation display has been described, the configuration may be such that it is enlarged in the same manner as the pseudo consecutive symbol.
<Effect example E>

FIG. 174 is a view showing in stages the other example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Effect example E-1)

  Since the timing shown to the figure (a)-the figure (c) is the same as the timing shown to FIG. 173 (a)-(c), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 174 (d), in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped (temporarily displayed), and then, for example, the vertical position remains unchanged. Running, rotating animation.

  Further, at this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed (stopped display) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the right of FIG. Specifically, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, the decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 6") of the numeral is displayed as fluctuation (temporary stop), and in the middle symbol display area 208k, the numeral decoration is displayed. A symbol (for example, "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and in the right symbol display area 208l, a decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 7") of numbers is displayed as shaking fluctuation (temporary stop).

  The timings shown in FIGS. (E) to (h) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 173 (e) to 173 (h) except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. It is.

  That is, in the figure (e), the second animation (an animation including an image in which the image of the character (princess) is displayed and the character "chance !!" is displayed) is executed, and the figure (f). The timing shown in is executed in the first symbol display area 208X, the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, the stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7") is executed At the same time, the mini character (princess) is displayed above the description display area TT1. The second decorative symbol is maintained in the state shown in FIG.

  In the fourth symbol display device 284, the timing shown in (g) in the same figure is displayed in gray in both Special Figure 1 (square) and Special Figure 2 (round), and is in the state of off stop. It is shown that. In addition, in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state (displayed stopped in the symbol combination of "department 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a symbol combination of missing). The second decorative symbol is maintained in the state shown in FIG.

  Thus, in the same figure (d) and the same figure (e), the second decorative figure of the combination of the same decorative pattern as the first ornamental pattern displayed in the same figure (f) and the same figure (g) is stopped and displayed And there is an overdraft.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it is a special symbol other than the pseudo-series symbol, the second decorative symbol causes a tipping, but the symbol displayed by the second decorative symbol does not include the special symbol ( The front bar is caused by the symbol combination of the decorative symbols of all the numbers without the special symbol and without the special symbol.

  In the timing shown in (h) of the figure, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in (g) in the same figure) is digested, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081 The variable display (first variable display) of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol of high-speed fluctuation is also performed in the symbol display areas 208j to 208l of the second image display device 2082 (second fluctuation It is done). The configuration other than this is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In this example, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol to start display in the same figure (d) and the stop timing (second timing) of the special symbol may be the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.

  In addition, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol to start display in FIG. 6D may be the same as the timing (second timing) of starting rotation of the special symbol. The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may occur after the second timing.

In addition, the start timing (first timing) of the variation display of the second decorative symbol to be started in the same figure (h) and the start timing (second timing) of the variation display of the first decorative symbol are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
(Example production E-2)

  FIGS. 174 (m) to (o) are diagrams showing other effect examples, and are effect examples when other special symbols are displayed.

  The timings shown in (m) and (n) in the figure are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b) in the figure. The timing shown in the same figure (o) is the same as the timing shown in the figure (c) but different from the special symbol of the character (hime) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X An animation (first animation) in which a special symbol is scrolled is displayed. The special symbol of this example is, for example, a special symbol relating to high-speed pseudo run (for example, a special symbol displayed as "continue"), and when the special symbol relating to high-speed pseudo run is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b An effect of high speed pseudo ream is executed.

  The timing shown in the figure (p) shows a state in which the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo run is stop-displayed (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area. At the timing shown in (q), the first symbol display area 208X starts displaying the first decorative symbol at variable display (first variable display) by stopping display of the special symbol related to the high speed pseudo link, and the high speed pseudo link is started. Shows a state in which the effect of is being executed. Further, in this case, for example, the number of times of execution of the high-speed pseudo sequence (in this example, “the second shot”) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the high-speed simulated rendition, the scroll display of the special symbol (for example, the special symbol displayed as "continuation") → stop display (temporary stop display) → first change display (re-change display) is, for example, 100 at high speed Repeatedly (until the display of the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-run reaches the “100th shot”)

  In this effect example, a special symbol relating to a high speed pseudo link may be mixed with a pseudo link symbol (symbol of a character (殿)) as shown in FIG. 170 or a symbol in another effect mode in the special symbol. .

  In addition, in this effect example, the second decorative symbol is not displayed, and there is no leading bar, but the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In this case, the display start timing of the second decorative symbol may be any timing from (n) to (p) of FIG. In addition, the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the same figure (q), in which case the same stop display as the stop indication of the first decorative symbol in the same figure (p) may be performed, for example A display similar to the display of the first symbol display area 208X in FIG. (Q) (a high-speed simulated rendition) may be performed.

It should be noted that the high-speed simulated continuous effect may be developed after the normal simulated continuous effect shown in FIG. 170, or only one of them may be executed.
<Effect example F>

  FIG. 175 is a view sequentially showing another example of effects (for example, high-speed pseudo-render effects) centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (B) to (c) are the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 (second variable display, FIG. (F) Since the timing is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 174 (n) to (o) except that the display is being performed, the description will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as "continuation") related to high-speed pseudo-repetition is displayed stopped (swing fluctuation , Temporary stop) is shown. Then, also at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, the fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol continues the display (the stop display is not performed).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6E, the special symbol related to the high speed pseudo run is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display (first variable display) of the first decorative symbol starts in the first symbol display area 208X. It shows a state in which the pseudo rendition is being performed. Then, also at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the variable display (second variable display) of the second decorative symbol continues the display (the stop display is not performed). The other configurations are the same as the configurations of FIG. 174 (n) to FIG. 174 (q).

  In this example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, the variation display (the second variation display) of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the period from FIG. 175 (b) to FIG. 175 (e). continuing. And in a period of Drawing 175 (b)-the same figure (d), the 1st decoration symbol and the 2nd decoration symbol are in a different state. As described above, when the high-speed pseudo-rendering effect is executed (the second variable display is continued even if a break (such as a temporary stop of a special symbol) may be provided during the high-speed pseudo-rendering effect) You may

In this example, since there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol, no advance baring occurs. However, changing the way of thinking, there is no stop indication (temporary stop indication) of the second decorative symbol (the second variable symbol display of the second decorative symbol is continuing to be displayed), the normal pseudo run It can also be said that the player may be able to recognize whether the effect or the high-speed simulated continuous effect (for example, advanced users can recognize it).
<Effect example G>

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing gradually another example of effects based on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and an example of effects when a button effect is executed.
(Effect example G-1)

  The timing shown to the figure (b) is the same as that of FIG. 170 (j) except that the 2nd decorative symbol is displayed in the state of FIG. 171 (p). That is, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") is stopped and the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 7") is stopped in the right symbol display region 208l (swing fluctuation) Is temporarily stopped, and in the middle symbol display area 208k, fluctuation display (high speed fluctuation) of the middle symbol is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the pseudo-series symbols enlarged and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X stop the enlargement display. The display size of the pseudo run symbol at this timing is, for example, a display size similar to that in the same figure (b), and more specifically, the display of the pseudo run symbol (such as FIG. 170 (g)) displayed by scrolling. The size is larger than the size, and the display area of the first image display device 2081 is not exceeded (the pseudo consecutive symbol is not displayed in the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083).

  At this timing, an effect (button effect) on the operation means is performed. That is, an animation relating to a button effect is displayed on the front of the enlarged pseudo-series symbol (overlapping a part of the pseudo-series symbol). The animation relating to the button effect includes, for example, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and a display indicating a reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136. The display for prompting the operation of the operation means is, for example, an image (button image BG) imitating the chance button 136 and the display of characters and an arrow “Press !!”, and a display showing the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 ( The elapsed time notification image TG) displays, for example, the whole of the acceptance valid period as a colored (other than white) solid image and the fill image becomes smaller with the lapse of the acceptance valid period (the meter subtracts (decreases)) (Displayed) is a display for executing an animation. Further, in accordance with this, the built-in LED lights up red to notify that the operation is possible.

  In this example, an example is shown in which the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap on the front of the enlarged and displayed pseudo linked symbol, but the button is displayed on the front of the enlarged and displayed pseudo linked symbol An example is shown in which the image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap, but at least at least a portion of the enlarged and displayed pseudo continuous symbol, at least a portion of the elapsed time notification image TG in which the meter is displayed by subtraction. Some may be configured to overlap.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 171 (p) continues in the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 has been operated within the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136. In the present embodiment, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo consecutive symbol is stopped until the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect, and the chance button 136 is operated within the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 In this case, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo-series symbol is resumed.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 171 (p) continues in the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

  That is, in the same figure (b)-the same figure (d), the state of the 1st decorative symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol is different.

  The timing shown to the same figure (e) has shown the state which the expansion display of the pseudo | simulation consecutive symbol of a 1st decorative symbol resumed by operation of the chance button 136, and the horizontal width was further expanded. At this timing, the left and right end portions of the pseudo run symbol are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-connected symbol is displayed (crossed over) over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2093).

  In the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y by the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in the lower part of FIG. It is (temporarily) stop display by the symbol combination of "pseudo run symbol-decoration 7", and it is in advance that the start of the pseudo run effect is determined by this (not visible in the first symbol display area 208X ( The stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is notified in place of the first decorative symbol). Then, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo run symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end portion of the pseudo run symbol at least the second decoration symbol (In this example, the left end of the pseudo run symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area).

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo run symbol is overlapped with a part of the display on the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character like a bastion on the stage, And the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2).

  In addition, at this timing, the family crest 244A starts to ascend and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081.

  As for the timing shown in the figure (f), the enlarged display of the pseudo connected symbol of the first decorative symbol is ended (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo connected symbol shown in the same figure (e)). It shows a state in which the speaker is rotated at a raised position and the sound effect "Don" is output from the speaker 120. In the state where the button image is not displayed (the same figure (e), the same figure (f)), the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 (and the third image display device 2083) A pseudo run symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed. The second decorative symbol continues the state of FIG.

  The other configuration is the same as the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 170 (k) to 170 (n), and thus the description will be omitted.

  In this example, a button effect is performed during execution of a first animation (a stop special animation of a special symbol, a middle approximate symbol animation). That is, the first animation includes an animation relating to a button effect (an animation of a button effect). And, in this case, the animation of the button effect is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. In addition, the animation of the button effect may be displayed only on the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), or may be displayed on the plurality of image display devices 208 ', respectively. An animation of one button effect may be displayed across the image display device 208 'of FIG.

  When the button effect is executed, until the button effect starts (for example, until the animation of the button effect shown in the same figure (c) starts to be displayed), the enlarged display of the pseudo-series symbol in the first symbol display device 2081 When (enlargement animation) is executed and the button effect is started, the enlarged display of the pseudo-series symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated within the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the enlarged display of the pseudo consecutive symbol is resumed.

  In addition, from the start of the button effect until the chance button 136 is operated, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 171 (p)) State), the decorative symbol (in this case, the pseudo consecutive symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 by the operation of the chance button 136 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 176 (e)). The state shown in the lower drawing) and the enlarged display of the pseudo run symbol resume on the first image display device 2081.

  That is, when the chance button 136 is operated in the time t1 from the start of the button effect, the second operation is performed earlier than in the case where the chance button 136 is operated after the time t2 (t2> t1) from the start of the button effect. The decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the presence or absence of the execution of the continuous effect (here, the pseudo sequential effect) can be recognized early (a front bar is caused by the second decorative symbol).

  In this example, after the operation of the chance button 136, the timing (first timing) at which the second image display device 2082 performs stop display of the second decorative symbol, and the first image display device 2081 The timing at which the enlarged display resumes (second timing) may be the same timing, or the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be faster than the first timing. It may be early.

Even when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 6D, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) may not be performed in FIG.
(Effect example G-2)

  The same figure (h)-the same figure (l) are the cases where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is not performed within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 (H) to (l) correspond to the timings shown in (b) to (f), respectively, so redundant explanations will be omitted. Do.

  Even when the button effect is started in (i) of the figure, as shown in (j) and (k) in the figure, the operation is not performed within the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 In this case, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed, and the variable display continues (the state of FIG. 171 (p)).

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows a state where the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In this case, stop display of the second decorative symbol is performed when time runs out, and in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 k (the state shown in the lower part of FIG. 176E).

In addition, since the chance button 136 is not operated and the enlarged display animation of the pseudo-connected symbol on the first image display device 2081 can not be resumed, (part of the enlarged animation in the middle) at the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed) the pseudo linked pattern of maximum size is displayed.
(Effect example G-3)

  The same figure (n)-the same figure (r) are the cases where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation was performed within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, It is an example when the pseudo run symbol of the 1st decoration symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the timing shown in the figure (n)-the figure (r) is respectively shown in the figure (b)-the figure (f). Since the timing corresponds to the timing shown, the redundant description will be omitted.

  The timing shown in the figure (p) indicates a state where the chance button 136 is operated. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 6Q, the enlarged display of the pseudo connected symbol of the first decorative symbol ends, and in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081, the display size before enlargement (in the initial state) The pseudo linked symbol of the display size) shows a state in which the scroll display is started. In addition, in the second image display device 2082, stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the second decorative symbol is executed. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the lower part of the figure (q), which is a (temporary) stop display of the symbol combination of the numeric decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7") . As a result, the fact that the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (the pseudo continuous effect is not started to be executed) is pre-empted.

  At the timing shown in the same figure (r), in the first symbol display area 208X, the first decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7") of the same symbol combination as the second decorative symbol is stopped (flickering) (Varying, temporary stop), and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect is not started.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo run symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is shown in the figure (q) from the display size shown in the figure (p) between the figure (p) and the figure (q). An animation that is displayed to be reduced to the display size may be executed, or after the chance button 136 is operated in (p) of the figure, the enlarged display is once resumed and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, maximum size) An animation may be executed which is displayed after being reduced to the display size shown in FIG.

  If the pseudo sequence effect is not executed, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (p), the second decorative symbol (eg, “decor 6-decor 8-”) is displayed on the second image display device 2082. The decorative symbol of the symbol combination of "decoration 7" is stop-displayed (temporary stop-display), and after the animation of the reduction display of the pseudo run symbol is executed in the first image display device 2081, the pseudo run effect is not started to be executed Scrolling of the suggested pseudo-series symbols is performed (the same figure (p)).

In addition, the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) of the first decorative symbol is started when the special symbol does not stop at a predetermined position and the scroll display is started, so that the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo series effect) is not started There is also a configuration in which a special symbol is stopped and displayed (continuous effect (simulated continuous effect) is executed) by making it look back, and the present embodiment can be applied even if the configuration is made. In that case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol including the stop indication of the pseudo consecutive symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol including the stop indication of the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol as shown in the lower part of the figure (e) at the timing shown in FIG. The symbol may be stopped and displayed.
<Effect example H>

  FIG. 177 is a diagram step by step showing another example of effects based on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and an example of effects performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (b) is a state in which reach is formed, and in the left symbol display area 208c of the first symbol display area 208X, the decorative symbol (here, "decor 6") shakes (temporarily stops) In the right symbol display area 208c, the decoration symbol (here, "decoration 6") shakes (temporarily stops), and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the middle symbol changes to low speed fluctuation. In this low-speed fluctuation, for example, when the middle pattern passes the "decoration 7", other than the removal is decided. When the middle pattern is stopped before "decoration 5" or when the middle symbol is stopped at "decoration 7", the detachment is determined.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is in a state where an effect (preceding effect) indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach (for example, a sword reach) is started. That is, in the first image display device 2081, the animation of the reduction display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually reduced while being temporarily stopped. In addition, the variable display of the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the second image display device 2082 at a certain timing during the execution of the animation of the reduced display. In the icon display area 800, a pedestal appears below the change icon h01.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the animation of the reduced display of the left symbol and the right symbol further progresses in the first image display device 2081, and the first image display is displayed while the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced. An animation is performed moving to the upper left and upper right of the display area of the device 2081 so as to be separated from each other. The variable display of the second decorative symbol is continuing.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which a display (notice effect effect) for giving notice that super reach (for example, sword reach) effect is started is being executed. An in-image (here, an image in which the character (Kengo) and the characters “Kengo-gosan!” Are displayed) is displayed.

  Further, in the icon display area 800, the pedestal of the fluctuation icon h0 and the pedestals of the other suspension icons h11 and h12 and the suspension icon are erased, and only the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. The variable display of the second decorative symbol is continuing.

  The timing shown in (g) in the same figure shows that the scene is switched in the first image display device 2081 and the confrontation scene between the character and the character is displayed, and the super reach effect starts to be executed. There is.

  Also, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, as shown in the right side of FIG. 6G, decorative symbols (both in this example) are displayed in the left symbol display area 208j and the right symbol display area 208l. "Decoration 6" is displayed temporarily. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed in the state of variable display in reach production (the same figure (d)), and after the execution of the notice effect of the super reach production (the same figure (f)) When the super reach effect is started, a temporary stop of the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol is displayed (the same figure (g)).

  The timing shown to the figure (h) has shown the state in which the special rendering (special display EX) is performed in the 2nd symbol display area 208Y. The special effect is, for example, one of the notice effects for notifying that the promotion effect is performed. The special effect is an effect that is not executed in the first symbol area 208X, and is, for example, a display that reduces the visibility of the second symbol display area 208Y. In this example, the letters "CHANCE" are displayed on the front of the second decorative symbol shown in the right figure (g), that is, over the symbol display areas 208j to 208l (special display EX )It is carried out. Special effects may or may not be performed, and the ratio of (execution) to be performed also varies. That is, the probability that the special effect is performed is different depending on the super reach effect being performed. Another rendering with a higher jackpot expectation degree than a certain rendering is configured such that the execution probability of the special rendering is higher when the other conditions are the same. The probability that this special rendition is executed (appears) is 0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the scene immediately after the confrontation is displayed on the first image display device 2081. At this timing, the special display EX of the second symbol display area 208Y is erased, and the second decorative symbol in the state shown in the right figure of the same figure (g) is displayed.

  In the timing shown in (j) of the figure, the scene where the character (殿) has won in the first image display device 2081 is displayed, and the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) shakes in the middle symbol display area 208b. (Provisional stop) is shown. Also in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the right figure (j), the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display area 208k, and the big hit The second decorative symbol is swayed (temporarily stopped) in the symbol combination (in this example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6").

  The timing shown to the same figure (k) has shown the state in which button presentation started execution. This button effect is, for example, a jackpot symbol promotion effect, and a large button image BG to the extent that the first decorative symbol becomes invisible or difficult to be recognized by the player is displayed overlapping the first decorative symbol, and the chance button A display prompting the operation of 136 (in this example, an image of characters of “Press !!” and an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating a reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  By the display of the button image BG, the first decorative symbol of the first symbol display area 208X is difficult to visually recognize, but the second decorative symbol is a symbol combination of the same big hit as the first decorative symbol (in the example, the same symbol (J) It shakes (temporarily stops) at the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" shown in the right figure, and is visible to the player.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at this timing (within the reception valid period of the operation indicated by the elapsed time notification image TG), as shown in FIG. 1 (l), the first symbol display area 208X and the second symbol display In any of the regions 208Y, the decorative symbol of the symbol combination after the jackpot promotion (here, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is shaken (temporarily stopped) and becomes visible to the player. In the case where the chance button 136 is not operated within the reception valid period of the event and the time is expired, the display may be performed as shown in FIG.

  In this effect example, the first decorative symbol of the first symbol display area 208X is difficult to visually recognize at the time of executing the button effect shown in FIG. 6K, and the second decorative symbol is visible to the player in the second symbol display area 208Y. Although it has become possible, there is no case where the second barre of the second decorative pattern (the barber of the combination of the decorative patterns after promotion shown in the same figure (l)) occurs.

  As described above, even in the case of developing into the super reach effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at least at any timing before the development.

  For the player, the point of most interest is the success or failure of the super reach production. Therefore, even if the first symbol display area 208X is difficult for the player to visually recognize in the super reach effect, it is necessary to convey the state of the decorative symbol to the character by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. Sex is low. Therefore, when displaying the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y during execution of the super reach effect, the special effect related to the second decorative symbol (for example, the visibility of the second decorative symbol is reduced Do the same Also, this special effect is executed with a certain probability (0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.) according to the situation.

  In addition, in the same figure (d), the timing (1st timing) which the display of a 2nd decoration pattern starts, and the timing (2nd timing) which the reduction display of a 1st decoration symbol starts are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Moreover, in the same figure (g), the timing (1st timing) when the left pattern and the right pattern of a 2nd decoration symbol stop temporarily and the timing (second timing) when super reach production starts are the same timing The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, the timing at which the special effect (special display EX) of the second decorative symbol starts is not limited to the timing shown in FIG.

  In addition, in the same figure (j), the timing (first timing) when the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and the success or failure result of the super reach effect (in this example, that the character has won) is notified. The display timing (second timing) may be the same, or the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 1L, the timing (first timing) at which the first decorative symbol after promotion is displayed and the timing (second timing) at which the second decorative symbol after promotion is displayed are the same. The timing may be timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
<Effect example I>

  FIG. 178 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects based on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and is another example of effects performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  Since the timing shown to the figure (b) is the same as the timing shown to FIG. 177 (j), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) has shown the state in which button production started execution. This button effect is, for example, an effect of adding a ball, and the first image display device 281 displays a button image BG and a display prompting the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the characters “Please push out ball and push !!”). An image of an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG representing a reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the symbol combination after the jackpot promotion (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" shown in the right figure of the same figure (c)) is temporarily stopped and displayed Bare has occurred.

  That is, as a result of the pass / fail judgment, it is assumed that the 16R big hit is actually won, but in the figure (b) it is assumed that the symbol combination of 4R big hit (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is temporarily stopped. In this case, as shown in (c) of the figure, the effect of adding balls is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, symbol combinations of 16R big hit (for example, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7") are temporarily stopped and displayed In some cases, it may be possible for the player to recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won (previous ballet by the second decorative symbol).

  In the timing shown in (d) of the figure, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in (c) in the figure, the display of the number of added balls (deposed display TT2) is performed, and the balls are displayed. It is in the state of performing an effect informing that it has been added. The disbursed ball overlay display TT2 is a display of an image of "+600" here, thereby notifying that 600 balls have been overlaid. The state of the second decorative symbol is the same as the right figure of FIG.

  It should be noted that the player who visually recognizes the payout ball top number display TT2 may sometimes be able to predict the number of rounds actually won from the top number of payout balls. That is, assuming that the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of the 16R big hit is 2400 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 16R) as an example, for example, 4R big hits (symbols) as shown in FIG. The number of balls obtained by the combination (e.g., "decoration 6-decoration 6") is 600 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 4R).

  In other words, the player who visually recognizes the displayed number-of-roll-outs display shown in FIG. 6D actually makes use of this number (or addition thereof) (even if the actual number of winning rounds by the second decorative symbol is unknown). It can be predicted how many R big hit it is. That is, the display of the number-of-roll-outs display in this case is the notification regarding the big hit (the notification about how many R the big hit the actual big hit is (the number of rounds actually won)).

  In the same figure (e) to the same figure (i), the button effect (with the extra ball effect) (the player's chance button 136 operation) and the extra ball number display TT2 are repeated several times, and the same figure (j). At the timing shown, a pop-out ball superimposition number display TT2 (in this example, "MAX" is displayed) indicating that the pop-up ball superimposition number has reached the maximum number is executed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 18K, the symbol combination of 16R big hit (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. It is informed that it is elected to the number of balls (the number of prize balls) 2400). In the second symbol display area 208Y, temporary stop display of symbol combinations (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") continues in the second symbol display area 208Y in the period from (c) to (k) in the figure. (The second barre with the second decoration pattern is continuing).

  In this example, the maximum number (for example, 2400 balls) of balls (prize balls) in the case of the 16R big hit and the number of balls on the figure (d), the figure (f) and the figure (h) In some cases, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the 16R big hit at the timing of FIG. (H) or FIG. In other words, it can be said that the front-end baring is caused by the ball topped number display TT2 shown in the figure (h) or the figure (j).

  In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing (1st timing) when the display of the 2nd decoration pattern of the 2nd image display device 2082 starts, and the timing when the button effect in the 1st image display device 2081 starts (second Timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

As described above, in one effect (for example, the jackpot symbol promotion director shown in FIG. 177 (k) to FIG. 177 (l)) performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, the second decorative symbol is displayed before the chance button 136 is operated. There is no preemption due to the second, but in the other effects (for example, the extra effects on the ball shown in FIG. 178 and the effects such as the R top effect on the big hit shown in FIG. 178) of the effects performed after the big hit temporary stop display, the second decorative symbol In the case of the above, there may be a prior case (FIG. 178 (c)).
<Effect example J>

FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (g) are diagrams showing gradually another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 'of the pachinko machine of this embodiment, wherein the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are shown. In addition to, it is an example of an effect that a third decorative symbol is displayed.
(Effect example J-1)

  FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f) are the same as the effect examples of FIGS. 172 (a) to 172 (f) except that the third decorative symbol is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z. Therefore, mainly different points will be mainly described, and the other descriptions will be omitted.

  As shown in the figure (b), the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z separately from the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and as an example, an image display device In any of the 208 '(in this example, the first image display device 2081), it is always displayed at least during the variation game of the decorative symbol (the timing at which the variable symbol display or stop display of the decorative symbol is being executed) (the first (2) It is a decorative pattern that is displayed even if it is not displayed. In addition, the third decorative pattern has a display size of each pattern at least smaller than the display size of each pattern of the first decorative pattern, and the entire display size of the third decorative pattern is at least the entire display size of the first decorative pattern It is a small decorative pattern (mini decorative pattern). In the following description, the phrase "the third decorative symbol is always displayed" means "the third decorative symbol is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol is displayed". .

  The third decorative symbol continues its display during the period from (a) to (g), but during display, for example, as shown in (d) and (e), the third symbol display area The position of 208Z may be configured to move.

  In the timing shown in (g) of the figure, for example, after the timing shown in (f) of the figure, the other movable bodies (Yatsushiro character 224B and general character 224C) descend from the initial position, and the first image display device 2081 It is in the state where it overlaps to the upper front of the. At this timing, a part of the pseudo run symbol and a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y are covered by the Yashiro character 224B and the general character 224C, and are viewed by the player It is difficult (not visible).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (g), the first image display device 2081 is provided with the third symbol display area 208Z and shows a state which is constantly displayed during the variation game of the special view 1 There is. In this example, since the period shown in FIG. 179 (b) to FIG. 179 (g) is during the change game of the special view 1 (timing during the change display of the decoration symbol), the first decoration symbol is not visible to the player. Even if it is the timing (the same figure (d)-(g)) which becomes it is the timing (the same figure (b), (c) and (g)) of the 2nd decoration design being non-display (visual difficulty) Also, the third decorative pattern is always displayed. In addition, even when the special symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the third decorative symbol does not have the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed. There is no.

Further, the third symbol display area 208Z is configured to be movable, and as shown in FIGS. (E) to (f), for example, a movable body or the like moves to the front surface of the image display device 208 ' Even when at least a part of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is difficult to view by the movable body, the third decorative symbol is always visible to the player by the movement of the third symbol display area 208Z. .
(Example production J-2)

  The same figure (n)-the same figure (r) are figures which show in order the other example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the 1st decorative symbol and the 2nd In addition to a decorative symbol, it is another example of production in which a third decorative symbol is displayed.

  The same figure (n)-the same figure (o) are the same timing as the production example of figure 177 (c)-figure 177 (d), but for example the 2nd symbol display in the upper left of the 1st image display device 2081 An area 208Y is provided to display the second decorative pattern, and a third design display area 208Z is provided above the description display area TT1 so that the third decorative pattern is always displayed. That is, there is a configuration in which a plurality of mini decoration symbols may be displayed (simultaneously) on one image display device (first image display device 2081). However, the states of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are different.

  In the timing shown in FIG. (N), the right symbol and the left symbol (for example, “decor 6”) of the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is changing at high speed (FIG. 177 (g) right State of the figure). Moreover, the 3rd decoration symbol is performing the change display.

  In the timing shown in (o) of the figure, reach effect is started, and the reduced movement animation of the first decorative symbol (for example, the right symbol and the left symbol in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped) is being executed. It is. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right side of FIG. 177 (g), and the third decorative symbol changes.

  In the same figure (p) and the same figure (q), the first decorative symbol approaches the second decorative symbol due to the reduction movement animation, and a part of the first decorative symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol This is a state in which a part of the characters is difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right side of FIG. 177 (g), and the third decorative symbol changes.

  The figure (r) is a state which one side (in this example, the 1st decoration symbol) became non-display, after the 1st decoration symbol and the 2nd decoration symbol almost overlap. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right side of FIG. 177 (g), and the third decorative symbol changes.

  In addition, in the effect example of the same figure (n)-the same figure (r), while displaying the 2nd decoration design with the 2nd image display device 2082, for example, in the same figure (p)-(q), the 1st decoration The left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol are respectively moved to the left and right, and the left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third image display device 2083 It may be configured to be In this case, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol may be moved in the direction of the second decorative symbol in the second image display device 2082 and may be erased (not displayed) at the overlapping stage.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed only during a certain period when a certain condition is met, whereas the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is always displayed.

  In addition, although each Example (representation example) as described in this specification can be combined suitably and applied, when applied in combination with a present Example, the 2nd decorative symbol in each Example is always displayed. It will not be done.

  Further, the third decorative symbol may be different in design of the symbol from the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and even in that case, the third decorative symbol is always displayed.

  In addition, as shown in the figures (g), (p) and (q), the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the first decorative symbol, the movable member, etc., and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). However, the third decorative symbol is always displayed even if the first decorative symbol or the movable body may move (the movable display is configured to be configured).

On the other hand, the third decorative symbol is configured to be visible to the player mainly displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner, and it is difficult to identify the symbol as compared to the second decorative symbol. Further, since the third decorative symbol is not provided with any special symbol, it is not configured to notify the player of the combination (state) of the decorative symbol as an alternative to the first decorative symbol like the second decorative symbol.
<Effect example K>

FIG. 180 is a diagram step by step showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 'of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, wherein the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the third image display It is an example of an effect related to the operation of the device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083.
(Effect example K-1)

  FIGS. 7A to 7B show an example of effects produced by the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083. In this example, a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol is provided in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081.

  FIG. 173 (a) is a timing corresponding to the timing shown in FIG. 173 (b), but the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083 are background images. Only displayed. At this timing, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are at the initial positions, and the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the left end of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is disposed at the left of the main liquid crystal 2081 The right sub liquid crystal 2083 overlaps the right end of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is disposed to the right of the main liquid crystal 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B shows a state in which one special symbol (for example, a pseudo run symbol) is divided and displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 at the initial position. Further, at this timing, in the main liquid crystal 2081, only the frame portion of the second symbol display area 208Y starts to be displayed. In this embodiment, when the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 move to predetermined positions, the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is performed, and the execution of the pseudo run effect is determined.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081, a part of which is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and is not visible to the player. In this example, the middle symbol display area 208k of the second decorative symbol is not overlapped with the left sub liquid crystal 2082 at the timing shown in FIG. In the state shown in j), in the middle symbol display area 208k, a special symbol (simulated continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized this may be able to recognize the temporary stop (execution of the pseudo connection effect) of the pseudo connection symbol (the second barring by the second decoration symbol is occurring).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 start moving (sliding) so as to be close to each other in front of the main liquid crystal 2081. By the movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is completely overlapped, and the whole is not visible to the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 and stop. When the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 contact each other, the pseudo continuous image displayed on each of the two sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 is integrated (crossed up) across the two sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 Is displayed on. Thereby, it will be in the state of the stop display of a pseudo run symbol, and execution of a pseudo run effect will be started after this. Further, the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 is overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, and most of them are unrecognizable to the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative pattern, which has been overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, is exposed from the left of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and is in a state visible again to the player. The second decorative symbol is in the state shown in FIG. 7 (j), and the pseudo continuous symbol is provisionally displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k, similarly to the display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083. It is displayed stopped.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 start moving in directions away from each other toward the initial position. At this timing, the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 becomes visible again to the player. In this example, while the display of the special symbol is continued in the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, another symbol different from the special symbol (here, “decorative” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b of the main liquid crystal 2081 7) is displayed temporarily, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (FIG. 1 symbol display area 208X), the combination of the first decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decor 7-decor 7" is stopped and displayed. It is done. Moreover, the pseudo | simulation continuation number display ("x 2" which shows 2 times in this example) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is again overlapped with the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 move to the initial positions, and the special symbols displayed by both sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are not displayed. Further, at this timing, a part of the second decorative symbol (the same figure (j)) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is not visible to the player by being overlapped with the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in the figure (h) shows a state in which the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 are not displayed, and the timing shown in the figure (i) is the main liquid crystal 2081 The state which the fluctuation | variation display (1st fluctuation | variation display) of a 1st decorative symbol reopened is shown.

  In addition, the timing (1st timing) of the display start of the 2nd decoration pattern in the figure (c) and the timing (2nd timing) of the movement start of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, the timing (first timing) of the non-display of the second decorative symbol in FIG. 6 (h) and the timing of completion of movement (end of movement) to the initial position of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (No. The timing 2) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In the present production example, at least one of the sub-liquid crystals is displayed in at least one of the states (the state corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol)) informing that the continuous effect (the pseudo continuous effect) is executed. It is configured to move to a position (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083).

The second decorative pattern is overlapped by the moving sub-liquid crystal during at least a part of the time when the sub-liquid crystal moves.
(Effect example K-2)

  FIGS. 180 (m) to (r) show another example of effects by moving the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this example, a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol is provided in one of the movable sub liquid crystals (for example, the left sub liquid crystal 2082).

  The same figure (m)-the same figure (r) are respectively shown in the figure (b)-the figure (g) except that the 2nd symbol display area 208Y and the 2nd decoration figure are displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 Since the configuration is the same as that shown, only different parts will be described, and redundant description will be omitted.

  That is, as in the case of (b) to (g) in the same figure, in the example of the present effect, the stop display of the special symbol (the pseudo connected symbol) is notified that the continuous effect (the pseudo connected effect) is executed. In at least one of the corresponding states, at least one sub liquid crystal (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a position.

  At this time, the second decorative symbol (the same figure (j)) is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 after the timing of the same figure (n). The same figure (n) to the same figure (r) are not overlapped by other configurations, and are always visible to the player.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol slides in the lateral direction in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 as the left sub liquid crystal 2082 moves.

  In this manner, the (secondary) second decorative symbol, which is an alternative to the first decorative symbol, is always visible to the player while being displayed, and is displayed by moving, thereby displaying the variation of the decorative symbol or It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize the state such as a temporary stop display.

In the example of effect shown in FIG. 180, an example in which one special symbol is displayed by two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 has been described, but one liquid crystal (image display device 208 ') including at least one sub liquid crystal Two special symbols may be displayed. For example, one special symbol may be displayed by the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082, or one special symbol may be displayed by the main liquid crystal 2081 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, or all liquid crystal display devices 208. One special symbol may be displayed by '.
<Effect example L>

  FIG. 181 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects based on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, in which the operations of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are performed. This is another related presentation example.

  The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 may be disposed above and below the first image display device 208, respectively. As an example, the image display device disposed on the upper side of the first image display device 2081 is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device disposed on the lower side is the third image display device 2083.

  As an example, in the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, the length in the vertical (height) direction is shorter than the substantially half length of the first image display device 2081, and the length in the width direction is also Slightly short. In the initial position, at least the lower end portion of the second image display device 2082 overlaps the front side of the upper end portion of the first image display device 2081, and the third image display device 2083 has at least the upper end side thereof. A portion overlaps the front side of the lower end side portion of the first image display device 2081.

Then, in this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 bring the front of the first image display device 2081 closer to or away from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable (slide movement) in the vertical direction.
(Effect example L-1)

  First, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to (c), the second image display device 2082 and the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol are provided.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) is the state which has started the fluctuation display of the 1st decoration symbol. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first symbol display area 208X corresponds to the plurality of image display devices 208 '(in this example, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2083). The variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the three image display devices 208 '.

  In the case of the stop display (final display), the first decorative symbol may be configured not to straddle the three image display devices 208 ′, and the first display displayed on the first image display device 2081. A part of the decorative symbol may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), and among the first decorative symbols displayed on the first image display device 2081 Only the middle symbol may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  In the first image display device 2081 which is visible to the player from between the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, the timing shown in FIG. Stop turning animation and middle pattern turning animation) are being executed. In addition, the first animation in this case is an animation including an animation of a button effect, and a button image BG on the front of the special symbol (for overlapping), an image suggesting the operation of the button (here, “press!” And the elapsed time notification image TG are displayed.

  At this timing, the first animation is executed in the first image display unit 2081 so that the first decorative symbol can not be viewed by the player. On the other hand, in the second image display device 2082, at this timing, the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 171 (o) starts to be displayed, and a decorative symbol ("decor 6" in this example) is displayed on the left symbol display area 208j. ), A special symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208k, and a decorative symbol ("description 7" in this example) in the right symbol display area 208l is temporarily stopped to start the execution of the continuous effect (the pseudo continuous effect) Is announcing that it has decided. In FIG. 181, all the second decorative symbols are in the state shown in FIG. 171 (o).

  In this example, the first animation is performed only on the first image display device 2081, but a part of the first animation may be performed on the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083.

  In the timing shown in (c) of the figure, in response to the chance button 136 being operated, an effect (in this example, a long scroll “for example,“ in this example, “a long scroll”) A notice effect of “continuation” is displayed. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decor 6”) and the right symbol (“decor 7”) are visible to the player, but The symbols are overlapped with the notice effect and are not visible to the player.

  This preliminary effect is displayed across the three image display devices 208 '. That is, although a part of the notice effect (a part of the scroll in this example) is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed overlapping the notice effect, and the second The decorative symbol is visible to the player. That is, although the first decorative symbol (in particular, the middle symbol) of the first image display device 2081 is not visible to the player, the state of temporary stop of the decorative symbol by the second decorative symbol ) Can be recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the plurality of image display devices 208 ′, but the special symbol or the button image does not extend across the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. It is displayed on the 1 image display device 2081. Here, in the present embodiment, “displayed across the plurality of image display devices 208 ′” includes “displayed across all the plurality of image display devices 208 ′”. That is, as shown to the same figure (a), in the state which the 2nd image display apparatus 2082 and the 3rd image display apparatus 2083 separated, the 1st image display apparatus 2081, the 2nd image display apparatus 2082, and the 3rd image display apparatus It means that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across all 2083.

In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the structure by which the scroll display of the symbol (for example, middle symbol) with a 1st decorative symbol is displayed straddling several image display apparatuses 208 'may be sufficient. The configuration for performing the button effect shown in FIG. 176 may be replaced with this embodiment.
(Effect example L-2)

  The effect examples shown in (d) to (e) in the figure are examples in which advance notice effects are executed by the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083.

  In the timing shown in (d) of the figure, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 slide in a direction in which they approach each other, and contact (adjacent to the top and bottom) the player sees the first decorative symbol It is in the state of becoming impossible. Even at this timing, the player can recognize the state of temporary stop of the decorative symbol (that the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed) by the second decorative symbol.

The timing shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated and return to the initial position. At this timing, the same display as shown in FIG.
(Effect example L-3)
Fig. 181 (g) to Fig. 181 (h) show another effect example.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure corresponds to the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-series effect) is performed in response to the chance button 136 being operated. It is in a state in which an effect for annunciation of the event (in this example, an announcement effect in which the letters "continuation" are displayed on the scroll) is being executed. The notice effect is executed only by the first image display device 2081, and the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed behind it, and the left symbol ("decor 6") and the right symbol ("decor 7") are displayed. Although it is visible to the player, the middle symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the player recognizes the state of temporary stop of the decorative symbol (that the pseudo consecutive symbols are being stopped and displayed) by the second decorative symbol. It is possible.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll) . In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the whole of the notice effect can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, the second decorative symbol also moves relatively downward with the movement of the second image display device 2082, but does not overlap with the notice effect displayed on the two image display device 2082, and is viewed by the player It is possible.
(Effect example L-4)

  Fig. 181 (i) to Fig. 181 (j) show another effect example. In this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol of the first image display device 2081.

  The timing shown to the same figure (i) is a state in which the 1st decoration symbol is displayed in the 1st image display device 2081, and it overlaps with the one part, and notice production is performed. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decor 6”) and the right symbol (“decor 7”) are visible to the player, but The symbols are overlapped with the notice effect and are not visible to the player.

  On the other hand, the display moves to the first image display device 2081, and the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol, and can be viewed by the player.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed above the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll) . In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire notice effect can be viewed by the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the second image display device 2082 by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part thereof is not visible to the player.

(Effect example L-5)
Fig. 181 (k) to Fig. (L) show another effect example. The timing shown in the same figure (k) is the same as the timing shown in the figure (i), and the second decorative symbol moves to the first image display device 2081 and is displayed above the first decorative symbol .

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed above the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll) . In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire notice effect can be viewed by the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 moves to the second image display device 2082 and can be viewed by the player.

  The timing at which the second decorative symbol moves may be before it is overlapped with the second image display device 2082 or may be simultaneous with the overlap, or is overlapped with the second image display device 2082 It may be after.

  Thus, in the present embodiment (FIGS. (A) to (c), (d) to (e), and (g) to (h)), a plurality of special symbols are present Are displayed on the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 respectively, and another image (here, an image of the notice effect) is displayed only on the front of one of the special symbols. The notice effect of is displayed across the plurality of image display devices 208 ′ by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  Further, in the present embodiment ((k) to (l) in the present embodiment, the image display device (here, the second image display device 2082) moves, and another image display device (here, the first image display device) When overlapping the second decorative symbol displayed in 2081), the second decorative symbol moves to the second image display device 2082 and maintains a state recognizable by the player. In this case, the other display (for example, the first decorative symbol) does not move to the second image display device 2082, but the other display (for example, the image of the notice effect) which is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082 Is moved to the second image display device 2082) and displayed on the second image display device 2082.

Also, as shown in (i) to (j) in the same figure, the second decorative symbol may not move even when overlapping is caused by the moving second image display device 2082.
<Effect example M>

FIG. 182 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Effect example M-1)
The same figure (b)-the same figure (e) are an example of a presentation during a big hit.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is the state before the start of the big hit game, and a big hit symbol combination (for example, “1”) as a first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 The decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ") is displayed on a temporary stop, and the built-in LED of the chance button 136 also lights up in rainbow colors. Further, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 5B, the second decorative symbol having the same content as the first decorative symbol is displayed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is the state during the big hit game (for example, during the round game), and the effect during the big hit is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081 (including the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) There is. During the jackpot game, in principle, the second decoration pattern is not displayed.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which a big hit is still in progress, but is a state in which the error is notified when an error (e.g., a bottom full error or the like) occurs. The notification of the error is, for example, an error display E1 (display of a character "Please pull a ball" in this example) on the main liquid crystal 2081. Further, in this case, for example, in the left sub liquid crystal 2082, a second decorative symbol (a symbol symbol combination of a big hit (for example, a decorative symbol in which “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7” is temporarily stopped) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 is not displayed due to the elimination of the error. At this timing, the second decorative symbol is also hidden again.

  In this case, the timing when the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing when the error display E1 is displayed (second timing) may be the same timing in FIG. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in FIG. 6E, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is not displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Effect example M-2)

  Next, the same figure (g)-the same figure (l) are an example of an effect at the time of performing an effect using the inside pattern of the 1st decoration pattern.

  In the timing shown in (g) of the figure, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the same decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 1") is temporarily stopped for the right symbol and the left symbol, and the middle symbol is changing. It is in the state where reach production is started. In this case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, a second decorative symbol of the same symbol combination (in the state of (f) in the same drawing) as the first decorative symbol is displayed.

The timings shown in (h) to (l) of the figure are states in which the countdown display of the middle symbol is being executed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. On the other hand, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the display of the second decorative symbol is continued in the state of (f) in the same figure (countdown display is not performed). As described above, in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X (not limited to the countdown display), when the effect using the middle symbol is executed, the middle symbol changes in the second symbol display area 208Y. The display may be continued.
(Effect example M-3)

  Next, FIGS. (M) to (o) are examples of effects in the case of performing triple line reach effects.

  The timing shown to the same figure (m) is a state in which the triple line reach production by a 1st decoration symbol is performed, and, in this case, the 2nd decoration symbol is non-display.

  The timing shown to the same figure (n) is the state in which the turning effect of the line ("deterior 7" in this example) with a 1st decoration pattern is performed. In this case, as shown in the figure (n) lower figure, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the same symbol combination as the decorative symbol of the line (in this example, "decoration 7").

  The timing shown to the same figure (o) is the state in which the turning effect of the other line ("deterior 8" in this example) of a 1st decoration symbol is performed. In this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol may be displayed at the time of turning effect of a certain line in the ripple line reach, and the second decorative symbol may not be displayed in the case of double line reach.

  In the same figure (n), even when the timing when the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing when the first decorative symbol starts turning (the second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Moreover, in the same figure (o), the timing (1st timing) in which a 2nd decoration symbol is non-displayed, and the timing (2nd timing) of the start of turn production of a 1st decoration symbol are the same timing, Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Effect example M-4)

  FIGS. 183 (b) to 183 (e) show examples of effects in the case where the second decorative symbol is displayed, for example, between FIG. 170 (g) and FIG. 170 (h).

  The timing shown in FIG. 170 (b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 170 (g), and in the main liquid crystal 2081, the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) is being executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, in the main liquid crystal 2081, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (display of the special symbol is determined) and the second decorative symbol is also in the same state as the first decorative symbol (FIG. It is displayed in the state of 171 (o)). At this timing, the main liquid crystal 2081 performs an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “display group integrated effect”) of integrally changing the display mode of a plurality of displays in the display area (display group G). As an example of the display group integrated effect, an effect of integrally displaying the display group G in an enlarged display, a reduced display, an inclined display, a rotational display (an effect of one or a plurality of these combinations) or a display group is integrally shaken. It is an effect to be displayed (shake vision effect) or an animation including these scenes. In this example, as shown in (c) of the figure, a display group integration effect is executed in which the display group G is integrally inclined.

  Specifically, a display in which a plurality of displays (a plurality of display groups G including a background display) in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081 are integrally inclined with respect to the outer frame (physical frame) of the main liquid crystal 2081 ( Is an animation including a scene). In such a display group integrated rendition, since a plurality of display groups G including the background display are reduced and integrated integrally slightly, a space is generated in the actual display area, and the space is filled, for example, with black Is displayed.

  Then, in this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 even while the display group integrated effect is being performed. In this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a predetermined area without being inclined. The content (pattern combination) of the display of the second decorative symbol is the same as the content (symbol combination) of the display of the first decorative symbol displayed in the display group integral effect, and in this example, “decoration 6-special symbol ( It is a symbol combination of the decorative symbols of the pseudo-series symbols)-decoration 7 ".

  The second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap over at least a part of the inclined display group G with a space (black filled display) generated by the inclination of the display group G. Note that the second decorative symbol may be displayed so as to overlap only in the space (black filled display) generated by the inclination of the display group G, or may overlap only in the inclined display group G. It may be displayed. The second decorative symbol may be displayed inclined at the same angle as the display group G.

  Even if the first decorative symbol may be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the display group integral effect, the player may be able to recognize the combination of the decorative symbols (the state thereof) by the second decorative symbol (second It is possible to pre-bare with a decorative pattern).

  The timing shown to the figure (d) is the state in which display group integrated presentation was complete | finished. At this timing, the display group G that has been displayed as inclined returns to the normal display state, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed at the same position. In this example, a part of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6” in the left symbol) returned to the normal display is overlapped with the second decorative symbol. The states of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the same.

  The timing shown to the figure (e) is the same as the timing shown to FIG. 170 (h), and it is the state which the 2nd decoration symbol is non-displaying.

In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing (1st timing) by which a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed start, and the timing (2nd timing) of the start of a display group integral presentation may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Effect example M-5)

  The same figure (g)-the same figure (i) are an example of an effect in case the design of a decorative symbol changes in a special figure 1 change game and a special figure 2 change game, for example.

  For example, the maximum number of reservations is 8 and the special figure 1 fluctuation game and the special figure 2 fluctuation game the advantage which differs in the specification (for example, special 1 fluctuation game 50% probability change and special 2 fluctuation game 100% probability change, 16R big hit) In the case where the ratio of () differs, the design of at least a part of the decorative symbol may be different between the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of Special Figure 1 and the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of Special Figure 2. A present Example is a display example of the 2nd decoration symbol in such a case.

  Specifically, in this example, the variation game of the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the variation game of the special figure 1, for example, the special figure 2 is a symbol combination of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" The special figure 1 is 16R only in the case of the pattern combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" while the special pattern 1 is 16R big hit in the case of and the pattern combination of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decor 3". It shall be a big hit.

  In addition, the decoration design which becomes the 16R big hit, the design differs in other decoration design at least in part. For example, a mark M is added to the right symbol ("decor 7") of FIG. That is, in the variation game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the "decoration 7" of the decoration symbol, and in the variation game of the special figure 2, the mark M is given to the "decoration 3" and "decoration 7" of the decoration symbol. Be done.

  The timing shown in the figure (g) is a symbol combination off the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 as a result of the variation game of the special figure 1 (for example, the symbol combination of "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7") The first decorative symbol is displayed in a temporary stop state.

  Since it is a variation game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the right symbol ("decoration 7") of the first decorative symbol, and the mark M is not given to the left symbol ("decoration 3").

  At this timing, Hold of Special Figure 1 is 2 and Hold of Special Figure 2 is 2 (total of hold is 4), and in the icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the right end portion, and the fluctuation icon On the left of h0, the hold icons h11 and h12 corresponding to the hold of the special view 1 and the hold icons h21 and h22 corresponding to the hold of the special view 2 are alternately displayed.

  Further, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second hold number display ("22" in this example) of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is performed.

  Further, in the left sub liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right side of (g) of the figure, the second decorative symbol in the same state as the first decorative symbol is (temporarily) stopped and displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the variation game of the special view 1 is stopped, and the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is out of alignment (for example, the symbol combination of "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7") Are stopped and displayed, respectively.

  The timing shown to the same figure (i) is a state in which one reserve of special figure 2 is digested and the fluctuation game of special figure 2 is started. In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern of the special figure 2 is started, and in the icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed at the left end The hold icons h11, h22 and h12 are displayed on the left thereof. Further, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second holding number display ("21" in this example) of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is performed.

  Also, in the left sub liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right figure (i), the second decorative symbol of symbol combination (for example, symbol combination of "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7") is continuously stopped and displayed. However, since the variable display of the special figure 2 is being executed, the mark M is given to the "decoration 3" of the left design and the "decoration 7" of the right design of the second decorative design. That is, the mark M is added to the "decoration 3" of the left pattern of the second decorative symbol as compared with the state of FIG.

  When it changes from the fluctuation game of special figure 1 to the fluctuation game of special figure 2, mark M is granted also to “decoration 3” which is the 16R big hit symbol and it notifies the player, but it is high speed in the first symbol display area 208X It is very difficult to recognize the decorative pattern which has started to change and to which the mark M is given.

  Even in such a case, when the corresponding decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 3”) is included in the second decorative symbol being stopped and displayed, the mark M is added to the decorative symbol. Thus, the player can be notified of the 16R big hit symbol.

In addition, in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, even if the mode in which the design is switched (a mode of applying and erasing the mark M) or the timing in which the design is switched (timing of applying and erasing the mark M) is made different. You may or may not be the same.
(Effect example M-6)

  The same figure (m) is another presentation example of a 2nd decoration symbol, for example, is an example of a display under execution of a super reach presentation.

  For example, during the execution of the super reach effect, the player is generally not interested in the symbol combination of the decorative symbols (which symbol is being tempted with). In such a case, since it is less necessary to notify accurate information in the second decorative symbol, an effect using the second decorative symbol may be performed.

  In this example, for example, a special display EX (here, as a notice effect) is made so that the second decorative symbol (same state as the right figure in FIG. 177 (g)) overlaps and the second decorative symbol becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize. Then, the effect of displaying the character "CHANCE" is executed.

Further, in addition to the second decorative symbol, another decorative symbol (a third decorative symbol whose display size is smaller than the first decorative symbol) may be displayed, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (the notice effect is Instead of the second decorative symbol being executed, the state of the decorative symbol may be displayed in the third decorative symbol. In this example, in the third symbol display area 208Z provided in the first image display device 2081, the third decorative symbol (the same as the second decorative symbol overlapping the special display EX shown in the left figure of FIG. The state is displayed.
<Effect example N>

  FIG. 184 is a diagram step-by-step showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, in the case where the ball-out display E2 and the second decorative symbol are displayed It is a presentation example.

  In addition, in FIG. 184, the example of an effect in the case of performing the ball removal display E2 in the configuration described above is described, and the description of the configuration already described is omitted.

Here, the ball removal display E2 is displayed on the image display device 208 'when the lower-ink-full error occurs, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the error, which is one of the error displays. The lower plate full error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 is full, and the lower plate full error is resolved when the lower plate full condition is canceled by operating the ball discharge lever 132, and the ball removal indication E2 Will also be hidden.
(Effect example N-1)

  The timings shown in FIGS. (B) and (c) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 170 (i) and 170 (j), respectively.

  As shown in (b) of the figure, at the timing when the horizontal width of the special symbol (pseudo run symbol) gradually starts to be enlarged, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the left symbol In order to overlap with the part, the ball removal display E2 is displayed.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the pseudo run symbol does not overlap with the ball removal display E2. In addition, the icon display area 800 and the explanation display area TT1 do not overlap with the ball removal display E2.

  The second symbol display area 208Y is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, but the display start timing (first timing) and the display start timing (second timing) of the unballooned display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  As shown in (c) of the figure, when the enlarged display of the pseudo run symbol progresses, a part of the pseudo run symbol is overlapped by the drop-out display E2. Then, at this timing, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

The timing (first timing) at which the display of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 171 (o) is started, and the timing (second timing) at which a part of the simulated symbol is overlapped by the ball-out display E2. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Effect example N-2)

  The timings shown in (e) and (f) in the figure correspond to the timings in (d) and (f) in FIG. 173, respectively.

  As shown in the figure (e), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped (temporarily displayed), and then, for example, at the timing when the rotating animation is being executed, for example, A ball removal indication E2 is displayed above the display area TT1. In this case, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any of the displays.

In the timing shown in (f) of the figure, the mini character (princess), which is a display relating to the continuous effect, starts to display and overlaps the ball removal display E2.
(Effect example N-3)

  The timings shown in (h) and (i) of the figure correspond to the timings of (d) and (e) of FIG. 176, respectively.

  As shown in the figure (h), within the reception effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (or immediately before the operation), the ball removal display E2 is performed below the special symbol. At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (here, the state shown in FIG. 171 (p)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, at the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the special symbol resumes the enlarged display by the operation of the chance button 136, and the unballooned display E2 overlaps the enlarged display. The second decorative symbol of this timing is the state shown in FIG. 171 (o). The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) in this case and the timing (second timing) at which a part of the pseudo-connected symbol is overlapped by the ball-out display E2 May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Effect example N-4)

  The timings shown in (k) to (m) in the figure correspond to the timings in (c) to (e) in FIG. 180, respectively.

  As shown in (k) of the figure, at the timing when the second decorative symbol (state of FIG. 171 (o)) in the main liquid crystal 2081 starts to be displayed and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, A drop-in-ball display E2 is performed below the first decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol). At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, at the timing shown in (l) of the figure, the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 slide so as to be close to each other, and the uncentered display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082. In this case, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the ball removal display E2.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure is a state in which the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) and stopped. Are overlapped, and at least a part of them is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing shown in the same figure (m) and the timing shown in the same figure (l), at least a different part of the display without sphere E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082. That is, at the timing shown in (l) of the figure, at least the left end of the unballooned display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the right end is not overlapped), and at the timing shown in (m) At least the right end of the blank display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the left end is not overlapped). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) is exposed from the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and is visible to the player.

Further, at the timing between FIG. (I) and FIG. (M), there may be a timing at which both ends of the unballed display E2 are not overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and can be viewed by the player. .
(Effect example N-5)

  The timings shown in (o) and (p) in the figure correspond to the timings in (i) and (j) of FIG. 181, respectively.

  As shown to the same figure (o), in the 1st image display apparatus 2081, the 2nd image display apparatus 2082 is displayed in the timing in which the 1st decoration symbol is displayed and it overlaps with the part and notice production is performed. The ball removal display E2 is performed below the. At this timing, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) is also displayed below the second image display device 2082 (in a substantially symmetrical position across the notice effect (display) with the ball removal display E2) .

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, in the timing shown in FIG. 6 (p), the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). It is. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire notice effect can be viewed by the player. Further, although a part of the unballooned display E2 is overlapped by the moved second image display device 2082, the overlapped portion is also displayed on the second image displayer 2082, and the unballooned display E2 is It becomes visible to the player as a whole.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with this by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part thereof is the player It has become invisible.

  As mentioned above, although the display example of the ball dropping display E2 has been described in the present rendering example (rendering example N), the ball dropping display E2 is not displayed when the ball dropping operation is performed and the lower plate full error is eliminated. (Erased).

  In addition, when the ball removal display E2 is performed, the notification sound may be output from the speaker 120.

  Moreover, it may change to ball extraction display E2, and another error display (for example, door open error etc.) may be displayed.

  Further, in the example production N-1 to the example N-5, the ball dropping display E2 is displayed at different positions, but as an example in which the ball dropping display E2 is displayed, the performance example N-1 to rendering example N- The display positions of 5 are listed, and in practice, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at one predetermined place. For example, in the case where the effects shown in FIGS. (B) and (c) are executed in the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the ball removal display E2 at the positions shown in FIGS. (E) and (f), The ball removal display E2 is displayed above the description display area TT1 in (b) and (c) of FIG.

  Thus, the player is displayed by displaying the ball-out display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (the display related to the continuous effect, the display of a part of the continuous effect) or the like of the present embodiment. There may be a case where it is possible to easily recognize the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect and the like of the present embodiment by focusing attention on the ball removal display E2.

  Alternatively, the player can display the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment, the special symbol, the continuous effect (the display related to the continuous effect, the display of a part of the continuous effect), etc. There may be a case where it is possible to easily recognize the ball-free display E2 by paying attention to the 2 decorative symbols, the special symbols, the continuous effect and the like.

  In addition, by displaying the ball removal display E2, the ball removal display E2 is erased early and the motivation to enjoy the effect display performed on the image display device 208 'is stirred up, and the lower bowl full error is eliminated (ball removal (ball removal) In some cases, it may be possible to prompt

Further, by displaying the ball drop display E2, it is possible to focus attention on important effect display when making the ball drop display E2 pay attention, and it may be possible to give an opportunity to drop the ball after the end of the effect display. is there.
<Example of image control>

  FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of image control regarding display of the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment.

  The figure (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM 436, and the figure (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image display device 208 '(left sub liquid crystal 2082, main liquid crystal 2081, and right sub liquid crystal 2083). .

  Also, FIGS. (C) and (d) are schematic diagrams for explaining general image control, and FIGS. (E) to (h) are adopted to display a part of the present embodiment. It is the schematic explaining the image control which is carried out.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the VRAM 436 includes frame buffers A, B, and B corresponding to the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (B), the main liquid crystal 2081 (A), and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (C). C and a work area W (for example, an area for expanding and storing image data compressed in the ROM 408). In actuality, two sets of frame buffers A, B and C are provided (for swap) to switch and display alternately.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 184 (g) and 184 (h), when displaying a second decorative symbol of the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol displayed by the main liquid crystal 2081, for example, on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, The image control as shown in FIGS. 185 (c) and (d) is performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), the VDP 434 reads the image data of the decorative symbol (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 184 (g)) stored in the ROM 406 and uses the work area W of the VRAM 436 The image data is temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image. Then, the display image is expanded in the first set of frame buffers A1 and B1 designated in the drawing area. At this time, for example, the frame buffer A1 is expanded at the same magnification, and the frame buffer B1 is expanded and contracted in accordance with the size of the second decorative symbol.

  Then, by swapping the designations of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the image stored in the frame buffers A1 and B1 not designated as the drawing area is the main liquid crystal 2081 and It is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  On the other hand, for example, in the effects shown in FIGS. 170 (h) to 170 (j), the first decorative symbol (the decorative symbol including the animation display of the middle symbol (the first animation display)) and the second decorative symbol (the middle The display is different from that of the decorative symbol including the temporary stop display of the symbol.

  In this case, the VDP 434 reads the image data of the decorative symbol (for example, the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 170 (h)) stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The image data is decompressed and temporarily stored using it to generate a display image.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6F, the generated display image is reduced (or the size remains unchanged) to generate another set.

  Thereafter, as shown in (g) of the figure, one part of the display image (which will be the first decorative pattern) is processed (in this case, the image of the middle pattern is enlarged) and the other ( The display image to be the second decorative pattern is processed as necessary (e.g., reduction of the image).

  And as shown to the figure (h), the display image of the 1st decorative symbol after processing, and the display image of the 2nd decorative symbol (after processing) are designated as the drawing area in the first set of frame buffer A1. , B1 (by the size as it is) respectively, and the frame buffer A1 not designated as the drawing area by swapping the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer A1, B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2, B2 The image stored in B1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Thereafter, the same processing is continuously performed according to the progress of the presentation (animation).

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 ', the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, A game console comprising a third image display device 2083), wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first decoration Variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first variation display") of symbols (for example, the first symbol display area 208X (the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c)), and the display of the plurality of types The display of one of them is the variable display (hereinafter referred to as the “second variable display”) of the second decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (symbol display regions 208k to 208g)) .)so The second decorative symbol (for example, the second decorative symbol in the final display, at least one second decorative symbol in the final display, the middle symbol shown in FIG. 170 (m), FIG. 171 (o), etc. The first decorative symbol (for example, the first decorative symbol in the final display, the at least one first decorative symbol in the final display, etc.) than the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 208 k, etc., etc. The display size of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b shown in FIG. 9 is larger, and the first animation display (for example, special in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) is performed in the first variation display. An animation (for example, stop turning animation of a special symbol, middle pattern turning animation) may be displayed asking whether the symbol is displayed in a stop display (temporary stop display). And the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the first animation display is displayed.

  Note that "in the first variation display, the first animation display may be displayed" means that "the first animation display is started in the first variation display" may be displayed. Yes. In addition, the first variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  Furthermore, the phrase "the first variation display is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the first animation display is displayed" means that the first animation display is displayed. In at least some of the states, the indication that the second variation indication is started may be made ". In addition, the second variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the contents of the first variation display (the type of decorative symbol) and the state (presence or absence of the confirmation display) are not yet determined. Even if the contents or state of the first variable display may be difficult for the player to visually recognize in comparison with the first animation or the second variable display, the second change display may cause the first change. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to be able to recognize (estimate) the content and state of the display or the subsequent presentation (for example, the presentation related to the jackpot expectation) (by means of the second variable display, it is possible to carry out the advance payout) Can be This may enhance the player's interest.

  In addition, the display of the second decorative symbol may allow the player to be accurately notified of the condition of symbol variation.

  In addition, for the advanced player who is used to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (the first barre), and the motivation for the game may be enhanced.

  In addition, the first animation display is one of the animation displays for asking whether the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first symbol is displayed after the end of the first animation display. The first symbol may be stopped and displayed, and the first symbol may be a first effect (for example, a continuous effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a continuous advance effect, an effect shown in FIG. 170 (p) to FIG. 170 (r), FIG. 173 (F) ~ A symbol relating to the start of the effect shown in Fig. 173 (h) (hereinafter, "the first effect symbol (eg, special symbol, pseudo run symbol, middle symbol of Fig. 170 (h), Fig. 173 ( The symbol d) may be one of the symbols in the middle symbol of FIG. 174 (p), etc.)).

  The first symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the first variation display.

  In addition, "the first symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that "the first symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display." The display may be made.

  In addition, the first animation display and the stop display of the first symbol may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, by the start of the first animation display, the first effect design relating to the start of the execution of the first effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. Whether or not it is undecided, or it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize in comparison with the first animation or the second change display, the second change display allows the first effect pattern to be displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to allow the player to recognize (guess) whether or not the first display (for example, the presentation related to the big hit expectation) is displayed (the second change display causes the first change to be displayed earlier). May be possible). This may enhance the player's interest.

  Also, for example, while performing the continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, while the interest of the player is enhanced, the state of the symbol variation may be able to be accurately notified to the player by the display of the second decorative symbol. .

  In addition, for the advanced player who is used to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (the first barre), and the motivation for the game may be enhanced.

  In addition, after the end of the first animation display, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed, and the first symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. Before the end of the animation display of the second variable display in the second variable display (for example, a special symbol, a pseudo run symbol, a middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 170 (j), FIG. 171 (o And the second symbol display area 208Y in FIG. 174 (d) is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is the first symbol of the first effect symbols. It may be a separate figure.

  The second symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the second variation display.

  Moreover, "the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that "the first symbol is not displayed and stopped after the end of the first animation display." May be done, "he said.

  In addition, “the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second change display before the end of the first animation display” means “the second change display before the end of the first animation display. There is a case where the display in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed may be made. In addition, the first animation display and the second symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, the start of the first animation display causes the first animation display to be displayed. After the end, whether or not the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed may not be determined, or it may be difficult for the player to see in comparison with the first animation or the second variation display. The player recognizes to the player whether or not the first effect pattern is stopped and displayed by the second symbol which is stopped and displayed in the second variation display, for example, the first effect (for example, the effect related to the big hit expectation) (Estimate) It may be possible to make it possible. (The second symbol of the second variable display may make it possible to make advance bid). This may enhance the player's interest.

  Also, for example, while performing the continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, while the interest of the player is enhanced, the state of the symbol variation may be able to be accurately notified to the player by the display of the second decorative symbol. .

  In addition, for the advanced player who is used to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (the first barre), and the motivation for the game may be enhanced.

  Further, in the first variation display, there may be a case where a display in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, a display as shown in FIG. 170 (i) to FIG. 170 (l)) may be displayed. In the variable display, there is no case where a display in which the second symbol expands is displayed, and the first animation display may be a display including a display in which the first symbol expands.

  In addition, after the end of the first animation display, a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, FIG. 171 (l) In the second variation display, the symbol may be stopped and displayed, and the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. Fourth symbol (for example, a symbol such as "decor 8" in the middle symbol shown in Fig. 171 (q), which is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y and which is different from the special symbol) Is stopped and the third symbol is one of the symbols other than the first effect symbol, and the fourth symbol is among the symbols other than the first effect symbol. Separate from the third symbol of It may be a symbol.

  In addition, "the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that "the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. May be done. Moreover, the first animation display and the stop display of the third symbol may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, "the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display" may be "a display may be made in which the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display". It is.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter, referred to as "ball discharge display (for example, error display E1 shown in FIG. 182 (d))". Alternatively, at least a part of the display of the first animation display displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed may be overlapped with the ball discharge display.

  In addition, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the second variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  In addition, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display may be overlapped by the second variation display.

  In addition, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  In the first variation display, a second animation display (for example, an animation display before start of continuous rendering, an animation display shown in FIGS. 170 (n) and (o), an animation display shown in FIG. 173 (e), etc. ) May be displayed.

The display device further comprises a first display unit (for example, the first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, the second image display device 2082), and the display unit is the first display unit. The first variation display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means.
The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, for example, the above-mentioned phrases such as "first display" and "second display" are simply named to improve readability, and "Xth xx" "Is not a term that has a special meaning.

  Here, what has been referred to as a lamp or illumination is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.
The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 186 and corresponds to “a plurality of reels 2002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery winning combination) for determining whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winnings are made by lottery. Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 2008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 2010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 2014 for launching a ball in the game area 2012, a winning opening 2016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection unit 2018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 2016; When the detecting means 2018 detects a ball, a payout means 2020 for paying out the ball, a variable display device 2022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 2022 And the movable body 2026 which operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 2022 is a symbol when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins And in is stopped and displayed after the change, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 187 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 3002, executes a lottery based on the bet 3004 and the start 3006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 3008 At the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 3009 is selected, the casino machine 3000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 3010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing a home-use video game console 6000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 7000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 6000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 7000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 7000 to a home video game console 6000 shown in FIG.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect example shown in FIG. 188 to FIG. 192 is another specific example of the effect example shown in FIG. In FIG. 188 (2) and the subsequent figures, as in FIG. 16 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown at the center, and the speaker 120, the movable body 700, and the movable body 702, a chance button 136, a chance button 704, a setting operation unit 137, and fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are schematically illustrated. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 includes the variable icon display area e, the special view 1 reserved icon display area f, the meter images g1, g2, and the like in FIG. g3, the fifth symbol display area h is displayed. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 188 to 192 are basically used only in the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 16 to 34 and 188 to 192, and when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings. Even, the codes shown in FIG. 16 to FIG. 34 and FIG.

  Further, the downward arrow illustrated at the center lower end in FIG. 188 (1) indicates that FIG. 188 (1) and FIG. 188 (2) continue in time series. Also in each of the drawings described below, the downward arrow illustrated at the center lower end of each drawing indicates that it continues in chronological order with the following drawings.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 (1) to (21), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 188 (1) to (21) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 188 (1) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed subsequently to FIG.

  FIG. 188 (2) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed during execution of the special view 1 change game. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icons f1 and f2 of the aspect 1 (for example, white) are displayed. The display j3 is a display capable of specifying the mode of the speech notice display k3 before the display of the speech notice display k3 shown in FIG. 188 (3) described later starts. The display j3 is moved from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j3 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j3. The display j3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 1 (for example, white). Aspect 1 of the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the aspect of the speech preview display k3 started in FIG. 188 (3) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the aspect of the speech preview display. The speech notice display k3 in this example is a prefetch notice display for the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon f2. By the display j3, the player can know the mode of the speech preview display k3 before the display of the speech preview display k3 is started.

  FIG. 188 (3) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k3 is started to be displayed. In this example, the display of the serif notice k3 is started after the display j3 is erased, but the display of the serif notice k3 may be started while the display j3 is displayed, or the serif notice may be performed simultaneously with the deletion of the display j3. The display k3 may be started. The display j3 may be deleted after being stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be moved to the lower right and moved out of the display area and deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (3), the serif notice display k3 is a pattern of a scroll, and the serif notice display k3 is displayed with a pattern in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech notice display k3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 188 (4) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 188 (5) shows a state in which the speech warning display k3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the serif of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k3 is the first embodiment.

  In FIG. 188 (6), a character image of a girl (hereinafter referred to as “girl”) m 3 and a character name display n 3 including a character image of “girl” are displayed overlapping the left end of the speech notice display k 3. It shows the condition that has been The speech notice display k3 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 188 (7) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 188 (8) shows a state in which the character string image of “same color is !!” is displayed in the dialogue warning display k 3. The character string image of “same color !!” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3. In addition, "It is the same color !!" is a letter related to the advance notice of the chance eye. The chance is a preview notice by the display of the three decorative symbols, images surrounding the decorative symbols, etc. in the same display color. The speech notice display k3 of the present example is a display including a character display regarding a pre-reading notice (for example, a chance eye). In addition, the dialogue warning display k3 of this example is a display that suggests or foretells that the advance notice of the opportunity eye is to be given when the variation display of the decorative pattern in progress is ended and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. It may be

  In FIG. 188 (9), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208 a in a mode of slightly swinging up and down, and “stop 4” is temporarily stopped in the mode of slightly swinging vertically in the middle pattern display area 208 b. It is displayed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, a state in which "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down is shown. In the drawing, two wavy lines respectively shown on the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 2", "decoration 4", and "decoration 6" indicate that each decorative pattern is slightly swaying up and down. The inside of the frame display that encloses “decoration 2”, “decoration 4” and “decoration 6” is displayed in mode 3 (for example, blue). The pattern aspect of "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" is a blue chance eye.

  FIG. 188 (10) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. By the stop pattern aspect of "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6", the look-ahead notice of blue chance eyes is given. In this example, the blue chance eye is a prefetch notice for the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon f2. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-6" is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 188 (11) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon e1 is erased. In this example, the variation icon e1 is erased during stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In 188 (12), with the special figure 1 fluctuation game being started by special figure 1 display 212 which is not illustrated, fluctuation indication of decoration design, 4th design and fluctuation indication of the 5th design are started Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the hold icon decrease animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the fluctuation icon e2 and the change icon Move to the display area e. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon movement animation is executed, and the reserve icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f is the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f Move to the first area of In FIG. 188 (12), the movement of the change icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 188 (12), the display j3 is started. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j3 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j3. Aspect 1 of the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the aspect of the speech preview display k3 started in FIG. 188 (13) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the aspect of the speech preview display. The speech notice display k3 is a prefetch notice display. By the display j3, the player can know the mode of the speech preview display k3 before the display of the speech preview display k3 is started.

  As described above, in this example, the speech advance notice display k3 is displayed in each of the two successive special figure variation games. As described above, the speech notice display, which is the advance notice, may be continuously displayed in the continuous special-image variation game.

  FIG. 188 (13) shows a state in which the speech notice display k3 has been started. The speech notice display k3 in this example is a prefetch notice display for the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 188 (14) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 188 (15) shows a state in which the speech warning display k3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k10 is the first embodiment.

  FIG. 188 (16) shows a state in which a character name display n3 including a girl m3 and a character image of "girl" is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k3.

  FIG. 188 (17) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 188 (18) shows a state in which the character string image of “same color is !!” is displayed in the speech warning display k 3. The character string image of “same color !!” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3. In addition, "It is the same color !!" is a letter related to the advance notice of the chance eye. The speech notice display k3 of the present example is a display including a character display regarding a pre-reading notice (for example, a chance eye). In addition, the dialogue warning display k3 of this example is a display that suggests or foretells that the advance notice of the opportunity eye is to be given when the variation display of the decorative pattern in progress is ended and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. It may be

  In FIG. 188 (19), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a in a mode of slightly swinging up and down, and “stop 5” is temporarily stopped in the mode of slightly swinging vertically in the middle pattern display area 208b. It is displayed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 7" is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines respectively shown on the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 3", "decoration 5", and "decoration 7" indicate that each decorative pattern is slightly shaken up and down. The inside of the frame display that encloses “decoration 3”, “decoration 5” and “decoration 7” is displayed in aspect 5 (for example, red). The pattern aspect of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a red chance eye.

  FIG. 188 (20) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 3-decorative 5-decorative 7", which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out, is stopped. By the stop pattern aspect of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", the look-ahead notice of red chance eyes is given. In this example, the red chance eye is a prefetch notice for the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon f2. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination "3-5-7" is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 188 (21) shows the passage of time. For example, subsequent to FIG. 188 (20), the effect example shown in FIG. 23 (7) or the like can be executed.

  As described above, in this example, the speech notice display k3 which is the advance notice is displayed in each of a plurality of consecutive (for example, two or three or more) special figure variation games. The dialogue warning display k3 is a display including a character display regarding the chance eye, and is a warning display regarding the chance eye. It should be noted that the target of the preview notice of the speech notice display k3 and the target of the preview notice of the chance eye are the same. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, since the serif notice display is the notice display regarding the pre-reading notice, the player is concentrated after the next change display without pulling the expectation to the change display in progress to the last stage. The player can be entertained by making it easy to understand the change display to be noted.

As described above, one of the speech notices (such as the second speech notices) of the prefetch notice that the mini game does not start in association may be performed continuously in a plurality of changes.
The word notice display of the pre-reading notice may include a letter display on the pre-reading notice display by the hold icon such as "prepare blue" and a letter display on the chance eye such as "same color !!".
The serif notice display including the character display regarding the prefetch notice display by the hold icon is a serif notice display regarding the read notice by the hold icon, and the serif notice display including the character display regarding the chance eye is the serif notice display regarding the chance eye.
Note that the speech notice display regarding the preview notice by the hold icon may not be continuously performed in a plurality of changes, and the speech notice display regarding the chance may be continuously performed in a plurality of changes.
In addition, the serif notice display regarding the chance eye may be performed in three continuous times, and the serif notice display regarding the advance notice by the hold icon includes the “blue preparation” in the first change, and is not displayed in the second change, The third change may be performed including "prepare red". Here, the speech warning display targets the same hold icon.
Note that the character display included in the speech preview regarding the chance eye and the character display included in the speech preview regarding the pre-reading preview by the hold icon may be the same character or the same character and the same aspect (for example, They may be completely the same, may be the same character and may be in different modes (for example, different poses and expressions), or may be different characters.
In addition, for example, when the mode of the holding icon changes during the fluctuation display of relatively short fluctuation time when the number of holdings is three or four, the change effect performed by the serif notice display related to the advance notice by the holding icon The display may be easier to be performed than some other change effect display (for example, another change effect display not related to the dialogue warning display), and there may be cases where such other change effect display is performed. It does not have to be.
In addition, in the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed, the display of the serif notice display k3 may be started, and after the display of the serif notice display k3 is started, the other serifs are displayed in the change display under execution. The display of the advance notice display (for example, the call notice display k1 and the call notice display k10) may not be started.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 188 (22) to (25) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 188 (22) shows the passage of time. In this example, for example, an example of effect that can be executed following FIG. 188 (6) and the like is shown.

  FIG. 188 (23) shows a state in which the speech notice display k3, the girl m3, and the character name display n3 are displayed. The mini game display o1 is not displayed because the mini game by the mini game display o1 can not be started in relation to the speech notification display k3.

  FIG. 188 (24) shows a state in which the character string image of “same color is !!” is displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is not displayed because there is no case where the mini game by the mini game display o1 is started in relation to the speech preview display k3.

  FIG. 188 (25) shows the passage of time. For example, subsequent to FIG. 188 (24), the effect example shown in FIG. 188 (9) or the like can be executed.

  Thus, the mini game display o1 is not displayed because there is no case where the mini game by the mini game display o1 is started in relation to the dialogue warning display k3. In addition, there may be a case where a mini game different from the mini game by the mini game display o1 is started in relation to the speech preview display k3.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 188 (26). FIG. 188 (26) shows an example of effect in the case of the power support state (general drawing high probability state). FIG. 188 (26) shows a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation game is being performed in the power support state. In the power-on state, the special view 2 reserved icon display area z is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area e. Further, in the present example, when in the power support state, the game mode of the general RUSH is set, so the game mode display x1 including the character string image of "general RUSH" in the upper left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is displayed.

  The special figure 2 reserved icon display area z is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. At the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas, an oval pedestal image showing the display position of the reserved icon of the special view 2 is displayed. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding orders, respectively. In FIG. 188 (26), the retention icons z1 and z2 of aspect 1 are displayed in the first area and the second area, respectively.

  In addition, as pachinko machine 100, as shown in Figure 3, because special figure 2 starting opening 232 is arranged in the right route of game board 200, because it is usual to play the game by hitting the right in the power support state, At the upper end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-handed display x2 including a character string image of "→ right-handed → right-handed → right-handed" is displayed.

  Further, in the present example, in the power support state, the speech warning display k3 is displayed. The speech notice display k3 of the present example includes a character string image of "prepare blue", and is a notice display relating to the prefetch notice with the hold icon. Note that the speech notice display k3 in this example may be a notice display regarding the chance eye. Thus, the second serif notice display (in this example, the serif notice display k3), which is the prefetch notice, is displayed in the power support state, and the first serif notice display without the prefetch notice (for example, the serif notice display k1 , K4) may be displayed in the non-power support state. The second serif notice, which is the pre-reading notice, may be displayed only in the power-on state, and the first serif notice, in which there is no pre-reading notice, may be displayed only in the non-power-up state. The first speech notice display and the second speech notice display may be speech notice displays displayed in different gaming states. The first speech preview and the second speech preview may be another series of speech previews.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 189 (1) to (10). FIGS. 189 (1) to (10) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 189 (1) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed subsequently to FIG.

  FIG. 189 (2) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed during execution of the special view 1 change game. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 of the mode 1 (for example, white) and the hold icon f1 of the mode 3 (for example, blue) are displayed.

  FIG. 189 (3) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k3 is started to be displayed. In this example, in the state where the hold icon f1 of the prefetching mode (mode 3) is displayed, the display of the speech notice display k3 is started. In this manner, in a state where another pre-reading notice display (for example, the hold icon in the pre-reading mode) different from the serif notice display is displayed, the display of the second serif notice display such as the serif notice display k3 is started There is a case.

  FIG. 189 (4) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 189 (5) shows a state in which the speech warning display k3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed.

  FIG. 189 (6) shows a state in which the girl m3 and the character name display n3 are displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k3.

  FIG. 189 (7) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 189 (8) shows a state in which the character string image of "prepare blue" is displayed in the speech preview display k3. The character string image of "prepare blue" is a character display of character displays representing serif of the girl m3.

  FIG. 189 (9) shows a state in which the mode of the reserve icon f2 is changed from the mode 1 circular to the mode 3 circular. The character string image of "prepare blue" in the speech preview display k3 is a display for previewing that the mode of the hold icon changes to mode 3. In this example, while the blue hold icon f1 is displayed, the speech notice display k3 including "prepare blue" is displayed, and the hold icon f2 changes to blue. In addition, the big hit reliability of the retention icon is, from the low order, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 3 (for example blue), aspect 4 (for example green), aspect 5 (for example red), aspect 6 (for example , Golden), aspect 7 (e.g., iridescent). Further, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed even after the character string image is displayed in the speech preview display k3.

  FIG. 189 (10) shows the passage of time. For example, following to FIG. 189 (9), the effect example shown in FIG. 21 (11) or the like can be executed. As described above, in this example, the speech notice display k3 includes a character display relating to a prefetch notice by displaying the hold icon in a look-ahead manner. In addition, in a state in which the speech notice display k3 is displayed, the display of the hold icon of the prefetching notice mode may be started due to the hold increase. In addition, the girl m3 may be included in a certain change effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and in the state where the dialog warning display k3 is displayed, the certain change effect display may be performed. It does not have to be.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 189 (11) to (20). 189 (11) to (20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 189 (11) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed subsequently to FIG.

  FIG. 189 (12) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed during execution of the special view 1 change game. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 of the mode 1 (for example, white) and the hold icon f1 of the mode 3 (for example, blue) are displayed.

  FIG. 189 (13) shows a state in which the speech notice display k3 has been started. In this example, in the state where the hold icon f1 of the prefetching mode (mode 3) is displayed, the display of the speech notice display k3 is started. In this manner, in a state where another pre-reading notice display (for example, the hold icon in the pre-reading mode) different from the serif notice display is displayed, the display of the second serif notice display such as the serif notice display k3 is started There is a case.

  FIG. 189 (14) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 189 (15) shows a state in which the speech warning display k3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed.

  FIG. 189 (16) shows a state in which the girl m3 and the character name display n3 are displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k3.

  FIG. 189 (17) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 189 (18) shows a state in which the character string image of “prepare red” is displayed in the speech preview display k 3. The character image "prepare red" is a character display of the character display representing the words of the girl m3.

  FIG. 189 (19) shows a state in which the mode of the hold icon f1 is changed from the mode 3 circular to the mode 5 circular. A character string image of "prepare red" of the speech warning display k3 is a display for giving a notice that the aspect of the hold icon changes to aspect 5. In this example, while the blue hold icon f1 is displayed, the speech notice display k3 including “prepare red” is displayed, and the hold icon f1 changes to red. Note that the speech preview display k3 is a prefetch preview display, and the preview target of the preview preview by the hold icon f1 already displayed in FIG. 189 (12) is the same as the preview target of the speech preview display k3. Further, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed even after the character string image is displayed in the speech preview display k3.

  FIG. 189 (20) shows the passage of time. For example, following to FIG. 189 (19), the effect example shown in FIG. 21 (11) or the like can be executed. As described above, in this example, the speech notice display k3 includes a character display relating to a prefetch notice by displaying the hold icon in a look-ahead manner.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 189 (21) and (22). 189 (21) to (22) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 189 (21) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed following FIG.

  In FIG. 189 (21), during execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, serif notice display k1, 婆 m1, character name display n1, mini game o1, fluctuation icon e1 of aspect 1 and suspension icon f2, and suspension icon of aspect 3 It shows the state in which f1 is displayed. In this example, in the state in which the hold icon f1 of the prefetching notice mode is displayed, the display of the speech notice notice k1 which is not the prefetching notice display is started. As described above, in a state where another pre-reading notice display (for example, the hold icon of the pre-reading mode) different from the serif notice display is displayed, the display of the first serif notice display such as the serif notice display k1 is started There is a case. The mode of the hold icon may not change when a hit is made in a mini game started in association with the first speech preview. It should be noted that the mode of the hold icon may change in the case of a hit in a certain mini game started in association with the first speech warning display. In addition, in a state where the first speech warning display is displayed, the display of the hold icon of the prefetching notice mode may be started due to the hold increase. In addition, 婆 m 3 may be included in a certain change effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and in the state where the first speech warning display is displayed, the pre-read notice mode is The display of the hold icon may not be started.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 190 (1) to (9). FIGS. 190 (1) to (9) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 190 (1) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed subsequently to FIG.

  FIG. 190 (2) shows a state in which the display j10 is displayed during execution of the special view 1 change game. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icon f1 of the aspect 1 (for example, white) are displayed. The display j10 is a display capable of specifying the mode of the speech notice display k10 before the display of the speech notice display k10 shown in FIG. 190 (3) described later starts. The display j10 is moved and displayed from the center on the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j10 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j10. The display j10 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 3 (for example, blue). Aspect 3 of the lower half of the display j10 corresponds to the aspect of the speech preview display k10 started in FIG. 190 (3) described later, and the display j10 is a display related to the aspect of the speech preview display. By the display j10, the player can know the mode of the speech notice display k10 before the display of the speech notice display k10 starts.

  FIG. 190 (3) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k10 is started to be displayed. In this example, the display of the serif notice k10 is started after the display j10 is erased, but the display of the serif notice k10 may be started while the display j10 is displayed, or the serif notice may be performed simultaneously with the deletion of the display j10. The display k10 may be started. The display j10 may be deleted after being stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be moved continuously to the lower right and moved out of the display area and deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 190 (3), the serif notice display k10 is a pattern of the scroll, and the serif notice display k10 is displayed as a pattern in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech notice display k10 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 190 (4) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k10 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 190 (5) shows a state in which the speech warning display k10 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice k10 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k10 is the third embodiment.

  FIG. 190 (6) shows a state in which a character name display n3 including a girl m3 and a character image of “girl” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k10. The speech notice display k10 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 190 (7) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, a mini game by mini game display o1 may be started after the display start of mini game display o1.

  FIG. 190 (8) shows a state in which a character string image of “Toen and Iori are good friends” is displayed in the speech preview display k10. The character string image of “Toen and Iori are good friends” is a character display of the character display representing the words of the girl m3. In addition, "It is the same color !!" is a letter related to the advance notice of the chance eye. Note that the speech notice display k10 may be a speech notice display of the same system as the first speech display. Further, the speech notice display k10 may be a speech notice display of the same system as the second speech display. The same system may have a common function (for example, advance notice, advance notice, etc.).

  FIG. 190 (9) shows the passage of time. For example, following to FIG. 190 (8), the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (12) or the like can be executed. In this example, in FIGS. 188 and 189, the girl m3 corresponding to the speech warning display k3 is displayed corresponding to the speech warning display k10. In this manner, a character display corresponding to the second serif notice display (serif notice display k3) may be displayed corresponding to another serif notice display (serif notice display k10). The other serif notice display may be a system of the first serif notice display, or may be a system of the serif notice display of different types. Note that the other speech preview display may be a preview preview display or may include a character display related to the preview preview display. Note that the character display corresponding to the second serif notice display (serif notice display k3) and the character display corresponding to the other serif notice display (serif notice display k10) may be completely the same display, The characters may be the same and different in aspect (for example, color, pose, expression, etc.). In addition, although the character display corresponding to the second serif notice display may be displayed corresponding to the first serif notice display or the like, a serif having a relatively low reliability among the plurality of first serif notice displays. In the case of the advance notice display, the character display is displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 190 (10) to (16). FIGS. 190 (10) to (16) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 190 (10) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed subsequently to FIG.

  FIG. 190 (11) shows a state in which the display j10 is displayed while the special figure 1 change game is being executed. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icon f1 of the aspect 1 (for example, white) are displayed.

  FIG. 190 (12) shows a state in which the speech notice display k10 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 190 (13) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k10 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 190 (14) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k10 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll is closed to the left.

  FIG. 190 (15) shows a state in which the speech notice display k10 is erased.

  FIG. 190 (16) shows the passage of time. For example, following to FIG. 190 (15), the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (17) or the like can be executed. In this example, the speech notice display k10 is erased before the state shown in FIG. 190 (5) as if the speech notice display starts. As described above, there is a case in which the speech notification display is erased before the display of the character display of the speech notification display is started to make it appear that the speech display is started. The speech preview may be a first speech preview, a second speech preview, or another speech preview. In addition, when the change time in case the number of holdings is four is short, you may be comprised so that the example of an effect shown to FIG. 190 (11)-(15) may be performed. Also, in the case of the first serif notice display, the effect example shown in FIGS. 190 (11) to (15) may be performed, but in the case of the second serif notice display, FIG. 190 (11) to (15) However, the effects shown in FIGS. 189 (6) to (9) may be performed whenever the display j3 is started.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 (17) to (27), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 190 (17) to (27) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 190 (17) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed subsequently to FIG.

  FIG. 190 (18) shows a state in which the display j10 is displayed during execution of the special view 1 change game. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icon f1 of the aspect 1 (for example, white) are displayed.

  FIG. 190 (19) shows a state in which the speech notice display k10 has been started. The speech warning display k10 is an aspect of aspect 3. The speech notice display k10 in this example is a second speech notice display that is a prefetch notice display.

  FIG. 190 (20) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k10 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 190 (21) shows a state in which the speech warning display k10 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k10 is the third embodiment.

  FIG. 190 (22) shows a state in which a character name display n3 including a girl m3 and a character image of "girl" is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display k10. The speech notice display k10 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 190 (23) shows a state in which the display has changed from the speech preview display k10 of the third embodiment to the speech preview display k3 of the first embodiment. As described above, the mode of the dialog warning display may change before the character display (in this example, "prepare for red") of the dialog warning display is started. In this example, another second serif notice display (e.g., serif notice k3) is displayed as if the second serif notice (e.g., serif notice k10) is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (24) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 190 (25) shows a state in which the character string image of “prepare red” is displayed in the speech notice display k 3. The character image "prepare red" is a character display of the character display representing the words of the girl m3.

  FIG. 190 (26) shows a state in which the mode of the reserve icon f1 is changed from the mode 1 circular to the mode 5 circular. A character string image of "prepare red" of the speech warning display k3 is a display for giving a notice that the aspect of the hold icon changes to aspect 5. Further, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed even after the character string image is displayed in the speech preview display k3.

  FIG. 190 (27) shows the passage of time. For example, following to FIG. 190 (26), the effect example shown in FIG. 21 (12) or the like can be executed. In this example, another second serif notice display (e.g., serif notice k3) is displayed as if the second serif notice (e.g., serif notice k10) is displayed. In addition, the reliability of the second serif notice display is set higher than that of the second serif notice display. In addition, another first speech notice display (for example, speech notice display k4) may be displayed as if it is displayed that a certain first speech display (for example, speech display k1) is displayed. The reliability of the first serif notice is set higher than that of the first serif notice. It should be noted that the character display mode is different in a certain second serif notice display and another second serif notice display. Further, the present invention is not limited to this example, and there may be a case where the character display of serif B is displayed as if the character display as serif A is displayed. In “Make it appear that the dialogue A is displayed”, at least a part of the display constituting the dialogue A may be displayed. In addition, when another first speech notice display (for example, speech notice display k4) is displayed to show that a certain first speech display (for example, speech display k1) is displayed, the mini The display switches from the first serif announcement to the other before the game starts.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 191 (1) to (15). FIGS. 191 (1) to (15) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 191 (1) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. Stop display (fixed display, main stop display) is displayed. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (1), the retention icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a mode 1 circular mode.

  Figure 191 (2) starts the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 (not shown). Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 191 (2), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  FIG. 191 (3) shows a state in which a display j 1 capable of specifying the mode (for example, color) of the speech preview display is displayed before the display of the speech preview display is started. The display j1 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j1 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display j1. The lower half of the display j1 is aspect 3.

  FIG. 191 (4) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display k1 is started to be displayed. The serif notice display k1 is displayed with a pattern in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech notice display k1 is mode 3.

  FIG. 191 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display k1 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 191 (6) shows a state in which the speech warning display k1 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display k1 is the third embodiment.

  FIG. 191 (7) shows a state in which 婆 m1 and a character name display n1 are displayed overlapping with the left end portion of the dialogue warning display k1. The speech notice display k1 may be a display including 婆 m1 and the character name display n1.

  FIG. 191 (8) shows a state in which the mini game display has been started in relation to the speech warning display k 1. In this example, Yoshimune o3 holding a bow included in the mini game display is displayed. At the beginning of display, Yoshimune o3 is displayed overlapping with part of the speech preview display k1.

  FIG. 191 (9) shows a state where Yoshimune o3 has moved downward. The Yoshimune o3 moves to a position where it does not overlap with the speech warning display k1. Further, in FIG. 191 (9), a character string image of “Don't ya Yatsushiro” is displayed in the dialogue warning display k1. The character string image of "Tomonaga Yatai" is a character display of the character display representing the line of 婆 m1. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by displaying the serif notice display k1 including the character display of the content related to the character, the serif notice display k1 can be noticed by the beginner player, and the serif notice display k1 In some cases, playing a mini game in conjunction with may make it easier for the player to focus on the mini game.

  FIG. 191 (10) shows a state in which target images (hereinafter referred to as “targets”) o 4 and o 5 which are mini game displays are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The target o4 is displayed above the target o5. The target o4 is a hit that includes the mark "◎". The target o5 is an outlier that includes the symbol "x". The mini game of this example is hit when an animation in which an arrow thrown by Yoshimune o3 hits a target o4 is displayed, and it is not reached when an animation in which an arrow fired by Yoshimune o3 hits a target o5 is displayed .

  FIG. 191 (11) shows the passage of time. In this example, while the mini game display is displayed, the speech notice display k1, 婆 m1, and the character name display n1 are erased.

  FIG. 191 (12) shows a state after the speech notice display k1, 婆 m1, and character name display n1 are erased. The mini game display Yoshimune o3 and the targets o4 and o5 are still displayed, and the mini game is being continued. In addition, it is a state immediately after Yoshimune o3 fired an arrow.

  FIG. 191 (13) shows a state in which the arrow hits the target o4.

  FIG. 191 (14) shows a state in which a notice display o6 including a character string image of “superheat” is displayed as a result display of the mini game after an arrow hits a target o4. The preliminary display o6 is a preliminary display of the change. In addition, Yoshimune o3 and target o4,5 are deleted before the display start of notice display o6, but Yoshimune o3 and target o4,5 may be deleted after the display start of notice display o6, and notice display o6 At the same time as erasing, Yoshimune o3 and target o4,5 may be erased. The notice display o6 may be included in the mini game display.

  FIG. 191 (15) shows the passage of time. For example, following to FIG. 190 (14), the effect example shown in FIG. 23 (6) or the like can be executed. In this example, the mini game is performed outside the balloon without being performed in the balloon of the speech notice display k1, and the mini game is displayed even after the end of the speech notice display k1. In addition, you may display some displays (for example, hall o3) regarding a mini game in the balloon, and all the displays regarding the mini game are displayed in the balloon, and the mini game is displayed after those displays pop out of the balloon. It may be started.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 191 (16) to (24). FIGS. 191 (16) to (24) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 191 (16) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. Stop display (fixed display, main stop display) is displayed. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (1), the retention icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a mode 1 circular mode.

  Further, in FIG. 191 (16), a running Yoshimune o7 and a mass display o8 are displayed. The Yoshimune o7 and the mass display o7 are mini-game displays and are always displayed. The mass display o 8 has six square images as a mass, and the square images are displayed side by side in a horizontal row. The square image of the third aspect 4 from the left and the square image of the sixth aspect 5 from the left are the squares, and the other square images are displayed in white and are outlying squares. At the beginning of the mini game, the Yoshimune o7 is located above the leftmost square image, and when the die comes out, the Yoshimune o7 remains stopped above the leftmost square image, and the dice comes out 2 And Yoshimune o7 moves up to the second square image from the left, and when 3 comes out with dice, Yoshimune o7 moves up to the third square image from left, and 4 with dice comes out Yoshikoe o7 from the left Move to the top of the square image and when the dice comes out with 5 dice, the Yoshimune o7 moves up the fifth square image from the left, and with the dice, with 2 dice, the Yoshimune o7 moves up to the sixth square image from the left. When Yoshimune o7 stops above the third square image from the left or the sixth square image from the left which is a square image of a hit, it becomes a hit, and when it stops above the other white square images, it becomes a departure. In addition, a highly reliable notice is given to the third square image from the left after the mini game in the third square image from the left.

  Figure 191 (17) starts the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 (not shown). Show the situation. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 191 (17), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e1 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  FIG. 191 (18) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 191 (19) shows a state in which the speech notice display k 1, 婆 m 1 and character name display n 1 are displayed.

  FIG. 191 (20) shows a state in which the mini game has been started. In this example, the display start of the dice o9 is the start of the mini game. The dice o9 are included in the mini game display. The dice o9 are displayed overlapping with the speech notice display k1. The appearance of dice o9 at the beginning of the display is "3".

  FIG. 191 (21) shows a state in which the die o 9 is shaken. When the die o9 is shaken, it moves to the outside of the speech notice display k1. In this example, the result of the dice o9 is "3". In addition, in the dialogue warning display k1, a character image of "Tomonaga Yatsushiro is" is displayed.

  FIG. 191 (22) shows the passage of time. When the movement of Yoshimune o7 is completed, the mini game is over and the mini game is a hit, so after the mini game is over, a notice of the change is displayed.

  FIG. 191 (23) shows a state where Yoshimune o7 is moving. When the Yoshimune o7 stops above the third square from the left, the mini game is over, and the mini game is a hit, so that a notice of the change is displayed after the mini game is over.

  FIG. 191 (24) shows the passage of time. For example, subsequent to FIG. 190 (24), the effect example shown in FIG. 16 (11) or the like can be executed. In this example, at least a part of the display related to the mini game (Yoshimune o7, Mass display o8) is always displayed. For example, Yoshimune o7 and Mass display o8 stop fluctuating in a certain gaming state (normal gaming state) It is displayed in the middle of or 0 when the number of changes is suspended or when the change is suspended when there is a hold, etc., the display related to the mini game (dice o9) is started to be displayed in the balloon in relation to the speech warning display. May be started.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 192 (1) to (8). FIGS. 192 (1) to 192 (8) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 192 (1) shows the passage of time. The present example shows, for example, an example of effect that can be executed subsequently to FIG.

  FIG. 192 (2) shows a state in which the speech notice display k11, 婆 m1 and character name display n1 are displayed while the special figure 1 change game is being executed. The speech warning display k11 is aspect 3. The speech notice display k11 may be a display including 婆 m1 and the character name display n1. In addition, in the dialogue warning display k11, a character string image of “Q is a general General,” “A1. One hundred generations,” “A2, General Yatsushiro”, and a cursor image showing the option being selected are displayed. It is done. In this example, a mini-game of a quiz on how many generals are played is performed by the player, and the player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select “A1. Hundred Generals” or “A2, General Yatsushiro You can answer the quiz by selecting the option. In FIG. 192 (2), the cursor image is located to the right of "A1. General Baidai", and "A1. General Baidai" is selected as the answer.

  FIG. 192 (3) shows a state in which the player presses the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor image downward, and "A2. General Yatsushiro" is selected as an answer.

  FIG. 192 (4) shows a state immediately before the player presses the OK button or chance button 136 of the setting operation unit 137 to select and decide an answer.

  FIG. 192 (5) shows a state immediately after the player presses the OK button or chance button 136 of the setting operation unit 137 and selects and decides an answer. Since the answer of "A2. General Yatsushiro" is the correct answer, in the speech notice display k11, "p."

  FIG. 192 (6) shows a state where the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started. An animation is displayed in which the markers p1 and p2 move to the gauge image g3. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the temples p1 and p2 indicates the trajectory and movement direction of the temples p1 and p2.

  FIG. 192 (7) shows a state in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 192 (8) shows the passage of time. For example, subsequent to FIG. 192 (7), the effect example shown in FIG. 22 (15) or the like can be executed. In this example, the quiz mini game is started in association with the speech preview k11, which is the first speech preview. When a hit is made in the quiz mini game, an effect of collecting gauge images is started. In addition, only one gauge image may be displayed, and accumulation of the gauge image itself may be a notice effect with a relatively high hit probability and reliability. In addition, after the mini game, a second speech preview display such as a speech preview display k5 may be started.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 192 (9) to (20). FIGS. 192 (9) to (20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 192 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. Stop display (fixed display, main stop display) is displayed. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order change machine in which the gaming balls are alternately prized in the special view 1 start opening 230 and the special view 2 start opening 232. The variation icon display area e is provided in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variation icon display area e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The right side of the variation icon display area e is a hold icon display area y. The reserved icon display area y is roughly divided from the left to the right from the first area to the eighth area, and a maximum of eight reserved icons are displayed. In FIG. 192 (9), pending icons z1, f1, z2, f2, z3, f3 and z4 are displayed from the left of the pending icon display area y. The hold icons z1 to z4 are the hold icons of the special view 2, and the hold icons f1 to f3 are the hold icons of the special view 1. Pending icons z1 to z4 and f1 to f3 are mode 1.

  In FIG. 192 (10), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started along with the special figure 2 variation game being started by the special figure 2 display device (not shown). Show the situation. Further, with the start of the special figure 2 change game, the hold icon decrease animation is executed, and the hold icon z1 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area y becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon display area e And the hold icon f displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area y becomes the first area, and similarly, the hold icons displayed in the third to seventh areas of the hold icon display area y z2, f2, z3, f3, z4 move to the second to sixth regions. In the state shown in FIG. 191 (2), the suspension of icon reduction animation has ended, and the movement of the variation icon e2 and the suspension icons z2, f2, z3, f3, and z4 is complete.

  FIG. 192 (11) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the hold is increased by one. The hold icon f4 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the seventh area of the hold icon display area y. The hold icon f4 is mode 1. In this example, a mini game different from the mini game by the mini game display o1 is started in association with the full hold. In the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display x3 including a “one more” character string image is displayed. The display x3 is a display that suggests that the mini game is started when the hold is full with one more and the full hold is full.

  FIG. 192 (12) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 192 (13) shows a state in which the display of the speech advance notice display k1, 婆 m1, character name display n1 and mini game display o1 is started.

  FIG. 192 (14) shows a state in which one gaming ball is won in the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the suspension is increased by one. A hold icon z5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the eighth area of the hold icon display area y. The hold icon z5 is aspect 1. Since the hold is full, another mini game (hereinafter referred to as "another mini game") different from the mini game by the mini game display o1 is started.

  FIG. 192 (15) shows a state where a mini game by mini game display o1 and another mini game have been started. Since another mini game is started in association with the full hold, the mini game is started independently of the mini game by the mini game display o1. In this example, a mini game by mini game display o1 and another mini game are started at substantially the same time. In another mini game, a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed above all the reserved icons, and the button image on the left is erased each time the player presses the chance button, and it is a hit. In this case, after one of the button images is deleted, the hold icon below the button image changes to the pattern of the Patrap. A display x4 including a character string image of “superheat that has changed to pat” is displayed on the right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and when the holding icon changes to a pattern of a patram, it becomes a hit in the mini game. With the hold icon changed to, the advance notice is made for the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon.

  FIG. 192 (16) shows that a mini game and another mini game are being executed by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 192 (17) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 192 (18) shows a state immediately after the player presses the chance button 136 four times. The button images on the fourth left icon from the left are erased. The dialogue warning display k1, 婆 m1, character name display n1, and mini game display o1 are erased.

  FIG. 192 (19) shows a state immediately after the player presses the fifth chance button 136 from the start of another mini game. The fifth hold icon f3 from the left is changed to the image of the PAT button. As a result, a pre-reading notice is given to the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon f3. In addition, the holding icon of the pattern of the Pato button is set to have a higher big hit reliability than the holding icon of the aspect 6. In addition, the same big hit reliability as the holding icon of aspect 7 may be set as the holding icon of the pattern of the Pato button. The icon of the symbol of the PATTO button and the icon of the symbol of the seventh aspect may be icons that may be displayed only when the corresponding symbol variation display is a big hit.

  FIG. 192 (20) shows the passage of time. For example, subsequent to FIG. 192 (7), the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (6) or the like can be executed. In this example, the mini game by the mini game display o1 may overlap the execution period of another mini game. When another mini game is hit, a pre-reading notice is given by the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode of the pat button. It should be noted that another mini game may be displayed while the second speech notice display (serif notice display k3), which is the advance notice, is displayed. In addition, another mini game can be executed even if it is a special figure 2 priority variable machine.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 34 and 188 to 192.

(A1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (e.g., a serif notice k1).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a serif notice display k3),
The first display is not a pre-reading advance notice display (for example, a notice display of the change concerned) a serif notice display.
The second display is a display including characters relating to the pre-reading notice (for example, “prepare blue”, “prepare red”, “same color !!”),
A mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) may be started in relation to the first display,
There may be no start of a mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) in relation to the second display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console having the above configuration, in order to make the player instantly notice the first display to confirm whether or not a certain mini game is successful, the second display is displayed. Since a certain mini game is not started, it is possible to increase the variation of the display so as not to get bored with the effect display. In addition, since the second display includes characters relating to the advance notice, the player can be concentrated after the next variable display, and the second display makes it easy to understand the variable display to be noticed and entertains the player. be able to. Note that the second display is in the tutorial display area TT1 shown in FIG. 35, in the display area d shown in FIG. 71, in the balloon displays i1 and i2, in the tutorial display area tu1 shown in FIG. , And may be displayed in the explanation display area TT1 of FIG. 170.

(A2)
It is a game stand described in a1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice (for example, the notice notice k1).
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by

(A3)
It is a game stand described in a2,
“A mini game may be started in relation to the first display,” as described in a1. ”,“ After the display of the first serif preview is started, the first A mini-game may be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(A4)
It is a game console described in a2 or a3.
A mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) is started in association with the first speech preview.
A game stand characterized by

(A5)
a game console according to any one of a2 to a4;
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice (eg, a serif notice k3),
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(A6)
It is a game stand described in a5,
"The second display is a display including characters relating to a prefetch notice," described in a1, "the second serif preview is a display including a character display relating to a prefetch notice." It is
A game stand characterized by

(A7)
It is a game stand according to a5 or a6,
As described in a1, "a mini game may not be started in connection with the second display" means "after the display of the second serif notice display is started, the second A mini-game can not be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(A8)
A game console according to any one of a1 to a7, wherein
The display of a certain effect display is started after the display showing a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result (for example, a hit)”) as a result of a certain mini game is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(A9)
It is a game stand described in a8,
The certain effect display is a notice display (for example, a notice display of the subject) regarding a change display in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(A10)
The gaming machine according to a8 or a9,
As a result of a mini-game, the effect display starts after a display representing a result (hereinafter, referred to as "second result (for example, removal)") different from the first result is displayed. Not,
A game stand characterized by

(A11)
The gaming machine described in a10,
The variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result, It is easy to be finally displayed in the big hit mode finally,
A game stand characterized by

(A12)
A game console according to any one of a1 to a11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by the display of chance eye (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" or "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7"),
A game stand characterized by

(A13)
A game console according to any one of a1 to a11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a certain pre-reading aspect (for example, aspect 3 or aspect 5).
A game stand characterized by

(A14)
A game console according to any one of a1 to a13, wherein
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving display of arrow images),
A game stand characterized by

(A15)
A game console according to any one of a1 to a14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(B1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (e.g., a serif notice k1).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a serif notice display k3),
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) may be started in relation to the first display,
There is no possibility that a mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) is started in relation to the second display.
It is possible to display an advance notice display (for example, the hold icon f1 shown in FIGS. 189 (2) to (9)) for displaying the icon in a certain prefetching mode,
There may be a case where both the notice display and the second display are displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console having the above configuration, in order to make the player instantly notice the first display to confirm whether or not a certain mini game is successful, the second display is displayed. Since a certain mini game is not started, it is possible to increase the variation of the display so as not to get bored with the effect display. In addition, since the second display includes characters relating to the advance notice, the player can be concentrated after the next variable display, and the second display makes it easy to understand the variable display to be noticed and entertains the player. be able to. Note that the second display is in the tutorial display area TT1 shown in FIG. 35, in the display area d shown in FIG. 71, in the balloon displays i1 and i2, in the tutorial display area tu1 shown in FIG. , And may be displayed in the explanation display area TT1 of FIG. 170.

(B2)
The gaming machine described in b1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice (for example, the notice notice k1).
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by

(B3)
The game console described in b2,
“A mini game may be started in relation to the first display,” as described in b1 ”means“ after the display of the first serif preview display is started, A mini-game may be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(B4)
The gaming machine described in b2 or b3,
A mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) is started in association with the first speech preview.
A game stand characterized by

(B5)
a game console according to any one of b2 to b4;
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice (eg, a serif notice k3),
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(B6)
The gaming machine described in b5,
"The second display is a read-ahead notice, and the second display is a display including a character display related to a read-ahead notice." described in b1. Is
A game stand characterized by

(B7)
The gaming machine described in b5 or b6,
The “second display is a pre-reading notice display according to claim 1”, and “the second serif notice display is a pre-notice display relating to a pre-reading notice” according to claim 1. is there,
A game stand characterized by

(B8)
a game console according to any one of b5 to b7, wherein
“There is no case where a mini game is started in relation to the second display,” as described in b1 ”means“ after the display of the second serif notice display is started, the second A mini-game can not be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended.
A game stand characterized by

(B9)
A game console according to any one of b5 to b8, wherein
In the state where the preliminary announcement display (for example, the hold icon f1 shown in FIG. 189 (2)) is displayed, the display of the second speech preliminary announcement display may be started.
A game stand characterized by

(B10)
a game console according to any one of b5 to b9, wherein
In the state where the second serif notice display is displayed, the display of the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode may be started by the hold increase.
A game stand characterized by

(B11)
a game console according to any one of b5 to b10, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a character display (for example, girl m3),
The certain character display may be included in a certain change effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.
In the state where the second dialogue warning display is displayed, there is no case where the display of the hold icon of the predictive warning mode is started by the certain change effect display,
A game stand characterized by

(B12)
The game console according to any one of b1 to b11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by the display of chance eye (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" or "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7"),
A game stand characterized by

(B13)
The game console according to any one of b1 to b11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a certain pre-reading aspect (for example, aspect 3 or aspect 5).
A game stand characterized by

(B14)
A game console according to any one of b1 to b13, wherein
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving display of arrow images),
A game stand characterized by

(B15)
A game console according to any one of b1 to b14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(C1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (e.g., a serif notice k1).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a serif notice display k3),
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) may be started in relation to the first display,
There is no possibility that a mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) is started in relation to the second display.
It is possible to display a notice display that displays the icon in a pre-read mode,
There may be a case where both of the above-mentioned advance notice display (for example, the hold icon f1 shown in FIG. 189 (21)) and the first display are displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console having the above configuration, in order to make the player instantly notice the first display to confirm whether or not a certain mini game is successful, the second display is displayed. Since a certain mini game is not started, it is possible to increase the variation of the display so as not to get bored with the effect display. In addition, since the second display includes characters relating to the advance notice, the player can be concentrated after the next variable display, and the second display makes it easy to understand the variable display to be noticed and entertains the player. be able to. The second display (serif notice display k3) is in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 35, in the display area d shown in FIG. 71, in the balloon displays i1 and i2, in the tutorial display area tu1 shown in FIG. It may be displayed in the 149 tutorial display area tu1, balloon displays f1 and f2, and the explanation display area TT1 in FIG. Similarly, the character display in the serif notice display k3 is in the tutorial display area TT1 shown in FIG. 35, in the display area d shown in FIG. 71, in the balloon display i1 and i2, in the tutorial display area tu1 shown in The tutorial display area tu1 and the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be displayed in the explanation display area TT1 in FIG.

(C2)
The game console described in c1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice (for example, the notice notice k1).
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by

(C3)
The game console described in c2,
"A mini game may be started in relation to the first display," described in c1, "is that after the display of the first serif notice display is started, A mini-game may be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(C4)
It is a game console described in c2 or c3.
A mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) is started in association with the first speech preview.
A game stand characterized by

(C5)
a game console according to any one of c2 to c4;
In the state where the notice display (for example, the hold icon f1 shown in FIG. 189 (21)) is displayed, the display of the first serif notice display may be started.
A game stand characterized by

(C6)
A game console according to any one of c2 to c5, wherein
In the state where the first serif notice display is displayed, the display of the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode may be started by the hold increase.
A game stand characterized by

(C7)
a game console according to any one of c2 to c6, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a character display (for example, 婆 m1),
The certain character display may be included in a certain change effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.
In the state where the first dialogue warning display is displayed, there is no case where the display of the hold icon of the prefetching notice mode is started by the certain change effect display,
A game stand characterized by

(C8)
a game console according to any one of c2 to c7, wherein
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice (eg, a serif notice k3),
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(C9)
The game console described in c8,
"The second display is a pre-reading notice display" described in c1 is that "the second serif notice display is a display including a character display relating to a pre-reading notice" Is
A game stand characterized by

(C10)
The gaming machine described in c8 or c9,
"The second display is a pre-reading notice display" described in c1 is "the second serif pre-display is a notice display regarding a pre-reading notice".
A game stand characterized by

(C11)
A game console according to any one of c8 to c10, wherein
“There is no case where a mini game is started in relation to the second display,” as described in c1 ”means“ after the display of the second serif notice display is started, the second A mini-game can not be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended.
A game stand characterized by

(C12)
A game console according to any one of c1 to c11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by the display of chance eye (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" or "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7"),
A game stand characterized by

(C13)
A game console according to any one of c1 to c11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a certain pre-reading aspect (for example, aspect 3 or aspect 5).
A game stand characterized by

(C14)
A game console according to any one of c1 to c13, wherein
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving display of arrow images),
A game stand characterized by

(C15)
A game console according to any one of c1 to c14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(D1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (e.g., a serif notice k1).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a serif notice display k3),
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) may be started in relation to the first display,
There is no possibility that a mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) is started in relation to the second display.
The second display is a display including a character display (for example, girl m3),
It is possible to display another serif notice display including a certain character display (serif notice display k10 shown in FIGS. 190 (3) to (8)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console having the above configuration, in order to make the player instantly notice the first display to confirm whether or not a certain mini game is successful, the second display is displayed. Since a certain mini game is not started, it is possible to increase the variation of the display so as not to get bored with the effect display. In addition, since the second display includes characters relating to the advance notice, the player can be concentrated after the next variable display, and the second display makes it easy to understand the variable display to be noticed and entertains the player. be able to. Note that the second display is in the tutorial display area TT1 shown in FIG. 35, in the display area d shown in FIG. 71, in the balloon displays i1 and i2, in the tutorial display area tu1 shown in FIG. , And may be displayed in the explanation display area TT1 of FIG. 170.

(D2)
It is the gaming machine described in d1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice (for example, the notice notice k1).
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by

(D3)
The game console described in d2,
“A mini-game may be started in relation to the first display,” described in d1 ”means“ after the display of the first serif notice display is started, A mini-game may be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(D4)
The gaming machine described in d2 or d3,
A mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) is started in association with the first speech preview.
A game stand characterized by

(D5)
A game console according to any one of d2 to d4, wherein
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice (eg, a serif notice k3),
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(D6)
It is the gaming machine described in d5,
"The second display is a read-ahead notice, and the second display is a display including a letter display related to a read-ahead notice." described in d1. Is
A game stand characterized by

(D7)
The gaming machine described in d5 or d6,
“The second display is a pre-read preview display as described in d1” means that the display of the second serif preview display is started after the display of the second serif preview display is started. A mini-game can not be started before it is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(D8)
A game console according to any one of d5 to d7, wherein
A certain character display (for example, girl m3) included in the second speech preview display is the same as a certain character display (for example, girl m3) included in the other speech preview display,
A game stand characterized by

(D9)
A game console according to any one of d5 to d8, wherein
The other speech warning display is a speech warning display of the same system as the first speech warning display,
A game stand characterized by

(D10)
A game console according to any one of d5 to d8, wherein
The other speech warning display is a speech warning display of the same system as the second speech warning display,
A game stand characterized by

(D11)
A game console according to any one of d1 to d10, wherein
After a display showing a certain result (for example, a hit) is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is started,
The certain effect display is a notice display regarding a change display in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(D12)
A game console according to any one of d1 to d11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by the display of chance eye (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" or "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7"),
A game stand characterized by

(D13)
A game console according to any one of d1 to d11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a certain pre-reading aspect (for example, aspect 3 or aspect 5).
A game stand characterized by

(D14)
A game console according to any one of d1 to d13, wherein
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving display of arrow images),
A game stand characterized by

(D15)
A game console according to any one of d1 to d14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(E1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (e.g., serif notice k1, k4).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a serif notice display k3),
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) may be started in relation to the first display,
There is no possibility that a mini game (for example, a mini game by mini game display o1) is started in relation to the second display.
The display of the second display may be started in a state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed,
After the display of the second display is started, the display of the other serif notice display (for example, the serif notice display k1, the serif notice display k10) is not started in the variable display under execution.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console having the above configuration, in order to make the player instantly notice the first display to confirm whether or not a certain mini game is successful, the second display is displayed. Since a certain mini game is not started, it is possible to increase the variation of the display so as not to get bored with the effect display. In addition, since the second display includes characters relating to the advance notice, the player can be concentrated after the next variable display, and the second display makes it easy to understand the variable display to be noticed and entertains the player. be able to. Note that the second display is in the tutorial display area TT1 shown in FIG. 35, in the display area d shown in FIG. 71, in the balloon displays i1 and i2, in the tutorial display area tu1 shown in FIG. , And may be displayed in the explanation display area TT1 of FIG. 170.

(E2)
The game console described in e1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice (for example, the notice notice k1).
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by

(E3)
The game console described in e2,
"A mini game may be started in relation to the first display," described in e1, "is that after the display of the first serif preview is started, A mini-game may be started before the display of the dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(E4)
The gaming machine described in e2 or e3,
A mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) is started in association with the first speech preview.
A game stand characterized by

(E5)
A game console according to any one of e2 to e4, wherein
After the display of the first dialog warning display, another dialog warning display (for example, the dialog warning display k5) may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(E6)
A game console according to any one of e2 to e5, wherein
One of the serif notices among the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice (eg, a serif notice k3),
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(E7)
The game console described in e6,
"The second display is a read-ahead notice, and the second display is a display including a character display related to a read-ahead notice." described in e1. Is
A game stand characterized by

(E8)
The gaming machine described in e6 or e7,
“The second display is a pre-read preview display as described in e1” means that the display of the second serif preview display is started after the display of the second serif preview display is started. A mini-game can not be started before it is ended. "
A game stand characterized by

(E9)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e8, wherein
After a display representing a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result (for example, a hit)”) is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is started,
The certain effect display is a notice display regarding a change display in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(E10)
The game stand described in e9,
As a result of a mini-game, the effect display starts after a display representing a result (hereinafter, referred to as "second result (for example, removal)") different from the first result is displayed. Not,
A game stand characterized by

(E11)
The game console described in e10,
The variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result, It is easy to be finally displayed in the big hit mode finally,
A game stand characterized by

(E12)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by the display of chance eye (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" or "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7"),
A game stand characterized by

(E13)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a certain pre-reading aspect (for example, aspect 3 or aspect 5).
A game stand characterized by

(E14)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving display of arrow images),
A game stand characterized by

(E15)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

The variation icon or the hold icon may overlap with the speech notification display such as the first speech display, the second speech display, or another speech display.
A capsule display is included in the first serif notice display, the second serif notice display, and the other serif notice display, and roulette display using the capsule display may be performed. The roulette display may not be performed when the second speech warning display is displayed.
After being hit in a mini game, a plurality of certain effects (for example, a plurality of stock-based effect activations (both the effect for storing the meter g1 of the pot and the effect for storing the meter g3 of the hall are both Triggered)).
A plurality of mini-games may be initiated in connection with the first speech preview. When the player makes a hit in the mini game, an effect for storing the meter g1 of the pot or an effect for storing the meter g3 of the holder may be started.
In addition, even if the result of the mini game is exactly the same, there are cases where certain effect displays started after that are different.

The "Some mini-games" that may be started in connection with the first serif announcement are not started in connection with the second serif announcement, and others in connection with the second serif announcement A mini-game (eg, Yoshimune o3 or a mini-game that throws a bow) may be started.
In addition, it is not necessary to start all the installed mini games in relation to the second serif announcement.
The number of mounted mini games may be only one.
"Some mini-games" are displayed when the button is operated while the dialogue warning display A is displayed, and the dialogue notice display B (A is switched from A to another dialogue warning display, or a new B is displayed with A displayed) May be started.
The "association" in "in relation to the first serif notice display" and the "relevant" in the "in relation to the second serif notice display" may have the same purpose or different meanings. .
For example, the Suguroku mini-game starts (within the balloon display) in conjunction with the first serif preview, but does not start (within the balloon display) in conjunction with the second serif preview. It may be started outside the balloon display while the second serif notice display is displayed.
A mini-game that spreads both the first serif announcement and a mini-game, and whether it's a success or a pattern that is easy to succeed (if there are multiple mini-games, a kind of A generic term for mini games may be started. The serif notice that is always started is a generic term for serif notices of various patterns.
One of the serif announcements is the first dialogue announcement.
The "first serif announcement" and "a mini game" may all be replaced with a generic term.
Also, the generic serif notice display does not include another serif notice display.
Further, the result of the mini game itself may be a certain effect display (prediction of the change).

Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS.
Although FIG. 193-FIG. 196 demonstrate as an example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100, this example of presentation is applicable also to slot machine 1000. FIG. FIGS. 193 (a) to (k) show the staged conversational presentation using the balloon display. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 193 to 196 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 193 to 196, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals 193 to 196 have priority.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, the special figure 2 The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 193 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 193 (b), which is subsequent to FIG. 193 (a), shows a state in the decorative symbol display device 208 where movement animation is started in which a balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d. . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  Following FIG. 193 (b), the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the effect display area 208d moves from the left to the right is ended, and is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Show the situation. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon and the design of the sunny mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon is displayed) Then, after stopping display at the approximate center of the screen, it is possible to display the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark in order from the top of the character string, or even if all the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark are displayed at once. Good.

  In FIG. 193 (d) following FIG. 193 (c), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player operates the chance button 136 It shows a state in which the effect to prompt is performed. Note that either one or both of the button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration time indication h112 or both may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 or overlap the balloon display f1. May be displayed.

  In FIG. 193 (e) continued from FIG. 193 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f2 by the wolf character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d is started, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the balloon display f1 is displayed is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. The movement animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2 You may start later. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 193 (f) continued from FIG. 193 (e), while the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208d moves toward the left is continuously executed, the balloon display f1 is upward It shows a state in which the moving animation to move to the end is ended and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The moving animation of the balloon display f1 and the moving animation of the balloon display f2 may end simultaneously, or the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the moving animation of the balloon display f2 ends.

  FIG. 193 (g) following FIG. 193 (f) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left ends and the stop display is performed at the approximate center of the screen. The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the "afternoon weather" character string of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. ing. The face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be partially covered by the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 193 (h) continued from FIG. 193 (g), an erase animation in which the balloon display f1 moves to the left and is erased and an erase animation in which the balloon display f2 is moved and erase to the right at the same time It shows the started condition. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 193 (i) following FIG. 193 (h) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are continuously executed. The character strings in the balloon section of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and the patterns indicating the weather are also displayed during the execution of the deletion animation. In addition, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 move, the lower part of the character string “Afternoon weather” and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark that is covered by the balloon display f2 are displayed.

  FIG. 193 (j) following FIG. 193 (i) shows a state immediately before the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 end. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 193 (k) following FIG. 193 (j) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is finished and the balloon displays f1 and f2 are deleted.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 and FIG. 194 to FIG. 196 is performed.

  As described above, in this example, in a conversational effect in which two balloon displays are displayed in stages, an erase animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 are simultaneously erased. In the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and f2, since the display of the balloon part is performed while the movement display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is different while the movement direction of the balloon display f1 and f2 is different, You may be able to entertain yourself. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIGS. 194 (a) to 194 (k) show the conversational presentation using the balloon display step by step.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, the special figure 2 The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 194 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 194 (b) following FIG. 194 (a) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6. Also, from the left end of the effect display area 208d, a moving animation in which a princess character display m3 appears is started. The moving animation in which the princess character display m3 appears is started after the display of the balloon display f1 is started. The moving animation of the princess character display m3 and the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may be started at the same time, or the princess character display m3 may be started before the start of the balloon display f1. The princess character display m3 is a notice display of the change. The princess character display m3 is overlapped with the fourth pattern aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the common drawing reservation number aa5, the fourth figure aa6 of the common drawing . The princess character display m3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 and the decoration pattern. The princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the balloon display f1 or the decorative symbol, or may be used as a preview advance notice display.

  In FIG. 194 (c) continued from FIG. 194 (b), the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the effect display area 208d moves from left to right is ended and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen At the same time, a moving animation in which the character display m3 of the princess appearing from the left end of the effect display area 208d moves from the left to the right is continuously executed. The moving speed of the princess character display m3 is faster than the moving speed of the balloon display f1. The moving speed of the princess character display m3 may be the same as the moving speed of the balloon display f1 or may be slower than the moving speed of the balloon display f1. The princess character display m3 may be stopped and displayed so as to interrupt the moving animation and overlap the balloon display f1 at the center of the screen. The entire princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 194 (d) continued from FIG. 194 (c), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player operates the chance button 136 While the effect which urges | performs being performed, the state which the deletion animation which the character display m3 of a princess reaches the screen right end and is erase | eliminated is shown is performed. Note that either one or both of the button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration time indication h112, or both may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 or the princess character display m3, It may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display f1 and the character display m3 of the princess.

  In FIG. 194 (e) continued from FIG. 194 (d), when the princess character display m3 is deleted and the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice display h110 is performed. The operation animation is displayed in which the balloon display f2 by the キ ャ ラ ク タ character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d and the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. It shows the condition that has been In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the display of the balloon display f1 is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, a balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f1. Further, the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the moving animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the moving animation of the balloon display f2, or the moving animation of the balloon display f2 You may start after the start of the The moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appears is started after the deletion of the princess character display m3, but may be started before the deletion of the princess character display m3. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 194 (f) continued from FIG. 194 (e), while the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208d moves toward the left is continuously executed, the balloon display f1 is upward It shows a state in which the moving animation to move to the end is ended and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The movement animation of the balloon display f1 and the movement animation of the balloon display f2 may end at the same time, or the movement animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the movement animation of the balloon display f2 ends. Good.

  FIG. 194 (g) following FIG. 194 (f) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left ends and the stop display is performed substantially at the center of the screen. The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the "afternoon weather" character string of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. ing. The face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be partially covered by the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 194 (h) continued from FIG. 194 (g), the deletion animation in which the balloon display f1 moves toward the left and is deleted and the deletion animation in which the balloon display f2 is moved and is deleted toward the right at the same time It shows the started condition. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 194 (i) following FIG. 194 (h) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are continuously executed. The character strings in the balloon section of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and the patterns indicating the weather are also displayed during the execution of the deletion animation. In addition, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 move, the lower part of the character string “Afternoon weather” and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark that is covered by the balloon display f2 are displayed.

  FIG. 194 (j) following FIG. 194 (i) shows a state immediately before the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 end. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 194 (k) following FIG. 194 (j) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is finished and the balloon displays f1 and f2 are deleted.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 and FIG. 193 to FIG. 196 is performed.

  Thus, this example displays the princess character display m3 so as to overlap with the first balloon display f1 of the two balloon displays in the conversational effect of displaying the two balloon displays in stages. In some cases, it is possible to poke off the player's will. In addition, the princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2 displayed at the end of the two balloon displays. In addition, in place of or in parallel with the princess character display m3, the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decorative pattern, the first to overlap the balloon display f1 or the balloon display f2. Four symbols, mini decoration pattern, notice display, prefetch notice display, tutorial display, pseudo link display, reach display, right hit display, left hit display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display , RT display, number of consecutive rotations display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, at least one of abnormal occurrence display May be displayed. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIGS. 195 (a) to 195 (k) show the conversational effects using the balloon display step by step.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, the special figure 2 The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 195 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 195 (b) following FIG. 195 (a) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 195 (c) continued from FIG. 195 (b), the balloon animation f1 appeared from the left end of the effect display area 208d was stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen after the movement animation of moving from left to right ended. It shows the state.

  In FIG. 195 (d) continued from FIG. 195 (c), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player operates the chance button 136 It shows a state in which the effect to prompt is performed. Note that either one or both of the button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration time indication h112 or both may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 or overlap the balloon display f1. May be displayed.

  In FIG. 195 (e) continued from FIG. 195 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f2 by the wolf character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d is started, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the display of the balloon display f1 is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, a balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f1. The movement animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2 You may start later. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 195 (f) following FIG. 195 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208d moves toward the left is continuously executed, and the balloon display f1 is upward It shows a state in which the moving animation to move to the end is ended and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The moving animation of the balloon display f1 and the moving animation of the balloon display f2 may end simultaneously, or the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the moving animation of the balloon display f2 ends.

  In FIG. 195 (g) following FIG. 195 (f), the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left is finished and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen so that it partially overlaps the balloon display f1. The balloon display f2 is displayed on the screen, and the princess character display m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of the balloon display f2. The princess character display m3 is displayed so that a putt appears in the center of the screen simultaneously with the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f2. In addition, although the character display m3 of a princess is a notice display of the said fluctuation | variation, you may be used as a prefetch notice display. The princess character display m3 may have a size that overlaps only the balloon display f2 or may have a size that overlaps only the balloon display f1. The character display m3 of the princess may be displayed so as to be lightened and gradually darkened at the time of appearance, or may appear before the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f2, or the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f2 It may appear later. In addition, after the start of the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appears, a moving animation may be performed in which the princess character display m3 appears from the right end of the screen and moves so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the character string “afternoon weather” of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. In addition, a part of the character string of the balloon display f1 and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, and a part of the character string of the balloon display f2 and a part of the image of the cloudy mark are covered by the princess character display m3. . The face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be partially covered by the balloon display f2. In addition, all of the princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 195 (h) continued from FIG. 195 (g), the character animation m3 of the princess is erased, and the balloon display f1 moves to the left and is erased and the erasing animation and the balloon display f2 are moved to the right It shows a state where an erase animation to be erased is started at the same time. By deleting the princess character display m3, a portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2 covered by the princess character display m3 is displayed. The princess character display m3 may be deleted before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2, or may be deleted after the start of the deletion animation. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 195 (i), which follows FIG. 195 (h), shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are continuously executed. The character strings in the balloon section of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and the patterns indicating the weather are also displayed during the execution of the deletion animation. In addition, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 move, the lower part of the character string “Afternoon weather” and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark that is covered by the balloon display f2 are displayed.

  FIG. 195 (j) following FIG. 195 (i) shows a state immediately before the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 end. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 195 (k) following FIG. 195 (j) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is finished and the balloon displays f1 and f2 are deleted.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 and FIG. 193 to FIG. 196 is performed.

  As described above, in this example, in a conversational effect in which two balloon displays are displayed in stages, the character display m3 of the princess is such that the two balloon displays overlap with each other in a state where the two balloon displays overlap and are displayed. In some cases, it is possible to poke a player's will by displaying. In addition, instead of the character display m3 of the princess or in parallel, in order to overlap with two balloon displays, a hold display, a hold icon, a change icon, a notice icon, an icon area display, a decorative pattern, a fourth pattern, Mini decoration pattern, notice display, preview notice display, tutorial display, pseudo linked display, reach display, right hit display, left hit display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display Display the number of consecutive shots, acquired ball number display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, and abnormality occurrence display. May be Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIGS. 196 (a) to 196 (k) show the conversational effects using the balloon display in stages.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Also, FIG. 196 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 196 (a) shows a state where a rectangular frame-shaped advance notice display area yk1 is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol display area 208a. In the notice display area yk1, a character string of "attention!" Is displayed, which suggests that the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 196 (c) is displayed. The notice display area yk1 may be always displayed, or a notice display other than the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

  FIG. 196 (b) following FIG. 196 (a) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5, and the fourth drawing aa6 of the common drawing, and the notice display area yk1.

  In FIG. 196 (c) continued from FIG. 196 (b), the balloon animation f1 appeared from the left end of the effect display area 208d was stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen after the moving animation for moving from left to right ended. It shows the state. At the same time as the stop display of the balloon display f1, “39.99”, which is the number of seconds at the start of the timer display of the timer advance display TM, is displayed in the special advance notice display area yk1. The timer notice display TM is a notice display used as a notice of the change, and a specific effect is performed when the timer display reaches 0.00. The specific effect may be reach effect, reach effect developed from reach effect, SP reach effect, or temporary stop effect of the jackpot symbol. Further, all of the timer advance notice display TM may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. The timer advance notice display TM may be used as a pre-reading advance notice display.

  In FIG. 196 (d) following FIG. 196 (c), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “34.50” is displayed as the timer display, and the chance button 136 is simulated above the balloon display f1. The button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating that the effect of urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. Note that either one or both of the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration display h112 imitating the chance button 136 may be displayed so as to overlap the preview display area yk1 and the balloon display f1, or the preview display It may be displayed so as to overlap the area yk1 and the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 196 (e) following FIG. 196 (d), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “34.00” is displayed as the timer display, and the player has a chance within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. By pressing the button 136, the button advance display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, and a moving animation in which a balloon display f2 by a brow character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d is started and the balloon display is displayed. It shows a state in which the moving animation in which f1 moves upward is started. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the balloon display f1 is displayed is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, a balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f1. The movement animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2 You may start later. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 196 (f) following FIG. 196 (e), the timer notice display TM is counted down to display “33.50” as the timer display, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The moving animation moving toward the left is continuously executed, and the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is ended, and the stop display is shown at the approximate center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The moving animation of the balloon display f1 and the moving animation of the balloon display f2 may end simultaneously, or the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the moving animation of the balloon display f2 ends.

  In FIG. 196 (g) following FIG. 196 (f), the timer announcement display TM is counted down and “33.00” is displayed as the timer display, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left is The timer is displayed and stopped at approximately the center of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1, and the timer is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of the balloon display f2. A state in which the advance notice display TM is displayed is shown. Note that the timer notice display TM may be displayed so as to overlap only with the balloon display f 1, or may be displayed so as to overlap only with the balloon display f 2, or all of the timer notice display TM may be ballooned. It may be displayed so as to overlap the displays f1 and f2.

  The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the character string “afternoon weather” of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. Further, a part of the character string of the balloon display f1 and the face image of the character of the character of the character and a part of the character string of the balloon display f2 are covered by the timer notice display TM. Note that the face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be covered by part of the balloon display f2, and the timer notice display TM is displayed on the balloon display f1 or the balloon display f2. It may be overlapped.

  In FIG. 196 (h) following FIG. 196 (g), the timer announcement display TM is counted down and “28.00” is displayed as the timer display, and the balloon display f1 moves toward the left. It shows a state in which the erasing animation to be erased and the erasing animation to be erased by moving the balloon display f2 toward the right are started at the same time. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 196 (i) continued from FIG. 196 (h), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “27.75” is displayed as the timer display, and the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are performed. Indicates a state where it has been continuously executed.

  In FIG. 196 (j) continued from FIG. 196 (i), the timer announcement display TM is counted down and “27.50” is displayed as the timer display, and the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 Shows the state just before the end of. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 196 (k) following FIG. 196 (j), “27.25” is displayed as the timer display by counting down the timer notice display TM, and the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends. The balloon displays f1 and f2 are shown in the erased state.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 149 to FIG. 169 and FIG. 193 to FIG. 195 is performed.

  As described above, in this example, in a conversational effect in which two balloon displays are displayed stepwise, after the display start of the balloon display f1 displayed first of the two balloon displays, the balloon display f1 or the balloon display f2 is displayed. The timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap, and the timer notice display TM is displayed even after the end of the display of the balloon display f2 displayed at the end of the two balloon displays, thereby picking up the player's indication There are times when you can. In addition, in place of or in parallel with the timer notice display TM, the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decorative symbol, the fourth design, the mini to overlap two balloon displays. Decorative design, notice display, preview notice display, tutorial display, pseudo linked display, reach display, right hit display, left hit display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, Display at least one of the number of consecutive times display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, abnormality occurrence display It is also good. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIG. 196 (l) shows an example in which a character image of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as "Yoshimune") ym and an advance notice display area yk1 are always displayed in the holding frame UI. The Yoshimune ym may be included in a tutorial effect display, a change display for changing a display mode such as a hold icon, a change icon, or a development candidate display of a development destination, or an effect display of a timer advance notice display. Since Yoshimune ym is always displayed, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation that these effect display may be started. In addition, since the advance notice display area yk1 is always displayed in the holding frame UI, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer advance notice display may be started. Note that either Yoshimune yk1 or the advance notice display area yk1 may be displayed at all times. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 196.

(K1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 194),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 194 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 194 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 194 (e)).
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 194 (e) to (h)).
One of the plurality of displays is a display (for example, a princess character display m3),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is a part of the certain display before a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display. It may overlap with at least a part (see, for example, FIGS. 194 (b) and (c)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display in front is made to stand out, and the first balloon display overlaps the display with a certain display to make the player's intention In some cases, it is possible to produce an effect that strikes the player, and improve the player's interest.

(K2)
It is the gaming machine described in (K1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 194 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(K3)
The gaming machine according to (K1) or (K2), wherein
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, when the balloon display and the advance notice display overlap, it is possible to poke off the player's intention, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(K4)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K3), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 194 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(K5)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K4), wherein
A game stand characterized in that the reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display.
(K6)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K5), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(K7)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K6), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(K8)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K7), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(K9)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K8), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, see FIGS. 194 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by
(K10)
It is a game console according to any one of (K1) to (K9),
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(K11)
It is a game console according to any one of (K1) to (K9),
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(L1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 195),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 195 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 195 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 195 (e)).
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 195 (e) to (h)).
One of the plurality of displays is a display (for example, a princess character display m3),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display and a part of the second balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the certain display (see, for example, FIG. 195 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display in front is made to stand out, and the two balloon displays overlap the display with a certain display, and the effect is to poke the player's mind In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(L2)
It is the gaming machine described in (L1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 195 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(L3)
It is a game console according to (L1) or (L2),
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, by overlapping the two balloon displays and the advance notice display, it is possible to catch the player's intention, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(L4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (L1) to (L3), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 195 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(L5)
It is a game console according to any one of (L1) to (L4),
A game stand characterized in that the reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display.
(L6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (L1) to (L5), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(L7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (L1) to (L6), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(L8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (L1) to (L7), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(L9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (L1) to (L8), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 195 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by
(L10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (L1) to (L9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(L11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (L1) to (L9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(M1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 196),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 195 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 196 (e)).
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (e) to (h)).
One of the plurality of displays is a display (for example, timer notice display TM),
In the conversation effect display, after a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the certain display overlap, both a part of the first balloon display and a part of the second balloon display May overlap with at least a part of the certain display (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (c) to (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display in the foreground is made to stand out, and at least one of the two balloon displays overlaps with a certain display. In some cases, it is possible to produce an effect that strikes the player, and improve the player's interest.

(M2)
It is the gaming machine described in (M1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 196 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(M3)
The gaming machine according to (M1) or (M2), wherein
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, when the balloon display and the advance notice display overlap, it is possible to poke off the player's intention, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(M4)
A game console according to any one of (M1) to (M3), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
Some of the characters of the first balloon display overlap with some of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 196 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(M5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (M1) to (M4), wherein
A game stand characterized in that the reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display.
(M6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (M1) to (M5), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(M7)
A game console according to any one of (M1) to (M6), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(M8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (M1) to (M7), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(M9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (M1) to (M8), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by
(M10)
A game console according to any one of (M1) to (M9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(M11)
A game console according to any one of (M1) to (M9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(N1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversational effect display (for example, the conversational effect shown in FIG. 193),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIGS. 193 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 193 (e)).
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (e) to (h)).
In the conversation effect display, after a part of the first balloon display is in a state of being overlapped with a part of the second balloon display, the state is canceled and one of the first balloon display The part may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 193 (i)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display on the near side is made conspicuous, and the first after the overlap due to the second balloon display on the near side is eliminated By displaying a part of the balloon display, the player may be able to enjoy the afterglow of the first balloon display, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(N2)
It is a game stand described in (N1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 193 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(N3)
The gaming machine according to (N1) or (N2), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 193 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(N4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (N1) to (N3), wherein
A game stand characterized in that the reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display.
(N5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (N1) to (N4), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(N6)
The game console according to any one of (N1) to (N5), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(N7)
The game console according to any one of (N1) to (N6), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(N8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (N1) to (N7), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by
(N9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (N1) to (N8), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(N10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (N1) to (N8), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(O1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversational effect display (for example, the conversational effect shown in FIG. 193),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIGS. 193 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 193 (e)).
The display means displays a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first moving animation” (for example, moving animation of the balloon display f1 shown in FIGS. 193 (h) to (k)). It is a possible means,
The display means displays a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation” (for example, moving animation of the balloon display f2 shown in FIGS. 193 (h) to (k)). It is a possible means,
The direction in which the first balloon display moves in the first movement animation (for example, the left direction) is the direction in which the second balloon display in the second movement animation moves (for example, the right direction) Different directions (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (h) to (k)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display on the near side is made to stand out, and the movement direction of the two balloon displays is different. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(O2)
It is the gaming machine described in (O1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 193 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(O3)
It is the gaming machine described in (O2),
The first movement animation is an animation that is displayed before the first balloon display is erased (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (h) to (k)).
The second movement animation is an animation displayed before the second balloon display is erased (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (h) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, in the animation for erasing the two balloon displays, the movement direction of the two balloon displays is different, so that it is possible to perform the effect of punishing the player's mind, thereby improving the player's interest There is a possibility.

(O4)
It is a game console according to any one of (O1) to (O3),
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 193 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(O5)
It is a game console according to any one of (O1) to (O4),
A game stand characterized in that the reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display.
(O6)
It is a game console according to any one of (O1) to (O5),
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(O7)
It is a game console according to any one of (O1) to (O6),
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(O8)
It is a game console according to any one of (O1) to (O7),
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(O9)
It is a game console according to any one of (O1) to (O8),
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 193 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by
(O10)
The game console according to any one of (O1) to (O9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(O11)
The game console according to any one of (O1) to (O9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 197 through 233 are basically used only in the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 197 through 233, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in the other drawings, The codes shown in FIG. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured in a frame shape Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage which can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “ball”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110 The upper plate 126 provided with the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 A ball extraction button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the firing device 110 by the operation of the player The ball emission handle 134 which launches the guided game ball into the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the cha that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 197) by the operation of the player. With respect to a card unit (CR unit) and a setting operation unit 137 which can make various settings and the like by the operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), the chance button lamp 138 for lighting the chance button 136 and the chance button 136 A ball rental operation button 140 for instructing a ball rental, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit Not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 199) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 198 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 197 as viewed from the rear side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 200). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board housing a first sub-board 160 that comprises a first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing and a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk A second sub-board case 166 for housing a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control part 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control part 400 and a substrate case 162; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls and that releases an error by an operation of a game clerk 68. A payout substrate case 172 housing the payout substrate 170, a launch substrate case 176 housing the launch substrate 174 constituting the launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the game ball, and various electric gaming machines And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156 and the first sub substrate 160 etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 199 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for a right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, the falling path of the gaming ball is divided into the right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and the left path on the left side of the rendering device 206 by changing the launch strength of the gaming ball by operating the ball emission handle 134 be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol starting opening 228, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the first special symbol starting opening 230, the second special symbol starting opening 232 (opened state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (opened state) etc. The ease of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting opening 228, the first special symbol starting opening 230 and the variable winning opening 234, the game of falling on the left path by the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nail 238 and the warp device 242 etc. Entry of balls is relatively easy, and entry of gaming balls falling on the right path is relatively difficult. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying a decorative symbol and various images (moving images or still images) used for effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower part of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 The normal symbol hold lamp 216 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7 segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) pending, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number (for example, four) of common drawing fluctuation games are displayed. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure variation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation game is specified. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and variable The winning openings 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of balls into the general winning openings 226 (general winning openings 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "winning balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rented balls" There are cases) and.

  The general drawing start port 228 and the general drawing start port 229 are devices, which are called gates and through chuckers, for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the present embodiment In the embodiment, one common drawing start port 228 is disposed on the left side path of the game board 200, and one common drawing start port 229 is disposed on the right side path. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start port 228 or the general drawing start port 229 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 or the drawing start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as an award ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 1 display device 212 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 1 variation game") is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right path. The special figure 2 start opening 232 has a pair of wing members 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and while the wing members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and win a common drawing fluctuation game, and a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right route. There is only one in the house. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 respectively include openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. For example, when the special figure display device wins the special figure variation game and the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing) Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the firing rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning any winning opening or start opening, or just out of passing the common drawing start opening 228, 229 The mouth 240 is reached.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. In addition, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying a fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The fourth symbol display 248 is provided with two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged in tandem. For example, LEDs are used as light sources of the two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to Special Figure 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to Special Figure 2. Note that the fourth symbol display device 248 may have only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth pattern may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as in this example, the fourth symbol display device may be provided in the rendering device 206 (center product). Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, from the warp outlet 242b to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling balls etc. that are run over by the balls discharged from the warp outlet 242 b and the nails of the game board 200 etc. In the central part of the front stage 244, the passed balls are special opening 1 start opening There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter 230.

  The effect movable body 224 in this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is vertically movable in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214, and a predetermined view A display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 200) for adjusting the volume to be set, the operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the signal to the basic circuit 402 and the signal stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from power supply control unit 660 to payout control unit 600 and second sub-control unit 500, and main control unit 300, second sub-control unit 500, and firing control from payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 201 (a) to 201 (d). The types of figures and figures will be described. FIG. 201 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1, and FIG. 201 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. As shown in FIG. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 201 (a), seven types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing G" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special drawing 1. In FIG. 201 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit and the number of rounds are performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game and after the end of the 7R big hit game, all transition to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. 15R special big hit symbol "Special figure A" and 7R special big hit symbol "Special figure B" is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game and is 7R big hit symbol "Special figure C" is a symbol which becomes a special figure low probability common figure high probability state after the end of a big hit game. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing C" are symbols whose advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R, and "special figure B" which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "special view E" is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability regular view low probability state, the special view high probability regular view low probability state (so-called so-called high probability game after the open time 100 ms × 2 R) Transition to the latent probability change state, and when “Special figure E” is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability regularity figure low probability state, the special figure high probability regularity popularity after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms × 2R) ends It shifts to the figure high probability state (refer to FIGS. 207 (a) and (b)). That is, the "special figure E" is an operation during the big hit game and the gaming state which is shifted thereafter by the gaming state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether it is the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state or not). It is a different pattern.

  "Special figure F" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure G” is a removal symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  In FIG. 201 (b), four types of special views, “special view a” to “special view d”, are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of special view 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is a detached symbol. In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, while seven special figures (of which five are the big hit) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used, As the stop symbol form of the four special figures of “special figure a” to “special figure d” (of which three kinds are big hit) are used. By configuring in this way, it may be possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a definite change in the big hit. In this example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 contains a sudden definite change or latent definite change which can hardly be obtained, while the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not contain a definite change or latent definite change. The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 201 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", 7R special jackpot of "special figure B", 7R jackpot of "special figure C", 15R special jackpot of "special figure a", 7R special jackpot of "special figure b" When notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-" Stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2 etc. When explicitly notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 15R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decor 3-decor 3- Stop display of decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "etc.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "Tokuku E" (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "Toku F", "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Do. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of “special figure D”, “decoration 1 – decoration 3 – decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure G" and "special figure d", symbol display areas other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 201 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 201 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" and "general drawing B" which are hit symbols, and "common drawing C" which is a detached pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 and the drawing start port 229, the drawing display device 210 displays all the seven segments and the central one. Repeat the lighting of the segment of the "general display of the fluctuation display". And, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 201 (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, initial values of four random number counters for generating a common drawing win random value, a common drawing random value, a special drawing 1 random value, and a special drawing 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time and the random value for determining the special drawing fluctuation time are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random value for determining a common drawing fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308 1 is added to the above value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general prize opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 2 start opening 232, or the common view start opening 228 , 229 is determined to have been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value and the general drawing are used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value value, and the special figure 2 random value value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round is next next while setting it in the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. Also, apart from the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value next makes one round, the random number counter for generating the common drawing random value, Special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for and the random number counter for generating a special number 2 random number value has made one rotation. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 are awarded, the winning balls provided in RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening are provided. The value of the number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start openings 228 and 229, and variable winning openings 234 and 235 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (1) Obtain a random number value and store it in the special order 1 random number value storage area in order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 holdings decreases, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair of the holding order is the highest (first) is deleted. And the holding order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value value set is processed to be advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations increases, the special order 1 is new to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair in the lowest order (last). Data of a combination of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is written.

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the acquisition order in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the special order 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value pair data are deleted each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by one, and the remaining data It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value set is advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, the special figure 2 winning random number value is new to the next pending order of the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest pending order. And, the data of the special figure 2 random number value set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random value) was newly acquired. In the case, the special drawing prefetch process is executed using the start information. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  If the common drawing start port 228 or the common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generating random number counter The random number value is acquired as a winning random number value, and the common-mode random number value is acquired from the random number counter for general-purpose random number value generation provided in the RAM 308, and is stored in the general-purpose random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random number value in the common drawing random number storage area is stored by the same number as the common drawing reservation number stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area. In the common drawing random number storage area, every time the common drawing reservation number decreases by one, the data of the combination of the common drawing random number and the common drawing random value of the highest rank (first) is erased and It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random value set is incremented by one. In addition, whenever the number of popular drawing reservations increases by one, a new common drawing winning random value and the next pending order of the data of the combination of the lowest drawing (last) common drawing winning random value and the common drawing random value Data of a set of common-mode random numbers is written. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 235 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 is any one of a hit symbol (a common drawing A or a common drawing B shown in FIG. 201 (d) and a disconnected drawing (a common drawing C shown in FIG. 201 (d)). Make a final display of the symbol of. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. It is executed using the combination of the first common drawing win random value and the common drawing random value in the common drawing random number storage area as a start condition that is 1 or more.

  The main control unit 300 acquires common drawing start information (a pair of common drawing win random value and common drawing random value) from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the common drawing random value storage area, A table for deciding on a pass / fail judgment stored in the ROM 306 based on the common drawing win random number value in the common drawing start information acquired and the value of the common drawing probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 205A and 205B described later) Use the reference) to decide whether to win or lose. Next, main control unit 300 determines the common drawing determination table (FIG. 205 (c) shown in FIG. 205 c) stored in ROM 306 based on the common drawing random number value in the acquired common drawing start information and the determined success or failure determination result. Use the hour movement table (see table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display of the common drawing. Next, the main control unit 300 uses, for example, various tables (for example, timer number selection not shown) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, and the acquired random number value for common drawing fluctuation time determination. The variable display time (timer number) of the common drawing is determined using the table), and the variable display time is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the common drawing fluctuation display time.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first drawing-up start information from the drawing random number storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the first drawing-general drawing start information from the drawing random number storage area and stores the common drawing reserve number. Subtract 1 from the number of general drawing reservations for the area. At this time, the general drawing start information extracted from the general drawing random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the general drawing start information stored in the temporary area. It is also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets a common drawing per shot flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON if the result of judgment is hit (winning), and sets a common drawing per shot flag to off when the result of judgment is non-winning.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 7R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability change flag, and common drawing probability change flag. . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on The special figure a shown in FIG. 201 (b), the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on when the special figure probability change flag is on, and the special figure probability change flag is off. If the special figure c, the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure d modes, Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of the special view a to special view d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or Solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (until the game ball of predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, 235) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1). In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing, it waits for the period which is displaying the image which notifies the player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display device 208 is finished In the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating an effect waiting period is set. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start hole 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit as game balls enter and there is a large number of game balls and the euphorism is increased, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol form of the special figure 2, the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing shown is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. 201 (a) is on, If the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, if the special figure probability change flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the chart probability change flag is on, the special view D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special view probability change flag is on, the common view probability change flag is off, the special view E, the small hit flag is on In the special figure F, when the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off the control so that it becomes each aspect of the special figure G. Special figure 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special view 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special view 1 display device 212 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view G symbols. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) with high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) with low degree of advantage. . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Or a small hit (in the present example, a small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1) using the hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 206 (a) to (d) described later) stored in Make a decision (whether or not to accept or reject). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 start information acquired and the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 207 (a), Determination of the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variation display of the special view 2 is performed using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 208 (a)). Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area Subtract 1 the number of reserved areas. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol fluctuation start command and a symbol fluctuation stop command concerning a common drawing are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a special figure start symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlying flags, values such as special figure probability change flags, special drawing related lottery processing In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it contains information indicating the timer number etc. selected in and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outliers flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and end effect start command, information including the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I have included it. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  If the command type is a symbol drawing start (rotation start) command of a common drawing, the command data is a per common drawing flag, a common drawing departure flag, a common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a common drawing related lottery process. Information including the information on the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the common drawing, information indicating the value of the common drawing per-flag, the common drawing deviation flag, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc. To be included.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special figure 1 related lottery process and special value 2 setting information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the common view display device 210 and special figure 1 display through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 204 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetching process executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217). In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the preliminary determination result (the special-figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see (b) to (e) in FIG. 204) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer division is completed. The processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the loading process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not non-power-supply is in progress, it may be determined in step S309 whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information of the increased amount may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 204 (b) to 204 (e) illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 204 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 pre-reading result information is stored in the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 204 (b), "special figure G" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure G" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 204C shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 204 (c), the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the reserve number of the special view 2 change game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 204 (c), “special figure d” (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “pending 1”, and the stopping symbol is placed in the storage areas “pending 2” to “pending 4”. Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 204 (c), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 204 (d) shows an example of a special-purpose look-ahead result storage unit for special view 1 during power support. As shown in FIG. 204 (d), in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 204 (e), in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation game is not the stop pattern information but the pre-reading result It may be stored as In the example shown in FIG. 204 (e), "timer 3" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "pending 1", and "timer 5" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "pending 2". The timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "pending 3" and "pending 4". In FIG. 204 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as "none". When timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-fetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set to correspond to the pass / fail result.

  In the above description, the stop symbol and the timer number are determined in advance, and the stop symbol information and the timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the pass / fail determination result is determined in advance and the information is prefetched It may be stored in the result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as pre-reading result information.

  Next, various tables used by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 205 to 208 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when performing a success / failure determination in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b) is composed of the items of “general drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure result”. The item “common drawing probability” indicates a common drawing probability (common drawing low probability or common drawing high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired common drawing winning random value. Here, the possible range of the common drawing winning random value of this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 205 (a) is a success or failure determination table for common use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 205 (b) is a success / failure determination table for common use, which is used when the drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of hitting is approximately 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. Comparing this success / failure determination table with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 205 (a), the probability of hitting is 100 times. As described above, it may be designed such that only the hit is selected in the general drawing high probability state (during time reduction operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% in the short-time operation, but in the short-time operation, the probability that the hit is selected is higher than that in the short-time non-operation state (generally low probability state).

  FIG. 205 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for common use. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is compared with the common drawing random number value when determining the stop symbol in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223), the distribution ratio of random number range for each design (ie Shows the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 205 (c), the distribution ratio of each symbol in the case where the success or failure determination result of the common drawing fluctuation game is a hit is 50% for the common drawing A and 50% for the common drawing B. The common drawings A and B are symbols for which the electric thu open operation is executed after the common drawing fluctuation game. In addition, since the disappointing symbol selected when the success or failure judgment result is disassembly is only one of the map C, the map C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of the disassembly. When the drawing C is selected, the electric chow opening operation is not executed after the drawing fluctuation game.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (c), the opening operation of the special view 2 start port (electric chow) 232 is executed after the normal view A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is not active, the wing member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. Do. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is a short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for only 1800 ms, and then It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 205 (c), the opening operation of the special figure 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the general view B is not short, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only for 100 ms only once. When the gaming state at the stop display of the common figure B is short time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and then opened for only 1450 ms, again It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 206 (a) to 206 (d) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when making a success / failure determination in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The success or failure determination tables shown in FIGS. 206 (a) to 206 (d) are configured by items of “special drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of the success or failure determination. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible ranges of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65,536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 206A is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 206 (b) is a success or failure determination table for the special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 206A, the probability of the big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of the small hit is the same.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 206C is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 206 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of small hit is zero.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 206D is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of success or failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 206 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of small hit is zero. When this success or failure judgment table is compared with the success or failure judgment table shown in FIG. 206 (c), the probability of the big hit is about 10 times.

  FIG. 207 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for the special view 1. FIG. The numerical values in the "sorting" column in the table are compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the distribution ratio of random number range for each pattern (ie each Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit is 30% for the special figure A (15R special big hit), and the special figure B 25% for (7R special big hit), 25% for special figure C (7R big hit), 10% for special figure D (sudden probability variation big hit), 10% for special figure E (latency probability variation big hit) is there. Special views A, B, D, E excluding special view C are symbols for which positive change is activated after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hits (special figures A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, that is, the probability of probability variation is 75%.

  The special figures A, B and D indicate the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (during time reduction operation), spread figure low probability (due time not working) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view C is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The special view E is a symbol in which time saving is activated after the end of the big hit game only when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state or the general drawing high probability state. That is, when the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, time saving does not operate after the end of the big hit game. For example, when the special figure E is displayed several times in succession as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability common figure low probability state, time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability common figure) However, after the second and subsequent stop display, the time saving function is activated (it is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state). The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 90% in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, 100% in the other game state.

  In this example, the small hit symbol and the detached symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game are only one type each. Therefore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value, and the success judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is In the case of outliers, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a small hit symbol or an off symbol may be provided in a plurality of types similarly to the large hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

  FIG. 207 (b) shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of the special view 1. As shown in FIG. 207 (b), in the big hit game after the special view A is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R with 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after special image B or special image C is stopped and displayed, 7R is performed with 29000 ms per 1R, and in big hit game after special image D is displayed and stopped, the open of attacker Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2Rs in 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the gaming state other than the special view low probability general view low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

  In the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, 100 ms of attacker opening is performed twice in one opening opportunity. That is, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state and the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, the attacker operates in the same manner.

  FIG. 208 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for Special Figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is the sorting percentage of the random number range for each symbol (ie, each is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 208 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit is 70% of the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which positive change is activated after the big hit game is over. The ratio of the probability change big hit (Toku figure a, b) in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, that is, the probability change probability is the same 75% as the probability change probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special figures a and b show the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (time reduction operation time), spread figure low probability (time reduction time not active) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view c is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of out pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. Therefore, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is a loss, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random number value. However, a plurality of types of off symbols may be provided similarly to the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 208 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special view 2. As shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the big hit game after the special view a is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R for 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special view b or the special view c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, 7Rs are performed with 29000 ms per 1R to open the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, Special Figure 2 has a high probability of being given time reduction compared to Special Figure 1, and the release time of the attacker is long (or the number of R is large). Therefore, it can be considered that Special Figure 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Special Figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIGS. 209 and 210. FIG. FIG. 209A is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the main process performed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 209A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric power long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S409 into effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 209B is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 209C is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 209D is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing (step S413) of the first sub control unit main processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 has been input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, otherwise transfer end ratio Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Part (a) of FIG. 210 shows the flow of electric power long open effect processing that is executed in the effect control processing of the main processing in the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 210 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric Chu Long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the common drawing fluctuation game, and the special drawing 2 starting opening (electric Chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times for a common drawing fluctuation game and won , It may be referred to as long open)) It is an effect to ask whether or not to. It should be noted that, even after the regular drawing fluctuation stop, the electric tune long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during the electric cheer opening!") May be continued based on the regular drawing stop symbol.

  The electric chulong opening effect processing shown in FIG. 210 (a) starts the symbol fluctuation start of the general drawing from the main control unit 300 in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 in FIG. 209 (a). (Start of rotation) It is executed when a command is received.

  The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether the power-on long open effect execution regulation flag that restricts the execution of the power-on long open effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the power-long open effect execution regulation flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether the execution of the power-long open effect is restricted. For example, during the dark display where the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely black, the player can not visually recognize the effect even if the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of electric power Tyuulong is not obtained . Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display dark rotation. In addition, if the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric Chu-long opening effect, the game It is possible to carry out an electric Chu-long opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long long open effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the success or failure determination result of the special figure change game and the demonstration effect.

  In step S801, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is restricted, and for the restriction of the electric Chu-long opening effect. Other control processing is executed to end the present processing, and the process returns to the effect control processing (step S409) of the main processing.

  In step S801, if the power-on long open effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the power-on long open effect can be performed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol variation (start of rotation) It is determined from the command data of the command whether or not the success / failure determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is hit with reference to the information regarding the common drawing per game flag and the general drawing disengaging flag.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the success / failure determination result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the common drawing is generated from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the common drawing change game is the common drawing A.

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is the common drawing A, the process proceeds to step S807, the effect type selects the effect of "success pattern", and the power is open Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809 to execute other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “success pattern”, and ends this processing to effect control of the main process. It returns to a process (step S409).

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is not the common drawing A in step S805, the processing proceeds to step S811, and the effect type selects the effect of "failure pattern A" Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern A”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If it is determined in step S803 that the regularity determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is not a hit, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes electric power long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery processing. In the electric chew long opening false effect execution lottery process, the electric chew long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 by taking out a random number value from the random number counter for the electric tune long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 It is judged whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit using

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric power long open false effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the electric power long open false effect in step S 817, the process proceeds to step S 821, and the effect type “failure pattern B” is selected and set as electric power long open effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern B”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric power long open false effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric power long open effect, and ends the present processing to execute the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric chulong opening effect shown in FIG. 210, when the electric chulong opening effect execution regulation flag is off, the electric chulong opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit An execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of moat-off, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Moreover, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set in the hit (open view B) when the turn off is open for a short time (short open), and the turn off does not open the turn off (outline C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general view B) and a shift (general view C).

  FIG. 210 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect. FIG. 210 (b) shows display effects being performed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. At the front of the background effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A fluctuation icon display area a is disposed on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a fluctuation icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variation icon display area a, a special view reserve display area c for displaying a reserve for special view is arranged, and a reserve icon b of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. At the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a power long open effect area d is disposed. The common drawing change game is started by the common drawing display device 210 (not shown), and the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric Chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric Chu-long opening effect area d. An image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed together with the display of "during a helping chance lottery" as an electric Chu-long opening effect, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 A scruffy effect is being performed which causes the player to expect that the game may be released long. As shown in FIG. 210 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the effect of opening electric power long. In addition, the right side area of the special view hold display area c is also partially hidden. Thus, if there is a case that the electric Chu-long opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol makes at least a part of the electric Chu-long opening effect difficult to confirm There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 211A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, various initial settings are performed in step S901 in FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S901, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S 903 following step S 901, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S 905. . In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 907 following step S 905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 907, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 211B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 211C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, specific examples of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 229. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 212 to 229 will be described with reference to FIG. 212 (1). FIG. 212 (1) and each figure to be described later show the decorative symbol display device 208 at the center. In the example shown in FIG. 212 (1), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display, main stop display) in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIGS. 212 to 229, an even number of decorative symbols ("decor 2", "decor 4", "decor 6", "decor 8", "decor 10") are displayed surrounded by a vertically elongated rectangular frame. The display color in the frame display is aspect 3 (for example, blue (indicated by upward hatching in the right in FIGS. 212 to 229)). Also, in FIG. 212 to FIG. 229, odd-numbered decorative symbols ("decoration 1", "decoration 3", "decoration 5", "decoration 7", "decoration 9") are surrounded by vertically elongated rectangular frame display The displayed color in the frame display is aspect 5 (for example, red (shown by grid hatching in FIGS. 212 to 229)). In addition, the frame display surrounding the odd-numbered decorative symbols is displayed so that the display size is larger than that of the frame display, and the lower right corners thereof match within the vertically long frame display including the character image in the frame. For example, as shown in FIG. 212 (1), "decoration 7" is displayed in a frame display including a character image of Yoshimune. The pachinko machine 100 displays the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in, for example, the mode 3 (blue) or the mode 5 (red). It is possible to execute pre-reading notice with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree), and can display a character image within a frame display surrounding an odd decoration pattern. The display of the preview foresight notice in which the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in blue is the display of the preview foresighted notice for the blue chance eye, and the display in the frame display surrounding the three decorative patterns is displayed in red The display is a display of the red-eye preview of the chance eye. The big hit reliability (expected degree) in the advance notice of the chance eye is set higher in red than in blue. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may display the decoration pattern itself in red or blue and execute the advance notice of the chance eye. Also, the odd-numbered decorative symbols may include character images.

  A display area (user interface) UI at the lower part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided. In the display area UI, for example, game information (for example, the number of reservations, the notice of the change, the advance notice, the tutorial, etc.) to be notified to the player is displayed. For example, five types of modes of modes 3 to 7 are provided as modes of the display area UI. Depending on the mode of the display area UI, a notice (the notice) or an advance notice may be given to a special figure change game being executed. These aspects are ordered in ascending order of big hit reliability, aspect 3 (eg, blue), aspect 4 (eg, green), aspect 5 (eg, red), aspect 6 (eg, gold), aspect 7 (eg, rainbow) Color). Mode 3 is a default mode of the display area UI.

  Further, at the center of the display area UI, a change icon display area e capable of displaying a change icon is provided. When the reserve is digested and the special figure variation game is started, the reserve icon corresponding to the special figure variation game becomes a variation icon. The fluctuation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the cylindrical pedestal image (base) displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the notice of the variation with a predetermined big hit reliability of the success or failure of the special view variation game.

  A special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area e. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area f, the number of pending icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the special drawing 1 pending icon display area f by the number of holding icons of the special view 1 according to the number of pending icons of the special drawing 1 and the pending state of each special icon It is possible to execute pre-reading notice with predetermined big hit reliability with the success or failure of the special figure 1 fluctuation game which relates. The special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from right to left. At the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas, an oval pedestal image showing the display position of the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding orders, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of Special Figure 1 corresponding to the earliest (most stored) hold is displayed, and in the same way, the second to fourth areas correspond to the second to fourth hold. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 212 (1), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and the suspension icons g1 to g4 are respectively displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special view 1 suspension icon display area f. . The retention icons g1 to g4 are displayed overlapping at the upper end of the pedestal image. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 212 (1), the retention icons fg1 to g4 are circular and are displayed in aspect 1 (for example, white (shown by dot hatching in FIGS. 212 to 1994)). Mode 1 is a default mode of the hold icon and the change icon (hereinafter, the hold icon and the change icon may be simply referred to as “icon” in some cases), and the lowest hit probability among the plurality of modes. It is. The default mode may be a mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of which the special view 1 prefetch result is "not determined", and the reliability of the default mode in this case is not set. The hold icon is an icon related to hold. The fluctuation icon is an icon related to symbol fluctuation display being executed.

  For example, seven types of aspects of aspect 1 to aspect 7 are provided as the aspect of the variation icon and the holding icon. These modes are, in descending order of big hit reliability, mode 1 (eg, white), mode 2 (eg, white flashing), mode 3 (eg, blue), mode 4 (eg, green), mode 5 (eg, Red), aspect 6 (for example, gold color), aspect 7 (for example, rainbow color). For this reason, for example, the jackpot symbol aspect is more easily determined and displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the icon of the aspect 3 than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the icon of the aspect 1. In addition, the aspect 7 is displayed only when the big hit design is displayed by the variation display of the corresponding decorative design of the icon.

  In addition, the special figure 2 reservation icon display area may be provided on the right side of the variation icon display area e. In the special figure 2 pending icon display area, the number of pending icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In addition, the special figure 2 reserve icon display area may be provided above the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 212 (1), an image simulating a door (hereinafter referred to as "door") on the right side (right side of the variation icon display area e) of the display area U1 of the decorative symbol surface device 208 There is j) is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display a display (for example, an animation display) in which a character image, an item image and the like appear from the door j.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 212 (1), a fifth symbol display area h capable of displaying the fifth symbol is provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variation game, each left right middle symbol of the fifth symbol is "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "9" → "0" → " The variable display of the fifth symbol which is switched in the order of 1 "→ ... is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 212 (1), the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is displayed. In the fifth symbol, similarly to the decorative symbol, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to notify of the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 212 (1), an image of a pattern of the sun is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the sun pattern is displayed when the effect stage is a fine stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image corresponding to the effect stage may be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 212 (1) and each of the drawings described later, the configuration necessary for describing the embodiment among the configurations of the pachinko machine 100 is extracted and illustrated in the region on the paper surface divided by the dashed dotted line. The speaker 120, the movable body 700, the movable body 702, the chance button 136, the chance button 704, and the setting operation unit 137 are shown in FIG. And the fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are schematically illustrated. The pachinko machine 100 has a movable body 700 and a movable body 702 as movable means. Details of the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described later.

  A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The chance button 704 is disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106, and is an operation means that can be operated by the player. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for notifying the fourth symbol, and are disposed, for example, at predetermined positions on the board of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 199. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square-shaped external shape, and reports the fourth symbol for Special Figure 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular external shape, and reports the fourth symbol for Special Figure 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks in white when lit during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and is turned off during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks in white when it is lit during execution of the special figure 2 variation game, and turns off during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game. The fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, the downward arrow illustrated at the lower end portion in the center of FIG. 212 (1) indicates that the state shown in FIG. 212 (1) and the state shown in FIG. 212 (2) continue in time series. . Also in each of the drawings described below, the downward arrow illustrated at the center lower end of each drawing indicates that it continues in chronological order with the following drawings.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 (1) to (28). FIGS. 212 (1) to (28) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 212 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. Stop display (fixed display, main stop display) is displayed. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 212 (1), the hold icons g1 to g4 are displayed in the first aspect.

  In the case of FIG. 212 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 not shown. Show the situation. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c represent the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the downward arrows shown in the fifth symbol display area h are the fluctuation displays of the fifth symbol It represents the displayed state. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon decrease animation (hold icon decrease animation) is executed and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is a change icon e1 And move to the change icon display area e, the hold icon move animation (hold icon move animation) is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f is a special view 1 Move to the first area of the reserve icon display area f, the reserve icon g3 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, move to the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, The reserve icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f moves to the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 212 (2), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are being moved. In the drawing, the arrows illustrated on the left of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 indicate the movement direction and movement locus of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4. In addition, while the reserved icon moving animation is displayed, four pedestal images of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f extend upward. Note that an animation display (for example, an animation in which a pedestal image bounces up and down) may be displayed in the display area UI while the hold icon movement animation is displayed.

  FIG. 212 (3) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decrease animation and the on-hold icon movement animation have ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 212 (3), the fluctuation icon (in this example, the fluctuation icon e1) is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. This may make it easier to identify the change icon and the hold icon.

  FIG. 212 (4) shows a state in which an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “shoji”) imitating a shoji door is displayed. The shoji k is displayed in the display area including the variation icon display area e and the special view 1 suspension icon display area f, and is displayed overlapping the variation icon and the suspension icon. For example, the shoji k appears in such a manner as to move upward from below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated on the lower right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. In this example, the shoji k is displayed overlapping with the change icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4. By being overlapped by the shoji k, the fluctuation icon e1 and the retention icons g2 to g4 are displayed as a shaded (silhouette) painted in black. In addition, the part of the icon which overlaps with the part of the wooden frame of the shoji k which imitated shojido is also displayed with a shadow picture. In addition, the base image of the variation icon display area e and the base image of the special view 1 suspension icon are hidden by Shoji k, and a part of the display area UI is also hidden. The player can recognize the outline (outline, outline) of the icons (the fluctuating icon and the holding icon) by displaying a shadow picture, but can not recognize the aspects 1 to 7 of the icons. In addition, an icon may be displayed by a shadow picture over the variable display of the decoration pattern of multiple times as a certain prior-reading notice. The pachinko machine 100 can make each variable display have a sense of expectation by making it difficult to understand the variable display of the target of the advance notice. The icon may be displayed only in a shadow picture.

  In the case of shoji k, an image of a portion corresponding to a shoji door crate is displayed in a plurality of manners (display manners). For example, seven modes of the modes 1 to 7 are provided as the modes of the shoji k. These modes are, in descending order of big hit reliability, mode 1 (eg, white), mode 2 (eg, white flashing), mode 3 (eg, blue), mode 4 (eg, green), mode 5 (eg, Red), aspect 6 (for example, gold color), aspect 7 (for example, rainbow color). In FIG. 212 (4), the shoji k is displayed in the first mode.

  FIG. 212 (5) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. The change effect of this example is an animation (change animation) in which a character image of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as "Yoshimune") m1 shoots an arrow image (hereinafter referred to as "arrow") m2 toward an icon to be changed. Is displayed. The Yoshimune m1 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the Yoshimune m1 is the start of the change effect of this example. In addition, the arrow m2 is not displayed as a shadow picture in a state where it does not overlap with the shoji k.

  FIG. 212 (6) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The arrow m2 is displayed so as to overlap with the shoji k, and is displayed as a shadow picture. The shadow arrow m2 is displayed in black, like the shadow icon. As described above, in the change animation included in the change presentation, at least a part of the image of the change animation is displayed as a shadow picture in a part of the scene. In addition, the arrow m2 is displayed overlapping the icon (in FIG. 212 (6), the change icon e1 and the hold icon g2). The arrow m2 and the icon may be seen as an integral image when the arrow m2 overlaps a plurality of icons.

  Thus, when a change effect is performed, at least a part (for example, the arrow m2) of the display of the change animation is displayed as a shadow picture in the scene of the change animation shown in FIG. 212 (6). In the scene shown in 5), the display of the change animation (for example, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) is not displayed as a shadow picture. According to the pachinko machine 100, as a part of the scene becomes a shadow picture, it can be made easy to understand that the change effect relates to the icon regarding the hold. In addition, the flying object (arrow m2) becomes a shadow in the vicinity of the icon, which makes identification of the icon of the change target more difficult than when it is not a shadow, and makes the icon look more carefully You can

  FIG. 212 (7) shows the state immediately after the scene in which the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g2. The icon of the target of the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g2, the arrow m2 is erased and the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged, and hold An animation in which the icon g2 jumps up is displayed. In the drawing, the upward arrow illustrated below the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. An animation in which the hold icon g2 jumps upward is displayed when the change presentation is successful.

  FIG. 212 (8) shows a state in which the hold icon g2 has moved downward. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated above the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. In addition, the promotion icon n1 is displayed so that a part of the shoji k overlaps. The promotion icon n1 includes a character string image of “LV UP” in a horizontally long rectangular frame, and after the deletion of the shoji k, the aspect of the icon is displayed in a manner having a higher hit than before the display of the shoji k starts. Is displayed (when the change production is successful). In addition, Yoshimune m1 is erased during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Elimination of Yoshimune m1 is the end of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 212 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. The lower end portions of "decoration 6" and "decoration 5" are overlapped by shoji k and stopped, but the lower end portions of these are not displayed in shades. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In the case of FIG. 212 (10), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 not shown. Show the situation. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 212 (10), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e2 and the hold icons g3 and g4 are being moved. In this way, even when the icon shadow picture is displayed, the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon movement animation are displayed.

  FIG. 212 (11) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decrease animation and the on-hold icon movement animation have ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 212 (11), the variation icon (in this example, variation icon e2) is displayed in a display size larger than the hold icon.

  FIG. 212 (12) shows a state in which the countdown display o is started to be displayed. The countdown display o is displayed above the shoji k, includes an image representing the number of seconds until the shadow display of the icon ends in a horizontally long rectangular frame, and notifies the time until the shadow display of the icon ends. It is a display. In FIG. 212 (12), the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “21.50”, and it is reported that an effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 21.50 seconds is started. Moreover, in FIG. 212 (12), the change production | presentation which changes the display mode of Shoji k is started. The change effect of this example is an animation in which a character image of Kunoichi (hereinafter referred to as "Kunoichi") m3 throws a shuriken image (hereinafter referred to as "shuriken") m4 toward shoji k which is a target of change (change animation) Is displayed. The display start of m3 is the start of the change effect of this example. The change effect of this example may be started simultaneously with the start of the display of the countdown display o, may be started before the start of the display of the countdown display o, or is started after the display of the countdown display o It is also good. Further, in FIG. 212 (12), the hold of the special view 1 is increased by one, so the hold icon g5 is newly displayed. The hold icon g5 corresponding to the hold increased while displaying the shoji k is also displayed as a shadow. In addition, m2 and m4 of the foreword, which are shown in FIG. 212 (12), are also images for predicting that the aspect of the shoji k changes.

  FIG. 212 (13) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. Unlike the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6), the shuriken m4 is not displayed in a shadow picture because it is displayed overlapping with the shoji k. As described above, the display of the change animation included in the change effect for changing the display mode of the shoji k is not displayed as a shadow picture. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “21.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 21.00 seconds.

  FIG. 212 (14) shows a state in which the display mode of the shoji k is changing while the change effect is being executed. When the shuriken m4 reaches the central portion of the shoji k, the shuriken m4 is erased and overlapped with the shoji k to display the effect image p1. The countdown display o also includes an image representing the number of seconds of “20.50”, and it is reported that an effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 20.50 seconds is started.

  FIG. 212 (15) shows a state in which the effect image p1 is erased and the display mode of the shoji k changes to mode 3. Note that the display mode of the shoji k may change during display of the effect image p1, or the display mode of the shoji k may change after the effect image p1 is erased. In addition, after the change of the display mode of the shoji k, m3 of the picture is erased. Erasure of m3 is the end of the change effect of this example. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "20.00", and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 20.00 seconds.

  FIG. 212 (16) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. The change effect of this example is an animation (change animation) in which a character image of a princess (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) m5 throws a heart image (hereinafter referred to as “heart”) m6 toward an icon as a change target. Is displayed. The princess m5 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the princess m5 is the start of the change effect of this example. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “12.50”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 12.50 seconds.

  FIG. 212 (17) shows a state in which the change animation of the change effect is displayed. The heart m6 is displayed so as to overlap with the shoji k and is displayed as a shadow picture. The heart m6 of the shadow picture is displayed in black similarly to the icon of the shadow picture. As described above, in the change animation included in the change presentation, at least a part of the image of the change animation is displayed as a shadow picture in a part of the scene. The heart m6 is displayed above the fluctuation icon e2 and moves downward toward the fluctuation icon e2. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "12.00", and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 12.00 seconds.

  Thus, when a change effect is performed, at least a part of the display of the change animation (for example, the heart m6) is displayed as a shadow picture in the change animation scene shown in FIG. 212 (17). In the scene shown in 16), the display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) of the change animation is not displayed as a shadow picture. In addition, after the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (16) to (18) are performed, the icon has a greater hit reliability than after the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8) are performed. It is easy to be displayed in the high aspect of The pachinko machine 100 can identify the type of the change effect by comparing the scenes that are not shadow images of the change effect, and can have an expectation as to which change effect is being performed. Also, the flying object (Heart m6) becomes a shadow in the vicinity of the icon, making identification of the icon of the change target more difficult than when not a shadow, making the icon look more carefully and notice the decrease in the number of reservations etc. You can

  FIG. 212 (18) shows a state immediately after the heart m6 collides with the fluctuation icon e2. The icon targeted for the change effect in this example is the change icon e2, and after the heart m6 collides with the change icon e2, the heart m6 is erased, and the change effect ends. Although the change effect in this example is successful, the player can not recognize in which mode the change icon g2 is displayed as a shadow picture. Further, in FIG. 212 (18), the movable body 700 has moved to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 700 has an annular shape, and a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible from the inside of the annular ring of the movable body 700. In the change effect of the fluctuation icon, the movable body 700 moves to a position in front of the fluctuation icon, and the fluctuation icon can be visually recognized through the inside of the annular ring of the movable body 700. In addition, after moving to a position before the variation icon, the movable body 700 changes from the aspect 1 (white) emission to the aspect 5 (red) emission. The movable body 700 may emit light to the aspect 5 before the start of movement, or may emit light to the aspect 5 during movement. By the luminescent color of the movable body 700, it is possible to notify in which manner the variation icon is displayed after the shoji k is erased. In the present example, the variable icon e2 is displayed in the same mode 5 as the light emission mode of the movable body 700 after the removal of the shoji k. As described above, in the case of the change effect on the fluctuation icon, the operation effect of the movable body 700 is executed. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “11.50”, and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 11.50 seconds.

  FIG. 212 (19) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. Elimination of the princess m5 is the end of the change effect of this example. Further, the promotion icon n2 is displayed above the promotion icon n1 so that a part thereof overlaps with the shoji k. The promoted icon n2 includes a character string image of “LV UP” in a horizontally long rectangular frame, and is displayed when the aspect of the icon changes to a high hit reliability aspect. The promotion icon n2 has the same display as the promotion icon n1. Also, the movable body 700 returns to the initial position, and the movable body 700 emits light in aspect 1. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "09.50", and it is reported that an effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 9.50 seconds is started.

  FIG. 212 (20) shows a state in which change effect is changed in which the display mode of the display area UI changes. When the change effect of this example is started, the background of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes black, and two display screens displayed on the entire surface in FIG. 212 (19) etc. are displayed side by side . The display screen A on the left side is mode 3 in the display area UI, and the display screen B on the right side is mode 4 in the display area UI. An effect of asking whether the display area UI changes is executed by the display screens A and B. Note that both of the display screens A and B include a shoji k. Further, the countdown display o included in the display screens A and B includes an image representing the number of seconds of "05.00", and it is informed that the effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 5.00 seconds is started ing.

  FIG. 212 (21) shows a state in which the display screen A is erased and the display screen B is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the display screen B is displayed at the center, it is suggested that the display area UI changes to aspect 4. In addition, the countdown display o included in the display screen B includes an image representing the number of seconds of "04.50", and it is notified that the effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 4.50 seconds is started .

  FIG. 212 (22) shows a state in which the change effect in which the display mode of the display area UI changes is ended. When the display screen B is displayed on the full screen of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the change effect of this example ends. The display area UI is changed to mode 4 (shown by cross hatching in FIGS. 212 to 229). Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “04.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 4.00 seconds. The display area UI of this example is displayed as a notice of symbol variation display corresponding to the variation icon e2. The display area UI may be displayed as a preview notice of symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon.

  FIG. 212 (23) shows a state where the countdown by the countdown display o is completed. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "00.00", and it is notified that an effect of ending the shadow picture display is started. Note that the countdown display o may display a time from the end of the shadow display to the start of the effect that the aspect of the icon changes.

  FIG. 212 (24) shows a state where the effect of ending the shadow picture display has been started. This effect is started when the countdown display o is erased, and a character string image of "GO !!" is displayed instead of the countdown display o. Further, at the start of this effect, the promotion icons n1 and n2 move above the icon whose form has changed (in this example, the fluctuation icon e2).

  FIG. 212 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which Shoji k opens to the left and right is displayed. With the opening of the shoji k, the suspension icons g3 and g4 that do not overlap with the shoji k are not displayed in a shadow picture. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 212 (25), a part of the hold icon g 5 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, and the entire hold icon g 5 is displayed as a shadow picture. Thus, when at least a part of the icon is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, the icon may be displayed as a shadow picture. The icon may be displayed as a shadow picture only in the portion overlapping the shoji k, or when the area of the portion overlapping the shoji k in the entire area of the icon is less than half, the icon is a shadow picture It may not be displayed. Further, the promotion icons n1 and n2 move downward toward the fluctuation icon e2. In FIG. 212 (25), the promotion icon n <b> 1 is displayed overlapping with part of the shadow picture variation icon e <b> 2.

  FIG. 212 (26) shows a state in which the shoji k has been erased and the effect image p2 is displayed overlapping the fluctuation icon e2. In addition, the suspension icon g5 is also not displayed as a shadow picture due to the deletion of the shoji k. Further, the promotion icons n1 and n2 are erased after the collision with the fluctuation icon e2, and the effect image p2 is displayed. In FIG. 212 (26), the promotion effect of the icon in which the aspect of the variation icon e2 changes to the aspect with high hit probability is performed. Since the display mode of the change icon becomes clear after the shoji k is erased, the countdown display o may be a display that displays the time until the display mode of the change icon becomes clear. At the timing when the display mode of the variation icon becomes clear, the promotion effect of the icon may be performed. The countdown display o may display the time until the promotion effect of the icon is started. Note that the promoted icons n1 and n2 may be displayed only in the state where the icons are displayed as shadows. In general, chances-up effects such as change effects are more reliable when performed in the second half of the symbol variation display (for example, when performed in the first half, chances are about to become the pseudo ream 2 On the other hand, when it is performed in the second half, the icon is configured to change to a pseudo ream 3 or a super reach effect or a mode with high reliability. In this example, since the promotion effects of the icons are collectively performed after the end of the shadow display, the player who is grasping the above general feeling has a sense of expectation for the digestion (erase) of the promotion icons n1 and n2. You can

  FIG. 212 (27) shows a state in which the effect image p2 is erased. The deletion of the effect image p2 makes the fluctuation icon e2 visible. The variation icon e2 is displayed in the fifth aspect (red). Further, the change effect sound of “Tsu” is outputted from the speaker 120. In this example, when the change effect is performed in a state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the change effect effect is performed after the end of the shadow picture display of the icon. The change effect presentation includes an effect image p2 and a change effect sound. The pachinko machine 100 can give the player a sense of expectation for the shadow state while giving the player a feeling that the expectation has suddenly risen when the icon changes from the shadow state to the non-shadow state. When the effect image p2 is erased and the effect sound is output, the promotion effect ends. The promotion effect of this example includes an effect effect.

  FIG. 212 (28) shows a state where the fluctuation icon e2 moves downward and is placed on the top of the pedestal image.

  As described above, in the effect example, in the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the change effect of changing the display mode of the icon is performed. In the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8) are performed and the outline is displayed as a jagged shadow picture after the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture is ended After the state where the icon g2 (variation icon e2) is displayed as the shadow picture is over, the outline may be displayed in the jagged mode 3 and the icon is displayed as the shadow picture as shown in FIG. 212 (16). After the state where the change effect shown in (18) is performed and the icon is displayed as a shadow is over, the icon is displayed as a shadow with the reserved icon g2 (variation icon e2) whose outline has been displayed as a jagged shadow. The outline may be displayed in the jagged aspect 4 after the end of the movement state. Also, if only the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8) are performed with the pending icon g2 (the change icon e2) as a target, before the display of the shoji k is performed after the change effect is performed. In the mode 3, the icons (in the present example, the hold icon g2 and the change icon e2) displayed in the mode 1 are displayed in the mode 3 after the shoji k2 is erased (the shadow image display of the icon ends). When only the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8) are performed on the pending icon g2 (the change icon e2), the state before the display of the shoji k is performed after the change effect is performed. Also in the case where the icon (in this example, the hold icon g2 and the change icon e2) displayed in the is displayed in any of the modes 4 to 7 after the shoji k2 is deleted (the shadow image display of the icon ends). is there. According to the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to have a sense of expectation until the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

  For example, when the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, the change icon shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8) changes the form (circle shape) of the reserve icon g2 from a circular form 1 to a form 3 of jagged. As a result of the change effect shown in FIGS. 212 (16) to (18), the holding icon g2 changes from the aspect 3 in which the outline is jagged to the aspect 5 in which the outline is jagged. In this example, since the change effect for the same icon is performed twice while the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the promotion effect of the icon is changed twice for the change effect after the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture ends. It is done collectively.

  The change animation of the change effect shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) is a display including the arrow m2, and the change animation of the change effect shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17) includes the heart m6. The arrow m2 and the heart m6 have different shapes. The pachinko machine 100 can make it easy to identify the type of change effect. In addition, the arrow m2 of the change animation of the change effect shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) and the heart m6 of the change animation of the change effect shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17) Alternatively, they may be displayed in the same shape (for example, a circle, an ellipse, etc.) when displayed as a shadow picture.

  Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 212 (1) to (28), a change effect is performed for the hold icon, and if the hold icon becomes a change icon, a promotion effect in which the mode of the change icon changes is If the icon is displayed as a fluctuating icon in the default (white circle) mode, the shadow display of the icon is started, the change effect for the icon is performed, and the shadow display of the icon is performed. A promotion effect may be performed in which the change icon changes after the end. Although the change effect is performed when the icon is displayed as a pending icon while the icon is displayed as a shadow icon, the change effect continues as a failure effect, and after the end of the icon shadow display, the icon is the default change icon. It may be displayed. Also, when the icon of the second display mode (for example, the mode of the jagged outline (mode of the variation icon shown in FIG. 212 (25))) is displayed after the state in which the icon is displayed in shadow is over. The display mode of the icon may change to another display mode (a mode 5 of the variable icon shown in FIG. 212 (27)).

  Next, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 (1) is a view showing the positional relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in the front-rear direction. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as "front" (front, front, front, etc.), and the reverse is "rear" (rear, rear) Side, rear face etc. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed, for example, on an island facility, the vertical upper side as viewed from the player is "upper" (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and the reverse is "lower" (lower, lower, Lower end, etc.). Also, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the left side (left side, left side, left end, etc.) of the player is viewed from the player, and the reverse is right side (right side, right side, etc.) And the right edge).

  FIG. 213 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 are viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. The positions of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 in the front-rear relationship are, in order from the rear side, the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 702, and the movable body 700. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are disposed in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 199.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 213 (1), the movable body 702 has movable portions 702a and 702b. The movable portion 702 a is disposed on the left side of the movable body 702, and the movable portion 702 b is disposed on the right side of the movable body 702. The movable portion 702a has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and is disposed so that the plane of the flat plate is orthogonal to an imaginary straight line extending in the front-rear direction. Similarly, it has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and the plane of the flat plate is disposed to be orthogonal to an imaginary straight line extending in the front-rear direction. A part of the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, "Yatsushiro") is written on the flat plate surface of the movable part 702a, and the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like on the flat plate surface of the effect movable body 702b. A part (in this example, "general") is written. In addition, full color LEDs are disposed on flat surfaces of the movable portions 702a and 702b, and the movable body 702 can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (1), the movable body 702 emits light in aspect 1 (white). The right end of the movable portion 702a located at the initial position is in contact with the left end of the movable portion 702b located at the initial position, and the movable portion 702a is movable leftward from the initial position. Is movable from the initial position to the right. For example, a stepping motor is used as a drive source of the movable parts 702a and 702b. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (1), the movable portion 702a is positioned at the left end of the movement range, and the movable portion 702b is positioned at the right end of the movement range.

  The movable body 700 has an annular shape, and a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized through the annular inside of the movable body 700. Further, the movable body 700 has a full color LED, and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (1), the movable body 700 emits light in aspect 1.

  Drive control (movement control) of the movable bodies 700 and 702 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the movable bodies 700 and 702 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 700 will be described using FIGS. 213 (2) and (3). FIG. 213 (2) shows a state where the movable body 700 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 700 is below the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 700 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move vertically in the plane parallel to the display screen in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 213 (3) shows a state in which the movable body 700 has moved upward. An upward arrow illustrated below the movable body 700 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the movable body 700. Further, a circular diagram shown in the lower part of the figure represents the initial position of the movable body 700. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (3), the movable body 700 is located at the upper end of the movement range. The movable body 700 may be movable upward from the position in FIG. 213 (3). When the movable body 700 is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized through the inside of the annular ring of the movable member 700.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 702 will be described using FIGS. 213 (4) to (6). FIG. 213 (4) shows the movable body 702 in the initial position. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (4), the movable parts 702a and 702b are located at the initial position, and the right end of the movable part 702a is in contact with the left end of the movable part 702b. The initial position of the movable body 702 is above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 702 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move vertically in a plane parallel to the display screen in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 213 (5) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward. The downward arrow illustrated below the movable body 702 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the movable body 702. Further, a rectangular diagram shown in the upper side in the drawing represents the initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (5), the movable body 702 is located at the lower end of the movement range. In addition, the movable body 702 may be movable below the position in FIG. 213 (5).

  FIG. 213 (6) shows a state in which the movable portion 702a has moved to the left and the movable portion 702b has moved to the right. A left-pointing arrow shown superimposed on the movable portion 702a represents the trajectory and moving direction of the movable portion 702a, and a left-pointing arrow shown superimposed on the movable portion 702a represents the trajectory and moving direction of the movable portion 702a. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (6), the movable portion 702a is located at the left end of the movement range, and the movable portion 702b is located at the right end of the movement range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 213 (6), the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702a and the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702b are the same. The movable portion 702a may be movable leftward from the position in FIG. 213 (6), and the movable portion 702b may be movable rightward from the position in FIG. 213 (6). It is also good.

  FIG. 213 (7) shows a state in which the movable bodies 700 and 702 are started from the initial position. In the figure, a circular diagram illustrated below represents the initial position of the movable body 700, and a rectangular diagram illustrated above represents the initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (7), the movable body 700 is stopped at the uppermost position of the movement range, and the movable body 702 is stopped at the lowermost position of the movement range. The movable body 702a is located at the left end of the movement range, and the movable body 702b is located at the right end of the movement range.

  Next, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described using FIG. 213 (8). FIG. 213 (8) shows a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special view 1 change game. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and in the fifth symbol display area h, the variable display of the fifth symbol is displayed. A white circular variation icon e0 is displayed in the variation icon display area e, and suspension icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special view 1 suspension icon display area f. In addition, although FIG. 212 and below demonstrate the presentation example performed in connection with execution of a special figure 1 fluctuation game, such presentation may be performed in connection with execution of a special figure 2 fluctuation game. The pachinko machine 100 may have a movable body in addition to the movable bodies 700 and 702. A display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be disposed on these movable bodies.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 (1) to (28), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 214 (1) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (28). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 214 (2) to (28) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (28).

  FIG. 214 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  FIG. 214 (3) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. The start of the animation that the door j opens is the start of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 214 (4) shows a state where a treasure chest image (hereinafter referred to as “treasure chest”) n 3 has appeared from the position where the door j was displayed after the door j is opened. In the figure, the arrow illustrated at the lower right of the treasure box n3 represents the movement direction and movement trajectory of the treasure box n3.

  FIG. 214 (5) shows a state in which the treasure chest n3 is in the display area UI and is moved to the right of the variation icon display area e. In the figure, the arrow illustrated at the upper right of the treasure chest n3 represents the movement direction and the movement trajectory of the treasure chest n3. The change target of the change presentation of this example is the change icon e2.

  FIG. 214 (6) shows a state where the treasure chest n3 is in the display area UI and is stopped on the right side of the variation icon display area e.

  FIG. 214 (7) shows a state where the treasure chest n3 is open. From the treasure chest n3, a string image of "superheat" appears.

  FIG. 214 (8) shows a state where the variation icon e2 is changed from the aspect 5 to the aspect 6 (gold, shown by vertical hatching in FIGS. 212 to 229). When the fluctuation icon e2 changes to the sixth aspect, the speaker 120 outputs a change effect sound of "kakeen", and the movable body 700 emits light to the sixth aspect (gold) which is the same aspect as the fluctuation icon e2. Further, the treasure box n3 is erased prior to the change of the aspect of the change icon e2. The deletion of the treasure chest n3 is the end of the change effect of this example. As described above, the change effect may be performed even after the icon is displayed as a shadow picture and is not displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 214 (9) shows a state where the start effect of the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect that urges the player to press the chance button 136. In the start effect of the button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although illustration is omitted, prior to the start of the button effect, “decoration 6” is displayed on the symbol display areas 208a and 208c as a temporary stop (swing fluctuation display), and reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the display area UI, the pedestal image in the special view 1 reserved icon display area, all the reserved icons, and the door j are erased. In addition, after the movable body 700 emits light in the sixth aspect, the light emission of the first aspect is obtained.

  FIG. 214 (10) shows a state in which the button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and the meter image showing the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed therebelow, and the strong button effect is started. Also, the button image is displayed in red. Further, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in red, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 214 (11) shows a state where an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective is started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 214 (12) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 700 emits light in mode 6, moves upward, and stops. A family crest image is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the family crest image can be visually recognized through an annular ring of the movable body 700. In addition, in the button effect of this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 214 (13) shows a state where the movable body 702 moves downward and the movable portions 702 a and 702 b move left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in mode 6, moves downward, and stops.

  FIG. 214 (14) shows a state in which the sword reach of the super reach effect is started after the movable bodies 700 and 702 move to the initial position. After the movable bodies 700 and 702 move to the initial position, the lighting of aspect 1 is performed. In the sword reach effect production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and the image of the crescent moon is displayed on the upper left of the display area. Also, at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "Kengo reach" is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a pavilion is displayed on the lower left side thereof. A character image of a swordsman (hereinafter referred to as "wordsman") is displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 214 (15) shows a state where the reach effect of swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 214 (16) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of "[Swordsman] Fufufu" is displayed as the word display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 214 (17) shows a state in which the balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the temple and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[殿] 成 る 敗 し く れ る” is displayed as a message display of the message.

  FIG. 214 (18) shows a state in which an animation in which the lord and the swordsman have cut each other is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (19) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is started to be displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (20) shows a state in which a button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 move to near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button introduction animation of this example ends when the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap.

  FIG. 214 (21) shows a state in which the button introduction animation has ended. After the button images q1 and q2 overlap with each other, a strong button image in a mode simulating a state in which the chance button 136 protrudes upward and a meter image indicating the operation valid period are displayed therebelow. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press !!” are displayed at the top of the strong button image, the chance button 136 emits light in mode 5 (red), and the pressed surface protrudes upward. A press is prompted. The strong button image is displayed in the fifth aspect.

  FIG. 214 (22) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. The meter image meter showing the remaining time of the operation effective period is decreasing.

  FIG. 214 (23) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once in the operation effective period, the button image and the meter image are erased, and the result of the sword reach is displayed. In this example, since the temple is won by the swordsman, an animation in which the temple is won is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the upper left corner of the display area, an effect image including the characters "holiday" is displayed. Is displayed. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period of this example, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 214 (24) shows a state in which the movable body 700 emits light in aspect 7 (rainbow color, shown by horizontal hatching in FIG. 212 to FIG. 229) and moves upward. A family crest image is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the family crest image can be visually recognized through an annular ring of the movable body 700.

  FIG. 214 (25) shows a state where the movable body 702 moves downward and the movable portions 702 a and 702 b move left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in mode 7, moves downward, and stops.

  In FIG. 214 (26), after the movable members 700 and 702 return to the initial position, the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is resumed, and the symbol display area 208a to 208c is a big hit symbol aspect. "Decoration 6" indicates a state where temporary stop display is shown. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 214 (27) shows a state in which the super reach effect has ended. The super reach effect ends when the character images of the lord and the swordsman are erased.

  FIG. 214 (28) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The decision result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit ("special figure C"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" which is a jackpot symbol aspect indicating that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-6-6" is stopped and displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 215 (1) to (20). FIGS. 215 (1) to (20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 215 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. Stop display (fixed display, main stop display) is displayed. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 215 (1), the hold icons g1 to g4 are displayed as aspect 1.

  In the case of FIG. 215 (2), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 not shown. Show the situation. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e1 and the variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f , The reserve icon g3 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f moves to the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, and the fourth area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f The hold icon g4 displayed on the screen moves to the third area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 215 (2), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are being moved. In the drawing, the arrows illustrated on the left of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 indicate the movement direction and movement locus of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4. Further, while the reserved icon moving animation is being displayed, four pedestal images of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f extend upward.

  FIG. 215 (3) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decreasing animation and the on-hold icon moving animation have ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 215 (3), the variation icon is displayed in a display size larger than the hold icon.

  FIG. 215 (4) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  FIG. 215 (5) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m1 shoots the arrow m2 toward the icon as the change object is displayed. The Yoshimune m1 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the Yoshimune m1 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, even in the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed.

  FIG. 215 (6) shows a state in which the change animation of the change effect is displayed. The arrow m2 is displayed so as to overlap the icon (in FIG. 215 (6), the change icon e1 and the hold icon g2).

  FIG. 215 (7) shows the state immediately after the scene in which the arrow m2 is stuck in the hold icon g2. The icon of the target of the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g2, the arrow m2 is erased and the outline of the hold icon g2 is circular from aspect 1 (for example, white) The outline changes to jagged aspect 3 (for example, blue), and an animation is displayed in which the hold icon g2 jumps upward. In the drawing, the upward arrow illustrated below the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. Also, when the icon changes to mode 3, the change effect sound of “kittor” is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 215 (8) shows a state in which the hold icon g2 has moved downward and returned to the pedestal image. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated above the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. In addition, in a state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, the promotion icon n1 is not displayed even if the display mode of the icon changes.

  FIG. 215 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In the case of FIG. 215 (10), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 not shown. Show the situation. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 215 (10), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e2 and the hold icons g3 and g4 are being moved.

  FIG. 215 (11) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decrease animation and the on-hold icon move animation have ended.

  FIG. 215 (12) shows a state in which the hold of the special view 1 is increased by one and the hold icon g5 is newly displayed. The hold icon g5 is displayed in the first aspect.

  FIG. 215 (13) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which the princess m5 throws the heart m6 toward the icon to be changed is displayed. The princess m5 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the princess m5 is the start of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 215 (14) shows a state in which the change animation of the change effect is displayed. The heart m6 is displayed above the fluctuation icon e2 and moves downward toward the fluctuation icon e2.

  FIG. 215 (15) shows a state immediately after the heart m6 collides with the fluctuation icon e2. The target icon of the change effect in this example is the change icon e2, and after the heart m6 collides with the change icon e2, the heart m6 is erased and the change icon g2 changes to a mode 5 (for example, red). The movable body 700 has moved to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the fluctuation icon g2 can be visually recognized through the inside of the annular ring of the movable body 700. In addition, after moving to a position before the variation icon, the movable body 700 changes from the aspect 1 (white) emission to the aspect 5 (red) emission. By the luminescent color of the movable body 700, it can be informed which mode the fluctuation icon has changed. The operation of the movable body 700 when the change effect directed to the fluctuation icon is performed is the same regardless of whether the icon is displayed as a shadow picture. In addition, when the icon changes to mode 5, the change effect sound of “kitakitta” is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 215 (16) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. Elimination of the princess m5 is the end of the change effect of this example. Also, the movable body 700 returns to the initial position, and the movable body 700 emits light in aspect 1.

  FIG. 215 (17) shows a state where a change effect in which the display mode of the display area UI changes is started. When the change effect of this example is started, the background of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes black, and two display screens displayed on the entire surface in FIG. 215 (16) etc. are displayed side by side . The display screen A on the left side is mode 3 in the display area UI, and the display screen B on the right side is mode 4 in the display area UI. An effect of asking whether the display area UI changes is executed by the display screens A and B.

  FIG. 215 (18) shows a state in which the display screen A is erased and the display screen B is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the display screen B is displayed at the center, it is suggested that the display area UI changes to aspect 4.

  FIG. 215 (19) shows a state in which the change effect in which the display mode of the display area UI changes is ended. When the display screen B is displayed on the full screen of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the change effect of this example ends. The display area UI is changed to aspect 4.

  FIG. 215 (20) shows that the effect is continuously executed although illustration is omitted. For example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) are executed after FIG. 215 (19).

  As described above, even when the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect may be performed to change the display mode of the icon. When the change effect is performed in a state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, the change effect effect is performed after the end of the change effect.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 216 (1) to (7). FIGS. 216 (1) to 216 (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 216 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (1) to (7) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 216 (2) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed.

  FIG. 216 (3) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which a character image of a ninja (hereinafter referred to as "ninja") m7 throws a scroll image (hereinafter referred to as "a scroll") m8 toward a holding icon is displayed . The display start of the ninja m7 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, even in the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed.

  FIG. 216 (4) shows a state where the scroll m 8 has reached the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 216 (5) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The scroll m8 is in an open state, and is displayed overlapping the hold icons g2 to g4. In addition, the scroll m8 does not overlap the fluctuation icon e1 that is not the target of the change effect. The target of the change effect in this example may be a change icon. In this case, the variation icon may overlap with the scroll m8.

  FIG. 216 (6) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. Erasure of ninja m7 and scroll m8 is the end of the change effect of this example. In addition, when the change effect is finished, the outline of the reserved icon g2 that is the target of the change effect changes from circular aspect 1 (for example, white) to outline aspect 3 (for example, blue). Note that when the icon changes to mode 3, the speaker 120 may output an effect sound of “quit”.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 216 (7), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after the hold icon g2 becomes a change icon, a change effect may be performed to change the change icon. In this case, the icon may be displayed as a shadow picture, or the icon may not be displayed as a shadow picture. In addition, in the change effect for which the reserved icon is the target, a certain image (in this example, the scroll m8) in the change effect may not overlap with the change icon, or may overlap with the change icon. . In addition, in the change effect of the change icon target, a certain image (in this example, scroll m8) in the change effect may not overlap with the hold icon, or may overlap with the hold icon .

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 216 (8) to (14) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 216 (8) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (8) to (14) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 216 (9) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows.

  FIG. 216 (10) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which the ninja m7 throws the scroll m8 toward the hold icon is displayed. The display start of the ninja m7 is the start of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 216 (11) shows a state in which the scroll m 8 has reached the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 216 (12) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The scroll m8 is in an open state, and is displayed overlapping the shadow drawing retention icons g2 to g4. Note that shadow picture retention icons g2 to g4 may be displayed so as to be transparent from the scroll m8. In addition, the scroll m8 does not overlap the fluctuation icon e1 that is not the target of the change effect. The target of the change effect in this example may be a change icon. In this case, the variation icon may overlap with the scroll m8.

  FIG. 216 (13) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. Erasure of ninja m7 and scroll m8 is the end of the change effect of this example. Further, when the change effect is finished, the outline of the holding icon g2 which has been the object of the change effect changes from circular to jagged.

  Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, FIG. 216 (14) has shown that presentation is performed continuously. For example, after the hold icon g2 becomes a change icon, a change effect (for example, effects shown in FIGS. 212 (9) to (28)) for changing the change icon may be performed. In addition, in the change effect for which the reserved icon is the target, a certain image (in this example, the scroll m8) in the change effect may not overlap with the change icon, or may overlap with the change icon. . In addition, in the change effect of the change icon target, a certain image (in this example, scroll m8) in the change effect may not overlap with the hold icon, or may overlap with the hold icon .

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 216 (15) to (20). 216 (15) to (20) show an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 216 (15) shows that, for example, the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (15) to (20) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 216 (16) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed.

  FIG. 216 (17) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which the ninja m7 throws the shuriken m9 toward the hold icon is displayed. The display start of the ninja m7 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, even in the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed. The target icon for the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2. The target icon of the change effect of this example may be a change icon.

  FIG. 216 (18) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The shuriken m9 is erased when it collides with the hold icon g2, and is overlapped with the hold icon g2 to display the effect image p3.

  FIG. 216 (19) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. The deletion of the ninja m7 and the effect image p3 is the end of the change presentation of this example. In addition, when the change effect is finished, the outline of the reserved icon g2 that is the target of the change effect changes from circular aspect 1 (for example, white) to outline aspect 3 (for example, blue). Note that when the icon changes to mode 3, the speaker 120 may output an effect sound of “quit”.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 216 (20), the effect is continuously executed. For example, after the hold icon g2 becomes a change icon, a change effect may be performed to change the change icon. In this case, the icon may be displayed as a shadow picture, or the icon may not be displayed as a shadow picture.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 (1) to (7), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 217 (1) to (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 217 (1) shows that, for example, the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 (1) to (7) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 217 (2) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed.

  FIG. 217 (3) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m10 passes in front of the icon is displayed. Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping on the door j. The display start of Yoshimune m10 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, even in the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed.

  FIG. 217 (4) shows a change animation of change presentation, in which Yoshimune m 10 is moving toward the icon.

  FIG. 217 (5) shows a state in which the change animation of the change effect is displayed. The target icon of this example change effect is the hold icon g2, and the outline of the hold icon g2 is circular after the Yoshimune m10 passes the hold icon g2, the outline 3 of the outline is jagged (for example, white) It changes to blue). Note that when the icon changes to mode 3, the speaker 120 may output an effect sound of “quit”.

  FIG. 217 (6) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. Elimination of Yoshimune m10 is the end of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 217 (7) shows that although the illustration is omitted, the effect is continuously executed. For example, after the hold icon g2 becomes a change icon, a change effect may be performed to change the change icon. In this case, the icon may be displayed as a shadow picture, or the icon may not be displayed as a shadow picture.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 217 (8) to (14) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 217 (8) shows that, for example, the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (8) to (14) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 217 (9) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows.

  FIG. 217 (10) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m10 passes in front of the icon is displayed. Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping on the door j. The display start of Yoshimune m10 is the start of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 217 (11) shows a change animation of change presentation, in which Yoshimune m 10 is moving toward the icon.

  FIG. 217 (12) shows a state in which the change animation of the change effect is displayed. The Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, and the Yoshimune m10 is displayed with a shadow. In this example, a scene is included in which the entire display of the change animation of the change effect (the entire Yoshimune m10) is displayed as a shadow picture. The target icon for the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after Yoshimune m10 passes the hold icon g2, the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged.

  FIG. 217 (13) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. Elimination of Yoshimune m10 is the end of the change effect of this example.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 217 (14), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after the hold icon g2 becomes a change icon, a change effect (for example, effects shown in FIGS. 212 (9) to (28)) for changing the change icon may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 (15) to (28), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 217 (15) to (28) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 217 (15) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (14), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 216 (15) to (28) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (14).

  FIG. 217 (16) shows a state in which the display mode of the shoji k has changed during execution of the special figure change game. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "20.00", and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 20.00 seconds.

  FIG. 217 (17) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 217 (18) shows a state in which an animation in which the door j opens is displayed. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “18.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 18.00 seconds.

  FIG. 217 (19) shows a state where the display of the princess m5 is started after the door j is opened. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “17.50”, and it is reported that an effect of ending the shadow picture display of the icon being started after 17.50 seconds.

  In FIG. 217 (20), in the present example in which the door j is closed and the princess m5 has moved to the upper side of the door j, the change presentation is not started immediately after the princess m5 is started to be displayed. The start of the change production is put on hold. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “17.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 17.00 seconds.

  FIG. 217 (21) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 217 (22) shows a state in which an animation in which the door j opens is displayed. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “15.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 15.00 seconds.

  FIG. 217 (23) shows a state in which the display of the bancho character image (hereinafter referred to as "bancho") m11 is started after the door j is opened. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “14.50”, and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon being started after 14.50 seconds.

  In FIG. 217 (24), in the present example in which the door j is closed and the slot length m11 has moved to the upper side of the door j, the display effect is not started immediately after the display of the slot length m11 is started. The start of the change production is put on hold. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "14.00", and it is notified that an effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 14.00 seconds is started.

  FIG. 217 (25) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 217 (26) shows a state where the princess m5 has moved downward. After the princess m5 moves downward and is displayed overlapping the door j, a change effect by the princess m5 is started.

  FIG. 217 (27) shows a state in which the change effect by the princess m5 has been started. Princess m5's thrown heart m6 is moving toward the icon.

  FIG. 217 (28) shows the passage of time. Thereafter, a change effect corresponding to the length m11 is performed, and then, for example, effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) are performed. Thus, the start of the change effect may be suspended. In this case, the princess m5 and the length m11 shown in FIGS. 217 (19) to (24) are displays indicating that the start of the change effect is suspended.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 218 (1) to (7). FIGS. 218 (1) to (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 218 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 218 (1) to (7) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 218 (2) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m1 shoots the arrow m2 toward the icon as the change object is displayed. The Yoshimune m1 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the Yoshimune m1 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, even in the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed.

  FIG. 218 (3) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The arrow m2 is displayed overlapping the icon (in FIG. 218 (3), the fluctuation icon e1).

  FIG. 218 (4) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The arrow m2 is displayed so as to overlap the icon (in FIG. 218 (4), the change icon e1 and the hold icon g2).

  FIG. 218 (5) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The arrow m2 is displayed overlapping with the icon (in FIG. 218 (5), the hold icon g2).

  FIG. 218 (6) shows a state in which the arrow m2 has passed all the icons without sticking to any icon. A change effect in which the arrow m2 does not pierce any icon is a failure effect.

  FIG. 218 (7) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed. Thus, the change effect may be a failure effect in which the aspect of the icon does not change.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 218 (8) to (14). FIGS. 218 (8) to (14) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 218 (8) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 218 (8) to (14) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 218 (9) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In FIG. 218 (9), the variation icon e1 is displayed in a mode 3 in which the outline is jagged. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which the princess m5 throws the heart m6 toward the icon to be changed is displayed. The princess m5 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of Yoshimune m1 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, even in the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed.

  FIG. 218 (10) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The heart m6 is moving above the fluctuation icon e2.

  FIG. 218 (11) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The heart m6 is moving downward toward the fluctuation icon e2.

  FIG. 218 (12) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The heart m6 continues to move downward through the fluctuation icon e2.

  FIG. 218 (13) shows a state immediately before the heart m6 continues to move downward through the fluctuation icon e2 and is erased. A change effect in which the heart m6 is erased without colliding with any icon is a failure effect.

  FIG. 218 (14) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed. Thus, the change effect may be a failure effect in which the aspect of the icon does not change. Further, in the change effect shown in FIGS. 218 (3) to (6) and the change effect of this example shown in FIGS. 218 (9) to (13), the image (arrow m2, heart m6) in the change effect is erased. Location on the display area and the direction to fade out are different. Thereby, it is possible to easily understand which change presentation is the failed change presentation.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 218 (15) to (21). FIGS. 218 (15) to (21) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 218 (15) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 218 (15) to (21) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 218 (16) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m1 shoots the arrow m2 toward the icon as the change object is displayed. The Yoshimune m1 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the Yoshimune m1 is the start of the change effect of this example. In addition, the shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed in shadows.

  FIG. 218 (17) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. A part of the arrow m2 overlaps with the shoji k, and the part is displayed in a shadow picture.

  FIG. 218 (18) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. It overlaps with the shoji k of arrow m2, and the whole is displayed in a shadow picture.

  FIG. 218 (19) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. It overlaps with the shoji k of arrow m2, and the whole is displayed in a shadow picture.

  FIG. 218 (20) shows a state in which the arrow m2 has passed all the icons without sticking to any icon. A change effect in which the arrow m2 does not pierce any icon is a failure effect. In addition, a part (left end) of the arrow m2 does not overlap with the shoji k, and the part is not displayed in a shadow picture. The arrow m2 is erased from the display area in a state in which at least a part is non-shadowed only for a moment while the shoji k is displayed.

  FIG. 218 (21) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed. Thus, the change effect may be a failure effect in which the aspect of the icon does not change.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 218 (22) to (28). FIGS. 218 (22) to (28) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 218 (22) shows that the rendition continues, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4). The effect examples shown in FIG. 218 (22) to (28) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 218 (23) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which the princess m5 throws the heart m6 toward the icon to be changed is displayed. The princess m5 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the princess m5 is the start of the change effect of this example. In addition, the shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed in shadows. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “12.50”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 12.50 seconds.

  FIG. 218 (24) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The heart m6 is moving above the fluctuation icon e2. A part of the heart m6 overlaps with the shoji k, and the part is displayed in a shadow picture. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “12.20”, and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 12.20 seconds.

  FIG. 218 (25) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The heart m6 is moving downward toward the fluctuation icon e2. The heart m6 overlaps with the shoji k and the whole is displayed in a shadow picture. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "12.00", and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 12.00 seconds.

  FIG. 218 (26) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The heart m6 overlaps with the shoji k and the whole is displayed in a shadow picture. The heart m6 continues to move downward through the fluctuation icon e2. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “11.30”, and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started in 11.30 seconds.

  FIG. 218 (27) shows a state immediately before the heart m6 continues to move downward through the fluctuation icon e2 and is erased. A part (bottom end) of the heart m6 does not overlap with the shoji k, and the part is not displayed in a shadow picture. The heart m6 is erased from the display area in a state in which at least a part is non-shadowed only for a moment while the shoji k is displayed. A change effect in which the heart m6 is erased without colliding with any icon is a failure effect. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “11.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 11.00 seconds.

  FIG. 218 (28) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed. Thus, the change effect may be a failure effect in which the aspect of the icon does not change. Moreover, in the failure effects of the change effects shown in FIGS. 218 (16) to (20), the arrow m2 passes to the left of the shoji k, and in the failure effects of the change effects shown in FIGS. 218 (23) to (27) , Heart m6 falls below Shoji k. Thus, by providing a failure effect for each of the change effects, it is possible to make it easy to understand which change effect has failed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 219 (1) to 219 (7). FIGS. 219 (1) to (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 219 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 219 (1) to (7) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 219 (2) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward from the lower end of the display area UI and the display is started. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k.

  FIG. 219 (3) shows a state in which the upper end of the shoji k is displayed. In the figure, the upward and downward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The shoji k vibrates up and down to be displayed, and an effect is performed to ask whether the whole shoji k is displayed and the icon becomes a shadow picture.

  FIG. 219 (4) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The lower end portions of the hold icons g2 to g4 are overlapped with the shoji k, but the hold icons g2 to g4 are not displayed in a shadow picture.

  FIG. 219 (5) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The lower half or more of the hold icons g2 to g4 are overlapped with the shoji k, and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed in shadows. In this example, when half or more of the hold icon is overlapped with the shoji k, the hold icon is displayed in a shadow picture. The lower end portion of the fluctuation icon e1 is overlapped with the shoji k, but the fluctuation icon e2 is displayed as a shadow picture at the same timing as the holding icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadow pictures. In addition. When more than half of the variation icons overlap with the shoji k, the variation icons may be displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 219 (6) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward and the whole shoji k is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The whole of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon g2 to g4 is overlapped with the shoji k2, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon g2 to g4 are displayed in a shadow picture.

  FIG. 219 (7) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (28) may be executed. In this manner, an effect may be performed to ask whether the icon is displayed as a shadow picture.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 219 (8) to (12). FIGS. 219 (8) to (12) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 219 (8) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 219 (8) to (12) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 219 (9) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward from the lower end portion of the display area UI and display is started. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k.

  FIG. 219 (10) shows a state in which the upper end of the shoji k is displayed. In the figure, the upward and downward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The shoji k vibrates up and down to be displayed, and an effect is performed to ask whether the whole shoji k is displayed and the icon becomes a shadow picture.

  FIG. 219 (11) shows a state in which the shoji k moves downward. In the figure, the downward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k.

  FIG. 219 (12) shows a state where the shoji k has moved downward and has been erased. In this example, since the entire shoji k is not displayed but the shoji k is erased, the effect that the icon is displayed as a shadow picture is not started.

  FIG. 219 (13) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed. In this manner, an effect may be performed to ask whether the icon is displayed as a shadow picture.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 219 (14) to (18). FIGS. 219 (14) to (18) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 219 (14) shows a state in which the upper end of the shoji k is displayed at the lower end of the display area UI. In this example, while the display area UI is displayed, the upper end of the shoji k is always displayed. The display area UI may include a part of the shoji k.

  FIG. 219 (15) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 219 (16) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, only one game ball is won in the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 1 variation game is started.

  FIG. 219 (17) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The fluctuation icon e2 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e.

  FIG. 219 (18) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed.

  Thus, in the present effect example, the upper end portion of the shoji k is always displayed while the display area UI is displayed. In addition, the character image that overlaps on the door j is always displayed, the character image displays an animation that pulls up the shoji k upward, and the effect of telling whether the effect that the icon is displayed as a shadow picture is started is displayed. It may be done.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 (1) to 220 (6), a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 220 (1) to 220 (6) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 220 (1) shows that the effect can be continued from the same state as the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example, except that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is two.

  FIG. 220 (2) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed.

  In FIG. 220 (3), since only one game ball is played in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, the reserve icon increase animation in which the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is increased An increase animation) is shown being started. In the third area of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f, the display of the suspension icon g4 corresponding to the increased suspension is started. In the hold increase animation of the present example, the display size of the hold icon started to be displayed at a point is displayed in a gradually enlarging manner.

  FIG. 220 (4) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation is being executed. The display size of the hold icon g4 is gradually increased.

  FIG. 220 (5) shows a state in which the on-hold icon increase animation has ended. The hold icon g4 is displayed in a normal display size.

  FIG. 220 (6) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 (7) to (12). FIGS. 220 (7) to (12) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 220 (7) shows that, for example, it is possible to continue the effect from the same state as the state shown in FIG. 212 (11) except that the number of reservations in special view 1 is two.

  FIG. 220 (8) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g2 and g3 are displayed in shadows.

  In FIG. 220 (9), since only one game ball is played in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, the reserve icon increase animation (the reserve icon increases the reserve icon of the special figure 1 An increase animation) is shown being started. In the third area of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f, the display of the suspension icon g4 corresponding to the increased suspension is started. In the hold increase animation of the present example, the display size of the hold icon started to be displayed at a point is displayed in a gradually enlarging manner. The hold icon g4 in the hold icon increase animation is also displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 220 (10) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation is being performed. The display size of the hold icon g4 is gradually increased. The hold icon g4 in the hold icon increase animation is also displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 220 (11) shows a state in which the on-hold icon increase animation has ended. The hold icon g4 is displayed as a shadow picture in a normal display size.

  FIG. 220 (12) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (12) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 220 (13) to (18). 220 (13) to (18) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 220 (13) shows that, for example, the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 220 (13) to (18) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 220 (14) shows a state in which the upper end of the shoji k is displayed. In the figure, the upward and downward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The shoji k vibrates up and down to be displayed, and an effect is performed to ask whether the whole shoji k is displayed and the icon becomes a shadow picture.

  FIG. 220 (15) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The lower end portions of the hold icons g2 to g4 are overlapped with the shoji k, but the hold icons g2 to g4 are not displayed in a shadow picture. Further, since only one game ball is played in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, the reserve icon increase animation in which the reserve icon of the special figure 1 increases is started. In the fourth area of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f, the display of a suspension icon g5 corresponding to the increased suspension is started. In the hold increase animation of the present example, the display size of the hold icon started to be displayed at a point is displayed in a gradually enlarging manner.

  FIG. 220 (16) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The lower half or more of the hold icons g2 to g4 are overlapped with the shoji k, and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed in shadows. In this example, when half or more of the hold icon is overlapped with the shoji k, the hold icon is displayed in a shadow picture. The lower end portion of the fluctuation icon e1 is overlapped with the shoji k, but the fluctuation icon e2 is displayed as a shadow picture at the same timing as the holding icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadow pictures. In addition. When more than half of the variation icons overlap with the shoji k, the variation icons may be displayed as a shadow picture. In addition, the hold icon g5 in the hold icon increase animation is displayed as a shadow picture at the timing when the other hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as a shadow picture. In addition. When a half or more of the hold icon g5 in the hold icon increase animation in Shoji k is overlapped, the hold icon g5 may be displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 220 (17) shows a state in which the shoji k moves upward and the whole shoji k is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated to the right of the shoji k indicates the movement direction of the shoji k. The whole of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon g2 to g5 is overlapped with the shoji k2, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon g2 to g5 are displayed in a shadow picture. Further, the on-hold icon increase animation is ended, and the on-hold icon g5 is displayed as a shadow picture in a normal display size.

  FIG. 220 (18) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (28) may be executed. Thus, the display period of the on-hold icon increase animation and the display period of the appearance animation of Shoji k may overlap.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 221 (1) to 221 (10). FIGS. 221 (1) to 221 (5) are diagrams showing time-series effect examples by extracting the vicinity of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 221 (1) shows a state in which the change icon e1 and the hold icons 2 to g4 are displayed. In the icon of this example, four characters of “eight”, “fair”, “general”, and “army” are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle (“Yatsushiro Shogun” pattern). Each character is arranged so that the center direction of the circle is down. In the state shown in FIG. 221 (1), the icon is in the normal position (only the upper and lower directions are correct), and only one of the characters "eight", "fair", "general", and "army". Eight "is in the correct position. In addition, the variation icon e1 and the retention icons g3 and g4 are circular in the aspect 1, and the retention icon g2 is the aspect 3 in which the outer contour is jagged in the up, down, left, and right directions.

  Also, in FIGS. 221 (1) to 221 (5), standby animation (standby animation, standby display) of icons is executed. The standby animation is executed during non-execution of the reserve icon decrease animation and the reserve icon movement animation and during the special figure variation game. The standby animation in this example is an animation in which the icon rotates clockwise. In FIGS. 221 (1) to 221 (5), the icon is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, and in the state shown in FIG. 221 (2), "military" is in the normal position, and in the state shown in FIG. 221 (3) "General" is in the normal position, and "No." is in the normal position in the state shown in FIG. 221 (4), and "eight" is in the normal position in the state shown in FIG. 221 (5).

  FIGS. 221 (6) to (10) are diagrams showing time-series effect examples by extracting the vicinity of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the icons are displayed as shadows. As shown in FIG. 222 (6), since the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the player can recognize the outline of the icon but can not recognize the “Yatsushiro general” pattern inside the icon. Also in FIGS. 221 (6) to (10), the standby animation of the icons is executed as in the states shown in FIGS. 221 (1) to (5), but the fluctuation icon e2 and the suspension icons g3 and g4 , The outer shape is a circular shape up and down left and right symmetrical, the internal "Yatsushiro Shogun pattern" is not displayed, it does not contain the scene of the rotation of the animation of the change icon e2 and the hold icons g3 and g4 standby animation, so The player can not recognize that The holding icon g2 is rotated because the outer shape is jagged in the up-down, left-right, and left-right asymmetry, and even if the internal “Yatsushiro Shogun pattern” is not displayed, it includes the scene of the standby animation of the holding icon g2. The player can recognize that.

  In this way, the standby animation for the circular (default) display style icon displayed in a shadow picture is unrecognizable, and the standby animation for a jagged icon with an outer shape that is asymmetrically displayed in the shadow picture is recognized It is possible. As a result, even in the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, it is possible to make the standby animation of the reserved icon targeted for the advance notice for previewing and the icon targeted for notice of the variation concerned noticeable. In addition, when the icon becomes a shadow picture, the default icon does not appear to move during standby animation, and the outline icon looks like moving, so it is easy to understand the icon changed from the default. Become.

  In addition, the standby animation of the icon may be an animation in which the pattern inside the icon (inside the outline) changes the pattern inside the icon as time passes, or the appearance (shape or pattern) of the icon is It may be a changing animation.

As shown in Figs. 221 (6) to (10), display modes of a plurality of types of shadow pictures (for example, a display mode of a circular shadow picture or a display mode of a shadow picture of a jagged edge) in a state where icons are displayed as shadow pictures. The icon can be displayed in any of the display modes.
The display mode of one of the display modes of the plurality of types of shadow pictures is the display mode of the jagged side, and the display mode of one of the display modes of the plurality of types of shadow pictures is the circular display mode). The circular display mode is a default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a certain state (the state in which the icon is displayed, FIG. 214 (9) to (28) until the number of reservations decreases. In a state other than the state shown, the standby display (standby animation) of the icon can be displayed, and in the standby display of the circular icons (in this example, the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g3 and g4), the icons are The standby display in the icon of the jagged display mode (in this example, the hold icon g2) does not include a rotating scene, but includes a scene in which the icon rotates. Thus, the standby display with the jagged icon of the outline includes a scene in which the icon rotates. Here, the certain state may be a certain state other than the state shown in FIGS. 214 (9) to (28) in which the icon is displayed.

In the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the icon may be displayed in the display mode of one type of shadow picture (for example, a circular shadow picture).
The decorative symbol display device 208 can display the standby display of the icon in a state until the number of holdings decreases, and the standby display of the circular shaded icon does not include the scene in which the icon rotates. In addition, the standby display in which the outline is a jagged icon includes a scene in which the icon rotates.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 222 (1) to 222 (6). FIGS. 222 (1) to 222 (6) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 222 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (11), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 222 (1) to 222 (6) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (11).

  FIG. 222 (2) shows a state in which change effects for changing the display mode of the shoji k are started. In the change production of this example, an animation (change animation) in which m3 of the clown throws the shuriken m4 toward the shoji k which is a change target is displayed. The display start of m3 is the start of the change effect of this example. Kunoichi m3 and shuriken m4 are also images that predict that the aspect of shoji k changes. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "21.50", and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 21.50 seconds.

  FIG. 222 (3) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. Since the shuriken m4 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, it is not displayed in the shadow picture. As described above, the display of the change animation included in the change effect for changing the display mode of the shoji k is not displayed as a shadow picture. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “21.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 21.00 seconds.

  FIG. 222 (4) shows a state in which the change animation of the change presentation is displayed and the shuriken m4 passes through the shoji k. The change presentation in this example is a failure presentation in which the aspect of the shoji k does not change. The countdown display o also includes an image representing the number of seconds of “20.50”, and it is reported that an effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 20.50 seconds is started.

FIG. 222 (5) shows a state in which the shuriken m4 is erased after passing through the shoji k.
Since the change presentation of this example is a failure presentation in which the aspect of the shoji k does not change, the shuriken m4 is erased after passing through the shoji k. The countdown display o also includes an image representing the number of seconds of “20.50”, and it is reported that an effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 20.50 seconds is started.

  FIG. 222 (6) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (16) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 222 (7) to (14) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 222 (7) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (11), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 222 (7) to (14) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (11).

  FIG. 222 (8) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change production of this example, an animation (a change animation) in which m3 of the clown throws a shuriken m4 toward Shoji k is displayed. The display start of m3 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, in the example of effects shown in FIGS. 212 (11) to (15) and 222 (2) to (5), the change effect including the mochi m3 and the shuriken m4 is executed as a effect for changing the aspect of the shoji k However, in this example, the change presentation including m3 of the moon and the shuriken m4 is executed as a presentation that changes the aspect of the icon. The change presentation for changing the aspect of the shoji k may be the same as the change presentation for changing the aspect of the icon, or at least a part (for example, at least part of the change animation) may be the same. , And at least some of the scenes may be the same.

  FIG. 222 (9) shows a state in which the change animation of the change effect is displayed. Since the shuriken m4 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, it is not displayed in the shadow picture. As described above, the display of the change animation included in the change effect that changes the display mode of the icon may not be displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 222 (10) shows a state in which after the shuriken m4 collides with the shoji k, the shuriken m4 is erased and overlapped with the shoji k and the effect image p1 is displayed. Due to the effect image p1, the shadow variation icon e1 and the retention icons g2 to g4 become invisible.

  FIG. 222 (11) shows a state immediately after the effect image p1 is erased. The icon of the target of the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after the effect image p1 is deleted, the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged and the hold icon g2 jumps upward. Is displayed. In the drawing, the upward arrow illustrated below the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. An animation in which the hold icon g2 jumps upward is displayed when the change presentation is successful.

  FIG. 222 (12) shows a state in which the hold icon g2 has moved downward. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated above the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2.

  FIG. 222 (13) shows a state in which the hold icon g2 has stopped. Note that m3 may also be displayed other than during change effect execution.

  FIG. 222 (14) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (12) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 222 (15) to (20). FIGS. 222 (15) to (20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 222 (15) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (11), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 222 (15) to (20) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (11).

  FIG. 222 (16) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change production of this example, an animation (a change animation) in which m3 of the clown throws a shuriken m4 toward Shoji k is displayed. The display start of m3 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, in the example of effects shown in FIGS. 212 (11) to (15) and 222 (2) to (5), the change effect including the mochi m3 and the shuriken m4 is executed as a effect for changing the aspect of the shoji k However, in this example, the change presentation including m3 of the moon and the shuriken m4 is executed as a presentation that changes the aspect of the icon. The change presentation for changing the aspect of the shoji k may be the same as the change presentation for changing the aspect of the icon, or at least a part (for example, at least part of the change animation) may be the same. , And at least some of the scenes may be the same.

  FIG. 222 (17) shows a state in which a change animation of change effect is displayed. The shuriken m4 is displayed being overlapped with shoji k and displayed as a shadow picture. Also, as with the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5), (6), 212 (16), and (17), the flying object (Shuriken m4) becomes a shadow in the vicinity of the icon, and the icon of the change target This is more difficult to recognize than in the case of non-shadowing, and you can make the icon look more carefully and notice a decrease in the number of reservations.

  FIG. 222 (18) shows a state in which after the shuriken m4 collides with the shoji k, the shuriken m4 is erased and overlapped with the shoji k and the effect image p4 is displayed. Although a part of the effect image p4 is not overlapped with the shoji k, the entire effect image p4 is displayed as a shadow picture. Also, due to the effect image p4, the shadow variation icon e1 and the retention icons g2 to g4 are overlapped and become invisible. Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (18), there is a scene in which the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture during the change display.

  FIG. 222 (19) shows a state immediately after the effect image p4 is erased. The icon of the target of the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after the effect image p4 is deleted, the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged and the hold icon g2 jumps upward. Is displayed. In the drawing, the upward arrow illustrated below the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. An animation in which the hold icon g2 jumps upward is displayed when the change presentation is successful.

  FIG. 222 (20) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (12) to (14) may be executed.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 223 (1) to (17). Drawing 223 (1)-(17) shows an example of a production of pachinko machine 100 by time series. FIG. 223 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 223 (1) to (17) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 223 (2) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In addition, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and the reservation icons g2 to g5 are displayed in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 223 (3) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the pedestal image f 2 of the second area of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f is expanded and contracted up and down. In the drawing, the upward and downward arrow illustrated on the lower right of the pedestal image indicates that the pedestal image f2 is expanded and contracted vertically. The reserved icon g3 displayed in the second area moves up and down as the pedestal image f2 expands and contracts. The animation in which the pedestal image of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f expands and contracts is a display showing that the pedestal image is expanded upward. In addition, the animation in which the base image of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f expands and contracts may be displayed as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 223 (4) shows a state in which the animation in which the pedestal image f2 extends upward is started. In the figure, an upward arrow illustrated to the lower right of the pedestal image indicates that the pedestal image f2 extends upward. The storage icon g3 displayed in the second area is placed on the upper surface of the pedestal image f2 and moves upward as the pedestal image f2 extends. The animation in which the pedestal image of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f is extended is a display as a prefetch notice for setting the suspension corresponding to the suspension icon displayed so as to be placed on the pedestal image as a preview target.

  FIG. 223 (5) shows a state in which an animation in which the pedestal image f2 extends upward is displayed.

  FIG. 223 (6) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 223 (7) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol have been started along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f , The reserve icon g4 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f moves to the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, and the fourth area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f The hold icon g5 displayed on the screen moves to the third area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 223 (7), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the variation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 are being moved. In the drawing, the arrows illustrated on the left of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 indicate the movement direction and movement locus of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5. Further, while the reserved icon moving animation is being displayed, three pedestal images of a first area, a third area, and a fourth area of the special icon 1 reserved icon display area f extend upward.

  FIG. 223 (8) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decreasing animation and the on-hold icon moving animation have ended. In addition, an animation in which the pedestal image f2 of the second area of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f shrinks downward is displayed, and an animation in which the pedestal image f1 of the first area extends upward is displayed. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area f, the base image of the area where the pending icon corresponding to the pending subject to the advance notice is displayed is extended upward and displayed to perform the advance notice.

  FIG. 223 (9) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 223 (10) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed.

  FIG. 223 (11) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 223 (12) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon is displayed. In the change presentation of this example, an animation (a change animation) in which Yoshimune m1 shoots arrow m2 toward the icon to be changed is displayed, and after the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g3, the first hold icon g3 has a circular shape. From the embodiment, the shell is changed to the second embodiment of the jagged, and is moved upward.

  FIG. 223 (13) shows a state in which the change effect of changing the display mode of the icon has ended. The hold icon g3 moves downward and returns to the pedestal image f1.

  FIG. 223 (14) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e2 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 223 (15) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol have been started along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g3 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e3 and the variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g4 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon g5 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 223 (15), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e3 and the hold icons g4 and g5 are being moved. In the drawing, the arrows illustrated on the left of the fluctuation icon e3 and the hold icons g4 and g5 indicate the movement direction and movement trajectory of the fluctuation icon e3 and the hold icons g4 and g5. In addition, while the reserved icon moving animation is displayed, three pedestal images of the second to fourth regions of the special icon 1 reserved icon display region f extend upward.

  FIG. 223 (16) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decreasing animation and the on-hold icon moving animation have ended. Further, an animation in which the pedestal image f1 of the first area of the special icon 1 reserved icon display area f shrinks downward is displayed, and an animation in which the pedestal image of the variable icon display area e extends upward is displayed. The special figure 1 fluctuation game is the fluctuation game which was the object of the advance notice, and the display in which the pedestal image of the fluctuation icon display area e extends upward is displayed as the notice of the fluctuation.

  FIG. 223 (17) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 (1) to (17), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 224 (1) to (17) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 224 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 224 (1) to (17) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 224 (2) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In addition, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and the reservation icons g2 to g5 are displayed in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 224 (3) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the pedestal image f 2 in the second area of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f is expanded and contracted up and down. In the drawing, the upward and downward arrow illustrated on the lower right of the pedestal image indicates that the pedestal image f2 is expanded and contracted vertically. The reserved icon g3 displayed in the second area moves up and down as the pedestal image f2 expands and contracts. The animation in which the pedestal image of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f expands and contracts is a display showing that the pedestal image is expanded upward. In addition, the animation in which the base image of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f expands and contracts may be displayed as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 224 (4) shows a state in which the animation in which the pedestal image f2 extends upward is started. In the figure, an upward arrow illustrated to the lower right of the pedestal image indicates that the pedestal image f2 extends upward. The storage icon g3 displayed in the second area is placed on the upper surface of the pedestal image f2 and moves upward as the pedestal image f2 extends. The animation in which the pedestal image of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f is extended is a display as a prefetch notice for setting the suspension corresponding to the suspension icon displayed so as to be placed on the pedestal image as a preview target.

  FIG. 224 (5) shows a state in which an animation in which the pedestal image f2 extends upward is displayed.

  FIG. 224 (6) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 224 (7) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol have been started along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f , The reserve icon g4 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f moves to the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, and the fourth area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f The hold icon g5 displayed on the screen moves to the third area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 224 (7), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 are being moved. In the drawing, the arrows illustrated on the left of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 indicate the movement direction and movement locus of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5. Further, while the reserved icon moving animation is being displayed, three pedestal images of a first area, a third area, and a fourth area of the special icon 1 reserved icon display area f extend upward.

  FIG. 224 (8) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decreasing animation and the on-hold icon moving animation have ended. In addition, an animation in which the pedestal image f2 of the second area of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f shrinks downward is displayed, and an animation in which the pedestal image f1 of the first area extends upward is displayed. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area f, the base image of the area where the pending icon corresponding to the pending subject to the advance notice is displayed is extended upward and displayed to perform the advance notice.

  FIG. 224 (9) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 224 (10) shows a state in which the shoji k is displayed during execution of the special figure 1 change game. The fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 are overlapped by the shoji k and displayed as a shadow picture. The pedestal image f1 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the shoji k, but is not displayed in the shadow picture. Thus, the pedestal image is not displayed as a shadow picture during the display of the shoji k, and becomes invisible. This makes it possible to make the icon displayed in a shadow picture stand out.

  FIG. 224 (11) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 224 (12) shows a state in which a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon is displayed. In the change presentation of this example, an animation (a change animation) in which Yoshimune m1 shoots arrow m2 toward the icon to be changed is displayed, and after the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g3, the hold icon g3 has a circular form. The shell changes in a jagged manner and moves upward.

  FIG. 224 (13) shows a state in which the change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has ended. The hold icon g3 is moving downward.

  FIG. 224 (14) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. The lower end portions of "decoration 6" and "decoration 5" are overlapped by shoji k and stopped, but the lower end portions of these are not displayed in shades. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e2 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 224 (15) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol have been started along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g3 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e3 and the variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g4 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon g5 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 224 (15), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e3 and the hold icons g4 and g5 are being moved. In the drawing, the arrows illustrated on the left of the fluctuation icon e3 and the hold icons g4 and g5 indicate the movement direction and movement trajectory of the fluctuation icon e3 and the hold icons g4 and g5. In addition, while the reserved icon moving animation is displayed, three pedestal images of the second to fourth regions of the special icon 1 reserved icon display region f extend upward.

  FIG. 224 (16) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decreasing animation and the on-hold icon moving animation have ended. Also, the fluctuation icon e3 moves upward. The display position of the variation icon e3 is the same as the display position in the state where the icon shown in FIG. 223 (16) is not displayed as a shadow picture. The display in which the fluctuation icon of the shadow moves upward is displayed as a notice of the fluctuation.

  FIG. 224 (17) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (10) to (28) may be executed. The present effect example is different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 223 (1) to 223 (17) in that the icons are displayed as shadows. When the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, the pedestal image is also displayed, and when the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the pedestal image is not displayed. In addition, the movement of the icon is the same between the case where the icon is not displayed as a shadow and the case where the icon is displayed as a shadow. As described above, by making the movement of the icon the same as when the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture and when the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the icon is displayed in any manner in any case. It is possible to make the player easy to understand.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 224 (18) to (23) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 224 (18) shows that the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 224 (5), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 224 (18) to (23) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 224 (5).

  FIG. 224 (19) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Further, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is 4, the suspension icons g2, g4 and g5 are displayed in the mode 1, and the suspension icon g3 is displayed in the mode 3 in which the outline is jagged. Further, as in FIG. 224 (5), the pedestal image f2 extends upward.

  FIG. 224 (20) shows a state in which the shoji k is displayed during execution of the special figure 1 change game. The fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g5 are overlapped by the shoji k and displayed as a shadow picture. The pedestal image f2 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the shoji k, but is not displayed in the shadow picture. Thus, the pedestal image is not displayed as a shadow picture during the display of the shoji k, and becomes invisible. This makes it possible to make the icon displayed in a shadow picture stand out.

  FIG. 224 (21) shows the passage of time. The special figure 1 change game performed in FIGS. 224 (19) and (20) ends, and the result of the special figure 1 change game is lost.

  FIG. 224 (22) shows a state in which the reserve corresponding to the reserve icon g2 is digested and the special figure 1 change game is started. The hold icon decrease animation is finished, the hold icon g2 is displayed as a change icon e2 in the change icon display area, the hold icon move animation is ended, and the move of the hold icons g2 to g5 is completed . The hold icon g3, which is the pre-reading notice mode, is displayed at a position higher than the hold icons g4 and g5.

  FIG. 224 (23) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (10) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 225 (1) to 225 (7). FIGS. 225 (1) to 225 (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 225 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (18), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 225 (1) to 225 (7) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (18).

  The state shown in FIG. 225 (2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (19).

  FIG. 225 (3) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 225 (4) shows a state in which a change effect in which the display mode of the display area UI changes is started. When the change effect of this example is started, the background of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes black, and two display screens displayed on the entire surface in FIG. 225 (2) etc. are displayed side by side . The display screen A on the left side is mode 3 in the display area UI, and the display screen B on the right side is mode 4 in the display area UI. An effect of asking whether the display area UI changes is executed by the display screens A and B. Note that both of the display screens A and B include a shoji k. Further, the countdown display o included in the display screens A and B includes an image representing the number of seconds of "05.00", and it is informed that the effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 5.00 seconds is started ing.

  FIG. 225 (5) shows a state in which the display screen A is erased and the display screen B is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the display screen B is displayed at the center, it is suggested that the display area UI changes to aspect 4. In addition, the countdown display o included in the display screen B includes an image representing the number of seconds of "04.50", and it is notified that the effect that the shadow picture display of the icon ends after 4.50 seconds is started .

  FIG. 225 (6) shows a state in which the change effect in which the display mode of the display area UI changes is ended. When the display screen B is displayed on the full screen of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the change effect of this example ends. The display area UI is changed to aspect 4. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “04.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 4.00 seconds.

  FIG. 225 (7) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (23) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 225 (8) to 225 (14). FIGS. 225 (8) to 225 (14) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 225 (8) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (18). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 225 (8) to 225 (14) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (18).

  The state shown in FIG. 225 (9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (19).

  FIG. 225 (10) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 225 (11) shows a state in which change effect is started in which the display mode of the display area UI changes. When the change effect of this example is started, the background of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes black, and two display screens displayed on the entire surface in FIG. 225 (2) etc. are displayed side by side . The display screen A on the left side is mode 3 in the display area UI, and the display screen B on the right side is mode 4 in the display area UI. An effect of asking whether the display area UI changes is executed by the display screens A and B. In this example, while the display screens A and B are displayed, the display position of the countdown display o does not change, and the countdown display o is displayed with the position displayed in FIG. 225 (9) or the like. Therefore, the entire shoji k included in the display screen A is overlapped with the count dyne display o and becomes invisible. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "05.00", and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 5.00 seconds.

  FIG. 225 (12) shows a state in which the display screen A is erased and the display screen B is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the display screen B is displayed at the center, it is suggested that the display area UI changes to aspect 4. Further, part of the shoji k included in the display screen B is overlapped with the countdown display o and becomes invisible. The countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of "04.50", and it is reported that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 4.50 seconds.

  FIG. 225 (13) shows a state in which the change effect in which the display mode of the display area UI changes is ended. When the display screen B is displayed on the full screen of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the change effect of this example ends. The display area UI is changed to aspect 4. Further, the countdown display o includes an image representing the number of seconds of “04.00”, and it is notified that an effect of terminating the shadow picture display of the icon is started after 4.00 seconds.

  FIG. 225 (14) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (23) to (28) may be executed. In the effect of this example, for example, in the effect display in which a plurality of display screens of transition candidates are displayed to change the display mode of the display area UI, the display position and display size of the countdown display o start the effect display Maintained at previous display position and at display size. Therefore, the countdown display o may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the display screen of the candidate to which the transition is made.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 226 (1) to (11). 226 (1) to (9) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 226 (1) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (11). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 226 (1) to (11) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (11).

  FIG. 226 (2) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 are displayed as shadows. The display area UI is the fourth aspect. In addition, the promotion icons n1 and n2 are displayed overlapping the shoji k.

  FIG. 226 (3) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. The start of the animation that the door j opens is the start of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 226 (4) shows the state where the treasure chest n3 has appeared from the position where the door j was displayed after the door j was opened. In the figure, the arrow illustrated at the lower right of the treasure box n3 represents the movement direction and movement trajectory of the treasure box n3.

  FIG. 226 (5) shows a state in which the treasure chest n3 is in the display area UI and is moved to the right of the variation icon display area e. In the figure, the arrow illustrated at the upper right of the treasure chest n3 represents the movement direction and the movement trajectory of the treasure chest n3.

  FIG. 226 (6) shows a state in which the treasure chest n3 is in the display area UI and is stopped to the right of the variation icon display area e. The left end of the treasure box n3 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, but the left end is not displayed as a shadow picture. Thus, the display (for example, treasure box n3) included in the change effect may not be displayed as a shadow picture. Further, the change target of the change presentation of this example is the change icon e2.

  FIG. 226 (7) shows the passage of time. In this example, the treasure box n3 is opened in a state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, and then, an effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon e2 changes. However, in the state where the fluctuation icon e2 is displayed as a shadow picture, it can not be recognized in which aspect the fluctuation icon e2 is changed.

  FIG. 226 (8) shows a state in which the shoji k has been erased. The change icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 are changed from being displayed as a shadow picture to being not displayed as a shadow picture. In addition, since the variable icon e2 is not displayed as a shadow picture by the elimination of the shoji k, it can be recognized that the variable icon e2 is changed to the fourth aspect. In addition, the “superheat” character string image jumping out from the treasure chest n3 and the treasure chest n3 is a display that suggests that the display mode of the icon has changed, and may be deleted after the shoji k is erased, and the fluctuation icon e2 is It may be erased at the timing of erasing. In addition, the display mode of the icon may change after the state in which the icon is displayed as a shadow is finished. The change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed after the state in which the icon is displayed in a shadow is finished.

  FIG. 226 (9) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (23) to (28) may be executed.

  FIG. 226 (10) shows a state where a treasure chest n4 is displayed on the right side of the treasure chest n3. The display of the treasure chest n4 is started after the display start of the treasure chest n3. The left end of the treasure chest n4 is overlapped with the treasure chest n3. As described above, when an item image such as a treasure box is stocked, a part of the item image that has been started to be displayed may overlap with a part of the item image that is started to be displayed later.

  FIG. 226 (11) shows a state where a treasure chest n4 is displayed on the right side of the treasure chest n3. The display of the treasure chest n4 is started after the display start of the treasure chest n3. The left end of the treasure chest n4 overlaps the treasure chest n3. As described above, when an item image such as a treasure box is stocked, a part of the item image which has been started to be displayed may be overlapped with a part of the item image which is started to be displayed later.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 226 (12) to (24). 226 (12) to (24) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 226 (12) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (11). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 226 (12) to (24) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (11).

  FIG. 226 (13) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 are displayed as shadows. The display area UI is the fourth aspect. In addition, the promotion icons n1 and n2 are displayed overlapping the shoji k.

  FIG. 226 (14) shows a state in which stock effect for stocking an item has been started. The start of the animation that the door j opens is the start of the stock effect of this example.

  FIG. 226 (15) shows a state where the door j is opened and display of the Yoshimune m1 is started at the position where the door j was displayed.

  FIG. 226 (16) shows a state in which the door j is closed. Yoshimune m1 is displayed overlapping on the door j. The animation in the stock rendition of this example includes the same scene as the change animation in the change rendition of the icon.

  FIG. 226 (17) shows a state in which display of a medal item (hereinafter referred to as "medal") n5 including a character image of a brow is started. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow illustrated to the right of the medal n5 indicates the moving direction of the medal n5. Also, Yoshimune m1 is aiming the bow at the medal n5.

  FIG. 226 (18) shows a state in which the arrow m2 is released by Yoshimune m1. An arrow m5 is flying toward the medal n5.

  FIG. 226 (19) shows a state in which the arrow m2 is stuck on the medal n5. Since the stock effect of this example is a success, the arrow m2 is stuck on the item medal n5. In the case where the stock effect is a failure, the arrow m2 does not pierce the medal n5, which is an item, and is deviated.

  FIG. 226 (20) shows a state in which the arrow m2 is erased after the arrow m2 is stuck in the medal n5. The character string image of "STOCK !!" is displayed on the right of the medal n5, and it is informed that the medal n5 of the item is stocked.

  FIG. 226 (21) shows a state in which the stock effect has ended. A medal n5 is displayed on the upper left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The position where the medal n5 is displayed in FIG. 226 (21) is the stock display area of the item. The stock rendering ends when the display of the item is completed moving to the stock display area.

  FIG. 226 (22) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 226 (23) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being performed. The fluctuation icon e2 is displayed in the sixth aspect. Also, an item of medal n5 is used. The medal n5 moves to the upper left from the stock display area, and a cut-in indication r including a character image of a whale is displayed in place of the medal n5. The cut-in indication r is a notice of the change. In this way, when the item is used, a notice of the change, a notice of a read ahead, and the like are performed.

  FIG. 226 (24) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (15) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 227 (1) to (4). FIGS. 227 (1) to 227 (4) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 227 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 227 (1) to (4) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 227 (2) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed. The outlines of the change icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are circular.

  FIG. 227 (3) shows a state in which the shoji k is displayed. The fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows. The outlines of the shadow icon fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are circular. Thus, the shape of the outline may be the same as the icon in the state displayed in a shadow picture and the icon in a state not displayed in the shadow picture.

  FIG. 227 (4) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 227 (5) to (7). FIGS. 227 (5) to (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 227 (5) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 227 (5) to (7) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 227 (6) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed. The outlines of the change icon e2 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are square. In this example, at the time point shown in FIG. 227 (2), the effect stage changes from stage A to stage B. The outline of the default icon in Stage A is circular, while the outline of the default icon in Stage B is square. Thus, the outline of the default icon may be different for each stage of presentation.

  FIG. 227 (7) shows a state in which the shoji k is displayed. The fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows. The outlines of the shadow variation icon e2 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are circular. Thus, the icon in the state of being displayed as a shadow picture may have, for example, a circular outline, regardless of the effect stage.

  FIG. 227 (8) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 227 (9) to (14) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 227 (9) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 227 (9) to (15) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (3).

  FIG. 227 (10) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows. The fluctuation icon e1 is an aspect of a pattern of Yoshimune, and the outline of Yoshimune is displayed in a shadow. The outlines of the hold icons g2 to g4 are circular.

  FIG. 227 (11) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 227 (12) shows a state in which the shoji k has been erased. By the deletion of the shoji k, the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture. The fluctuation icon e1 is displayed with a Yoshimune pattern of aspect 5 (red color). The display modes of aspect 1, aspect 2, aspect 3, aspect 4, aspect 5, aspect 6, and aspect 7 are set in descending order of the big hit reliability of the icon whose pattern is Yoshimune.

  FIG. 227 (13) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed.

  FIG. 227 (14) shows a state in which the display mode of the variation icon e1 is mode 1. For example, the jackpot reliability of the icon of the pattern of the character may be set for each character. Also, for example, the jackpot reliability of the icon of the Yoshimune design may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the icon of the sixth aspect in the circle.

  FIG. 227 (15) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 228 (1) to 228 (9), a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 228 (1) to (9) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 228 (1) shows that the effects are continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 228 (1) to (9) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 228 (2) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m1 shoots the arrow m2 toward the icon as the change object is displayed. The Yoshimune m1 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the Yoshimune m1 is the start of the change effect of this example. In addition, the arrow m2 is not displayed as a shadow picture in a state where it does not overlap with the shoji k.

  FIG. 228 (3) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The arrow m2 is displayed so as to overlap with the shoji k, and is displayed as a shadow picture. The shadow arrow m2 is displayed in black, like the shadow icon. As described above, in the change animation included in the change presentation, at least a part of the image of the change animation is displayed as a shadow picture in a part of the scene. In addition, the arrow m2 is displayed overlapping the icon (in FIG. 228 (3), the change icon e1 and the hold icon g2). When the arrow m2 overlaps a plurality of icons, the arrow m3 and the icon may be seen as an integral image.

  Thus, when a change effect is performed, at least a portion (for example, the arrow m2) of the display of the change animation is displayed as a shadow picture in the scene of the change animation shown in FIG. 228 (3). The display (for example, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) of the change animation in the scene shown in 2) is not displayed in a shadow picture. According to the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the change effect relates to the icon relating to the hold by making the first scene a shadow picture.

  FIG. 228 (4) shows the state immediately after the scene in which the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g2. The icon of the target of the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g2, the arrow m2 is erased and the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged, and hold An animation in which the icon g2 jumps up is displayed. In the drawing, the upward arrow illustrated below the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. An animation in which the hold icon g2 jumps upward is displayed when the change presentation is successful.

  FIG. 228 (5) shows a state in which the hold icon g2 has moved downward. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated above the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2.

  FIG. 228 (6) shows a state in which the promotion icon n1 is displayed. The promotion icon n1 of this example is displayed above the icon adjacent to the icon (in this example, the hold icon g2) that was the target of the change effect. Further, the promotion icon n1 moves along with the movement of the icon that was the target of the change effect. Moreover, in FIG. 228 (6), the special figure 1 fluctuation game is ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. The lower end portions of "decoration 6" and "decoration 5" are overlapped by shoji k and stopped, but the lower end portions of these are not displayed in shades. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In the case of FIG. 228 (7), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation display of the fifth symbol are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 not shown. Show the situation. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 228 (7), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e2 and the hold icons g3 and g4 are being moved. In this way, even when the icon shadow picture is displayed, the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon movement animation are displayed. The promotion icon n1 moves along with the movement of the icon (in this example, the change icon e2) that was the target of the change effect.

  FIG. 228 (8) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decreasing animation and the on-hold icon moving animation have ended. The promotion icon n1 is displayed above the change icon e2 that was the target of the change effect. The promotion icon n1 is deleted along with the deletion of the icon (in this example, the change icon e2) that was the target of the change effect.

  FIG. 228 (9) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (12) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIGS. 228 (10) to (23) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 228 (10) shows that the rendition continues, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 228 (10) to (23) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 228 (11) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m1 shoots the arrow m2 toward the icon as the change object is displayed. The Yoshimune m1 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the Yoshimune m1 is the start of the change effect of this example. In addition, the arrow m2 is not displayed as a shadow picture in a state where it does not overlap with the shoji k.

  FIG. 228 (12) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. The arrow m2 is displayed so as to overlap with the shoji k, and is displayed as a shadow picture. The shadow arrow m2 is displayed in black, like the shadow icon. As described above, in the change animation included in the change presentation, at least a part of the image of the change animation is displayed as a shadow picture in a part of the scene. In addition, the arrow m2 is displayed overlapping the icon (in FIG. 228 (12), the change icon e1 and the hold icon g2). When the arrow m2 overlaps a plurality of icons, the arrow m3 and the icon may be seen as an integral image.

  Thus, when a change effect is performed, at least a portion (for example, the arrow m2) of the display of the change animation is displayed as a shadow picture in the change animation scene shown in FIG. 228 (12). 11) The scene shown in 11) and the display of the change animation (for example, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) are not displayed in a shadow picture. According to the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the change effect relates to the icon relating to the hold by making the first scene a shadow picture.

  FIG. 228 (13) shows the state immediately after the scene in which the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g2. The icon of the target of the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after the arrow m2 is stuck on the hold icon g2, the arrow m2 is erased and the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged, and hold An animation in which the icon g2 jumps up is displayed. In the drawing, the upward arrow illustrated below the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. An animation in which the hold icon g2 jumps upward is displayed when the change presentation is successful.

  FIG. 228 (14) shows a state in which the hold icon g2 has moved downward. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated above the hold icon g2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon g2. In addition, the promotion icon n1 is displayed so that a part of the shoji k overlaps. The promotion icon n1 of this example is displayed not adjacent to the icon that was the target of the change effect but adjacent to the change icon. In addition, Yoshimune m1 is erased during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Elimination of Yoshimune m1 is the end of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 228 (15) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. The lower end portions of "decoration 6" and "decoration 5" are overlapped by shoji k and stopped, but the lower end portions of these are not displayed in shades. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of "6-5-8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  Figure 228 (16), with the special figure 1 fluctuation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 which is not illustrated, the fluctuation indication of the decoration design, the 4th design and the fluctuation indication of the 5th design are started Show the situation. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon reduction animation is executed and the reserve icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and variation icon display Move to area e, hold icon move animation is executed, and hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 228 (16), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e2 and the hold icons g3 and g4 are being moved. In this way, even when the icon shadow picture is displayed, the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon movement animation are displayed.

  FIG. 228 (17) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decrease animation and the on-hold icon movement animation have ended.

  FIG. 228 (18) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 228 (19) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (24) except that the character string image of "GO !!" is not displayed in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 212 (24) . In this example, since the countdown display o for notifying that the effect that the shadow display of the icon ends is started is not displayed, the character string image of "GO !!" displayed after the display end of the countdown display o is also displayed I will not.

  FIG. 228 (20) shows a state in which an animation in which Shoji k opens to the left and right is displayed. With the opening of the shoji k, the suspension icons g3 and g4 that do not overlap with the shoji k are not displayed in a shadow picture. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 228 (20), a part of the hold icon g5 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, so the entire hold icon g5 is displayed as a shadow picture. Thus, when at least a part of the icon is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, the icon may be displayed as a shadow picture. The icon may be displayed as a shadow picture only in the portion overlapping the shoji k, or when the portion overlapping with the shoji k in the entire area of the icon is less than half, the icon is displayed as a shadow picture It may be gone. Further, the promotion icons n1 and n2 move downward toward the fluctuation icon e2. In FIG. 228 (20), the promotion icon n1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the shadow picture variation icon e2.

  FIG. 228 (21) shows a state in which the shoji k has been erased and overlapped with the fluctuation icon e 2 to display the effect image p 2. In addition, the suspension icon g5 is also not displayed as a shadow picture due to the deletion of the shoji k. Further, the promotion icons n1 and n2 are erased after the collision with the change icon e2. In FIG. 228 (21), promotion effects are performed for icons in which the mode of the variation icon e2 changes to a mode in which the big hit reliability is high. After the deletion of the shoji k, the display mode of the fluctuation icon becomes clear. At the timing when the display mode of the variation icon becomes clear, the promotion effect of the icon may be performed. Note that the promoted icons n1 and n2 may be displayed only in the state where the icons are displayed as shadows. In general, chances-up effects such as change effects are more reliable when performed in the second half of the symbol variation display (for example, when performed in the first half, chances are about to become the pseudo ream 2 On the other hand, when it is performed in the second half, the icon is configured to change to a pseudo ream 3 or a super reach effect or a mode with high reliability. In this example, since the promotion effects of the icons are collectively performed after the end of the shadow display, the player who is grasping the above general feeling has a sense of expectation for the digestion (erase) of the promotion icons n1 and n2. You can

  FIG. 228 (22) shows a state in which the effect image p2 is erased. The deletion of the effect image p2 makes the fluctuation icon e2 visible. The fluctuation icon e2 is displayed in the fifth aspect. Further, the change effect sound of “Tsu” is outputted from the speaker 120. In this example, when the change effect is performed in a state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the change effect effect is performed after the end of the shadow picture display of the icon. The change effect presentation includes an effect image p2 and a change effect sound. The pachinko machine 100 can give the player a sense of expectation for the shadow state while giving the player a feeling that the expectation has suddenly risen when the icon changes from the shadow state to the non-shadow state. When the effect image p2 is erased and the effect sound is output, the promotion effect ends. The promotion effect of this example includes an effect effect.

  FIG. 228 (23) shows that the effect continues. After this, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 212 (28) and FIGS. 214 (1) to (28) may be executed. In this example, the promotion icon representing the success of the change presentation is moved along with the upper part of the icon targeted for the change presentation. Note that although the icon may be internally changed in aspect due to the success of the change presentation, the icon may be displayed in a shadow picture, and thus the appearance may not be changed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 229 (1). FIG. 229 (1) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Also, in the present example, the shoji k is displayed, and the change icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed in a shadow picture. In this example, in the state where the icon is displayed in a shadow picture, the hold number display s is displayed. The number-of-retentions display s includes number images arranged horizontally on the left and right within a horizontally-long rectangular frame, the left number image indicates the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 and the right number image indicates the number of reservations of Special Figure 2. Is shown. In this example, since the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, the number-of-retentions display s includes a numeric image of “3 0”. In addition, the number-of-holds display s is displayed overlapping in the upper left corner of the shoji k. Also, the number-of-holds display s is not displayed in the shadow picture. As described above, in the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the number of reservations may be notified in a separate display from the holding icon.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 197 to 229.

(P1)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a change icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon or change icon),
There are cases where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a shadow picture (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the above-mentioned certain change effect may be performed,
After the certain change effect is performed in the first state (e.g., after the state displayed by the shadow is finished), the first display mode (e.g., the outline is a jagged shadow) is displayed There is a case where one icon (for example, the retention icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) is displayed in a second display mode (for example, an outer shape is jagged mode 3) after the first state is finished. Yes,
One icon (for example, FIG. 212) being displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is performed in the first state (for example, after the state displayed with a shadow is finished) The hold icon g2 shown in (4) is displayed in a third display mode (for example, the outline shape of the variation icon e2 shown in FIG. 214 (28) is jagged after the first state ends). In some cases,
The first display mode is a display mode of a shadow picture,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The variation display of the decoration symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the third display mode is finally more than the variation display of the decoration symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the second display mode It is easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear. The second display mode and the third display mode are display modes that are not shadow pictures. It should be noted that the first display mode is a shadow picture mode in which only one mode (for example, a circular shape filled with black color) is always taken in the shadow state, or a plurality of modes (shadow picture) ( For example, an aspect of one shadow picture in a case where it is circular and filled in black or an outer shell is jagged and filled in black) (an outer shell is jagged and black filled) Or, it may be a generic term of the form of the shadow picture. Note that the icons related to holding include a holding icon and an icon (variation icon) that has been displayed as a holding icon in the past.

(P2)
It is a game stand described in P1, and
An icon may be displayed as a shadow picture over a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table of the configuration, by making it difficult to understand the variable display of the target of the advance notice, it is possible to give each variable display a sense of expectation.

(P3)
The game console described in P1 or P2,
The certain change effect includes a display of a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “a first change animation (for example, an animation in which a Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots an arrow m2)”. And
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, it is referred to as a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter, “first scene (for example, a scene shown in FIG. 212 (6))”. At least a part of the display of the first change animation (for example, the arrow m2) is displayed as a shadow picture, but a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the second change animation”) In the "third scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))", the display (for example, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) of the first change animation is not displayed in a shadow picture,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the change effect relates to the icon regarding the hold by making the first scene a shadow picture.

(P4)
It is a game stand described in P3, and
A certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect (for example, FIG. 212 (16, for example, FIG. 212 (16), which is different from the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as“ first change effect ”) ) To (18))) can be performed,
The second change effect is a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17).) Different from the first change animation. It is an effect including display,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter, "the second scene (for example, the change animation shown in FIG. 212 (17))" At least part of the display of the second change animation (for example, the heart m6) is displayed in a shadow picture, but a scene other than the second scene of the second change animation ( Hereinafter, in the “fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the display (for example, princess m5 and heart m6) of the second change animation is not displayed in a shadow picture,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the said structure, the kind of change production | presentation can be identified by comparing the scene which does not become a shadow picture, and it can be made to have a feeling of expectation about which change production | presentation is performed.

(P5)
It is a game stand described in P4, and
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the said structure, it can be made easy to identify the kind of change production. Also, the scale of the first scene and the scale of the third scene may be the same or different.

(P6)
A game console as described on P4 or P5,
In the first state, change effects of both the first change effect and the second change effect may be performed (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the configuration, when you do not know the target icon, you have an expectation by making you imagine whether it is a change effect multiple times for one icon or a change effect for another icon You can

(P7)
A game console according to any one of P4 to P6, wherein
In the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the first change effect is performed (for example, in the cases shown in FIGS. 215 (5) to (8)). Yes,
In the second state, there are cases where the second change effect is performed (for example, the cases shown in FIG. 215 (13) to (15)),
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed A change-effect effect is performed after the end of the first state without the effect effect being performed).

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, when the icon changes from the shadow state to the non-shadow state, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for the shadow state while giving the player a feeling of a sudden increase in expectation. In the second state, the change effect production is performed each time the first change production is performed, but in the first state, the change effect production is performed each time the first change production is performed. The change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state without being performed each time it is performed. There are effect presentation effects and sound effects, and either display or sound may be delayed.

(P8)
It is the game stand described in P7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to provide an element of giving an expectation to the player who is watching the change effect carefully, and to have a sense of superiority. Note that the second change effect can also be performed in the second state.

(P9)
The game console described in P7 or P8,
A movable means (eg, movable body 700);
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can execute a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) And
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to provide an element that gives the player who is looking carefully at the movable means a sense of expectation, and to have a sense of superiority.

(P10)
A game console according to any one of P4 to P9, wherein
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the configuration, after the state in which the icon is displayed in the shadow is finished, giving a feeling that the feeling of expectation has risen at a stretch, and giving the feeling of expectation in the state where the icon is displayed in the shadow it can. In addition, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the change production has succeeded to everyone and give them a sense of expectation. Note that the third display (promotion icon) is not displayed after the end of the first change presentation in the second state.

(P11)
A game console according to any one of P1 to P10, wherein
In the first state, there is a case where the start of the change effect for changing the display mode of the icon is suspended (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 217 (20) to (26))
The display means is capable of displaying a fourth display (for example, princess m5 or long-length m11),
The fourth display is a display indicating that the start of the change effect to change the display mode of the icon is suspended.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation for the state in which the icon is displayed in a shadow picture. The start of the first change effect or the second change effect may be suspended.

(P12)
The gaming machine according to any one of P1 to P11, wherein
The display means can display a fifth display (for example, timer display o),
The fifth display is a timer display indicating a time until the first state ends,
After the end of the fifth display, the first state ends.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the said structure, it can be made to pay attention to the presentation of the timer display periphery in the state in which the icon is displayed by the shadow, and it can give expectation by giving discomfort to the said presentation . The timer display may indicate the time until the start of the effect at which the first state ends.

(P13)
A game console according to any one of P1 to P12, wherein
When the icon is displayed as a shadow picture, the outer shape of the icon (for example, the circular shape or the jagged outer shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the said structure, it can be made to pay attention to an icon by a shadow picture.

(P14)
The gaming machine according to any one of P1 to P13, wherein
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a shadow picture to being not displayed as a shadow picture (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it can be easily understood that the icon has been changed from being displayed as a shadow picture to being displayed as not a shadow picture.

(P15)
It is the game stand described in P14,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a shadow picture.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, unnecessary information display other than the icon can be blocked to make it easy to draw attention to the icon.

(P16)
It is the game stand described in P15,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, unnecessary information other than the icon can be blocked to make it easy to draw attention to the icon.

(P17)
A game console according to any one of P1 to P16, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed as a shadow picture,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed as a shadow picture.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console of the configuration, while clarifying the important display regarding the success or failure, the important display regarding the success or failure for the player watching over the icon by overlapping the important display regarding the certain image and the success or failure You can even look out.

(P18)
It is the game stand described in P17,
The display means can display a sixth display (for example, a character image for anticipating that the display of Shoji k is started to be displayed),
The sixth display is a display for notifying that the certain display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game stand of the configuration, an expectation can be given to the state in which the icon is displayed in a shadow picture, and the attention is paid to the form of the icon before the icon is displayed in the shadow picture be able to.

(P19)
The game console described on P17 or P18,
The display means can display a seventh display (for example, m3 of the screen, m4 of the shuriken m4 shown in FIG. 212 (12)),
The seventh display may be displayed before the start of the display of the certain display.
The certain display is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
The seventh display is a display for predicting that the display mode of the certain display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, an expectation can be given to the state in which the icon is displayed in a shadow picture.

(P20)
The gaming machine according to any one of P1 to P19, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of shadow pictures (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture) in the first state Is
A game stand characterized by

(P21)
It is the game stand described in P20,
One of the display modes of the plurality of types of shadow pictures is the first display mode,
One of the display modes of the plurality of types of shadow pictures is a sixth display mode (for example, a circle),
The first display mode and the sixth display mode are different in display mode,
The sixth display mode is a default display mode in the display modes of the plurality of types of shadow pictures,
The display means displays a standby state of the icon in a certain state (for example, a state where the icon is displayed, a state other than the states shown in FIGS. 214 (9) to (28)) until the number of holdings decreases. Can be displayed,
The stand-by display (for example, the change icon e1 and the stand-by animations g3 and g4 shown in FIGS. 221 (6) to (10)) in the icon of the sixth display mode does not include a scene in which the icon rotates.
The standby display (for example, the standby animation of the hold icon g2 shown in FIGS. 221 (6) to (10)) in the icon of the first display mode includes a scene in which the icon rotates.
A game stand characterized by

(P22)
It is a game stand described in P21,
The standby display in the icon of the second display mode (e.g., the icon with the jagged outline) includes a scene in which the icon rotates,
The game machine is characterized in that the standby display in the icon of the third display mode (for example, the icon whose outline is a jagged edge) includes a scene in which the icon rotates.

(P23)
The gaming machine according to any one of P1 to P19, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of shadow picture (for example, a circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(P24)
It is the game stand described in P23,
The display means displays a standby state of the icon in a certain state (for example, a state where the icon is displayed, a state other than the states shown in FIGS. 214 (9) to (28)) until the number of holdings decreases. Can be displayed,
The standby display in the icon of the first display mode does not include the scene in which the icon rotates.
A game stand characterized by

(P25)
It is the game stand described in P24,
The standby display in the icon of the second display mode (e.g., the icon with the jagged outline) includes a scene in which the icon rotates,
The standby display in the icon of the third display mode (for example, the icon with the jagged outline) includes a scene in which the icon rotates.
A game stand characterized by

(P26)
The gaming machine according to any one of P1 to P25, wherein
The gaming machine is a parinko machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

  In FIGS. 212 to 229, the example of the effect of the change effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon may be replaced with the effect for changing the display mode of the change icon, or the effect of the change effect for changing the display mode of the change icon The example may be replaced by an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon.

The icon displayed as the hold icon is displayed as a change icon.
The pending icon may be referred to simply as pending, and the floating icon may be referred to as the pending.
The shadow picture may be a silhouette.
The shadow picture does not have to be a precise shadow picture of a non-shadow picture, but may be a display style of a shadow style (for example, a black display in which the outline of the non-shadow picture display is simplified).
The fourth symbol and the number indicating the number of reservations may be displayed overlapping each other on the shoji k, and the fourth symbol or the number indicating the number of reservations may not be a shadow.
A part of the pending change presentation may have a change presentation performed within the range of the shoji as an effect that becomes a shadow picture. In this case, when the change effect is performed in the shadow state, the change effect is displayed as a shadow picture from beginning to end.

Also, as in the slot machine, a plurality of jackpot probability settings (for example, maximum 6) may be provided. For example, setting 1 is low probability when the big hit probability is 1/320 high probability big hit probability is 1/32, setting 2 is the low probability when big hit probability is 1/310 high probability when big hit probability is 1/31, setting 3 is low Probability big hit probability 1/300 high probability Big hit probability 1/30, setting 4 is low probability when big hit probability is 1/290 high probability when big hit probability is 1/29, setting 5 is low probability when big hit probability is 1 The / 280 high probability jackpot probability may be 1/28, and in setting 6, the low probability jackpot probability may be 1/270 high probability the jackpot probability may be 1/27. The ratio of the high probability probability value to the low probability probability value is the same for each setting. It should be noted that the values relating to the player's profit other than the big hit probability, such as the number of time-savings, the number of certain variations, the number of big hits R, etc. are the same for each setting. The advantage of setting 6 may be larger or smaller than the preference of setting 1.
The higher the degree of preference setting is, the higher the appearance frequency (the appearance frequency per unit time in the normal gaming state or the appearance frequency with respect to the number of times of symbol variation display) becomes higher. It is possible to infer the setting by the frequency of the effect on the shadow picture.
Note that the on-hold icon movement animation in which the on-hold icon moves does not include a scene in which the on-hold icon rotates.
In addition, after the shadow picture display of the icon is interrupted within one time of the variable display, the shadow picture display may be resumed in the next and subsequent variable displays. For example, a shadow picture display may be interrupted by SP reach start etc.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 230 (1) and (2). FIGS. 230 (1) and 230 (2) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 230 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 230 (1) and 230 (2) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 230 (2) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows. Further, in the present example, the start of the change effect (on-hold change effect) is on hold (standby). On the left side of the door j, Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and on the right side of the door j, a door m is displayed overlapping on the door j. The text image of "stock" is displayed above Yoshimune m10. Similarly, a character string image of "stock" is displayed above the princess m5. Thus, in this example, the start of a total of two, that is, the change presentation by Yoshimune m10 and the change presentation by Hime m5 is suspended. In addition, there may be one, and three or more change effects may be suspended. In addition, the aspect of Yoshimune m10 at the time of suspension of the change effect by Yoshimune m10 is an aspect of the first frame (a certain scene) of the animation of the change effect. Similarly, the mode of the princess m5 at the time of suspension of the change production by the princess m5 is a mode of the first frame (a certain scene) of the animation of the change production. In addition, the character string image of "stock" does not need to be displayed. In addition, when a plurality of change effects are suspended, the change effects are started in the order of being stocked, or started from the change effects by the character display close to the icon (in this example, Yoshimune m10) or the character far from the icon It may be started from the change presentation by the display (in this example, the princess m6).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 (3) to 230 (7), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 230 (3) to (7) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 230 (3) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 230 (3) to 230 (7) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 230 (4) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows. Moreover, in this example, as in the state shown in FIG. 230 (2), the start of the change effect by Yoshimune m10 and the change effect by Hime m5 are reserved (standby). In this example, the aspect of Yoshimune m10 at the time of suspension of the change effect by Yoshimune m10 is an aspect not included in the animation of the change effect. Similarly, the aspect of the princess m5 at the time of suspension of the change presentation by the princess m5 is an aspect not included in the animation of the change presentation. In addition, the character string image of "stock" does not need to be displayed. The mode of Yoshimune m10 at the time of suspension of the change effect by Yoshimune m10 may be an aspect of a certain scene other than the first frame of the animation of the change effect.

  FIG. 230 (5) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of icons by Yoshimune m10 has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m10 passes in front of the icon is displayed. The movement start of Yoshimune m10 is the start of the change effect of this example. In addition, when the change presentation by Yoshimune m10 is started, the character string image of “stock” displayed above Yoshimune m10 is erased.

  FIG. 230 (6) shows a state in which a change animation of change effect is displayed. The Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, and the Yoshimune m10 is displayed with a shadow. In this example, a scene is included in which the entire display of the change animation of the change effect (the entire Yoshimune m10) is displayed as a shadow picture. The target icon for the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and after Yoshimune m10 passes the hold icon g2, the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged. In FIG. 230 (6), Yoshimune m10 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon g2.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 230 (7), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after the hold icon g2 becomes a change icon, a change effect (for example, effects shown in FIGS. 212 (9) to (28)) for changing the change icon may be performed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 230 (8) to (14). FIGS. 230 (8) to (14) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 230 (8) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 230 (8) to (14) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (4).

  FIG. 230 (9) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is being executed. The shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows. Moreover, in this example, as in the state shown in FIG. 230 (2), the start of the change effect by Yoshimune m10 and the change effect by Hime m5 are reserved (standby). In this example, the aspect of Yoshimune m10 at the time of suspension of the change effect by Yoshimune m10 is an aspect not included in the animation of the change effect. Similarly, the aspect of the princess m5 at the time of suspension of the change presentation by the princess m5 is an aspect not included in the animation of the change presentation. In addition, the character string image of "stock" does not need to be displayed. The mode of Yoshimune m10 at the time of suspension of the change effect by Yoshimune m10 may be an aspect of a certain scene other than the first frame of the animation of the change effect.

  FIG. 230 (10) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 230 (11) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon by the princess m5 has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which the princess m5 throws a heart toward an icon to be changed is displayed. The action start of throwing the heart of the princess m5 is the start of the change effect of this example. When the change effect by the princess m5 is started, the character string image of "stock" displayed above the princess m5 is erased.

  FIG. 230 (12) shows a state in which a change animation of change effect is displayed. The heart m6 is moving toward the hold icon g2.

  FIG. 230 (13) shows a state in which a change animation of change effect is displayed. The heart m6 is moving toward the hold icon g2. In this example, a scene is displayed in which a part of the display of the change animation of the change effect (heart m6) is displayed as a shadow picture. The target icon for the change effect in this example is the hold icon g2, and the outline of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged after the heart m6 collides with the hold icon g2.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 230 (14), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after the hold icon g2 becomes a change icon, a change effect (for example, effects shown in FIGS. 212 (9) to (28)) for changing the change icon may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 (15) to (23), a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 230 (15) to (23) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 230 (15) shows that, for example, the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 224 (7). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 230 (15) to (23) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 224 (7).

  FIG. 230 (16) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Further, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3, and the icons of suspension g3 to g5 are displayed in the first embodiment. In addition, the fluctuation icon e2 of aspect 1 is displayed. Further, the pedestal image f1 of the first area of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f extends upward.

  FIG. 230 (17) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 230 (18) shows a state in which the shoji k is displayed during execution of the special figure 1 change game. The fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 to g5 are overlapped by the shoji k and displayed as a shadow picture. The pedestal image f1 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the shoji k, but is not displayed in the shadow picture. Thus, the pedestal image is not displayed as a shadow picture during the display of the shoji k, and becomes invisible. This makes it possible to make the icon displayed in a shadow picture stand out.

  FIG. 230 (19) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 230 (20) shows a state where a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon is displayed. The change presentation of this example is a change presentation by Yoshimune m10. The target icon for the change effect in this example is the hold icon g3, and after Yoshimune m10 passes below the hold icon g3, the outline of the hold icon g3 changes from circular to jagged. In FIG. 230 (20), Yoshimune m10 is in the process of passing below the hold icon g3. In this example, Yoshimune m10 does not overlap with the pending icon g2 that is the change target.

  FIG. 230 (21) shows a state in which the outline of the reserve icon g3 changes from a circular form to a jagged form after Yoshimune m10 passes under the reserve icon g3. Yoshimune m10 has been deleted.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 230 (23), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, subsequently, the effects shown in FIG. 224 (23) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 230 (24) to (26). FIGS. 230 (24) to (26) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 230 (24) shows that, for example, the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 224 (16). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 230 (24) to (26) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 224 (16).

  FIG. 230 (25) shows a state in which the movable body 700 has moved to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 212 (18), the variation icon e2 is located at the default position, and the movable member 700 moves so that the center of the variation icon e2 is substantially positioned at the center inside the annular ring of the movable member 700. There is. In this example, although the moving position of the movable body 700 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 212 (18), the fluctuation icon e3 is positioned above the default position, so the annular ring of the movable body 700 is The center of the fluctuation icon e2 is located above the inner center. In the state where the fluctuation icon is located at the default position as shown in FIG. 212 (18), the movable body 700 and the fluctuation icon do not substantially overlap when viewed in the front-rear direction, but as shown in FIG. In the state where the icon is located above the default position, the movable body 700 and the variation icon overlap in the front-rear direction. Thus, even if the position of the variation icon is different from the initial position, the moving position of the movable body 700 may not change. The movable body 700 may overlap at least a part of the icon displayed in a silhouette.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 230 (26), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (10) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 231 (1) to (13), an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 231 (1) to (13) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 231 (1) shows that, for example, the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). The effect examples shown in FIGS. 231 (1) to (13) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 212 (3). In this example, a serif notice display shown in FIGS. 16 to 34 and 188 to 192 is executed.

  FIG. 231 (2) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In addition, the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2, g3 and g4 of the aspect 1 are displayed.

  FIG. 231 (3) shows a state in which the display zj 3 is displayed during execution of the special view 1 change game. The display zj3 is a display capable of specifying the mode of the speech notice display zk3 before the display of the speech notice display zk3 shown in FIG. 231 (4) described later starts. The display zj3 is moved and displayed from the center portion at the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, the right downward arrow illustrated on the upper left of the display j3 represents the trajectory and the moving direction of the display zj3. The display zj 3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed transparent, and the lower half is displayed in aspect 1. Aspect 1 of the lower half of display zj3 corresponds to the aspect of serif notice display zk3 started in FIG. 231 (4) described later, and display zj3 is a display related to the form of serif notice display. The speech notice display zk3 in this example is a prefetch notice display for the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon g3. By the display zj3, the player can know the mode of the speech preview display zk3 before the display of the speech preview display zk3 is started.

  FIG. 231 (4) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display zk 3 has been started. In this example, the display of the serif notice zk3 is started after the display zj3 is erased, but the display of the serif notice zk3 may be started while the display zj3 is displayed, or the serif notice may be performed simultaneously with the deletion of the display zj3. The display zk3 may be started. The display zj3 may be deleted after being stopped in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be continuously moved to the lower right, moved out of the display area, and deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 231 (4), the speech warning display zk3 is a pattern of a scroll, and the speech warning display zk3 is displayed in a pattern in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech warning display zk3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 231 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display zk3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 231 (6) shows a state in which the speech warning display zk 3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice zk3 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display zk3 is the first embodiment.

  In FIG. 231 (7), a character image of a girl (hereinafter referred to as “girl”) zm 3 and a character name display zn 3 including a character image of “girl” are displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display zk 3 It shows the condition that has been The speech notice display zk3 may be a display including the girl zm3 and the character name display zn3.

  FIG. 231 (8) shows a state in which the character string image of “change !!” is displayed in the speech warning display zk 3. The character string image of "change !!" is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3. Further, “change !!” is a character relating to the pre-reading notice in which the hold icon changes to the pre-reading notice mode.

  FIG. 231 (9) shows a state in which the hold icon g3 is changed from aspect 1 to aspect 2. Big hit reliability is, from low to high, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, white blinking) aspect 3 (for example, blue), aspect 4 (for example, green), aspect 5 (for example red), aspect 6 (e.g. golden), aspect 7 (e.g. iridescent). In the drawing, line segments respectively extending from the hold icon g3 to the upper right, lower right, upper left, and lower left indicate that the hold icon g3 is blinking.

  FIG. 231 (10) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 231 (11) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game performed in FIGS. 231 (2) to (9) is ended, and the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The hold icon g2 is displayed as a change icon e2. In FIG. 231 (12), the shoji k is also displayed, and the fluctuation icon e2 and the retention icons g3 and g4 are displayed overlappingly by the shoji k and displayed as a shadow picture. In this example, the hold icon g3 changes to the blinking mode 2 in FIG. 231 (9), but the blink of the hold icon g3 is not displayed (not visible) when the hold icon g3 is displayed as a shadow picture (not visible) It has become. In addition, the icon which was a mode which blinked before becoming a shadow picture may blink and be displayed (a blink can be visually recognized) also in the period currently displayed with the shadow picture. Also, the icon may be changed to blink in a state where it is displayed as a shadow picture.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 231 (13), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (12) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 231 (14) to (25) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 231 (14) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 231 (11), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 231 (14) to (25) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 231 (11). In this example, a serif notice display shown in FIGS. 16 to 34 and 188 to 192 is executed.

  FIG. 231 (15) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In addition, the shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the holding icons g2, g3 and g4 are displayed as shadows.

  FIG. 231 (16) shows a state in which the display zj3 is displayed while the special figure 1 change game is being executed. The display zj3 is a display capable of specifying the mode of the speech notice display zk3 before the display of the speech notice display zk3 shown in FIG. 231 (17) described later starts. A part of the display zj3 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k.

  FIG. 231 (17) shows a state in which the speech advance notice display zk3 has been started. The dialogue warning display zk3 is a pattern of the scroll, and the dialogue warning display zk3 is displayed in a pattern of a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of the display. Further, the speech warning display zk3 is an aspect of aspect 1. In addition, a part of the dialogue warning display zk3 is displayed overlapping on the shoji k.

  FIG. 231 (18) shows a state in which the dialogue warning display zk 3 is displayed in the animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 231 (19) shows a state in which the speech warning display zk 3 in which the scroll is completely open is displayed. The serif notice zk3 in which the scroll is completely open has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character of the character is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the speech warning display zk3 is the first embodiment.

  FIG. 231 (20) shows a state in which the girl zm3 and the character name display zn3 are displayed overlapping the left end portion of the speech notice display zk3. The girl zm3 and the character name display zn3 are displayed so as to overlap with the shoji k. The speech notice display zk3 may be a display including the girl zm3 and the character name display zn3.

  FIG. 231 (21) shows a state in which the character string image of “change !!” is displayed in the speech warning display zk 3. The character string image of "change !!" is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3. Further, “change !!” is a character relating to the pre-reading notice in which the hold icon changes to the pre-reading notice mode.

  FIG. 231 (22) shows a state in which the change effect of the hold icon g2 has been executed. In this example, the speech warning display zk3 is a display related to the change effect. Further, the speech notice display zk3 related to the change presentation is not displayed in the shadow picture. When the change presentation ends, the outline of the hold icon g2 that was the target of the change presentation changes from circular to jagged.

  FIG. 231 (23) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 231 (24) shows a state in which the speech notice display zk3, the girl zm3, and the character display name zn3 are erased. In this example, the hold icon g3 is displayed in the second mode, which is a blinking mode after the end of the shadow picture display. In this case, the hold icon bg3 may blink even in the state in which the shadow picture is displayed.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 231 (25), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (12) to (28) may be executed. In this example, as the notice display regarding the effect of changing the display mode of the icon, the serif notice display zk3 can be displayed, and the notice display is displayed in the first state in which the icon is displayed in silhouette (started ) May be.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 232 (1) to (11), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Figs. 232 (1) to (11) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 232 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 231 (12), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 232 (1) to (11) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 231 (11).

  FIG. 232 (2) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7" in the case of a turnout showing that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game was a turnoff. Stop display (fixed display, main stop display) is displayed. In the fifth symbol display area h, the fifth symbol of the combination of "2-4-7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 232 (2), the variation icon e1 and the hold icons g1 to g4 are displayed in the first aspect. In the present example, a bird's-eye view image (hereinafter referred to as "eyebrows") z1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e.襖 z1 is overlapped to the fluctuation icon.

  FIG. 232 (3) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon e1 is erased.

  In Fig. 232 (4), with the special figure 1 change game started by the special figure 1 display device (not shown), the variable indication of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variable indication of the fifth symbol are started Show the situation. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c represent the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the downward arrows shown in the fifth symbol display area h are the fluctuation displays of the fifth symbol It represents the displayed state. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon decrease animation (hold icon decrease animation) is executed and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is a change icon e1 And move to the change icon display area e, the hold icon move animation (hold icon move animation) is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f is a special view 1 Move to the first area of the reserve icon display area f, the reserve icon g3 displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, move to the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, The reserve icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f moves to the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 232 (4), the hold icon decrease animation and the hold icon move animation are being displayed, and the change icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are being moved. In the drawing, the arrows illustrated on the left of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 indicate the movement direction and movement locus of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4. In addition, while the reserved icon moving animation is displayed, four pedestal images of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f extend upward. Note that an animation display (for example, an animation in which a pedestal image bounces up and down) may be displayed in the display area UI while the hold icon movement animation is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (5) shows a state in which the on-hold icon decreasing animation and the on-hold icon moving animation have ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 212 (3), the fluctuation icon (in this example, the fluctuation icon e1) is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. This may make it easier to identify the change icon and the hold icon.

  FIG. 232 (6) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed.

  FIG. 232 (7) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed.

  FIG. 232 (8) shows a state in which an animation in which 襖 z 1 opens during execution of the special figure 1 change game is executed. The fluctuation icon e2 remains stopped.

  FIG. 232 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which 襖 z 1 is closed is executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game.

  FIG. 232 (10) shows a state in which the animation in which the 襖 z1 closes during execution of the special figure 1 change game is finished. In this example, an animation in which 襖 z1 opens and closes is performed. Even if the animation is executed, the fluctuation icon remains stopped.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 232 (11), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. Figs. 232 (12) to (22) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 232 (12) shows that the effect continues from the state shown in FIG. 232 (5), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 232 (1) to (11) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 231 (5).

  FIG. 232 (13) shows a state in which an animation in which the eyelid z1 closes is executed after an animation in which the eyelid z1 is opened is executed during execution of the special figure 1 change game. In addition, as the left and right sides of 襖 z1 are closed, the fluctuation icon e2 is gradually displayed as a shadow picture from the left and right. By closing the left and right of 襖 z1, the fluctuation icon e2 is gradually overlapped with 襖 z1 so as to be taken into the bag.

  FIG. 232 (14) shows the state after the eyelid z1 is opened and closed. In this example, when 襖 z1 is completely closed, the variation icon e2 is overlapped with 襖 z1 and the whole is displayed as a shadow picture. Incidentally, at the time point shown in FIG. 232 (14), the fluctuation icon e2 may not be displayed as a shadow picture.

  FIG. 232 (15) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 232 (16) shows a state in which 襖 z1 is enlarged. In this example, the fluctuation icon e2 displayed as a shadow picture is a change target. Although a part of the hold icon g3 which is not to be changed is overlapped with 襖 z1, the part of the hold icon g3 is not displayed in a shadow picture.

  FIG. 232 (17) shows a state in which Yoshimune m1 overlapped with 襖 z1 is displayed. Yoshimune m1 is displayed as a shadow picture. A change presentation in which the aspect of the fluctuation icon e2 changes is started by Yoshimune m1.

  FIG. 232 (18) shows the state immediately after the scene in which the arrow released by Yoshimune m 1 is stuck in the fluctuation icon e 2. After the arrow bites into the fluctuation icon e2, the arrow is erased, and the outline of the fluctuation icon e2 changes from circular to jagged.

  FIG. 232 (19) shows a state in which the change effect has ended as Yoshimune m 1 is erased.

  FIG. 232 (20) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 232 (21) shows a state in which 襖 z1 is reduced to the original size. In this example, 襖 z1 is enlarged and a character of silhouette display (shadow picture display) appears to perform change effect, and after change effect is finished, 襖 z1 may be reduced or display area UI is not displayed. And may be reduced at the timing when the fluctuation icon disappears.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 232 (22), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (26) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. Figs. 232 (23) to (28) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 232 (23) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 232 (14), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 232 (23) to (28) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 232 (14).

  FIG. 232 (24) shows a state in which 襖 z 1 is enlarged as in FIG. 232 (16).

  FIG. 232 (25) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the change icon e 2 has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m10 passes in front of the icon is displayed. The display start of Yoshimune m10 is the start of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 232 (26) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping with 襖 z1, and Yoshimune m10 is displayed in a shadow picture. In this example, a scene is included in which the entire display of the change animation of the change effect (the entire Yoshimune m10) is displayed as a shadow picture. The target icon of the change effect in this example is the change icon e2, and after Yoshimune m10 passes the change icon e2, the outline of the change icon e2 changes from circular to jagged.

  FIG. 232 (27) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. The outline of the fluctuation icon e2 is changed from circular to jagged. Elimination of Yoshimune m10 is the end of the change effect of this example. In this example, after 襖 z1 is enlarged, a change effect is performed not by Yoshimune m1 which is a character of silhouette display but by Yoshimune m10. It should be noted that after the end of the change effect, ず z1 may not be reduced, and another hold change effect may be performed.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 232 (28), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (26) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 (1) to (15). Figs. 232 (1) to (15) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 232 (1) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 215 (3), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 232 (1) to (15) are, for example, effects subsequent to the state shown in FIG. 232 (3).

  FIG. 233 (2) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed in the first aspect.

  FIG. 233 (3) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m10 passes in front of the icon to be changed is displayed. The Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping on the door j, and the display start of the Yoshimune m10 is the start of the change effect of this example. As described above, even in the state where the icon is not displayed as a shadow picture, a change effect for changing the display mode of the icon may be executed.

  FIG. 233 (4) shows a state in which a change animation of change presentation is displayed. Yoshimune m10 has started moving.

  FIG. 233 (5) shows a state where Yoshimune m10 has passed in front of the hold icon g3. The icon of the target of change presentation in this example is the hold icon g3. The change effect may be a mode in which Yoshimune m10 of the character display appears on the back of the icon to be changed or passes through the back.

  FIG. 233 (6) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. The hold icon g3 is displayed in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 233 (7) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 233 (8) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed after the special figure 1 fluctuation game being executed in FIG. 233 (1) to (6) is finished. The hold icon g2 is displayed as the change icon e2 in the change icon display area e, the hold icon g3 is displayed in the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon g4 is displayed in the special view 1 hold icon display area It is displayed in the second area of f.

  FIG. 233 (9) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 233 (10) shows a state in which the shoji k is displayed during execution of the special view 1 change game. The fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icons g3 and g4 are displayed as shadows.

  FIG. 233 (11) shows a state in which change effect for changing the display mode of the icon has been started. In the change effect of this example, an animation (change animation) in which Yoshimune m10 passes in front of the icon is displayed. Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping on the door j. The display start of Yoshimune m10 is the start of the change effect of this example.

  FIG. 233 (12) shows a state in which a change animation of change effect is displayed and Yoshimune m10 moves toward the icon.

  FIG. 233 (13) shows a state in which a change animation of change effect is displayed. The Yoshimune m10 is displayed overlapping with the shoji k, and the Yoshimune m10 is displayed with a shadow. In this example, a scene is included in which the entire display of the change animation of the change effect (the entire Yoshimune m10) is displayed as a shadow picture. The target icon for the change effect in this example is the hold icon g3, and the outer shape of the hold icon g2 changes from circular to jagged after Yoshimune m10 passes through the hold icon g3.

  FIG. 233 (14) shows a state in which the change effect has ended. Elimination of Yoshimune m10 is the end of the change effect of this example.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 233 (15), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after the hold icon g3 becomes a change icon, a change effect (for example, effects shown in FIGS. 212 (9) to (28)) for changing the change icon may be performed.

  In this example, after the change effect is performed in the non-silhouette display state of the hold icon, the change effect is performed in the silhouette display state of the hold icon. The first change effect (the change effect shown in FIGS. 233 (3) to (6)) is executed 100% in the non-silhouette display, and the second change effect (FIG. 233 (11) to ( The change effect shown in 13) may be performed 100% in silhouette display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 233 (16) to (20). FIGS. 233 (16) to (20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 233 (16) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 233 (2), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 233 (16) to (20) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 233 (2).

  FIG. 233 (17) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Further, the variation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed in the first aspect. Further, the current stage of presentation is a fine stage, and a clear background image is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon and the hold icon in the case of the sunny stage are displayed in a circle. The default mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon in the case of the sunny stage is circular.

  FIG. 233 (18) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 233 (19) shows a state in which the effect stage has been changed to the rain stage during execution of the special view 1 change game. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image of a rain pattern is displayed. The fluctuation icon and the hold icon in the case of the rain stage are displayed as squares. The default mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon in the case of the rain stage is square.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 233 (20), it is shown that the effect is continuously executed. For example, after this, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 233 (4) to (28) may be executed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 233 (21) to (25) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 233 (21) shows that the effect is continued from the state shown in FIG. 233 (2), for example. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 233 (21) to (25) are, for example, effects following from the state shown in FIG. 233 (2).

  FIG. 233 (22) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In addition, the shoji k is displayed, and the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icons g2 to g4 are displayed as shadows. Further, the current stage of presentation is a fine stage, and a clear background image is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon and the hold icon are displayed in a circle.

  FIG. 233 (23) shows the passage of time.

  FIG. 233 (24) shows a state in which the effect stage has been changed to the rain stage during execution of the special view 1 change game. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image of a rain pattern is displayed. In this example, in the silhouette state, at least the display mode of the icons (default) on the sunny stage and the rainy stage is the same circle. Therefore, there is no change in the form of the icon even if the stage is changed in the silhouette state. In addition, the display mode of a certain icon may change according to this stage change, and the mode of the prefetch mode may differ according to an effect stage. When the display mode of the icon changes according to the stage change, the change (change display) of the icon is more emphasized.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 233 (26) to (28) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 233 (26) shows that the rendition continues from any of the above rendition examples, for example.

  FIG. 233 (26) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" is a red chance eye. As in the present example, chance eye effects may be performed. Even in the silhouette display state and the chance eye, the chance eye is displayed on the back side of the shoji k. The change display of the icon may be performed according to the chance eye display or after the chance message, and even in this case, the chance eyes are not displayed in a silhouette.

  FIG. 233 (27) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been executed according to the start of the special figure variation game. In the middle symbol display area 208b, a special design symbol including a character image of "change" is displayed. Thus, the special symbol may be made stoppable to the middle symbol. The change display of the icon may be performed in response to the stop of the special symbol of “change” or after the symbol, and even in this case, the chance eyes and the change display may not be displayed in a silhouette at all. Even in this case, the chance and the change display may be displayed on the back side of the shoji k.

  Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, FIG. 233 (28) has shown that presentation is performed continuously. For example, after this, for example, any of the above-described exercises may be performed.

The above-mentioned silhouette is a shadow picture.
The change display may be performed in the silhouette display state or may be performed in the non-silhouette display state. The change display is an effect display that changes the aspect of the icon.
Depending on the type of change display, the occurrence probability is higher in the non-silhouette display state than in the silhouette display state. For example, the change display by Yoshimune m10 has a higher probability of occurrence in the silhouette display state than in the non-silhouette display state, and the change display by Yoshimune m1 has a higher occurrence probability in the non-silhouette display state than the silhouette display state. It is also good.
The change display includes character displays such as Yoshimune m1, Kunoichi m3, princess m5, ninja m7, Yoshimune m10 and the like, and the character display can be identified even in the silhouette display state.
The display time of a certain change display is the same regardless of whether in the silhouette display state or the non-silhouette display state.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 197 to 233.

(F1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decoration symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a fluctuation icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon),
There are cases where icons are displayed in a silhouette (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
One icon (for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode (for example, the outline is a jagged shadow picture) after the certain change presentation is started in the first state g2) may be displayed (started) in a second display mode (for example, the outer shape is a jagged aspect 3) after the first state is finished,
One icon (for example, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is the first icon. In some cases, the outer shape of the variation icon e2 shown in FIG. 214 (28) may be displayed (started) in a jagged manner 4 after the state has ended, for example.
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change effect includes a display of a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “a first change animation (for example, an animation in which a Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots an arrow m2)”. And
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene (for example, shown in FIG. 212 (6) The display of at least a portion (for example, Yoshimune m1) of the display of the first change animation is not displayed in a silhouette).
In the state where the icon is not displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the “second state”), the certain change effect may be performed (started) (for example, FIGS. 233 (3) to (6) )reference),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

(F2)
It is a game stand described in f1,
An icon may be displayed as a silhouette over a plurality of times of variable display of a decorative symbol as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

(F3)
The gaming machine described in f1 or f2,
The first change animation in a scene other than the first scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “third scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))”. Display (eg, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) is not displayed in the silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(F4)
The game console described in f3,
A certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect (for example, FIG. 212 (16, for example, FIG. 212 (16), which is different from the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as“ first change effect ”) ) To (18))) can be performed,
The second change effect is a change animation different from the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17)). It is an effect that includes the display of
When the second change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second scene (for example, FIG. 212 (17) At least a part of the display of the second change animation (eg, the heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette in the “change animation shown)”), which is different from the second scene of the second change animation. In a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the second variation animation display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette not,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(F5)
The game console described in f4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

(F6)
A game console as described in f4 or f5,
In the first state, change effects of both the first change effect and the second change effect may be performed (started) (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)) ,
A game stand characterized by

(F7)
A game console according to any one of f4 to f6, wherein
In the second state, the first change effect (for example, in the cases shown in FIGS. 215 (5) to (8)) may be performed (started),
In the second state, there are cases where the second change effect is performed (started) (for example, the cases shown in FIG. 215 (13) to (15)),
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
A game stand characterized by

(F8)
It is the gaming machine described in f7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

(F9)
The gaming machine described in f7 or f8,
A movable means (eg, movable body 700);
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can execute a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) And
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(F10)
The gaming machine according to any one of f4 to f9,
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

(F11)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f10, wherein
When the icon is displayed as a silhouette, the outline shape of the icon (e.g., a circular shape or a jagged outline shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

(F12)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f11, wherein
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a silhouette to being not displayed as a silhouette (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

(F13)
The game console described in f12,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(F14)
The gaming machine described in f13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

(F15)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(F16)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture in the first state) Is
A game stand characterized by

(F17)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette (for example, circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(F18)
The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f17, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(G1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decoration symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a fluctuation icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon),
There are cases where icons are displayed in a silhouette (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the first state, after the start of a certain change effect (for example, after the state displayed with a shadow is finished), the first display mode (for example, the outline is a jagged shadow) was displayed One icon (for example, the reserve icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) is displayed in the second display mode (for example, the mode 3 of the outline shape is jagged) after the first state ends (start May))
One icon (for example, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is the first icon. In some cases, the outer shape of the variation icon e2 shown in FIG. 214 (28) may be displayed (started) in a jagged manner 4 after the state has ended, for example.
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change effect includes a display of a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “a first change animation (for example, an animation in which a Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots an arrow m2)”. And
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene (for example, shown in FIG. 212 (6) The display of at least a portion (for example, Yoshimune m1) of the display of the first change animation is not displayed in a silhouette).
Another on-hold change presentation (hereinafter referred to as “second change presentation (for example, FIGS. 212 (16) to (18)) different from the above-mentioned change presentation (hereinafter referred to as“ first change presentation ”) Change effect shown) and “change effect shown in FIGS. 230 (2) to (6), (9) to (13), etc.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

(G2)
The game console described in g1,
An icon may be displayed as a silhouette over a plurality of times of variable display of a decorative symbol as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

(G3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note g1 or g2,
The first change animation in a scene other than the first scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “third scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))”. Display (eg, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) is not displayed in the silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(G4)
The game console described in g3,
The second change effect is a change animation different from the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17)). It is an effect that includes the display of
When the second change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second scene (for example, FIG. 212 (17) At least a part of the display of the second change animation (eg, the heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette in the “change animation shown)”), which is different from the second scene of the second change animation. In a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the second variation animation display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette not,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(G5)
The game console described in g4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

(G6)
It is a game console as described in g4 or g5,
In the first state, change effects of both the first change effect and the second change effect may be performed (started) (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)) ,
A game stand characterized by

(G7)
A game console according to any one of g4 to g6, wherein
In the case where the icon is not displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect is performed (started) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 215 (5) to (8) In the case shown in),
In the second state, the second change effect (for example, in the cases shown in FIGS. 215 (13) to (15)) may be performed (started),
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
A game stand characterized by

(G8)
The game console described in g7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

(G9)
The gaming machine described in g7 or g8,
A movable means (eg, movable body 700);
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can execute a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) And
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(G10)
The gaming machine according to any one of g4 to g9,
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

(G11)
The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g10, wherein
When the icon is displayed as a silhouette, the outline shape of the icon (e.g., a circular shape or a jagged outline shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

(G12)
The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g11, wherein
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a silhouette to being not displayed as a silhouette (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

(G13)
The game console described in g12,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(G14)
The game console described in g13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

(G15)
A game console according to any one of g1 to g14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(G16)
The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture in the first state) Is
A game stand characterized by

(G17)
A game console according to any one of g1 to g16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette (for example, circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(G18)
The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g17,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100)
A game stand characterized by

(H1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decoration symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a fluctuation icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon),
There are cases where icons are displayed in a silhouette (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
One icon (for example, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is the first state May be displayed (started) in the second display mode after
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is a third display mode (for example, a diagram after the first state is ended) The outline shape of the variation icon e2 shown in 214 (28) may be displayed (started) in a jagged aspect 4),
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change effect is referred to as a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first change animation (for example, animation in which Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots arrow m2)”. Effect that includes the display of),
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, the first change in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). At least a part of the animation display is not displayed in silhouette,
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene (for example, shown in FIG. 212 (6) At least part of the display of the first change animation (e.g., Yoshimune m1) is not displayed in the form of a silhouette, and is different from the first scene of the first change animation). Display of at least a part of the display of the first change animation (for example, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2 in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “third scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))”) ) Is displayed in silhouette,
In the third scene, the display of the first change animation displayed as a silhouette (for example, Yoshimune m10 shown in FIG. 230 (6)) and the icon displayed as a silhouette (for example, FIG. 230 (6) And the display of the hold icon and the change icon) overlap (see, for example, FIG. 230 (6)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

(H2)
It is the game stand described in h1, and
An icon may be displayed as a silhouette over a plurality of times of variable display of a decorative symbol as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

(H3)
The game console described in h2,
A certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect (for example, FIG. 212 (16, for example, FIG. 212 (16), which is different from the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as“ first change effect ”) ) To (18))) can be performed,
The second change effect is a change animation different from the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17)). It is an effect that includes the display of
When the second change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second scene (for example, FIG. 212 (17) At least a part of the display of the second change animation (eg, the heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette in the “change animation shown)”), which is different from the second scene of the second change animation. In a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the second variation animation display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette not,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(H4)
It is the gaming machine described in h3.
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

(H5)
It is a game console as described in h3 or h4,
In the first state, change effects of both the first change effect and the second change effect may be performed (started) (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)) ,
A game stand characterized by

(H6)
The gaming machine according to any one of h3 to h5,
In a state in which the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "the second state"), the first change effect may be performed (started),
In the second state, there are cases where the second change effect is performed (for example, the cases shown in FIG. 215 (13) to (15)),
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
A game stand characterized by

(H7)
It is the gaming machine described in h6,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

(H8)
The gaming machine described in h6 or h7,
A movable means (eg, movable body 700);
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can execute a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) And
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(H9)
The gaming machine according to any one of h3 to h8,
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

(H10)
A game console according to any one of h1 to h9, wherein
When the icon is displayed as a silhouette, the outline shape of the icon (e.g., a circular shape or a jagged outline shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

(H11)
The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h10,
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a silhouette to being not displayed as a silhouette (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

(H12)
It is the gaming machine described in h11,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(H13)
The game console described in h12,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

(H14)
The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(H15)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h14,
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture in the first state) Is
A game stand characterized by

(H16)
The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h15,
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette (for example, circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(H17)
A game console according to any one of h1 to h16, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(I1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decoration symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a fluctuation icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon),
There are cases where icons are displayed in a silhouette (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
One icon (for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode (for example, the outline is a jagged shadow picture) after the certain change presentation is started in the first state g2) may be displayed (started) in a second display mode (for example, the outer shape is a jagged aspect 3) after the first state is finished,
One icon (for example, FIG. 212) being displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state (for example, after the state displayed in the shadow picture is finished) The hold icon g2 shown in (4) is displayed in a third display mode (for example, the outline shape of the variation icon e2 shown in FIG. 214 (28) is jagged after the first state ends). (Initiated) may be
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change effect includes a display of a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “a first change animation (for example, an animation in which a Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots an arrow m2)”. And
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene (for example, shown in FIG. 212 (6) At least part of the display of the first change animation (eg, Yoshimune m1) is not displayed in a silhouette).
A certain movable means (for example, movable means 700) may be provided, and at least a part of the icon displayed by the silhouette may be overlapped with the certain movable means (for example, see FIG. 230 (25)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

(I2)
It is the game stand described in i1,
An icon may be displayed as a silhouette over a plurality of times of variable display of a decorative symbol as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

(I3)
The game console described in i1 or i2,
The first change animation in a scene other than the first scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “third scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))”. Display (eg, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) is not displayed in the silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(I4)
The game console described in i3,
A certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect (for example, FIG. 212 (16, for example, FIG. 212 (16), which is different from the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as“ first change effect ”) ) To (18))) can be performed,
The second change effect is a change animation different from the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17)). It is an effect that includes the display of
When the second change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second scene (for example, FIG. 212 (17) At least a part of the display of the second change animation (eg, the heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette in the “change animation shown)”), which is different from the second scene of the second change animation. In a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the second variation animation display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette not,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(I5)
The game console described in i4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

(I6)
It is a game stand as described in the remarks i4 or i5,
In the first state, there are cases (started) in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed (for example, see FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)) ,
A game stand characterized by

(I7)
A game console according to any one of i4 to i6, wherein
In a state in which the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "the second state"), the first change effect may be performed (started),
In the second state, there are cases where the second change effect is performed (for example, the cases shown in FIG. 215 (13) to (15)),
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
A game stand characterized by

(I8)
It is a game console described in Appendix i7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

(I9)
The game console described in i7 or i8,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the certain movable means performs a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) Is viable and
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state is performed, the certain movable means can execute the certain operation,
When the second change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the certain movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the second change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state is performed, the certain movable means can perform the certain operation.
A game stand characterized by

(I10)
A game console according to any one of i4 to i9, wherein
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

(I11)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i10, wherein
When the icon is displayed as a silhouette, the outline shape of the icon (e.g., a circular shape or a jagged outline shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

(I12)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i11, wherein
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a silhouette to being not displayed as a silhouette (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

(I13)
The game console described in i12,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(I14)
The game console described in i13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

(I15)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(I16)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture in the first state) Is
A game stand characterized by

(I17)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette (for example, circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(I18)
It is a game console according to any one of i1 to i17,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(J1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decoration symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a fluctuation icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon),
There are cases where icons are displayed in a silhouette (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
One icon (for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode (for example, the outline is a jagged shadow picture) after the certain change presentation is started in the first state g2) may be displayed (started) in a second display mode (for example, the outer shape is a jagged aspect 3) after the first state is finished,
One icon (for example, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is the first icon. In some cases, the outer shape of the variation icon e2 shown in FIG. 214 (28) may be displayed (started) in a jagged manner 4 after the state has ended, for example.
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change effect includes a display of a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “a first change animation (for example, an animation in which a Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots an arrow m2)”. And
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene (for example, shown in FIG. 212 (6) The display of at least a portion (for example, Yoshimune m1) of the display of the first change animation is not displayed in a silhouette).
When the icon of the second display mode is displayed after the end of the first state, the display mode of the icon may change to another display mode.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

(J2)
It is the game stand described in j1, and
An icon may be displayed as a silhouette over a plurality of times of variable display of a decorative symbol as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

(J3)
It is a game console described in j1 or j2, and
The first change animation in a scene other than the first scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “third scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))”. Display (eg, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) is not displayed in the silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(J4)
It is a game stand described in j3, and
A certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect (for example, FIG. 212 (16, for example, FIG. 212 (16), which is different from the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as“ first change effect ”) ) To (18))) can be performed,
The second change effect is a change animation different from the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17)). It is an effect that includes the display of
When the second change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second scene (for example, FIG. 212 (17) At least a part of the display of the second change animation (eg, the heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette in the “change animation shown)”), which is different from the second scene of the second change animation. In a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the second variation animation display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette not,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(J5)
It is the gaming machine described in j4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

(J6)
It is a game console as described in the appendix j4 or j5,
In the first state, change effects of both the first change effect and the second change effect may be performed (started) (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)) ,
A game stand characterized by

(J7)
A game console according to any one of j4 to j6, wherein
In a state in which the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "the second state"), the first change effect may be performed (started),
In the second state, the first change effect (for example, the case shown in FIGS. 215 (5) to (8)) may be performed,
In the second state, there are cases where the second change effect is performed (for example, the cases shown in FIG. 215 (13) to (15)),
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
A game stand characterized by

(J8)
It is the gaming machine described in j7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

(J9)
It is a game console described in j7 or j8,
A movable means (eg, movable body 700);
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can execute a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) And
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(J10)
The gaming machine according to any one of j4 to j9, wherein
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

(J11)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j10, wherein
When the icon is displayed as a silhouette, the outline shape of the icon (e.g., a circular shape or a jagged outline shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

(J12)
The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j11, wherein
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a silhouette to being not displayed as a silhouette (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

(J13)
It is the gaming machine described in j12,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(J14)
It is the gaming machine described in j13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

(J15)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(J16)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture in the first state) Is
A game stand characterized by

(J17)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette (for example, circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(J18)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j17, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(K1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decoration symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a fluctuation icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon),
There are cases where icons are displayed in a silhouette (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
One icon (for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode (for example, the outline is a jagged shadow picture) after the certain change presentation is started in the first state g2) may be displayed (started) in a second display mode (for example, the outer shape is a jagged aspect 3) after the first state is finished,
One icon (for example, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is the first icon. In some cases, the outer shape of the variation icon e2 shown in FIG. 214 (28) may be displayed (started) in a jagged manner 4 after the state has ended, for example.
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change effect includes a display of a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “a first change animation (for example, an animation in which a Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots an arrow m2)”. And
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene (for example, shown in FIG. 212 (6) The display of at least a portion (for example, Yoshimune m1) of the display of the first change animation is not displayed in a silhouette).
When the number of reservations increases in the first state, the icon displayed according to the increase is also displayed as a silhouette (for example, the suspension icon g4 shown in FIGS. 220 (9) to (11)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

(K2)
The game console described in k1,
An icon may be displayed as a silhouette over a plurality of times of variable display of a decorative symbol as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

(K3)
The gaming machine described in k1 or k2,
The first change animation in a scene other than the first scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “third scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))”. Display (eg, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) is not displayed in the silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(K4)
The game console described in k3,
A certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect (for example, FIG. 212 (16, for example, FIG. 212 (16), which is different from the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as“ first change effect ”) ) To (18))) can be performed,
The second change effect is a change animation different from the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17)). It is an effect that includes the display of
When the second change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second scene (for example, FIG. 212 (17) At least a part of the display of the second change animation (eg, the heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette in the “change animation shown)”), which is different from the second scene of the second change animation. In a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the second variation animation display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette not,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(K5)
The game console described in k4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

(K6)
A game console as described in k4 or k5,
In the first state, change effects of both the first change effect and the second change effect may be performed (started) (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)) ,
A game stand characterized by

(K7)
A game console according to any one of k4 to k6, wherein
In a state in which the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "the second state"), the first change effect may be performed (started),
In the second state, the first change effect (for example, the case shown in FIGS. 215 (5) to (8)) may be performed,
In the second state, there are cases where the second change effect is performed (for example, the cases shown in FIG. 215 (13) to (15)),
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),

(K8)
The game console described in k7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

(K9)
It is a game console described in k7 or k8,
A movable means (eg, movable body 700);
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can execute a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) And
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(K10)
A game console according to any one of k4 to k9,
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

(K11)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k10, wherein
When the icon is displayed as a silhouette, the outline shape of the icon (e.g., a circular shape or a jagged outline shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

(K12)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k11, wherein
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a silhouette to being not displayed as a silhouette (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

(K13)
The game console described in k12,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(K14)
The game console described in k13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

(K15)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(K16)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture in the first state) Is
A game stand characterized by

(K17)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette (for example, circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(K18)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k17,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(L1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decoration symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an icon (for example, a hold icon or a fluctuation icon),
The icon is an icon related to hold (eg, hold icon),
There are cases where icons are displayed in a silhouette (for example, the cases shown in FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)),
It is possible to execute certain change effects (for example, the change effects shown in FIGS. 212 (5) to (8)) that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the first state, after the start of a certain change effect (for example, after the state displayed with a shadow is finished), the first display mode (for example, the outline is a jagged shadow) was displayed One icon (for example, the reserve icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) is displayed in the second display mode (for example, the mode 3 of the outline shape is jagged) after the first state ends (start May))
One icon (for example, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 212 (4)) displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is the first icon. In some cases, the outer shape of the variation icon e2 shown in FIG. 214 (28) may be displayed (started) in a jagged manner 4 after the state has ended, for example.
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
It is possible to display a notice display (for example, a dialogue notice display zk3) regarding an effect of changing the display mode of the icon,
In the first state, the advance notice may be displayed (started),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand of the configuration, it is possible to give an expectation before the display mode after the change of the icon becomes clear.

(L2)
It is the game stand described in l1,
An icon may be displayed as a silhouette over a plurality of times of variable display of a decorative symbol as a pre-reading notice (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (4) to (24)).
A game stand characterized by

(L3)
It is the gaming machine described in l1 or l2,
The certain change effect includes a display of a change animation (hereinafter, referred to as “a first change animation (for example, an animation in which a Yoshimose m1 shown in FIGS. 212 (5) and (6) shoots an arrow m2)”. And
When the certain change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene (for example, shown in FIG. 212 (6) At least a part of the display of the first change animation (eg, Yoshimune m1) is displayed in the form of a silhouette, but the scene is different from the first scene of the first change animation. Display of the first change animation (eg, Yoshimune m1, arrow m2) is not displayed as a silhouette in a scene (hereinafter referred to as "the third scene (eg, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (5))")
A game stand characterized by

(L4)
The game console described in l3,
A certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect (for example, FIG. 212 (16, for example, FIG. 212 (16), which is different from the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as“ first change effect ”) ) To (18))) can be performed,
The second change effect is a change animation different from the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation (for example, change animation shown in FIGS. 212 (16) and (17)). It is an effect that includes the display of
When the second change effect is performed (started) in the first state, a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second scene (for example, FIG. 212 (17) At least a part of the display of the second change animation (eg, the heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette in the “change animation shown)”), which is different from the second scene of the second change animation. In a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as “the fourth scene (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 212 (16))”, the second variation animation display (for example, princess m5, heart m6) is displayed as a silhouette not,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(L5)
The game console described in l4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect (for example, a change effect by Yoshimune m1 and arrow m2),
One of the change effects of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect (for example, the change effect by the princess m5 and the heart m6),
The first change animation is a display including a first display (for example, arrow m2),
The second change animation is a display including a second display (for example, a heart m6),
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (6)) and the second change animation in the second scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (17)) is different,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene (for example, the shape of the arrow m2 shown in FIG. 212 (5)) and the second change animation in the fourth scene The shape of the second display (for example, the shape of the heart m6 shown in FIG. 212 (16)) is different,
A game stand characterized by

(L6)
It is a game console as described in l4 or l5,
In the first state, change effects of both the first change effect and the second change effect may be performed (started) (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (1) to (28)) ,
A game stand characterized by
A game stand characterized by

(L7)
It is a game console according to any one of l4 to l6,
In the case where the icon is not displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect is performed (started) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 215 (5) to (8) In the case shown in),
In the second state, the second change effect (for example, the case shown in FIGS. 215 (13) to (15)) may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect (for example, the effect image p2 shown in FIG. 212 (26), FIG. 212 (27) after the end of the first state The change effect sound shown in
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (7)) is performed during execution of the first change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the first change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect (for example, a change effect sound shown in FIG. 215 (15)) is performed during execution of the second change effect. (For example, in the case of the second state, the change effect presentation is performed each time the second change presentation is performed, but in the case of the first state, the change effect presentation is performed every time the second change presentation is performed Change effect presentation is performed after the end of the first state, without effect presentation being performed),
A game stand characterized by

(L8)
The game console described in l7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (5) and (6)),
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation (for example, the change animation shown in FIGS. 215 (13) and (14)),
A game stand characterized by

(L9)
It is the gaming machine described in l7 or l8,
A movable means (eg, movable body 700);
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can execute a certain operation (for example, an operation of moving to the front of the fluctuation icon) And
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(L10)
A game console according to any one of l4 to l9,
The display means can display a third display (for example, promotion icons n1 and n2) in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by

(L11)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices l1 to l10,
When the icon is displayed as a silhouette, the outline shape of the icon (e.g., a circular shape or a jagged outline shape) is visible.
A game stand characterized by

(L12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices l1 to l11, wherein
There are cases where the icon changes from being displayed as a silhouette to being not displayed as a silhouette (for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (25) to (27)),
A game stand characterized by

(L13)
The game console described in Appendix I12,
The display means comprises an icon display area (for example, a display area UI) capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(L14)
It is the gaming machine described in l13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, mode 3),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode (for example, mode 4),
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by

(L15)
A game console according to any one of l1 to l14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display (for example, shoji k)
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case where the display of the certain display and the display of the certain part of the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping (hereinafter referred to as "first case (for example, the case shown in FIG. 212 (9)"),
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by

(L16)
It is a game console according to any one of l1 to l15,
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes (for example, the display mode of a circular shadow picture or the display mode of a jagged shadow picture in the first state) Is
A game stand characterized by

(L17)
A game console according to any one of l1 to l16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette (for example, circular shadow picture) in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(L18)
It is a game console according to any one of l1 to l17,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 234 to 258 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 234 to 258, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in FIG.

<Type of item>
Next, with reference to FIG. 234, types of items included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a generic term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the item according to the present embodiment is largely divided into two types: custom item and non-custom item. It can be different. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. The non-custom item is an item that can not be modified (customized) in the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine 100, but the player is given a predetermined profit.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give the item to the player when an item giving condition set for each item is satisfied. When the custom item is given, the player performs the setting operation of the given custom item by using the effect customization screen (see FIG. 243 (q etc.) described later), thereby displaying the pachinko machine 100. , Voice, functions, various probabilities, etc. can be modified (customized) according to their own preferences. Also, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain predetermined benefits (eg, benefits for the player such as a notice, a prefetch notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 234, for example, the item grant condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is granted. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the user's preference. In addition, when the item grant condition of item D (hold pedestal custom 1), item E (hold pedestal custom 2) or item F (hold pedestal custom 3) is satisfied and the item is granted, a pachinko machine It is possible to modify (customize) a part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) at 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed below the hold icon) according to the user's preference.

  In addition, when the item giving condition of “heat” is satisfied and the item is given, the player is notified by the notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)”. Can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a hit or a high possibility of a hit). In addition, when the item grant condition of "superheat" is satisfied and the item is granted, a notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is "super heat (very high expectation)" is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a big hit, or that the possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, the meter increase presentation and the item assignment presentation will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gauges A meter having a scale) is displayed, and one sphere is inserted into the entrance hole 227 for increasing the meter, and the gauge of the meter is turned off (decreased) one by one each time it enters (details will be described later).

  By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine whether the number of balls entering the meter increase entrance 227 or the gauge of the meter is full (predetermined value for the meter increase entrance 227). It becomes possible to grasp whether a number (in this example, ten balls) has entered. In addition, the aspect of meter increase presentation is not limited to this example, For example, even if one sphere lights at every entrance into the entrance for meter increase 227 and enters, one gauge of the meter is lit (increased). Good.

  Further, the item giving effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the giving of the item, and in the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number of opening ports 227 for meter increase (this example) Then, it is determined that the item granting condition is satisfied when 10 spheres have entered), and using the decorative symbol display device 208, an indication is given that an item is given, the type of the item concerned, etc. Perform (details will be described later). By executing such an item giving effect, the player can grasp that the item has been given, the type of the item, and the like. In addition, the item giving condition and the aspect of the item giving effect are not limited to this example, for example, the number and type of already acquired items may be displayed, or the item is special (rare item May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  The first embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. The gaming state shown in FIG. 235 (a) is a state (during symbol variation) in which the variation game of the special figure is being executed. Also, in this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, and the number of special figure 2 variation games is 3 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 6 by the display of six reserve icons PI. Is displayed, nine gauges are extinguished, and one gauge GG is lit. With the meter increase effect, nine spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (one more sphere It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), when one ball enters the entrance for increasing meter 227, as shown in FIG. 235 (c), it is lit 1 as shown in FIG. 235 (c). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 235 (d), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter is performed By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 235 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 235 (e) to (g). An animated display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 235 (h), information on items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 235 (i), the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description IT of the item as information on the item (in this example, the description of item A) (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  The state shown in FIG. 235 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In this example, when the information on the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) is displayed in the item giving effect, a button is displayed for the period shown in FIG. Make a presentation.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item application effect by displaying the display related to the button effect in front of the display regarding the item application effect or the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is made to overlap at least a part of the display of the display and the decoration of the design. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not disturbed, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the item By temporarily reducing the visibility of the presentation effect, the presentation effect may be able to be enhanced.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG capable of performing a specific selection (in this example, selection of whether to set an acquired item or not) from a plurality of options and an appearance of a chance button 136 effective for accepting an operation are simulated. The image of the button and the character image prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, PUSH), and the appearance of the left and right keys whose reception of the operation is effective among the up, down, left and right direction keys (not shown) An operation valid period display TG including a button image BG2 and a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 235 (l) in a state where the option of “Yes” is temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 235 (m) By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the “Yes” selection has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  In the state shown in FIG. 235 (n), the button effect is ended and the item giving effect is resumed. In the item presentation effect after resumption, FIG. 235 (n) to FIG. (P) are triggered when a specific selection (in this example, selection to set an acquired item) is made from a plurality of options in button production. After displaying an animation that moves from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the image including the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of "during item A setting" instead of the character display CD1, it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition during the SP (super) reach change (the gauge of the meter becomes full). In the present embodiment 2, over the period shown in FIG. 236 (a) to FIG. 236 (b), the variation game of the special figure develops from the normal symbol variation to the SP reach variation, and continues from FIG. 236 (c) to FIG. 236 (c) In addition to the SP reach fluctuation, the SP reach effect is executed over the period shown in FIG.

  During one such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 236 (d), when one ball enters the entrance for increasing meter 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 236 (e). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 236 (f), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the effect modes of the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those of the above-described embodiment 1 except that the SP reach change is being performed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item provision is performed by displaying the display regarding the item provision effect in front of the display regarding the SP reach effect and the meter over the period shown in FIG. 236 (h) to FIG. 236 (q). At least a part of the display relating to the rendering is overlapped with the display relating to the SP reach rendering and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item giving effect is not impeded, so that the information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the SP reach effect and the meter can be improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  Further, at least a part of the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed by displaying the variation display of the decoration symbol in front of the display regarding the item giving effect over the period shown in FIG. 236 (k) to the same figure (o). Is overlapped with at least a part of the display regarding the item giving effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol is not impeded, it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game and also temporarily recognize the visibility of the item giving effect. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the velocity.

  Furthermore, over the period shown in the following FIGS. 236 (l) to (o), the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed in front of the display for the SP reach effect or the item imparting effect Thus, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol overlap at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item imparting effect. With such a configuration, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the visibility of the button effect will not be disturbed, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variation game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time thereof. In addition to being able to perform, there may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach effect or the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 3 is an example which starts an item provision effect based on that item provision conditions were satisfied (due that the gauge of a meter became full) during non-pattern fluctuation (during stop display of a symbol). The gaming state shown in FIG. 237 (a) is a state in which the variation game of the special drawing is not executed (during non-symbol variation). In this example, there is no special figure fluctuation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations for special figure 1 fluctuation game is 0, the number for special figure 2 fluctuation game is 0, It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such non-design fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it lights up as shown in FIG. 237 (c). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 237 (d), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the effect modes of the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those in Example 1 except that the SP reach change is being performed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item provision is performed by displaying the display related to the item provision effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIG. 237 (j) to FIG. (M) At least a portion of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbol is There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item giving effect is started during the symbol change based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the non-pattern change (during stop display of the symbol). This is an example of During the non-design fluctuation shown in FIG. 238 (a), as shown in FIG. 238 (b), one ball enters the entrance for 227 for increasing the meter, and in the subsequent FIG. 238 (c), it lights up A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 238 (d), during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 238 (c), based on the ball entering the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) In the subsequent FIG. 238 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 238 (f), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 238 (g). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 238 (h), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter is performed By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 238 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to this example, triggered by the establishment of the item giving condition, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 238 (i) to FIG. 238 (k). An animated display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 238 (l), the information on the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 238 (m), the item image IG including the character display of "Heat" is displayed. In this item image IG, an item giving condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure fluctuation game is “hot (high expectation)” (the special figure fluctuation game has a winning result of It indicates that it is a hit, or that the possibility of a hit is high.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  In the state shown in the following FIG. 238 (n), the item giving effect is ended and the SP reach is started. As described above, if the display related to the item giving effect is deleted before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not disturbed, so the progress of the fluctuation game is accurately made to the player. It may be possible to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation in the state where the number of reservations is full. This is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on what has been done (the gauge of the meter is full).

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 239 (a) is a state (during symbol variation) in which the variation game of the special figure is being executed. In this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, the number of special figure 2 variation games is 4 It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 7 by the display of seven reserve icons PI. Is displayed, and 6 gauges are turned off and 4 gauges GG are turned on. 6 spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (the 4 spheres are It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 239 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 239 (c), it is lit 4 A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 239 (c), as shown in FIG. 239 (d), the ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230), and the following FIG. 239 As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special game 1 floating games is increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the lower display area of the screen, the number of reserved special game variations (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) increases from 7 to 8 and becomes full by the display of eight reserve icons PI Is shown.

  In this example, the meter increase effect is shifted to the increase mode when the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) becomes full (8 in this example). Configured. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced by N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 239 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 239 (g), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. Perform meter increase effect to turn off two of the gauges. In addition, as shown in FIG. 239 (i), when one ball further enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 239 (j), the one gauge which has been lit is extinguished. By doing this, a meter increase effect is realized in which all 10 gauges go out, and the right to erase another gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. The subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode), and therefore the same in FIG. 239 The reference numerals are attached and the explanation is omitted.

  In this example, the example shows transition to the increase mode (double mode) based on the fact that the ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation while the number of reservations is full. It may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the condition of is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item grant condition is satisfied (when the gauge of the meter is full), the right to erase the gauge of the meter can be carried over to the next game, but it is configured not to carry over The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 240 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment in time series.

    In the sixth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving two types of custom items). Note that the meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are applied in the item application effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 240 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, as shown in FIG. 240 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of item names (in this example, item A and item B) IN1 and IN2 and descriptions of items (in this example, descriptions of item A and item B (content in the figure) Is omitted)) Display IT1 and IT2. In addition, three or more types of items may be provided in the item provision effect.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 240 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button effect according to the present example, a selection display SG capable of specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item A or item B) and reception of the operation are effective. Among the button image BG1 including an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (in this example, PUSH) prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136, the operation acceptance is effective among the up, down, left, and right direction keys not shown. And an operation effective period display TG including a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right key) is effective. .

  As shown in FIG. 240 (l), when the selection operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 240 (l) while the option of “item A” is temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 240 (m) In addition, by highlighting the option of “item A”, it is informed that the selection of “item A” has been confirmed (that item A has been selected to be set among acquired item A and item B). Do.

  In the state shown in the subsequent FIG. 240 (n), the button effect is ended and the item giving effect is resumed. In the item presentation effect after resumption, FIG. 240 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, selection to set item A among acquired item A and item B). (N) to (p), an animation is displayed in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed while being moved from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display region After that, instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", by performing the character display CD3 of "during item A set", it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, an increase in meter effect and an item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving custom items and non-custom items). It is to be noted that the meter increase effect, the item imparting effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are imparted in the item imparting effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, as shown in FIG. 241 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description of the item (in this example, the description of item A (content is omitted)) display of IT1 Display the item image IG including the display of the character of "Heat". Note that the non-custom item to be assigned in the item assignment effect may be another non-custom item (for example, hold change, model explanation 1 to 3, lost or the like) described using FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 241 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. The subsequent item giving effect and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore the same reference numerals as in FIG. 241 denote the same, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen on the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 243 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in time series, and FIG. 244 shows various menus selected on the menu screen. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demonstration screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 242 (a) using the decorative symbol display device 208. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen whose display is started when, for example, a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during non-symbol variation, and in the present example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or brightness adjustment Display the top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen capable of selecting various menus is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in the present example, the right key) or the third operation means (in the present example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or the brightness adjustment screen) is displayed. , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) or the fifth while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When the operation of the operation means (in this example, the down key) is received, the display of a luminance adjustment screen such as the various lamps 418 and the decorative symbol display device 208 etc. capable of adjusting the luminance is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step and the meter display is suggested to indicate that the volume is increased by one. If the operation of the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is decreased by one step Run. When the operation of the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display is performed to indicate that the brightness is increased by one step. When the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the down key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is decreased by one step is executed Do.

  Furthermore, when it is detected that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed while displaying the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demonstration screen is started, and the symbol variation display is performed. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 242 (b) is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to the present example is composed of four menus of effect customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and return to the demo screen, and when each menu is selected, the effect customization screen and the mobile terminal It is configured to transition to a linked service screen, an initialization confirmation screen, and a demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 243, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the non-symbol variation shown in FIG. 243 (a), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is received as shown in FIG. 243 (c) while the demo screen is displayed, the display of FIG. 243 (d) is performed. The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 243 (e), during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161 d) is accepted, so as shown in FIG. 243 (f). As shown, while the brightness is lowered by one step, the meter display indicating that the brightness is decreased by one is executed, and as shown in FIG. 243 (g), the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key 161c). Since the operation of (a) is received, as shown in FIG. 243 (h), the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is increased by one step is executed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 243 (i), during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted, and thus the brightness adjustment screen is replaced. The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 243 (j) is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 243 (k), while the display of the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161 a) is accepted. As such, the meter display is executed to indicate that the volume has been lowered by one step and the volume has been decreased by one step.

  Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 243 (l) is displayed, the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 243 (m) is started. Since the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is received as shown in FIG. 243 (n) while the demonstration screen is displayed, the menu screen shown in FIG. 243 (o) The display of has started.

  Subsequently, with the menu of effect customization being provisionally selected on this menu screen, as shown in FIG. 243 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted. , The display of the effect customization screen has been started. Further, as shown in FIG. 243 (r), while the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 243 (q) is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. The display of moving the light display to the next selectable item (in this example, the item P) is performed, and with the item P temporarily selected, as shown in FIG. 243 (t), the first operation is performed. Since the operation corresponding to the means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character display of "setting item P" is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208 By doing, it is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal linked service screen>
FIG. 242 (c) is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal-linked service screen according to the present embodiment is configured of six menus of trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the portable terminal interlocking service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 244 (b), the display of the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 244 (b1) is started, and this portable terminal interlocking service is started. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, after the trial play screen display shown in FIG. 244 (b1-1) is started, the new registration is selected on the trial play screen The display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 244 (b1-2) is started.

  When the password input menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 244 (b2), the password as shown in FIG. 244 (b2-1) and the same figure (b2-1-1) The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, a display of a screen notifying a password input error as shown in FIG. 244 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of a screen notifying the completion of the password input as shown in FIG. 244 (b2-1-3) is started.

  When the data storage menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 244 (b3), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 244 (b3-1) is started, and this confirmation screen is displayed. When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 244 (b3-2) is started, and “Exit” is selected while this two-dimensional code display screen is displayed. In this case, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 244 (b3-2-1) is started.

  Also, when the menu of data clear is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 244 (b4), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 244 (b4-1) is started, and this confirmation screen When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 244 (b4-1-1) is started. When the quick start menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 244 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 244 (b5-1) is started. When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, with reference to FIG. 245, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 245 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (display of the gauge of the meter becomes full) while the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. The gaming state shown in FIG. 245 (a) is a state in which a demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-pattern variation. Also, in this example, there are no special figure fluctuation games being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special drawing 1 fluctuation games is 0, and the number of special drawing 2 fluctuation games is 0 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 while such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 245 (c). After performing the meter increase effect that all the ten gauges go out by turning off the one gauge which has been lit, as shown in FIG. 245 (d), "full" instead of the meter display By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and therefore the same in FIG. Although the code is attached and the description is omitted, the display related to the item giving effect is in front of the display regarding the demonstration screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIG. 245 (e) to (n). By making it display in, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the demo effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen), the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Operation related to the button effect (in this example, setting of the item acquired by the player than the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment)) Operation) to be received with priority.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example Then, the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the player has received an operation for setting the acquired item, but the timing shown in FIG. 245 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when the) is displayed, the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, the operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the In addition, even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the demo screen (top menu screen) The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation related to (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection, volume adjustment, or luminance adjustment) is accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 9>
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition (that the gauge of the meter is full) while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243 is displayed. It is an example. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item giving effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen over the period shown in FIG. 246 (e) to FIG. At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display on the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the player) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired is received, but the timing shown in FIG. 246 (n) (the timing when the menu effect is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the operation on the menu screen (in this example, the operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the user has received a menu selection operation such as a mobile terminal interlocking service.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 247 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment in time series.

  In the present embodiment 10, the item application effect is started based on the establishment of the item application condition (display of the gauge of the meter being full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIG. 242 and FIG. 243 is displayed. This is an example of The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment over the period shown in FIG. 247 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment, the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in the present example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired is received, but the timing shown in FIG. 247 (n) (the timing at which the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example) A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for performing the volume adjustment has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / example 11>
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 248 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment in time series.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition (that the gauge of the meter is full) while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 244 is displayed. It is an example. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. While the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item giving effect is displayed in front of the display relating to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIG. 248 (g) to (n). By displaying at least a part of the display related to the item giving rendering, at least a part of the two-dimensional code is made to overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) Configured.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the user has received an operation for setting the item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 248 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation by the chance button 136 is received at timing (1), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation related to the two-dimensional code ( In this example, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation (an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, with reference to FIG. 249, an increase in meter effect and an item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment in time series.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item using a production customization screen after having done. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed in front of the display on the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIG. 249 (e) to FIG. Then, at least a portion of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the effect customizing screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. Temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect customization screen may improve the effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen, so An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set in the effect customization screen) It is composed of

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customizing screen), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the user has received an operation for setting the item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 249 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set in the effect customization screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customizing screen), the operation related to the effect customizing screen (this example In the effect customization screen, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation of determining the item to be set is accepted.

  Further, in this example, in the state where the option “Yes” is temporarily selected during the button effect, as shown in FIG. 249 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, and as shown in FIG. Even when the "Yes" option is highlighted, the process of setting the acquired item is not performed immediately, and as shown in FIG. 249 (q) to (u), the menu screen is displayed again. When the mobile terminal interlocking service screen is selected in and the presentation customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 249 (v), the item acquired in the item giving presentation (in this example, the item A) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
A meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described next with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter becomes full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item immediately by operation in button production after having done.

  The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those of the above-described Example 12, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 250 and their descriptions are omitted. j) When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is received as shown in FIG. 250 (l) in a state where the option “Yes” is temporarily selected during the button effect shown in FIG. As shown in (m), by highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while displaying the effect customization screen, item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the effect customization screen being displayed as shown in FIG. 250 (i).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, an increase in meter effect and an item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243 is displayed. After that, the point to set the item using the effect customization screen is the same as the embodiment 12 described using FIG. 249, but in this example, the effect customization screen is in front of the display regarding the item giving effect By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item application effect (in this example, all the gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, since the visibility of the effect customization effect is not impeded, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item imparting effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the Note that at least a part of the effect customization screen may be configured not to overlap at least a part of the display related to the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 15 starts item provision presentation based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during display of the effect customization screen described using FIG. 242 and FIG. 243. This is an example in which the item provision effect is continued even if the symbol variation display is started while the effect customization screen is being displayed. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the twelfth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 252 (l), the ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) during the item giving effect shown in FIG. 252 (k). In the subsequent FIG. 252 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item provision effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item giving effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not inhibited.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 16>
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 253 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixteenth embodiment in time series.

  This embodiment 16 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 235 in that the item application effect is started based on the establishment of the item application condition (the gauge of the meter becomes full) during the symbol change. Although it is the same as 1, in this example, the item is displayed across two changes of the change and the next change.

  Specifically, after the variation ends during the execution of the item giving effect shown in FIG. 253 (k) and the symbol stop display is performed, as shown in the following FIG. 253 (l), the suspension of the special view 2 is performed. New fluctuation game is started based on. Then, the button effect is continued also in the next symbol variation following the symbol variation in which the item giving condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 253 (m), the button effect is produced based on the pressing operation of the chance button 136 being accepted. , The item giving effect is resumed, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. As in this example, if it is possible to display items across a plurality of symbol variations, the item giving effect is not interrupted with stopping or starting symbol variations, and the player's willingness to play the game May be able to last. In addition, the symbol variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient, and it is not necessary to be a continuous symbol variation.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 254 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in time series.

  The embodiment 17 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 235 in that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. Same as 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the ball's entry into the meter increase entrance 227 during execution of the item assignment effect, and the meter increase effect is executed when the ball entry is detected. ing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253 (k), during the execution of the item assignment effect shown in FIG. 253 (j), since the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 is detected, the following FIG. 253 (l) As shown in), during the display of the item by the item giving effect, the meter increase effect to advance the gauge of the meter is started. If it is possible to increase the meter while the item is displayed as in this example, it may be possible to further increase the player's willingness to play the game. In addition to enabling the increase of the meter during the display of the item, the establishment of the item grant condition may be possible (the gauge of the meter may be full), In this case, the right to give the item may be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 18>
A meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described next with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the mini game is executed based on the establishment of the item provision condition during symbol variation (the gauge of the meter becomes full), and the item provision effect is started after the mini game is over. Do. FIG. 255 (e) shows the state where the mini game has been started. In this example, the display area in which the gauge of the meter is displayed is enlarged, and it is configured to execute the lottery in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the lottery according to the present embodiment may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, or may be determined based on the player's selection operation, the player's selection operation The result may be predetermined regardless of. In addition, the "x" sign of the result of Amidaki is off, the image imitating a capsule is the acquisition of an item, the letter of E means that the item of E is acquired, and the letter of E is reached Is configured to give notice of the items to be earned. In addition, when the design and color of the image imitating a capsule are different from normal, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be a plurality of types of mini games, and the type of items may vary depending on the type of mini game The ease of acquisition and the appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Ami-dakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. With the configuration as in this example, it may be possible to entertain the player without getting bored of the period from the satisfaction of the item grant condition to the display of the item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first modification will be described. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for increasing meter 227” is used as a trigger for the effect of increasing the meter, but the present invention is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of the ball may be used as a trigger for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 256 (a) to (b), the meter increases when the ball enters the starting opening (in the present example, the first special view starting opening 230) during non-pattern variation. The effect may be executed, as shown in FIG. 256 (c) to FIG. 256 (e), the ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) during symbol variation. In the case, a meter increase effect may be performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 256 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 of the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 of the second display mode based on the pre-reading result of the change game In this case, the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIG. 256 (i) to FIG. 256 (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo link is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 256 (m) to (o), even when the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the execution of the button effect, the meter increase effect is executed. Good, as shown in FIG. 256 (p), meter increase effect may be executed when reach is executed, or SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 256 (q) The meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIG. 256 (r), the meter increase effect may be executed when the advance notice (in this example, the display of the character image of the princess) is executed. .

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second modification will be described. FIG. 257 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the second modification in time series.

  The point that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) is displayed while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIG. 242 and FIG. 243 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the operation regarding volume adjustment is performed (in this embodiment, even if the display regarding volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display regarding button effects). An operation relating to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation for adjusting the volume.

  Specifically, during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 257 (c), as shown in FIG. 257 (d), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. As shown in e), after executing the meter increase effect of turning off all the 10 gauges by turning off one of the gauges that were on, as shown in FIG. 257 (f), on the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank” instead, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the entrance hole 227 for meter increase, and the item provision condition is satisfied. To inform

  The state shown in the following FIG. 257 (g) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 257 (g) to (i). An animated display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 257 (j), information on items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. As shown in FIG. 257 (k), after the animation display is performed, the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the explanation of the item IT (in this example, the description of item A) (The contents are omitted)).

  In this example, at least a part of the display of the volume control screen is displayed by displaying at least a part of the display of the volume control screen by displaying the display related to the item addition effect on the back side of the display of the volume control screen. Some overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not impeded, information on volume adjustment can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing it.

  Further, in this example, the display related to volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 257 (n), the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) When the operation of is received, the display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” is executed during the button effect without executing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is accepted, display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” during the button effect is performed without executing the processing of lowering the volume by one step.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 257 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 257 (r) while the option “Yes” is temporarily selected during the button effect, the button effect is ended, and then FIG. s) After performing animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD 1 of “item not set”, the character display CD 3 of “during item A setting” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the third modification will be described. FIG. 258 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for meter increase 227” is regarded as the condition for the item grant, but the present invention is not limited to this and “the entrance to the inlet for meter increase 227 is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of a sphere may be used as the satisfaction condition of the item assignment. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 258 (a) to (c), the cumulative number of balls entering the variable winning hole 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls obtained during the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example) , And an item may be given if it exceeds 10000 spheres, or as shown in FIG. 258 (d) to FIG. An item may be assigned when the operation is accepted in the order of the key 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a gaming table provided with the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). Means for displaying effects setting display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 249, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 247, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 243), and the effect setting display is one or more It is a display including settings (for example, setting of items shown in FIG. 249, setting of volume shown in FIG. 246, setting of luminance shown in FIG. 243), and the effect being displayed during display of the effect setting display A display including the setting of 1 (for example, the setting of item A shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 249) separately from the setting display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”. For example, an eye shown in FIG. Can be displayed on the display means displays the (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) suggests that it has granted beam, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the first display including the setting of 1 can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed while the effect setting display is being displayed, Even during display, the player may be able to enjoy it.

  In addition, count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 235 (a) etc.) capable of displaying a display in which the number or amount increases or decreases is provided. , “First count display.” For example, a display in which all ten gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 235 (c) or the like, and a character display CD 2 of “full tank” as shown in FIG. When it becomes, the said 1st display may be displayed on the said display means, and the display by the said count display means may be a display which can be changed in the period of a non-pattern variation display.

  With such a configuration, since the display of the count display means changes during non-pattern variation display, it may be possible to play a game without getting bored of the player. In addition, the player may not wake up even if the suspension of the floating game is lost.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means, and the second display is a notice (For example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 238 (m) or the like).

  If such a configuration is used, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 255) is executed. May be

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to enjoy the period until the first display is displayed.

  In addition, an operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 235 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) during display of the first display. For example, it is a means capable of displaying the button effect shown in FIG. 235 (j) etc., and the first operation display means an effective period display of the operation means (eg, FIG. It may be a display including the operation effective period display TG shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, the player can operate the operation means to participate even while the first display is displayed, and the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the effect setting display and the display of the first display, the effect setting display may be erased.

  With such a configuration, the first display may be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, when the first display is displayed on the display means, settings (for example, settings of items shown in FIG. 249) selectable in the effect setting display may be increased.

  With such a configuration, the player's choice can be increased, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 258 (o) to (r), when the ball enters a predetermined game area (eg, for increasing the meter) while the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) is displayed. When a ball enters the entrance, when the ball enters the starting opening or the winning opening, the first display (for example, the player sets the item A) separately from the effect setting display in the display. And a setting (for example, an item A) corresponding to the first display can be displayed on the display means, and the display corresponding to the acquisition may be displayed on the display means. It may be displayable on the display means.

  In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and for example, the symbol variation starts while the item appearing during the non-symbol variation is displayed. In any case, the item may not be deleted. Also, while the custom display and the item are being displayed, even if the variation of the symbol starts, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. In addition, even if the meter is difficult to see (or not visible) during the display of the custom display, the item may appear when the meter is full. Also, the item may appear after the meter is full during non-design variations.

  Moreover, the meter which stored a part in non-design fluctuation may make an item which shows reliability appear after being full during symbol fluctuation. Further, an item (heat, intense heat, etc.) indicating the reliability may be made easier to appear at the time of symbol fluctuation than at the time of non-pattern fluctuation, or may not be appeared at the time of non-pattern fluctuation. Moreover, you may display a button effective meter (operation effective period display) during non-design fluctuation. Also, the item may be displayed by canceling the demonstration screen (or without cancellation), or the item may be displayed by canceling (or without canceling) the menu display. The display of the two-dimensional code may be canceled (or without cancellation) to display the item.

  Also, the meter may be stored at an opportunity other than ball passing. In addition, there may be an increase mode in which the increase amount of the meter is increased than that in the normal state. Further, in this case, the system may be configured to shift to the increase mode at the end of the hold full or the power support. Also, the item may appear after the mini game with the meter full. In addition, even during SP reach, an effect may be performed in which an item appears. Also, the period of the button effect of reach and the period of the button effect of customization may or may not overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect rather than one. Further, the items to appear may be changed depending on the game state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item is made to appear during the display of the customization screen, the display of “?” In the customization screen may be changed (the item is additionally displayed), or when the customization screen is displayed again without being changed. In the customization screen, the display of "?" May be changed. In addition, the appearance of the item may be notified, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may be made to easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. Further, the item may be displayed across a plurality of changes, the meter may be stored while the item is displayed, or the meter may be configured to be full at one type of trigger.

  In addition, display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or more single color or full color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, The meter display may be performed only by the reel (drum) display device, the leaf display device, the plasma display, or the projector, or the meter display may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, , When the ball enters the entrance for increasing meter 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display 208 and the meter display of the other display devices increase by the same increment), one for the decorative symbol display 208 and the other display device It is good also as a count display means which performs meter display.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel And a stop button for stopping rotation of the reel individually, lottery means for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control regarding the stop of the symbol and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally winning combination Determining means for determining whether or not the game is performed, and payout control means for performing game medium payout processing for paying out the game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Here, what has been referred to as a lamp or illumination is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 259 "corresponding to each of a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 260 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on the bet 2004 and the start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix a1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain type of serif notice.
The certain type of serif notice is a display that may include a text display of the content related to a certain character,
A mini-game may be initiated in connection with the certain type of serif preview.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix a1,
Equipped with operating means,
The result of a mini game can be derived without using the operation means.
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as a "first result") is derived as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is configured to be started,
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as a "second result") other than the first result is derived as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is not started. Yes,
The variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. Are easily configured to be displayed in a big hit manner on the
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2,
The certain type of serif notice is a display including a balloon,
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The balloon of the second aspect of the second aspect of the second aspect of the second aspect of the balloon according to the mini game of the first aspect of the first aspect of the present invention. The first result is more easily derived from a mini game started in relation to the notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a4)
The game console described in Appendix a3,
Configured to play a mini game in the balloon
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a5)
It is a game console according to the a3 or a4.
Some kind of character display representing a serif of a character is configured to be displayable in the balloon,
A plurality of character displays can be displayed as the certain character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character displays is a first character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally the final display in the big hit mode, rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without the second character display being displayed. Easily configured,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a6)
The game console according to any one of appendices a3 to a5, wherein
It is configured to provide a display indicating the mode of the balloon before the display of the certain type of serif preview is started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a2 to a6,
An effect indication is an indication of the certain type of speech warning display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a2 to a7, wherein
The display for a mini-game may be erased after the mini-game has been started but before the results are derived.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a2 to a8,
It has symbol display means that can display symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a variation display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol variation display") in which a lost symbol form is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation display") in which the big hit symbol form is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a "loss variation display") of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the lost symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a "big hit variation display") of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the big hit symbol variation display,
The lost change display is a change display that finally displays a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as “first finalized display”) of a certain combination of decorative symbols,
The big hit variation display is a variation display that finally displays a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as "second finalized display") of a combination of decorative symbols other than the first finalized display,
The display of the first finalized display is configured to start in response to the end of the lost symbol fluctuation display,
The display of the second finalized display is configured to start corresponding to the end of the big hit symbol variation display,
The variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result, rather than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result described in the appendix a2 Is more likely to be finally displayed in a big hit manner in the final, "is more than the variation display of the decorative symbol" the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result " The variation display of the decorative symbol whose display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is configured so that the second finalized display is more easily displayed. "
It is
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a10)
The game console according to any one of appendices a2 to a9, wherein
It is configured to be able to display a display indicating that a certain effect display is to be displayed before a certain mini game is started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a11)
The game console according to any one of appendices a2 to a10, wherein
It is configured to be able to execute timer preview effects,
The certain effect display may be displayed in relation to the timer advance effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a12)
The game console according to any one of appendices a2 to a11, wherein
An effect display is a display whose display is started only by the derivation of the first result.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a13)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a1 to a12,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters;
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are different displays,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as "a decorative symbol"),
Among the certain types of serif notices, a serif notice is a display including the second character display (hereinafter referred to as "a serif notice"),
It is configured to be able to display certain chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as "certain chance eyes") including the certain decorative designs,
The certain serif notice display is configured to be displayed after the certain chance eyes stop display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a14)
It is a game console described in Appendix a13,
In some cases, the display of a combination of decorative symbols that is not a chance eye (hereinafter referred to as a "non-certain chance eye") may be stopped before the certain chance eye is stopped.
It is configured to be able to perform an effect of changing the non-presence chance eye to the pre-scene chance,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a15)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note a13 or a14,
In a certain rendering state among a plurality of types of rendering states, the certain chance eye is configured to be able to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a15, wherein
The certain type of serif notice is a display including any of a plurality of types of characters,
It is configured to be able to display a display that suggests a character included in the certain type of serif preview display before the display of the certain type of serif preview display is started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a16, wherein
“A mini game may be started in relation to the above-mentioned certain type of serif notice display” described in the a1. A ”,“ after the display of the certain type of serif notice display is started A mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of dialogue warning display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a18)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a1 to a17,
A serif notice of another type (hereinafter referred to as "the second type of serif notice") different from the aforementioned type of the serif notice (hereinafter referred to as the "first type of serif notice"). It is configured to be viewable,
There is a state in which both the display of the first type speech warning display and the display of the second type speech display are displayed,
If only the second type of serif notice of the first type of serif notice and the second type of serif notice is displayed, a mini game is not started. Being
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a19)
The game console described in Appendix a18,
Equipped with operating means,
As a response display of the operation of the operation means, display of a serif notice display of the second type of serif notice display is configured to be started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state in which a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation display") is displayed, of the second type of serif announcements as a response The display of a certain serif notice display is configured to be started,
At least a portion of the display of the first type of serif preview is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a19, wherein
Some mini-games include a variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a 21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a20, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a20, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 1a1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain type of serif notice.
One of the serif notices of the certain kind of serif notices is a first serif notice.
One of the serif notices of the certain kind of serif notices is a second serif notice.
The first serif notice and the second serif notice are different notices,
The first speech warning display is a speech warning display including a character display of the content related to a certain character,
A mini-game is started in connection with the first serif announcement,
A mini-game is not started in connection with the second serif announcement.
After a display representing a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is started,
The certain effect display is a notice display concerning a running change display,
The second serif notice display is a look-ahead notice display of one of a plurality of read-ahead notice displays.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a2)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 1a1,
Equipped with operating means,
The result of a mini-game can be derived without the operation of the operation means,
One of the serif notices of the certain kind of serif notices is a third serif notice.
The first serif notice and the third serif notice are different notices,
The third speech notice may be displayed as the certain effect display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a3)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 1a1 or 1a2,
The first speech preview display is a speech preview display including a certain image (hereinafter referred to as "first image"),
In a display area (hereinafter, referred to as a "first display area") of display areas in which the first image is displayed, character display representing serifs is displayed,
The display of a mini game is displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display areas in which the first image is displayed,
The first image is an image different from the background image displayed across the display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a4)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 1a3,
The first image may be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The first image aspect is the second aspect of the second aspect, rather than a mini-game where the aspect of the first image is initiated in relation to the first serif announcement of the first aspect. It is easier for the first result to be derived in the case of a mini-game started in connection with the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a5)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 1a4,
Before the display of the certain type of serif preview is started, a display indicating the aspect of the first image is displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a6)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 1a4 or 1a5,
The second speech preview display is a speech preview display including a certain image (hereinafter referred to as "second image") other than the first image,
In a display area of the display area in which the second image is displayed, a character display representing a serif is displayed,
The outline of the first image and the outline of the second image are the same outline,
The color of the first image and the color of the second image are different colors,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a6, wherein
The effect display is not started after a display representing a result (hereinafter referred to as a “second result”) different from the first result as a result of a mini game is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a8)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1a7,
The variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result, It is easy to be finally displayed in the big hit mode finally,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a9)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 1a8,
It has symbol display means that can display symbol variation display,
The display means can display the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means can display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol variation display") in which a lost symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means can display symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation display") in which the big hit symbol form is finally displayed.
The display means can display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “loss variation display”) of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the lost symbol variation display.
The display means can display a variation display (hereinafter referred to as a "big hit variation display") of the decorative symbol displayed corresponding to the big hit symbol variation display.
The lost change display is a change display that finally displays a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as “first finalized display”) of a certain combination of decorative symbols,
The big hit variation display is a variation display that finally displays a finalized display (hereinafter referred to as "second finalized display") of a combination of decorative symbols other than the first finalized display,
In response to the end of the lost symbol variation display, the display of the first finalized display is started,
In response to the end of the big hit symbol variation display, the display of the second finalized display is started,
The display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result according to the additional statement 1a8 "The variable display is likely to be finally displayed in the big hit mode finally", "the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result, rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol, The second finalized display is more likely to be displayed in the case of the variable display of the decorative symbol whose display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result. "
It is
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a9, wherein
The display means can display a timer announcement effect display,
The timer notice effect display may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the first serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a10, wherein
Multiple displays representing a character can be displayed,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
It can display multiple decoration patterns,
One of the plurality of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first display (hereinafter referred to as "a certain decorative symbol"),
Of the certain types of serif notices, a serif notice is a serif notice including the first indication,
It is possible to display a certain chance eye (hereinafter referred to as "a certain chance eye") including the certain decorative pattern,
After the certain chance eyes stop displaying, the certain serif notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a12)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 1a11,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display and the second display are different displays,
In some cases, the display of a combination of decorative symbols that is not a chance eye (hereinafter referred to as a "non-certain chance eye") may be stopped before the certain chance eye is stopped.
It is possible to execute a change effect to change the non-one chance eye to the one chance eye,
The change effect is an effect including the second display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a12, wherein
The first speech warning display is a display including one of a plurality of types of characters,
It is possible to display an indication that suggests a character included in the first serif notice before the display of the first serif notice is started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a13, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a tutorial display,
The first serif preview may be displayed overlapping at least a portion of the tutorial display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a14, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display.
When the certain effect display is displayed, an increase display of the meter display may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a15, wherein
It is possible to display a read ahead notice display that displays the hold icon in a certain manner,
"The second serif notice is one read before notice of a plurality of read ahead notices" described in the remark 1a1 "," the second serif notice is the above-mentioned certain advance notice It is a notice display regarding display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a16, wherein
“A mini-game is started in relation to the first serif notice display” described in the remark 1a1 ”means“ after the display of the first serif notice display is started, the first serif A mini-game is started before the display of the advance notice is ended.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a16, wherein
A serif notice of another type (hereinafter referred to as "the second type of serif notice") different from the aforementioned type of the serif notice (hereinafter referred to as the "first type of serif notice"). Can be displayed,
There is a state in which both the display of the first type speech warning display and the display of the second type speech display are displayed,
If only the second type of serif notice of the first type of serif notice and the second type of serif notice is displayed, a mini game is not started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a19)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 1a18,
Equipped with operating means,
As a response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a serif notice display of the second type of serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state in which a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation display") is displayed, of the second type of serif announcements as a response display The display of a certain serif notice is started,
At least a portion of the display of the first type of serif preview is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a19, wherein
Some mini-games include a variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 1a21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a20, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including a first line,
The first display is a display including a first character,
The second display is a display including a second line,
The second display is a display including a second character,
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The second character may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note b1,
The third character may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b3)
It is a game console described in Appendix b2,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display including a third line,
The third display is a display including the third character,
The third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b4)
The game console described in Appendix b3,
One of the plurality of displays is a first conversation notice display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display,
The first conversational notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation advance notice display is a display including the second display,
The second conversation advance notice display is a display including the third display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b5)
It is a game console described in Appendix b4,
The second conversation notice may be displayed after the first conversation notice is displayed during a period in which a certain symbol variation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a first animation display,
The first animation display is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of a character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The first animation display is a display that may include the second character.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b7)
The game console described in Appendix b6,
The first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b8)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note b6 or b7,
In the first animation display, the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b6 to b8,
One of the plurality of displays is a second animation display,
The second animation display is displayed prior to the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of a character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The second animation display is a display not including the first character.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b10)
It is a game console described in appendix b9,
The number of characters in the second animation display is less than the number of characters in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b11)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note b9 or b10,
The first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first displayed character in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b12)
The game console according to any one of appendices b9 to b11, wherein
The display period of the first animation display is shorter than the display period of the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b13)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b12,
The first display is a display including a first color,
The second display is a display including a second color,
The reliability in the first color is a reliability different from the reliability in the second color,
The display including the second color may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix b13,
The confidence in the second color is greater than the confidence in the first color,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b15)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b14,
The first line is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b16)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b15,
The first display is a display including a first name,
The first name is the name of the first character,
The first name is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b17)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b16,
Equipped with operation means operable by the player;
The second display is displayed when the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary note b18)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b17, wherein
The second display is displayed after the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary note b19)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b18,
A movable body movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b20)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b19, wherein
A display may overlap with the display of at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary note b21)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b20,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary note b22)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b20,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a display including characters relating to pre-reading notice,
A mini-game may be started in connection with the first display,
There may not be a mini game started in connection with the second display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
The serif notice of one of the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice,
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A3)
It is a game console described in Appendix A2,
“A mini-game may be started in relation to the first display,” as described in the supplementary note A1, “is displayed after the display of the first serif preview is started. A mini-game may be started before the display of the serif announcement on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A4)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A2 or A3, wherein
A mini-game is started in conjunction with the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2 to A4,
One serif notice of the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice,
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A6)
It is a game console described in Appendix A5,
“The second display is a display including characters relating to a prefetch notice,” as described in Appendix A1, and “the second serif preview is a display including a character display relating to a prefetch notice, ",
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A7)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A5 or A6,
“There is no case where a mini game is started in relation to the second display” described in the appendix A1, “If the display of the second serif notice display is started, the second A mini-game can not be started before the display of the serif announcement on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A8)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A7, wherein
After a display representing a certain result (hereinafter referred to as a "first result") is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A9)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A8,
The certain effect display is a notice display regarding a change display in progress.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A10)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A8 or A9,
The effect display is not started after a display representing a result (hereinafter referred to as a “second result”) different from the first result as a result of a mini game is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10,
The variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result, It is easy to be finally displayed in the big hit mode finally,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is the pre-reading notice by displaying the chance eye.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A11, wherein
The pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a pre-reading mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A13, wherein
Some mini-games include a variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini-game may be started in connection with the first display,
There may not be a mini game started in connection with the second display.
It is possible to display a notice display that displays the icon in a pre-read mode,
There may be a case where both the notice display and the second display are displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note B1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
The serif notice of one of the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice,
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B3)
It is a game console described in Appendix B2,
“A mini-game may be started in relation to the first display,” as described in Appendix B1, “If the display of the first serif notice is started, the first game may be started. A mini-game may be started before the display of the serif announcement on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B4)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note B2 or B3,
A mini-game is started in conjunction with the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices B2 to B4,
One serif notice of the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice,
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B5,
"The second display is a read-ahead notice, and the second display is a display including a character display related to a read-ahead notice." Is that
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B7)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note B5 or B6,
"The second display is a pre-reading notice display" described in the appendix B1, "the second serif pre-display is a notice display regarding a pre-reading notice," ,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B5 to B7, wherein
“There is no case where a mini game is started in relation to the second display,” as described in Appendix B1, “If the display of the second serif notice is started, the second A mini-game can not be started before the display of the serif notice display on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B5 to B8, wherein
The display of the second serif notice may be started while the notice is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B5 to B9, wherein
In the state where the second serif notice display is displayed, the display of the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode may be started by the hold increase.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B11)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices B5 to B10,
One of the plurality of displays is a character display,
The certain character display may be included in a certain change effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.
In the state where the second dialogue warning display is displayed, there is no case where the display of the hold icon of the predictive warning mode is started by the certain change effect display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is the pre-reading notice by displaying the chance eye.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B11, wherein
The pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a pre-reading mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B13, wherein
Some mini-games include a variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix C1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini-game may be started in connection with the first display,
There may not be a mini game started in connection with the second display.
It is possible to display a notice display that displays the icon in a pre-read mode,
There may be a case where both the notice display and the first display are displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C2)
The game console described in Appendix C1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
The serif notice of one of the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice,
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C3)
The game console described in Appendix C2,
“A mini-game may be started in relation to the first display,” as described in the supplementary note C1, “is displayed after the display of the first serif announcement is started. A mini-game may be started before the display of the serif announcement on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C4)
The game console described in Appendix C2 or C3,
A mini-game is started in conjunction with the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C2 to C4, wherein
The display of the first serif notice may be started while the notice is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C6)
The game console according to any one of appendices C2 to C5, wherein
In the state where the first serif notice display is displayed, the display of the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode may be started by the hold increase.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C2 to C6, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a character display,
The certain character display may be included in a certain change effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.
In the state where the first dialogue warning display is displayed, there is no case where the display of the hold icon of the prefetching notice mode is started by the certain change effect display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C8)
The game console according to any one of appendices C2 to C7, wherein
One serif notice of the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice,
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C9)
The game console described in Appendix C8,
"The second display is a read-ahead notice, and the second display is a display including a letter display related to a read-ahead notice." Is that
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C10)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C8 or C9,
"The second display is a pre-read advance notice display" described in Appendix C1, "the second serif pre-display is a notice display regarding a pre-read advance notice," ,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C8 to C10, wherein
“There is no case where a mini game is started in relation to the second display,” as described in the supplementary note C1, “does not indicate that“ the second serif notice display has been started, A mini-game can not be started before the display of the serif notice display on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is the pre-reading notice by displaying the chance eye.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C11, wherein
The pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a pre-reading mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C13, wherein
Some mini-games include a variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix D1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini-game may be started in connection with the first display,
There may not be a mini game started in connection with the second display.
The second display is a display including a certain character display,
It is possible to display other serif notices including a certain character display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
The serif notice of one of the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice,
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D2,
“A mini-game may be started in relation to the first display,” as described in the supplementary note D 1, “when the display of the first serif notice is started, the first game may be started. A mini-game may be started before the display of the serif announcement on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D4)
The game console described in Appendix D2 or D3,
A mini-game is started in conjunction with the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices D2 to D4.
One serif notice of the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice,
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5,
"The second display is a read-ahead notice, and the second display is a display including a letter display related to a read-ahead notice." Is that
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D7)
The game console described in Appendix D5 or D6,
"The second display is a pre-reading notice display" described in the supplementary note D1, "the display of the second serif notice display is started, and then the display of the second serif notice display A mini game can not be started before the game is ended.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D5 to D7, wherein
One character display included in the second serif notice display is the same as a certain character display included in the other serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D5 to D8, wherein
The other speech warning display is a speech warning display of the same system as the first speech warning display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D5 to D8, wherein
The other speech warning display is a speech warning display of the same system as the second speech warning display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D10, wherein
After a display representing a certain result is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is started,
The certain effect display is a notice display regarding a change display in progress.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is the pre-reading notice by displaying the chance eye.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D11, wherein
The pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a pre-reading mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D13, wherein
Some mini-games include a variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix E1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a serif notice that is not a prefetch notice,
The second display is a read ahead notice.
A mini-game may be started in connection with the first display,
There may not be a mini game started in connection with the second display.
The display of the second display may be started in a state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed,
After the display of the second display is started, the display of the other serif notice display is not started in the running variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of serif notices,
The serif notice of one of the plurality of serif notices is the first serif notice,
The first display is the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2,
“A mini-game may be started in relation to the first display,” as described in Appendix E1, “If the display of the first serif notice is started, the first game may be started. A mini-game may be started before the display of the serif announcement on the screen is terminated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E4)
The game console described in Appendix E2 or E3,
A mini-game is started in conjunction with the first serif announcement.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E2 to E4, wherein
Another serif notice may be displayed after the first serif notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E2 to E5, wherein
One serif notice of the plurality of serif notices is a second serif notice,
The first speech preview and the second speech preview are different displays,
The second display is the second serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E7)
The game console described in Appendix E6,
"The second display is a pre-reading notice display" described in the remark E1, "the second serif pre-display is a display including a character display relating to a pre-reading notice" Is that
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E8)
It is a game console described in Appendix E6 or E7,
"The second display is a pre-reading notice display" described in the remark E1, "the display of the second serif notice display is started, and then the display of the second serif notice display. A mini game can not be started before the game is ended.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E8, wherein
After a display representing a certain result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is started,
The certain effect display is a notice display regarding a change display in progress.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E10)
The game console described in Appendix E9,
The effect display is not started after a display representing a result (hereinafter referred to as a “second result”) different from the first result as a result of a mini game is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E11)
The game console described in Appendix E10,
The variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result, It is easy to be finally displayed in the big hit mode finally,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E11, wherein
The certain pre-reading notice is the pre-reading notice by displaying the chance eye.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E11, wherein
The pre-reading notice is a pre-reading notice by displaying the hold icon in a pre-reading mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E13, wherein
Some mini-games include a variable display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix F1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
In the state where the icon is not displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "the second state"), the certain change effect may be performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note F1,
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note F1 or F2,
The display of the first change animation is not displayed as a silhouette in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as a "third scene") other than the first scene of the first change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F4)
It is a game console described in Appendix F3,
It is possible to execute a certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second change effect”) other than the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as the “first change effect”) for changing the display mode of the icon. And
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F5)
The game console described in Appendix F4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F6)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note F4 or F5,
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F4 to F6, wherein
In the second state, the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F8)
It is a game console described in Appendix F7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F9)
It is a game console described in Appendix F7 or F8,
Equipped with movable means,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F10)
It is a game console according to any one of supplementary notes F4 to F9,
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F10, wherein
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F11, wherein
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F13)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note F12,
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F14)
It is a game console described in Appendix F13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F16)
The game console according to any one of appendices F1 to F15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F17, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix G1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
It is possible to execute a given pending change presentation (hereinafter referred to as a “second change presentation”) other than the above-mentioned change presentation (hereinafter referred to as “first change presentation”).
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G2)
The gaming machine described in appendix G1,
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note G1 or G2,
The display of the first change animation is not displayed as a silhouette in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as a "third scene") other than the first scene of the first change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G3,
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G6)
A game console as described in Appendix G4 or G5,
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G7)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices G4 to G6,
In a state where the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G8)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G9)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G7 or G8,
Equipped with movable means,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G10)
Appendices G4 to G9 are the gaming machines according to any one of
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G10, wherein
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G11, wherein
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G12,
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G17, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix H1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). A part of the display is not displayed as a silhouette, and the first change animation is displayed in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "third scene") other than the first scene of the first change animation. At least a portion of the display is displayed in a silhouette,
In the third scene, the display of the first change animation displayed as a silhouette overlaps the display of an icon displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1,
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H3)
It is a game console described in appendix H2,
It is possible to execute a certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second change effect”) other than the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as the “first change effect”) for changing the display mode of the icon. And
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H4)
It is a game console described in Appendix H3,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H5)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note H3 or H4,
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H6)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices H3 to H5,
In a state where the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H7)
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H8)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note H6 or H7,
Equipped with movable means,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices H3 to H8,
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H10)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices H1 to H9,
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H10, wherein
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H12)
The gaming machine described in Appendix H11,
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H13)
The game console described in Appendix H12,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H13, wherein
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H14, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H16)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices H1 to H15,
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix H17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H16, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix I1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
It may be provided with a movable means, and at least a part of the icon displayed in the silhouette may overlap the movable means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I2)
The game console described in Appendix I1,
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I3)
It is a game console described in Appendix I1 or I2, and
The display of the first change animation is not displayed as a silhouette in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as a "third scene") other than the first scene of the first change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I4)
It is a game console described in Appendix I3,
It is possible to execute a certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second change effect”) other than the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as the “first change effect”) for changing the display mode of the icon. And
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I5)
The game console described in Appendix I4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I6)
A game console as described in Appendix I4 or I5,
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices I4 to I6,
In a state where the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix I7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I9)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note I7 or I8,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the change icon changes in the first state, the certain movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state is performed, the certain movable means can execute the certain operation,
When the second change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the certain movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the second change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state is performed, the certain movable means can perform the certain operation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I10)
It is a game console according to any one of supplementary notes I4 to I9,
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I11)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices I1 to I10,
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I11, wherein
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I13)
The game console described in Appendix I12,
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I14)
It is a game console described in Appendix I13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I15)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices I1 to I14,
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I17)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices I1 to I16,
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I18)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices I1 to I17,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix J1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
When the icon of the second display mode is displayed after the end of the first state, the display mode of the icon may change to another display mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1,
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J3)
It is a game console according to appendix J1 or J2, and
The display of the first change animation is not displayed as a silhouette in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as a "third scene") other than the first scene of the first change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J4)
It is a game console described in Appendix J3,
It is possible to execute a certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second change effect”) other than the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as the “first change effect”) for changing the display mode of the icon. And
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J5)
It is a game console described in Appendix J4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J6)
A game console as described in Appendix J4 or J5,
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices J4 to J6,
In a state where the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J8)
It is a game console described in Appendix J7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J9)
It is a game console described in Appendix J7 or J8,
Equipped with movable means,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J10)
Appendices J4 to J9, wherein the game console according to any one of
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J10, wherein
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J11, wherein
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J13)
It is a game console described in Appendix J12,
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix J13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J15)
The game console according to any one of appendices J1 to J14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix J18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J17, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix K1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
When the number of reservations increases in the first state, an icon displayed according to the increase is also displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K2)
It is a game console described in appendix K1,
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note K1 or K2,
The display of the first change animation is not displayed as a silhouette in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as a "third scene") other than the first scene of the first change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K4)
The game console described in Appendix K3,
It is possible to execute a certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second change effect”) other than the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as the “first change effect”) for changing the display mode of the icon. And
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K5)
The game console described in Appendix K4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K6)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note K4 or K5,
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices K4 to K6,
In a state where the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K8)
The game console described in Appendix K7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K9)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note K7 or K8,
Equipped with movable means,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K10)
Supplementary note K4 to K9, wherein the game console according to any one of
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K10,
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K11, wherein
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K13)
The game console described in Appendix K12,
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K14)
The game console described in Appendix K13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K15)
The game console according to any one of appendices K1 to K14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K15, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K17,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix L1)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
It is possible to display a notice display regarding the effect of changing the display mode of the icon,
In the first state, the advance notice may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L2)
It is a game console described in Appendix L1,
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note L1 or L2, and
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as “first scene”) The display of the first change animation in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as a “third scene”) which is partially displayed as a silhouette but is different from the first scene of the first change animation Does not appear in the silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L4)
The game console described in Appendix L3,
It is possible to execute a certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second change effect”) other than the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as the “first change effect”) for changing the display mode of the icon. And
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L5)
The game console described in Appendix L4,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L6)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note L4 or L5,
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L7)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices L4 to L6,
In a state where the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L8)
The game console described in Appendix L7,
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L9)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L7 or L8,
Equipped with movable means,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L10)
It is a game console according to any one of supplementary notes L4 to L9,
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L11)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices L1 to L10,
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L12)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices L1 to L11,
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix L12,
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix L13,
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L15)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L14, wherein
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L16)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices L1 to L15,
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L17)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L16, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix L18)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices L1 to L17,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

100 Pachinko machine 136 chance button 208 decoration symbol display device 224 effect movable body 226 general winning opening 228, 229 common drawing starting opening 230 special drawing 1 starting opening 232 special drawing 2 starting opening 232a wing member 234 variable winning opening 234a door member 300 main Control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit

Claims (18)

It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying an icon,
The icon is an icon related to hold,
The icon may be displayed in a silhouette,
It is possible to execute certain change effects that may change the display mode of the icon,
In the state where the icon is displayed as a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the certain change effect may be started,
In the case where one icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change presentation is started in the first state is displayed in the second display mode after the first state is ended There is
One icon displayed in the first display mode after the certain change effect is started in the first state is displayed in the third display mode after the first state is ended There is a case,
The first display mode is a display mode of a silhouette,
The display mode differs between the second display mode and the third display mode.
The certain change presentation is a presentation including the display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first change animation"),
When the certain change effect is performed in the first state, at least a display of the first change animation is performed in a certain scene of the first change animation (hereinafter referred to as "first scene"). Some displays are not displayed in silhouette,
When the icon of the second display mode is displayed after the end of the first state, the display mode of the icon may change to another display mode.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
An icon may be displayed in a silhouette over a variable display of a plurality of decoration patterns as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 1 or 2,
The display of the first change animation is not displayed as a silhouette in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as a "third scene") other than the first scene of the first change animation.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein
It is possible to execute a certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second change effect”) other than the certain change effect (hereinafter referred to as the “first change effect”) for changing the display mode of the icon. And
The second change effect is an effect including display of a change animation (hereinafter referred to as “second change animation”) different from the first change animation.
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, the second change animation is displayed in a certain scene of the second change animation (hereinafter referred to as "second scene"). Although at least a part is displayed as a silhouette, in a certain scene (hereinafter referred to as "fourth scene") other than the second scene of the second variation animation, the second variation animation Display does not appear in silhouette,
An icon is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode after the second change presentation is performed than after the first change presentation is performed,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 4, and
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects that change the display mode of the icon,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the first change effect,
One of the plurality of types of change effects is the second change effect,
The first change animation is a display including a first display,
The second change animation is a display including a second display,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the first scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the second scene,
The shape of the first display of the first change animation in the third scene is different from the shape of the second display of the second change animation in the fourth scene,
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 4 or 5, and
In the first state, there may be a case in which both change effects of the first change effect and the second change effect are performed,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 4 to 6, wherein
In a state where the icon is not displayed in a silhouette (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the first change effect may be performed,
In the second state, the second change effect may be performed,
When the first change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the second change effect is performed in the first state, a change effect effect is performed after the end of the first state,
When the first change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the first change effect,
When the second change effect is performed in the second state, a change effect effect is performed during execution of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 7, and
The first change effect in the second state is an effect including the first change animation,
The second change effect in the second state is an effect including the second change animation.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to claim 7 or 8, wherein
Equipped with movable means,
The icon is a variation icon related to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed,
When the first change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the first state is performed, the movable means can perform a certain operation,
When the first change effect is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon changes in the second state, the movable means can execute the certain operation,
The movable means is capable of performing a certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the first state is performed,
The movable means can execute the certain operation when the second change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes in the second state is performed.
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 4 to 9, wherein
The display means can display a third display in the first state,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the first change presentation,
The third display may be displayed after the end of the second change effect.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein
The outer shape of the icon is visible when the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The icon may change from being displayed in silhouette to being not displayed in silhouette,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 12, and
The display means comprises an icon display area capable of displaying an icon;
In the first state, the icon display area is not displayed as a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 13, and
The icon display area is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a fifth display mode,
In the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fifth display mode, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally performed as compared to the case where the icon display area is displayed in the fourth display mode. Easy to be displayed clearly in the big hit mode,
A game stand characterized by 15. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The display means can display a certain display,
When the certain display and the icon are displayed overlapping, the icon is displayed in a silhouette,
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") in which the display of the certain display and the display of a certain part of the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping each other.
In the first case, the display of the part is hidden without being displayed in a silhouette,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The display means can display an icon in any of the display modes of a plurality of types of silhouettes in the first state.
A game stand characterized by 17. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The display means can display an icon in a display mode of one type of silhouette in the first state.
A game stand characterized by The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 17, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by